www.gmu.ac.ae
STUDENT
HANDBOOK
A Y 2013 - 2014
GMU
COLLEGE OF MEDICINE
INTEGRATED MBBS PROGRAM
Handbook for MBBS Students-2013-2014
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 3 | P a g e
C O N T E N TS
Introduction 8
GMU Vision & Mission Statement 9
From the President’s Desk 10
Message from the Provost 11
Message from the Dean, College of Medicine 12
About the Student Handbook 13
1.0 Academic Calendar 15
2.0 University Divisions & Academic Programs 18
3.0 License & Recognition 20
4.0 The Campus 22
5.0 Location Map 24
6.0 Undergraduate Admission Policies & Procedures 26
6.1 Policy Statement
6.2 Undergraduate Admission Requirements
6.3 Admission Process
6.4 Documents Required for Admission
6.5 Transfer Admissions Policy and Procedures
6.6 Transfer within GMU
6.7 Re-admission
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 4 | P a g e
7.0 Student Services 32
7.1 Office of Student Affairs
7.2 Counseling Services
7.2.1 Student Counseling Policy
7.2.2 Academic Counseling Policy
7.2.3 Personal Counseling
7.2.4 Student Activities Policy
7.3 GMU Undergraduate Student Council
7.3.1 Student Council Executive Board
7.3.2 Student Publications
7.3.3 Student Behavior
7.4 Student Academic Services
7.4.1 The Dean’s Office
7.4.2 Office of Student Affairs
7.4.3 Career Service Office
7.4.3.1 Career Service Policy
7.4.4 Financial Aid Office
7.5 Health Services
7.5.1 Health Services Policy
7.6 Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance
7.7 Student Records Policy
7.8 Information Release Policy
7.9 Plagiarism and Copyright Policy
7.10 Dress Code
7.11 Dining Services
7.12 Recreational Facilities
7.13 Student Support Services
7.14 GMU Physical Facilities
7.14.1 Lecture Halls
7.14.2 GMU Testing Center
7.14.3 Common Rooms & Lockers
7.14.4 Masjid
7.14.5 Mail Box
7.14.6 GMU Hostel
7.15 Transportation
7.16 Telephone
7.17 Classroom & Laboratory Protocol
7.18 Student Identification
7.19 University Entrance
7.20 Car Parking in the Campus
7.21 Information on Safety Issues
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 5 | P a g e
8.0 Students’ Rights & Responsibilities 58
8.1 Student Rights
8.1.1 Rights in the Pursuit of Education
8.1.2 Right to access Records and Facilities
8.1.3 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy & Publication
8.1.4 Right to contribute to University Governance and Curriculum
8.2 Students’ Responsibilities
8.3 GMU Honor Code
8.4 Salient Features of the Honor Code
8.5 Breach of Honor Code
8.6 Effects of Committing an ‘Honor Offence’
9.0 University Resources and Services 62
9.1 Introduction
9.2 Vision
9.3 Mission
9.4 Library
9.4.1 Timings
9.4.2 Library Resources
9.4.3 Library Orientation
9.4.4 Audio Visuals
9.4.5 Scanning and Printing
9.4.6 Photocopy
9.4.7 Journal Article Request Service
9.4.8 Cataloguing
9.4.9 Online Public Access Catalogue (OPAC)
9.4.10 Security Gates
9.5 Library Policy and Procedures
9.6 Library Rules & Regulations
9.7 Circulation Policy and Procedures
9.8 Multimedia Labs
9.9 Network Infrastructure
9.10 Wi-Fi Network
9.11 Online Resources
9.12 Servers & Supports
9.13 IT Training
9.14 Internet Services
9.15 Technology Support for Learning
9.16 IT Support Team
9.17 User accesses and Security
9.18 E-Learning at GMU
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 6 | P a g e
10.0 GMC Hospital & Research Center (GMCH & RC) 71
10.1 Vision
10.2 Mission
10.3 Clinical Departments & Services
10.3.1 Do’s
10.3.2 Don’ts
10.3.3 Violation Warning
11.0 Student Finance 75
11.1 Student Finance Policy
11.2 Tuition Fees
11.3 Hostel Fees
11.4 Utilities Service Fees
11.5 Registration Fees
11.6 Examination Fees
11.7 Visa Charges
11.8 Caution Deposit
11.9 Fees for Other Services
11.10 Transportation Fees
11.11 Payment of Fees
11.12 Late Fees and Fines
11.13 Financial Aid and Scholarships
11.14 Refund of Fees
11.15 Revision of Tuition and Other Fees
12.0 Academic Policies 80
12.1 Program Completion Policy
12.2 Academic Progress Policy
12.3 Grading, Assessment and Progression Policy
12.4 Online Examination (Exam Soft)
12.5 International Foundations of Medicine (IFOM) I & II Examinations
13.0 Misconduct & Disciplinary Procedures 85
13.1 Student Misconduct & Disciplinary Procedures
13.1.1 Academic Misconduct
13.1.2 Personal Misconduct
13.1.2.1 Personal Misconduct on University Premises
13.1.2.2Personal Misconduct Outside University Premises
13.2 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities
13.2.1 Student Rights and Responsibilities Policy
13.2.2 Rights in the Pursuit of Education
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 7 | P a g e
13.2.3 Right to Access Records and Facilities
13.2.4 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy & Publication
13.2.5 Right to Contribute to University Governance and Curriculum
13.2.6 Student’s Responsibilities
14.0 The Integrated MBBS Program 95
14.1 Goals
14.2 Intended Program Learning Outcomes
14.3 MBBS Program Structure
14.4 Plan of Study
14.5 Course Descriptions
14.6 Clinical Training Sites
14.7 Course Outline
14.8 Typical Week
14.9 PBL Week
15.0 List of Text Books, Reference Books, Recommended Readings 180
15.0 Grading, Assessment & Progression Policies 193
16.0 Dean’s List of Toppers 202
17.0 Administrators & Faculty 203
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 8 | P a g e
Introduction
MBBS Student handbook is meant to provide information and guidelines on the various services
and MBBS program offered by College of Medicine (CoM) at GMU. It contains sections covering
admission procedure, general rules and regulations, student support services, curriculum
details, departments and examination policies. Each section has been listed in the contents so
that you can refer quickly to areas of particular interest to you. Please note that attendance in
various courses arranged by the college is mandatory and this has been repeatedly stressed in
the handbook. Every effort has been made to provide accurate and up to date information.
Additional information useful to students will be regularly displayed on the college notice
board. Students are also advised to get in touch with course coordinators for any academic
difficulties.
We hope that the handbook will help and guide you during the new academic year at CoM.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 9 | P a g e
GMU Vision Statement
The Vision of Gulf Medical University is to be a leading contributor to the continuous
improvement of the nation’s health care delivery system through the pursuit of excellence
in medical education, biomedical research and health care services.
The University aspires to provide a unique learning experience of high quality to our
students and produce graduates whose competence will help them to make a significant
contribution to the health of the community through pursuit of academia, research and
health care.
The University aspires to attract the best of students by offering a variety of excellent
programs supported by quality administration and student support services.
The University aspires to be known for excellence and impact of its research on the
educational milieu of the nation and the outcomes of clinical care.
The University aspires to be an integral part of the community through transfer of
knowledge, continuous dialogue with the country’s health care planners and enhanced
community service.
GMU Mission Statement
It is the Mission of the Gulf Medical University to strengthen and promote excellence in
medical education, biomedical research and patient care.
GMU is committed to prepare a highly skilled health workforce made up of health care
professionals, health management and support workers and health science investigators in
order to meet the health care needs of the nation and the region.
GMU will strive to produce health care professionals who will integrate the advances in
research with the best clinical practices.
GMU will promote health services, which incorporate the latest advances in scientific
knowledge in a manner that supports education and research for the benefit of the
community.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 10 | P a g e
From the President’s Desk
Dear Students,
It gives me great pleasure to welcome you to the portals of Gulf Medical University where
we are entering into an exciting new era! You are beginning a new chapter in your life here
at Gulf Medical University. It will be a challenging yet exciting and illuminating journey for
you.
I am grateful to the Almighty Allah for the remarkable development the Gulf Medical
University has undergone in the last 15 years, where the University has been able to make its
mark in Medical Education, Healthcare and Research. We aspire to be among the best in the
region, and we're making it happen right now. We have embarked on a journey of making
GMU as a Research Based University in the coming years.
Our students coming in from 67 nations around the world thrive in our culture of dynamism
and innovation. We are proud of our traditions, our current standing and our vision for the
future. GMU students come from every corner of the world to invest in education that
inspires challenges and prepares them to be globally competitive. Eventually they discover a
world of opportunities to explore new possibilities, new ideas and new perspectives to
prepare them for life in their chosen career paths. Our students find in GMU a rich, vibrant,
innovative, and enriching academic experience.
The newly launched Center for Advanced Biomedical Research and Innovation (CABRI) has
been established to evolve, integrate, and develop multi-disciplinary research and enhance
the teaching activities of the university. It will also provide advanced diagnostic research and
testing services in the areas of Allergies, Diabetes, Cardiovascular Disease and Hereditary
diseases. Newer fields like Proteomics, Metabolomics and Genomics will be explored.
The Center for Quality Enhancement (CQE) has been established as a central facility to
enhance Quality within the University, the hospitals and laboratories of the group.
The GMC Hospitals one among the Clinical Training sites for the students of the Gulf Medical
University is now expanding rapidly with new hospitals in Dubai, Ajman, Sharjah and Ras Al
Khaimah being added to enhance the clinical training facilities to students of Gulf Medical
University. The latest expansions include the 25,000 sq.ft. modern simulation center to be
made available for clinical training in the forthcoming academic year.
I invite you to join us in this exciting journey into a bright future with a University that is
talented, dedicated, and caring. We wish you a happy and fruitful time during your study in
the Gulf Medical University.
Thumbay Moideen
Founder President - GMU Board of Governors
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 11 | P a g e
Welcome Note from the Provost
Dear Students,
On behalf of the President, the faculty, administration and the student body, I am delighted
to welcome you to the Gulf Medical University also known as GMU!
The university learning community will now be made up of students working to become
practicing physicians, pharmacists, dentists and physical therapists, a multi professional
group very much like the multi professional healthcare delivery teams of the 21st
Century.
We hope at GMU as you “Study together today to work together tomorrow” you will share
the large pool of knowledge and experience that is available in the different health related
disciplines with each other and grow to respect the contribution made by each health
profession to provide comprehensive health care to the community you will together serve
in the future.
Members of the faculty, as well as students and staff have helped building this institution
that is attracting regional, national and international attention. With a faculty committed to
maintaining strong academic standards for our students and ourselves and the commitment
of the administration and staff in every aspect of our mission and your contribution as a
member of the university community we will together realize the potential to deliver the
vision of GMU.
The leadership of the faculty and staff at GMU is engaged in efforts to strengthen teaching,
learning, research and creativity both at the undergraduate and graduate levels. GMU’s
mission is focused on assuring the quality of its programs to the university student
population. With the establishment of the Center for Advanced Biomedical Research and
Innovation (CABRI), active research combined with public service shall further strengthen
opportunities for learning.
As you become familiar with the campus, your mentors and your peers you will surely be
impressed with the multifaceted and rich academic environment. We are confident that your
contributions to the lives of fellow students, your chosen career field and the university will
be marked by excellence. Welcome.
Prof. Gita Ashok Raj MD; MNAMS
Provost - Gulf Medical University
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 12 | P a g e
Message from the Dean, College of Medicine
Greetings from College of Medicine, GMU!
College of Medicine in its over 15 years of existence has remained undiminished in its
endeavor to impart quality education and clinical training to our undergraduate medical
students. We follow the organ-system based integrated curriculum incorporating elements
of innovative trends in medical education.
Students receive good clinical exposure to a large number and a wide variety of clinical cases
as they are posted in Hospitals under Ministry of Health and Al Mafraq Hospital, Abu Dhabi
under SEHA in addition to our own GMC Hospital at Ajman for their clerkship training in
order to become safe practitioners of the future. I take this opportunity to thank MoH, SEHA
& GMC Hospitals for offering their clinical training sites for our students.
Every student undertakes a research project by the end of third year that enables to imbibe
the quality of a scientist early in their training. Emphasis on evidence-based approach to
decision making, participation in community services, professionalism and ethics form
important elements of the curriculum. Students are trained to become self-learners and life-
long learners in order to adapt to the ever-changing advances in the medical field.
College of Medicine is offering a number of short and long-term courses including AHA
accredited Life Support Courses as part of continuing medical education. It is a reality for
majority of students graduating from College of Medicine and wanting to update their
knowledge and skills or pursue further studies, to look upon their alma mater to provide the
same. The multi-national and multi-cultural mix of student diaspora is encouraged to
participate in a wide variety of extra-curricular activities like cultural and ethnic day
celebrations, debate and sports competitions.
I thank our Founder President; Mr.Thumbay Moideen to provide us with constant guidance
and support and today under his leadership and vision, College of Medicine is the ultimate
destination for any student aspiring to be a successful doctor.
Dear students, welcome to the College of Medicine, GMU for a promising and glorious
future!
Prof. Manda Venkatramana, MS, FRCSEd, PGDHPE
Dean, College of Medicine, GMU
Professor of Surgery
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 13 | P a g e
About The Student Handbook
This handbook is a source of important information regarding Gulf Medical University
(GMU) policies, regulations, rules, procedures and facilities which will be very useful to
students during their studies. The material contained herein is a supplement to the Catalog
and other information distributed to the students by GMU.
Every effort has been made to provide students with complete and accurate information.
The University reserves the right to change program, requirements and to modify, amend
or revoke any rule/s, regulation/s and / or financial schedules. However, the information
published in this handbook shall be valid for the academic year for which it is published.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 14 | P a g e
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 15 | P a g e
1.0 Academic Calendar
2013 Day Events
Jul 31 Tue Last day for application for admission
Aug 31 All days Registration period
Aug 15 Thu Last day for payment of tuition and other fees for all returning
students**
FALL SEMESTER
Sep 4 Wed
Fall Semester begin
1st
Year MBBS (Phase – I) Students and Parents welcome session
Reopening for returning 4th
Year (Phase – III Year 1) students
Reopening for returning 5th
Year (Phase – III Year 2) students at
Mafraq Hospital, Abu Dhabi
Sep 8 Sun
Reopening for returning 2nd
Year (Phase – II Year 1) students
Reopening for returning 3rd
Year (Phase – II Year 2) students
Sep 26 Thu White Coat Ceremony
Oct 13 - 17 Sun –Thu *Eid Al Adha Holiday
Nov 4 Mon *Islamic New Year Holiday
Nov 5 - 6 Tue &
Wed
GMU Annual Scientific Meeting
Dec 2 Mon National Day Holiday
Dec 22 –
Jan 2
Sun – Thu
Fall Semester Break for the I, II, III & IV Year MBBS students
Dec 28 Sat Phase – III Year 2 Semester – 9 Examination
2014
Jan 1 Wed New Year Holiday
Jan 4 Sat Phase – III Year 1 Semester – 7 Examination begins
Jan 5 Sun Phase – II Year 2 Semester – 5 Examination begins
Jan 6 Mon Phase – II Year 1 Semester – 3 Examination begins
Jan 9 Thu V Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins
IV Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins
Jan 13 Mon *Al Moulid Al Nabawi Holiday
Feb 2 Sun Phase – III Re-sit Examination begins
Feb 9 Sun Final MBBS Part – II Professional Supplementary Examination begins
Feb 10 Mon Final MBBS Part – I Professional Supplementary Examination begins
Feb 16 Sun Phase – I Semester – 1 Examination begins
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 16 | P a g e
SPRING SEMESTER
Feb 23 Sun Spring Semester begin
Mar 20 Thu Annual Sports Day
Mar 21 Fri GMU Global Day
Mar 22 Sat GMU Literary Day
Mar 30 – Apr 10
Sun -
Thu
Spring Semester Break for the I, II, III Year MBBS Students
May 26 Mon *Israa Al Mihraj Holiday
Jun 16 Mon V Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins
Jun 22 Sun
Phase – III Year 2 Semester – 10 (theory & OSCE) Examination
begins
Phase – II Year 2 Semester – 6 Examination begins
Jun 29 Sun Phase – I Semester – 2 Examination begins
Jun 28 Sat *Holy month of Ramadan Starts
Jun 30 Mon IV Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins
Jul 6 Sun Final MBBS Part – II Professional Examination begins
Jul 13 Sun
Phase – III Professional Examination begins
Phase – II Professional Examination begins
Final MBBS Part – I Professional Examination begins
Jul 20 Sun
Phase – I Professional Examination begin
Phase – III Year 1 Semester – 8 Examination begins
Phase – II Year 1 Semester – 4 Examination begins
Jul 27 – Aug 31 Sat Eid Al Fitr Holidays & Summer vacation
* Islamic holidays are determined after sighting the moon. Thus actual dates of holidays may not
coincide with the dates in this calendar.
**All tuition and other fees are subject to revision by Gulf Medical University’s Board of
Governors in accordance with University requirements. Every year, fees are reviewed and
subject to revision. As and when fees are revised, the new fees will be applicable to all enrolled
and new students. The amount shown in this document represent fees as currently approved.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 17 | P a g e
UNIVERSITY DIVISIONS &
ACADEMIC PROGRAMS
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 18 | P a g e
2.0 University Divisions and Academic Programs
The University has six academic divisions offering following degree and non-degree
programs.
College of Medicine (CoM)
 Bachelor of Medicine & Bachelor of Surgery (MBBS) Program
 Bachelor of Biomedical Sciences (BBMS) Program
College of Pharmacy (CoP)
 Doctor of Pharmacy (PharmD) Program
College of Dentistry (CoD)
 Doctor of Dental Medicine (DMD) Program
College of Allied Health Sciences (CoAHS)
 Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Program
College of Graduate Studies (CoGS)
 Master of Science in Clinical Pathology (MS CP)
 Master in Public Health (MPH)
 Master in Toxicology (MTox)
 Diploma in Toxicology (DipTox)
 Masters in Human Reproductive Biology (MHRB)
 Master of Physical Therapy (MPT)
Center for Continuing Education and Community Outreach (CCE&CO)
 Non degree programs
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 19 | P a g e
LICENSE & RECOGNITION
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 20 | P a g e
3.0 License & Recognition
The following programs have received Initial Accreditation from Commission for Academic
Accreditation, Ministry of Higher Education & Scientific Research (CAA MOHE&SR),
AbuDhabi – UAE.
SI.No Program
Month &Year of Initial
Accreditation
1 Bachelor of Medicine & Bachelor of Surgery (MBBS) September 2004
2 Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) June 2005
3 Doctor of Pharmacy (PharmD) August 2008
4 Doctor of Dental Medicine (DMD) September 2008
5 Master of Science in Clinical Pathology (MS CP) January 2009
6 Master in Public Health (MPH) July 2010
7 Master in Toxicology (MTox) July 2010
8 Diploma in Toxicology (Dip Tox) July 2010
9 Masters in Human Reproductive Biology (MHRB) December 2012
10 Master of Physical Therapy (MPT) May 2013
11 Bachelor of Biomedical Sciences (BBMS) October 2013
Gulf Medical University is listed in the WHO World Directory of Medical Schools and in the
Eastern Mediterranean Regional Office (EMRO), WHO website.
http://www.emro.who.int/hped/
Gulf Medical College is listed as an accredited / recognized medical school in the
International Medical Education Directory (IMED) published by Foundation of Advancement
of International Medical Education and Research (FAIMER) at the website
http://imed.ecfmg.org/
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 21 | P a g e
THE CAMPUS
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 22 | P a g e
4.0 The Campus
The Gulf Medical University is located in the Al Jarf area in the northern emirate of Ajman
on a vast stretch of land extending up to a 100,000 sq.mtrs and a built area of 1,90,000
sq.ft. It has laboratories, classrooms and administration buildings, a standalone building
that houses the library and the modern multimedia centers, a cafeteria, multi-cuisine
restaurant and a sports complex with courts for lawn tennis, basketball, volley ball and lush
green grounds for cricket and football and the vacant grounds have been earmarked for
the future multispecialty hospital, the residence halls for students and living quarters for
the staff and faculty.
The Gulf Medical College Hospital and Research Center is located a few miles away on the
side of a main arterial road entering Ajman from the neighboring emirate of Sharjah and
currently serves as the teaching hospital for GMU. The affiliated hospitals are located in the
different emirates: Mafraq Hospital in Abu Dhabi (HAAD), Sheikh Khalifa Hospital in Ajman,
Umm Al Quwain Hospital in UAQ and Ajman Municipality Public Health Clinic.
The GMU Campus includes modern facilities with classrooms, laboratories and learning
center that are appropriately equipped with up-to-date instructional and educational aids.
GMU encourages social, cultural and other extra-curricular activities and sports to enhance
a comprehensive personality development. The spacious campus spotted with greenery
contains student rest rooms, prayer halls, indoor and outdoor sports facilities, first aid
clinic, and student car parking. The facilities are well connected with each other making it
easy for students to move from one area to another.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 23 | P a g e
LOCATION MAP
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 24 | P a g e
5.0 Location Map
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 25 | P a g e
UNDERGRADUATE
ADMISSION
POLICIES & PROCEDURES
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 26 | P a g e
6.0 Undergraduate Admission Policies & Procedures
6.1 Policy Statement
Gulf Medical University admits students irrespective of their national origin, color, gender or
religion to all the rights, privileges, activities and programs offered by the university.
The University stands for the highest moral and academic standards consistent with the
heritage and cultural background of the United Arab Emirates and shall aspire for national
and international recognition of its programs and degrees.
The University sets high standards for previous academic performance to attract student of
high caliber and to meet and exceed the standards of high retention, low attrition and
outstanding academic performance required to fulfill the accreditation standards for every
program offered by the University.
6.2 Undergraduate Admission Requirements
 Applicants shall meet all criteria for admission into each programs offered by the
University as laid down in the Standards published by the Commission for Academic
Accreditation, Ministry of Higher Education and Scientific Research, UAE.
 The applicant must have completed a minimum of 12 years of education in school and
passed subjects in Physics, Chemistry and Biology in higher secondary school.
 The applicant must have secured a minimum of 80% marks as per U.A.E. Secondary
School education standards or its equivalent in each of the three science subjects
(Physics, Chemistry, Biology)
 Students who complete their secondary school education as per UK curriculum must
have completed at least two of the three science subjects (Physics, Chemistry,
Biology) in ‘AS’ levels or ‘A’ levels provided they have passed in all the three subjects
in their ‘O’ levels. The minimum grade required is B/C in AS/A level in Chemistry,
Biology or Physics.
 A score of at least 28 of IB (International Baccalaureate) and for holders of American
Diploma a minimum score of 80% is required in addition to a SAT II score of at least
550 in Biology.
 An aggregate score of 75% for Pakistan Board, 80% for Indian State Board and 75% for
Indian Central Board while the minimum score of 70% in each subject of Biology,
Physics and Chemistry is required.
 The applicant must have completed 17 years of age on or before the 31st of
December of the year of admission.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 27 | P a g e
 The applicant must have proficiency in spoken and written English and Science
terminology.
 The applicant must have passed the English language proficiency test such as TOEFL
or IELTS. A minimum score of 500 TOEFL (173 CBT, 61 iBT) or its equivalent in a
standardized English language test, such as 5.0 for IELTS or any other equivalent
internationally recognized test.
 The applicant shall appear for a written MCQ test and a personal interview before the
GMU Admissions Committee.
 The Admissions Committee shall evaluate all applicants for both cognitive and non-
cognitive traits demonstrating their aptitude for the chosen area of study.
 Applicants shall submit all academic documents and official transcripts / credits /
grades / marks duly attested by the Ministry of Education, U.A.E. and Ministry of
Foreign Affairs, U.A.E. or U.A.E. Embassy in their country on admission into the
program.
 Applicant shall submit a copy of the Equivalency Certificate issued by the Ministry of
Education – U.A.E.
 Applicant shall submit a copy of the Emirates ID.
 Students of Indian nationality are required to obtain an “Eligibility Certificate” from
the Medical Council of India / Dental Council of India, New Delhi before they seek
admission into the MBBS / DMD program.
 On admission, the student shall submit a copy of the individual’s birth certificate or
proof of age, the applicant’s passport, and a copy of UAE nationality ID (Khulasat Al-
Kayd), a Certificate of Good Conduct. A medical fitness certificate including blood
test results, fifteen recent colour photographs, a written pledge by the applicant
agreeing to comply with University rules and regulations, the application form duly
filled up with complete details, a receipt for payment of a non-refundable fee
towards admission.
All information regarding admissions shall appear in the Catalog, Institutional website and in
any other forms of advertisement circulated by the University.
6.3 Admission Process
This is carried out in several stages:
1) Advertisement in the media: Information in the media will include details of the
programs, colleges of the university, admissions criteria and online registration form.
2) Scrutiny of information: The Admissions Committee scrutinizes the credentials of the
applicant with reference to the high school education: courses, grades in the qualifying
examinations and the overall suitability of the applicant for admission into the program.
The committee would also inform the applicant regarding the need for any additional
documents that may be required.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 28 | P a g e
3) Short listing: Applicants whose credentials have been accepted as adequate by the
Admissions Committee are informed about the date and time for a personal interview
that would be conducted in Gulf Medical University, Ajman. GMU will provide necessary
help concerning visa arrangements for students from outside UAE.
4) Personal Interview: The Admissions Committee of GMU will conduct the personal
interview. The committee follows a protocol for the interview that will last
approximately 45 minutes. The conversation during the interview will be in English. This
will be in an informal atmosphere and the applicant will be given ample opportunity to
respond to the questions in a relaxed manner. After the personal interview, the
Admissions Committee will submit its recommendations to the Provost concerning the
suitability of the candidate for admission.
5) Provost Approval: The Provost of GMU will finalize admissions after studying the
recommendations of the Admissions Committee. The decision of the Provost on matters
concerning admissions shall be final.
6) Academic Advising: GMU is committed to provide academic advising in order to advise
students in the development and pursuit of academic objectives consistent with their life
goals and the available opportunities at the university.
7) Medical Fitness: Students admitted to GMU are required to submit a Medical Fitness
certificate soon after they have registered on the University rolls. The Medical
Examination in this connection will be carried out in GMC Hospital & Research Center,
Ajman.
8) Enrollment: Candidates who are finally selected for admission are required (within the
time announced on the notification of selection) to submit a letter of acceptance to the
Provost, along with the fee in cash or by demand draft in favor of Gulf Medical
University, Ajman payable at Ajman, U.A.E. Failure to comply with this requirement will
result in cancellation of the admission.
6.4Documents Required for Admission:
 Application form with all entries completed
 Attested copy of High School Mark Sheet
 Certificate of English language proficiency test
 True copy of applicant's passport
 Fifteen recent passport-size photographs
 Emirates ID copy
 Equivalency certificate issued by the Ministry of Education, UAE
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 29 | P a g e
6.5 Transfer Admissions Policy and Procedures:
Students shall be considered for transfer only as per the following Transfer Admissions
Policy of the University:
 Only students from a federal or licensed institution in the U.A.E. or a recognized
Foreign Institution of higher learning shall be eligible for admission by transfer.
 All transfer students shall meet the English Language proficiency requirements of the
program to which they are transferred.
 All transfer students shall submit official transcripts before admission to the Program in
which they are transferred.
 All transfer students shall submit official transcripts of credit earned from all institutions
of higher education previously attended before admission to undergraduate programs.
 Only students who are in good academic standing (a minimum cumulative grade point
average of 2.0 on a 4.0. scale, or equivalent) for transfer to an undergraduate program
of study similar to that from which the student is transferring shall be accepted for
admission.
 Students who are not in good standing shall be transferred only to a program in a field
different from the one from which the student is transferring.
 The University shall transfer undergraduate program credits only for courses relevant to
the degree that provide equivalent learning outcomes and in which the student earned a
grade of B (2.0 on a 4.0 scale) or better;
 The University shall inform applicants for transfer admissions or re-admission of the
transfer credits earned for previous courses.
 The University shall limit transferred credit hours to less than 50% of the total credit
hours required for the program.
 The University shall not grant credit twice for substantially the same course taken at two
different institutions.
 The University shall allow the transfer of credits for clinical training only when done in
the U.A.E.; in exceptional circumstances, in which case waiver of this condition shall be
sought from the CAA, MoHESR before admission.
 On admission, the student shall submit a copy of the individual’s birth certificate or proof
of age, the applicant’s passport and a copy of UAE nationality ID (Khulasat Al-Kayd), a
Certificate of Good Conduct, a medical fitness certificate including blood test results, six
recent color photographs, a written pledge by the applicant to comply with University
rules and regulations, the application form duly filled up with complete details and a
receipt for payment of a non-refundable fee towards admission.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 30 | P a g e
6.6 Transfer within GMU
The students' wishes are taken into consideration when applying to the programs of Gulf
Medical University. However, they will be allowed to transfer to other programs available in
the university according to established rules based on the recommendations of the
Admissions Committee.
6.7 Re-admission
Students who are on leave for a period of one year must apply for re-admission to the
program through the Admissions Office.
 Students in Good Standing: Students who are absent on approved leaves must apply
for re-admission before they will be permitted to register for the semester.
 Students Suspended for misconduct: Students who have been rusticated from the
university and under probation must apply for readmission and may be readmitted
after serving the suspension period.
 Students on academic probation: Students who fail to meet the minimum GPA
requirement but have satisfied other requirements may be allowed to register as a
non-matriculate student for a probationary period. Non matriculated students who
achieve a minimum GPA of 2.0 can be readmitted, provided they meet all the other
requirements.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 31 | P a g e
STUDENT SERVICES
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 32 | P a g e
7.0. Student Services
7.1 Office of Student Affairs
The Office of Student Affairs supports and complements the mission of the University and
its academic programs by creating a comfortable, safe and secure environment that
contributes to the success of the students’ educational mission and personal growth. It
helps to involve students in the university community by providing appropriate student
organizations, activities, publications and opportunities for interaction with faculty, staff and
peers outside the classroom.
7.2 Counseling Services
7.2.1 Student Counseling Policy
All counseling sessions are conducted with the utmost regard to confidentiality and all
records kept by Counselor are treated as confidential.
Information shared with a counselor is not released to anyone outside the Counseling
Services office. Information may be released under the following exceptions, if,
 the student gives written permission to disclose information (In that instance, the
student determines what information is to be released and to whom.) or
 A student presents a danger to himself / herself or to another person.
Students meeting with a counselor shall be encouraged to discuss any concerns that they
have about confidentiality.
7.2.2 Academic Counseling Policy
Student advising is part of the academic duties of every faculty member. The Dean or Chair
of the Academic Unit assigns advisors so that the number of advisees per faculty member is
as small as possible.
Each student shall have an appointed full-time faculty advisor. This does not preclude
informal advising with a student regarding progress in the courses being taught.
Student advising is not limited to registering students, but encompasses all aspects of
academic advising, including selection of electives, counseling on any academic difficulty/ ies
or problem encountered, and monitoring the academic progress of advisees.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 33 | P a g e
An academic advising guide has been prepared by the Provost’s office and is distributed to
all academic advisors.
Students receive notification of their faculty advisor and a listing of all students and advisors
is available in the Academic Advising Center (AAC). Prior to actual course registration,
faculty are available to advisees during their scheduled office hours to discuss academic
programs and issues related to vocational, career and educational goals. A record is kept of
the advisory meetings. Faculty advisors assigned to the Office of Advising, Assessment and
Counseling Center shall coordinate further referrals.
Adjunct faculty is not to be responsible for the academic advisement of their students.
7.2.3 Personal Counseling
Professional counseling is available for personal problems (i.e., financial, career, home,
health) especially if you have;
 Physical complaints when no medical causes can be found.
 Excessive anxiety for examinations / accommodation / or home sickness.
 Lack of interest in daily activities.
 An unusual amount of irritability or fear to mingle with friends.
 Not been able to cope with studies.
 Inability to concentrate.
 Personality changes that can’t be explained such as sudden shifts in mood / behavior.
Referrals are made to the office of Admission & Registers regarding regulations concerning
questions of transfer; to the Accounts Office regarding financial aid issues; to the Career
Counselor’s Office regarding career or job placement issues; by the Dean Student Affairs
who attends to all student activities, discipline issues, university policy etc.
7.2.4 Student Activities Policy
The Office of Student Affairs offer comprehensive programs and services that foster an
educational environment conducive to the overall development of students.
The Office of the Dean of Student Affairs oversees all departments catering to various
student services and serves as an advocate for students in the development of University
policy. The Office is also responsible for administering the University code of conduct
(judicial policies).
Information on specific programs and services particularly athletic, cultural and literary like
GMU Global day celebrations, intercollegiate Sports meet, debates, presentations at
scientific meetings, health exhibitions shall be published in the Student handbook,
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 34 | P a g e
University Catalog and displayed prominently on Student Notice Boards, the University
Website and MYGMU e-platform to encourage participation by all students in these events.
7.3 GMU Undergraduate Student Council
The GMU student council comprises of representatives elected from the various academic
programs.
GMU Student Council shall have representation in faculty committees such as Academic
Council, College Council, Student Affairs Committee, Curriculum Development Committee,
Library Council, Sports, Culture & Literary Committee, Campus Health, Campus Safety and
Security Committee.
The student council comprises of class representatives. Each class will elect student
representatives who would coordinate the curricular and extracurricular activities of the
class.
Each class will elect two representatives comprising one male and one female.
The class representatives will be elected following an approved election procedure and the
procedure consists of the following stages:
 Nominations of the candidates are submitted to the Dean / Associate Dean of Student
Affairs.
 The Dean / Associate Dean of Student Affairs will supervise the voting and declare the
results of the election.
 The names of the elected class representatives will be announced to the University.
 Elected student representatives will be invited to the Office of the Dean / Associate
Dean of Student Affairs where they will sign a formal document accepting their duties
and responsibilities as elected members of the student council.
 The elected representatives from the student council will represent in different
committees.
 The University reserves the right to remove student representatives from their office
on disciplinary grounds and/or inadequate performance.
Duties and Responsibilities of Student Representatives
1. To interact with other students in the class and collect data on matters pertaining
to the teaching program, examinations and student welfare measures.
2. To bring to the notice of the faculty, Associate Dean or the Dean any matter/s
relating to student activities, which require modification/s or corrective measures.
3. To attend meetings of Student Council with the Associate Deans and the Dean at
regular intervals. The members of the Student Council are expected to come
prepared with the agenda for such meetings so that all relevant points can be
discussed in an orderly manner.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 35 | P a g e
4. To identify any personal problem of the students which require immediate or
urgent intervention and brings it to the notice of the faculty, Associate Deans or the
Dean.
5. To recommend effective measures relating to student activities (academics,
discipline and welfare).
6. To act as a healthy and reliable link between the students on one hand and the
members of faculty and administration on the other.
7.3.1 Student Council Executive Board
Elected representatives from the Student Council form the Student Council Executive
Board comprising one student from each program who will attend the respective college
council meetings called for by the Deans of the respective colleges.
The university reserves the right to remove any student representative from their elected
office on disciplinary grounds and / or inadequate performance.
Students indulging in Academic or Personal misconduct will not be allowed to be elected
for Class Representative or Member of Student Council Executive Board; and those holding
these posts already stand to be disqualified.
7.3.2 Student Publications
Students write, edit and publish a newsletter (Previously ‘GMU Pulse’, under name change
at present), which is an essential feature that chronicles student life at GMU. The students’
newsletter expresses their sense of commitment and degree of cooperation as well as their
awareness of the educational and social issues that affect life in the GMU. The newsletter
reflects the make-up of the GMU and it appears in two languages - Arabic and English.
7.3.3 Student Behavior
 All students are expected to maintain decorum and decency in conducting themselves
in the Campus.
 Men and women students should not be seen together anywhere in the campus
including the central hall, corridors, learning center or cafeteria. Members of faculty
have been requested to be on the vigil about this and have been authorized to censure
any student violating this regulation.
7.4 Student Academic Services
7.4.1 The Dean’s Office
The Office of the Dean oversees all departments catering to various student academic
services.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 36 | P a g e
7.4.2 Office of Student Affairs
Office of Student Affairs coordinates all matters concerning student council, student
welfare, career guidance, alumni affairs, student health, placement, student discipline,
residential halls, transportation, student publication, student activities and sports. Student
may approach the Associate Dean Student Affairs to resolve issues regarding student
affairs and student support services.
7.4.3 Career Service Office
The University has a full time Career Counselor.
7.4.3.1 Career Service Policy
The Career Counselor shall be available at all hours on all working days throughout the year;
Students are encouraged to meet the Career Counselor and discuss their career plans.
All students are encouraged to avail of clinical training at sites available in the country and
abroad during the summer break.
The students are encouraged to seek help in preparing their curriculum vitae.
Students shall also be helped in filling application forms for taking various licensing
examinations being held in the country and abroad.
The career counselor collects and disseminates information about the various hospitals,
institutions and universities offering internship and residency programs in the country and
abroad.
The career counselor shall encourage graduates to keep in touch with the alma mater
through the University’s website, correspondence and telephone.
The Career Counselor maintains a register of GMU Alumni. The Career Office also keeps a
record of employment of all Alumni and seeks evaluation of the GMU graduate as an
employee.
The Career Counselor shall submit reports periodically to update the Alumni records in the
Center for Quality Enhancement (CQE).
7.4.4 Financial Aid Office
Information on financial aid may be obtained from the Chief Accounts Officer of the Gulf
Medical University.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 37 | P a g e
Refer to Section 11.13 under Financial Aid and Scholarships in this document for further
details.
7.5 Health Services
A First Aid Room is available in the GMU campus. All GMU students shall be eligible for
medical treatment in the GMCHRC.
7.5.1 Health Services Policy
In order to streamline the health care needs of GMU students, a Campus Medical Center
has been established. This will provide care in the following areas:
o First Aid Service at GMU
o Referral to GMC Hospital
o Coordination between GMU & GMC Hospital
The student Management System has been linked with that of the hospital for easy
identification of student for treatment.
As part of the registration procedures, every student must be covered for health services
under one of the two following plans. Plan – I is compulsory for all GMU sponsored
students. This provides medical benefits under the GMCHRC Health Card. Plan II is
compulsory for others who are officially enrolled in health insurance plans with their
families.
Students shall be required to present the Student ID as identification document on
registering for medical treatment.
The Office of the Academic Affairs at GMCHRC shall make arrangements for access to
health care facilities at the hospital and to encourage students to undergo vaccination.
It is compulsory for all GMU students to have a valid Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance.
Students shall be informed regarding the benefits of immunization and testing for
communicable diseases and encouraged to undertake appropriate immunizations and
tests.
7.6 Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance
As per the Ministry of Health (MoH) guidelines, all students undergoing clinical training at
various hospitals are required to have a valid Clinical Training – Third Party Liability
Insurance. This insurance cover is restricted to training hours only and / or whilst
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 38 | P a g e
participating in indoor and/or outdoor university activities under university’s expressed
authorization including transportation from and to training centre by university vehicles.
7.7 Student Records Policy
 The University shall maintain confidentiality of student records. The student records
shall be stored in safe custody and only authorized personnel shall have access to
them.
 Transcripts shall be issued only upon the signed request of the parent or the student.
Under no circumstances shall the student records be released to any third party
without the knowledge of the student or the student’s parent.
 All official records shall be signed by the Provost of the University whose signatures
only shall be recognized outside the bounds of GMU.
 A progress report shall be sent regularly to the contact address to inform the
guardians about the ward’s progress.
 The records policy shall be published in the student handbook for information. The
Office of the Dean Admissions & Registers shall maintain the student’s permanent
academic record and requests to view the individual’s record must be made to the
Office of the Dean Admissions & Registers.
 The program office of academic program in which a student is enrolled also maintains
student files that are considered non-permanent. Students have the right to access
their program file except documents where access has been waived (e.g.
recommendation forms).
 A student must submit an application to the Dean Admissions & Registers office to
obtain access to his/her program academic record.
The Dean Admissions & Registers Office shall ensure:
 The continuous maintenance and back up of student records with one set stored in a
secure location, preferably off-site in a vault or fireproof cabinet.
 Special security measures to protect and back up computer-generated and stored
records.
 Confidentiality of records.
 A definition of what constitutes the permanent record of each student; the right of
access to student records, including students’ access to their own records.
 The authority to manage and update student records.
 Appropriate retention and disposal of records.
7.8 Information Release Policy
 The University shall neither deny nor effectively prevent current or former students
of the University the right to inspect and review their education records.
 Students shall be granted access to their records within a reasonable period of time
after filing a request. Students have the right to request the amendment of their
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 39 | P a g e
education records to ensure that the records are not inaccurate, misleading or
otherwise in violation of their privacy or other rights.
 The University shall not release or provide access to education records, except
“directory” information, without the written consent of the student to any individual,
agency or organization.
 The University is, however, authorized to provide access to student records to
Campus officials and employees who have legitimate educational interests in such
access. These persons are those who have responsibilities in connection with the
academic, administrative, or service functions of the university and who have reason
for using student records connected with their academic or other university
responsibilities. Disclosure may also be made to other persons, Ministry and
Government officials or organizations under certain conditions (e.g. as part of an
accreditation or program evaluation; in response to a court order, audit in connection
with financial aid; or to institutions to which the student is transferring).
 The University shall designate the following items as “directory” information:
student name, addresses, telephone numbers, major field of study, participation in
officially recognized activities and sports, dates of attendance, degrees and awards
received, most recent previous school attended and photograph. The University may
disclose any of those items without prior written consent, unless notified in writing
on the form available from the Dean Admissions & Registers.
 Confidentiality of information shall be highly respected at GMU. If students wish that
any of their education record shall be available to anyone, a consent form shall be
available in the Office Admissions and Registers. If there is no consent form,
information will not be disclosed except to the appropriate person(s) in connection
with an emergency, if the knowledge of such information is necessary to protect the
health or safety of the student or other persons.
 Under no circumstances shall the student records be released to any third party
without the prior knowledge of the student or the student’s parent.
7.9 Plagiarism and Copyright Policy:
Plagiarism is defined as “a piece of writing that has been copied from someone else and is
presented as being your own work”. The student should cite the sources if they use
someone else’s ideas. If the student include copyrighted material in their thesis, they are
responsible for obtaining written permission from the copyright holder. The Gulf Medical
University takes no responsibility in this regard. To avoid plagiarism, student must mention
the sources properly using footnotes, endnotes or references, inclusion of illustrative
graphs, charts etc. which are copyrighted sources, permission letter should be included.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 40 | P a g e
Copyright is legal protection of intellectual property. As thesis is legally classified as
publication and an intellectual property of the student, during the preparation of thesis, the
student should consider the copyright laws regarding the protection of original work.
Copyright ownership means that the student has the exclusive right to print, reprint, copy,
sell, and prepare derivative works based on their work.
7.10 Dress Code
Professional Dress
Students should at all times maintain a neat and clean appearance, and dress in attire that is
appropriate. When students are functioning as medical / health professionals, either with
clinical patients or simulated patients, dress must be appropriate and professional. A
professional image increases credibility, patient’s trust, respect, and confidence. In addition,
because medical and health sciences students utilize facilities on campus where patients and
the public are present, professional dress and appearance are also expected even when
students are not engaged in patient care. In addition, most of the clinical facilities have
specific dress code policies that must also be followed. Furthermore, Photo I.D. badges are
to be worn at all times.
Violation of the dress code can have detrimental consequences for patient care and could
damage the reputation of the institution. Flagrant and repeated violations of the dress code
may be deemed to signify a lack of insight or maturity on the part of the individual student
and call for counseling and discipline. The immediate supervisor may choose to discuss initial
violations of the dress code directly with the student. Serious or repeated violations may be
subject to disciplinary action.
 Students of GMU are expected to maintain decorum in their dress code in
accordance with the dignity of the medical profession and of the institution.
 Traditional dresses are allowed for only U.A.E nationals.
 Students must wear white coats with identity cards / badges on entering the campus
/ clinical sites and must wear the coats as long as they are inside the campus / clinical
sites. The white coat must be clean and well maintained and of acceptable quality.
The white coat must be worn fully buttoned.
 The security and duty staff have the right to reject admission to any student into the
campus when not properly dressed or when not wearing the white coats.
 White coats are to be worn only inside the college and hospital premises. Students
should not wear white coats in public places such as supermarkets.
 Women students must take special care in avoiding skin tight and revealing dress.
They must have their hair properly tied up and must not keep the hair loose. All
women students must wear dress, which reaches down to the ankle level.
 Students must wear dress that does not hinder practical or clinical work.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 41 | P a g e
7.11 Dining Services
GMU provides modern dining services in the campus where meals are served at a
reasonable price. The dining facilities are provided at 3 locations in the campus and 2 in the
GMC hospital. The ‘Terrace’ a multi cuisine restaurant located in the campus serves all the
Arab, Continental & Asian cuisines.
7.12 Recreational Facilities
State of the art recreational facilities are provided in the Body & Soul Health Club, a
gymnastic unit of GMU. Membership is provided to the students at a concessional rate and
they can enjoy all facilities including swimming.
World class Basketball, Volleyball courts, Tennis courts, Cricket & Football fields have been
located in the campus. Separate indoor Table Tennis facility for male and female students
has been provided. The sports committee announces inter-collegiate sports events every
year wherein interested students can participate.
7.13 Student Support Services
Faculty in-charge/ Name Tel.No: 06 7431333
Coordinators
Hostel : Dr. Joshua Ashok Ext. 317
Mrs. Sherly Ajay Ext. 384
Sports & First Aid: Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie Ext. 211
Cultural Activities: Mr. Vignesh Unadkat Ext. 240
Library: Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas Ext. 316
Administrative Assistance:
Accounts: Mr. Aslam Hameed Ext. 300
Library: Mr. Diaz Idiculla Ext. 221
Mr. Ansal Ext. 221
Common Rooms, Common utilities
and Transport: Mr. Subeesh Ext. 219
Audio Visual Aids: Mr. Supreeth / Mr. Bilal Ext. 222
Visa and Health Card: Mr. Fayaz Mohammed Ext. 238
Photocopy Section, Mail Boxes
and Sub store Mr. Sakthi Ext. 283
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 42 | P a g e
7.14 GMU Physical Facilities
7.14.1 Lecture Halls
The lectures are usually held in the four main lecture halls - Lecture Hall I, Lecture Hall II,
Lecture Hall III and Lecture Hall IV. In addition the demonstration rooms located close to
laboratories are used in teaching smaller classes for lectures, group discussions, seminars
and tutorials. The graduate students have their classrooms in the teaching / learning center.
7.14.2 GMU Testing Center
The state-of-the-art GMU testing center is the latest addition to the ever-growing facilities of
Gulf Medical University. This new unit is capable of accommodating placement tests,
examinations or any other form of testing through a sophisticated technical set-up.
With a capacity of holding up to 88 participants, the centre has all modern facilities. To meet
the standards required for international testing regulations, invigilators are supported with
adequate number of CCTV cameras in each testing halls. The testing center has a data
processing room where post-test analysis of scores could be done or the central valuation
room for the examiners to value paper based tests. Access to the center and examination
halls is user-friendly to people with special needs (wide elevator and doors).
7.14.3 Common Rooms & Lockers
Separate common rooms with locker facility are available for male and female students.
Locker keys may be obtained from the Administrative office. In the event of any damages to
the lockers or loss of keys, a fine of AED 100 is levied. Only materials pertaining to academic
and learning needs are to be kept in the lockers; strict disciplinary action is taken if any
objectionable material is found in the lockers.
7.14.4 Masjid
Separate entrance for men and women with ablution facilities are provided in the Masjid.
7.14.5 Mail Box
All incoming postal mail would be kept in the designated area close to the photocopying
section.
7.14.6 GMU Hostel
Separate hostel facilities for male and female students are provided on request. Resident
wardens in the hostels take care of student needs. Indoor games and Internet facilities are
available for recreation and study.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 43 | P a g e
A. Aim: The Office of Student Affairs support and complement the mission of the college
and its academic program by creating a comfortable and safe environment that contributes
to the success of resident students’ educational progress and personal growth.
The hostel offers a learning environment that fosters self-dependence, respect for social and
communal norms, and tolerance of cultural diversity. The residence halls provide
opportunities for residents to improve their leadership, communication and social skills,
which support their academic development.
B. Hostels
GMC Girls Hostel Ajman Single / Sharing rooms
GMC Boys Hostel Ajman Single / Sharing rooms
C. Hostel Fees details
Students who are sent out of the hostel on disciplinary action will not be eligible to get
refund of the rent.
Hostel Single Sharing
Ajman 19000/- + 1000 security deposit 13000/- + 1000 security deposit
D. Hostel Regulations
These rules have been formulated to help the students to study comfortably in the hostel, to
ensure their safety and maintain discipline. All the inmates of the hostels are to strictly
adhere to these rules.
1. Right of Occupancy
a. GMU students who have paid or arranged for the payment of their hostel
fees, tuition and other college fees have the right to reside.
b. Rent is charged for one academic year extending from the beginning of the
academic year to the end.
c. Request of renewal to be submitted and paid before the next academic
year. The room is confirmed only on payment.
d. Students leaving the hostel in the middle of an academic year are not
eligible for refund of the rent.
e. Student has the right to report to the Warden, Hostel In charge or Office of
Student Affairs in case of any difficulty faced during her / his stay in the
hostel.
2. Security
a. To ensure the security of all students, all GMU hostels are protected by
security staff / warden for 24 hrs. throughout the year.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 44 | P a g e
3. Facility
a. Air conditioned room with kitchen and bathroom, cot with mattress and
quilt, fridge, study table and chair, wooden cupboard, micro-oven.
b. Water cooler provided in each floor, common washing area, computer lab
and exercise room.
c. Cleaning, transportation and fulltime warden.
4. Curfew
a. During week days (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, & Thursday) all
resident female students are expected to be in their respective dorms by
9:00 p.m. and male students by 9:30 pm
b. During weekends (Friday & Saturday) female students must report back
before 10:00 p.m. and male students report back before 11:00 p.m.
c. Daily attendance of hostel students will be conducted and submitted to the
Hostel In-charge and Office of Student Affairs.
d. The hostel Warden monitors the attendance records regularly for tardiness
and absences. Repeated violation of attendance regulations will be
reported to the Office of Student Affairs.
e. Students require prior permission from the warden before leaving the
hostel for shopping. Details about their movement in such cases should be
entered in a movement register maintained for this purpose.
f. Hostel doors will be closed by 11:00 pm.
Violation of the curfew timings and hostel regulations may result in the
cancellation of the hostel facility.
5. Weekend / Vacation out-pass policy
a. Female students who wish to go out to visit their parents or relatives must
obtain prior permission from their parents or nominated guardians on each
occasion.
b. A letter must be faxed /email to the Office of Hostel In-charge
(fax no: 06-7468989 or email: sherly@gmu.ac.ae or
Warden Daisy Thomas, email: daisythomas@gmu.ac.ae
Warden Subaida, email: subaidarakefa@gmu.acae) well in advance for prior
approval.
c. Student should fill out the out-pass form before leaving.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 45 | P a g e
6. Inter-visitation
a. GMU students who are not residents of the hostel and parents are not
permitted to stay in the hostel.
b. On emergency purpose, one–day stay of non-residents (current GMU
student/ GMU student’s sister), concerned student requires to take prior
approval (at least 3 days before) from the Office of Student Affairs.
A visitor fee of AED 100/- per day will be charged. Student is requested to submit the
receipt of payment on entry to the hostel.
c. Hostel students may be permitted to have visitors / friends in the visiting
area and will not be permitted to take them to their rooms.
d. GMU students visiting hostel inmates are required to fill the form and take
the approval from the Warden.
e. Outsiders other than parents or nominated guardians are not allowed
inside the hostels. Parents are allowed to visit their ward’s room only on
the first day of the University or on emergency situation upon approval.
7. Smoking / Alcohol / Drugs
a. Smoking, seesha and using drugs / alcohol are strictly prohibited in GMU
hostels.
b. If a student is found using drug / alcohol / seesha etc., he / she will face
severe disciplinary consequences.
8. Littering
a. Since the hostels are the residents’ second home, all students are expected
to maintain cleanliness inside the halls.
b. Rooms are inspected periodically for cleanliness.
c. Students are also expected to regularly empty the garbage in their rooms.
d. In the event a student room is found to be in a dirty state, the Student
Affairs office has the right to charge the student for getting it cleaned.
9. Cable / TV / Internet / Computer Room
a. Students are allowed to have Television of their own.
b. Hostel has the Wi-Fi connections on all floors and an additional computer
room with internet connection is provided for learning purpose.
c. Computer /Internet usage will be viewed seriously and any misuse will entail
discontinuing the facility.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 46 | P a g e
10. Exercise area (Girls’ Hostel Safeer area)
a. Students are provided with tread mills for exercise.
b. Students utilizing need to sign in the usage of time in the register.
11. Meals and Cafeteria
a. Micro-oven and Fridge has been provided for warming and storing of food.
b. Procuring ordered food from outside restaurants should be delivered before
10:00 pm. Any late deliveries will not be permitted.
c. The facility of hostel delivery of food is arranged from the University Terrace
Restaurant (Contact no: 06-7430002)
12. Transportation
 Hostel students are provided transport facility to the University.
 On regular class days, University bus has been arranged as per following
schedule:-
Time Main Girls Hostel
(Safeer area)
Girls Hostel
(Jurf)
Boys Hostel
Pick up to the University First trip : 8:00 am
Second trip : 8:10 am
8:15 am 8:15 am
Pick up from University 3:45 pm 3:45 pm 3:45 pm
 Transport facility is also provided for hostel students during summer and
semester break holidays. Request for transport signed by the Warden has to
be filled and submitted to the Transport department for approval.
 Transport is NOT provided for weekend travels.
13. Concerning Fire Codes
a. A fire alarm sound indicates that an emergency situation exists.
b. Students are required to switch OFF the electrical equipments after use. In
case any room is found to have the oven, A/c or any other electrical
equipment ON unnecessarily, the office reserves the right to ask the student
to pay the electricity charges.
c. Cooking indoors with charcoal or any open flame device, burning candles is
prohibited.
d. In case of complaint regarding malfunctioning switches or any other electrical
equipment needs to be reported to the Warden immediately or written in the
complaint book.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 47 | P a g e
14. Entering / Transfer of rooms
a. GMU officials including Hostel Supervisor and Warden may enter student
room in an emergency.
b. Students will be informed in case of maintenance work to be done or college
officials entering their rooms.
c. Male members are not allowed inside the girls’ hostel except male
maintenance staff on approval will be accompanied by the Warden.
d. Requests for a transfer to another room are to be forwarded through the
Warden’s office.
15. Laundry
a. Washers and dryers are located in the hostel. The Laundry room will be closed
by 11:00 p.m.
16. Furniture
a. Students are strictly forbidden from removing any of their room furniture.
b. Hostel students are required to obtain special approval from the hostel in-
charge to bring own furniture.
17. Storage
a. Storage rooms are NOT available in hostels.
b. Students need to clear their belongings on leaving the hostel. The belongings
will be moved outside once the student leaves the hostel.
c. Institution will not be responsible for student’s belongings once the student
leaves the hostel.
18. Medical Facilities
a. Students should report any injury or illness immediately to the Warden
without delay so that necessary medical attention could be arranged.
b. All GMU students are eligible for medical treatment in GMC hospital. Students
are required to present the Student ID as identification document to register
for medical treatment.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 48 | P a g e
19. Student responsibilities
a. Students must take care of their personal belongings and the management
will not be responsible for any loss or damage. On leaving the hostel, student
is required to clear all her / his belongings.
b. Students must maintain cleanliness and discipline in the hostel. All property
and fittings should be handled with care. If a student is found to be
responsible for any damages, the cost of repair / replacement will be
recovered from the student.
c. Students are required to abide by the advice and decisions of the Warden on
all matters pertaining to life in the hostels.
d. Students are required to abide by any other rules or regulations, which the
Dean, the Supervisor or the Warden may feel necessary to introduce from
time to time.
e. Students are required to submit the No Objection letter from parent and fill
up the out-pass /clearance form when staying outside or when vacating the
hostel.
f. Students are required to submit the clearance form to the office of the
Warden before vacating the room and submit a copy to the accounts
department for refund of deposit.
20. Actions Prohibited
a. Student should NOT break the curfew timings.
b. Student should NOT write on walls, lifts, doors of the hostel.
c. Student should NOT bring in any pets (cat, puppy, bird etc.) into the hostel.
d. Student should NOT remove furniture, or install personal locks for rooms.
e. Student should NOT insert / fix holes or hooks in walls, floors or ceiling.
f. Student should NOT refuse to follow the instructions from the Warden or
security personnel who is only performing his/her duties.
g. Students are NOT allowed to decorate the exterior of rooms, corridors or
other common areas.
h. Student should NOT shout or create disturbances for any residential room.
i. Student should NOT drop or throw any solid object or liquid from windows.
j. Student should NOT harass or verbally abuse any resident or staff member
living in the hostel.
k. Student should NOT host overnight guest / parent without obtaining prior
approval from the Office of student affairs / Hostel In-charge.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 49 | P a g e
Following actions are taken for those who break the rules of the hostel
i. First warning with letter issued to student.
ii. Second and final warning with letter issued and copy to parents and the respective
College Dean
iii. Third – student penalized / expelled from the accommodation.
Any breach of the above rules by the inmates may result in their, being deprived of the
privilege of occupying the room besides rendering themselves liable to pay such damages,
as may be claimed by the authorities. Also there will be NO refund of fees in the event of
denial of hostel accommodation on grounds of misconduct (academic or personal).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I have read and understood the above rules and regulations of the hostel and will follow
the same.
_________________ ______________________ _________
Student’s Signature Parent’s Signature: Date:
21. Whom to Contact in an Emergency
Dr. Joshua Ashok
Associate Dean,
Student Affairs
Tel : 06- 743
1333 Ext: 317
Mobile: 050-7447921
Mrs. Sherly Ajay Ladies Hostel In-charge
Tel : 06-7431333
Ext:384
Mobile: 050-7276958
Mr. Subish
Manager, General
Services
Tel : 06-743
1333 Ext: 219
Mobile: 050-7467155
Mrs. Daisy
Thomas
Warden, GMU Ajman
Girls Hostel
Tel: 06-7464881 Mobile: 050-5103981
Mrs. Zubaida
Warden, GMU Ajman
New Girls Hostel
Tel: 06-7496255 Mobile: 050 - 3649007
7.15 Transportation
Bus facilities, to commute from residences to GMU and other clinical locations, are available
to the hostel students free of cost. Day scholars are provided transport on request and on
payment of stipulated fees. Students requiring transport facilities should contact the
Transport Department for all transport needs.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 50 | P a g e
7.16 Telephone
Prepaid telephone booths are located in the central hall.
7.17 Class Room & Laboratory Protocol
Separate entrances are designated for men and women students in the Lecture Halls and
Laboratories. Students are strictly advised to follow these.
 Attendance will not be granted to late comers to lectures and practical.
 Students are not allowed to bring food and drinks into the lecture rooms and
laboratories.
 Lab coats must be worn only during laboratory work, ambulatory and bedside teaching
activities.
 Students should use equipment and property of the institution with care and should not
indulge in destruction or damage to any of the equipment & property. If a student is
found to be responsible for any such damage, the repair / replacement cost for the same
shall be recovered from the student.
 Students who require audio visual equipment for presentations should organize this with
the help of the Administrative Assistant for Student Affairs. Students should fill in the
request form for this and hand over the same at least 3 days before their presentation.
 Visitors are not permitted to attend lectures and laboratories except with the prior
written approval of the Dean.
 Students should leave the lecture halls as soon as the lectures are over. Lingering on in
the hall alone or in groups is not permitted. Lecture halls will be locked soon after the
lectures are over and will be opened only 15 minutes before the commencement of
lectures.
7.18 Student Identification
 All students are required to submit passport size photos to be fixed on their ID cards.
 The Student ID must be worn at all times and must be presented on demand in the
campus, clinical sites and examinations.
 Loss of ID cards must be reported to the Dean’s office and replacement card can be
obtained after payment of AED 25.
7.19 University Entrance
Separate entrances are designated for men and women students. These should be strictly
adhered to. Parents, relatives and friends who drop the students in the college and drive
them back are requested to respect this and drop or collect the students only from the
designated areas. Students are not allowed to walk through the main foyer doors or sit in
the entrance area. This area is meant for guests and visitors to the college.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 51 | P a g e
7.20 Car Parking in the Campus
 Cars should be parked in the allocated positions for men and women students separately
in an orderly manner. Only cars belonging to the President, Trustees and other visiting
dignitaries are allowed to be parked in the main portico area. The College administration
reserves the right to tow away any vehicle, which has been parked in an unauthorized
manner or place.
 Dangerous driving practices, creating inconvenience or risk to others and damage to
property within the college campus are punishable offences.
7.21 Information on Safety Issues
GMU adheres to and adopts the guidelines on safety issues, which covers safety aspects
under the categories- Laboratory and Chemical safety. Excerpt from the University
Laboratory Safety Manual is provided.
Laboratory Safety
1. General
1.1 Take care not to run around in the laboratories unless a situation [e.g. Emergency]
warrants the same.
1.2 Laboratory dress code:
 Laboratory coat must be worn while pursuing laboratory work but be removed while
visiting a non-laboratory environment, e.g. office, canteen, toilet, and computer
room.
 No smoking is permitted at any time in or near the laboratory.
 Long-sleeved laboratory coats must be worn to protect against chemical spills and
prevent exposure to radiation and UV light.
 Latex gloves must be worn when handling toxic chemicals and, bacteria. However,
do not use such gloves in the course of simple chores like opening doors, answering
telephones, at the keyboard, to cite some examples.
 Safety goggles or spectacles must be worn while working with hazardous chemicals
or radioactive materials.
 Use the face-mask when using the UV trans-illuminator.
 Mandatory use of close footwear [E.g. No open-toed shoes, sandals and slippers]
when working in the laboratory and while handling also working hazardous chemicals
or radioactive materials.
 Long hair or loose clothing must be secured before commencing work to avoid the
possibility of their entanglement in equipment, or contact with chemicals or
possibility of a fire accident.
 Wearing a Walkman/radio head phone while working is prohibited.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 52 | P a g e
1.3 Waste disposal:
 Appropriate bag must be used to dispose hazardous and non-hazardous waste. The
specially designed safety bag must only be used for disposal of hazardous waste and
not for non-hazardous waste disposal. Non-hazardous waste can be disposed in the
general household garbage bag.
 Broken glass and needles must be disposed in a sharps bin or plastic container.
 Acid, organic solvent, and radioactive waste must be disposed in the designated
bottles or containers (see Chemistry and Radiation Safety for detail).
2. Electrical outlet usage:
 To avoid power overloading, ideally, one electrical outlet must be connected only
to one equipment
 If the outlet is used for more than one connection, the adaptor with the Singapore
Productivity and Standard Board (PSB) logo (i.e. PSB approved adaptors) must be
used.
Chemical Safety
1. General
 Working alone with hazardous chemicals (particularly after office hours) must be
discouraged in all laboratories involved in such experimental work.
2. Chemical Storage
 The general properties and storage characteristics of each chemical must be
indicated by a colored sticker on the chemical containers. The suggested color
codes are:
a. RED: Flammable
b. WHITE: Corrosive
c. YELLOW: Reactive
d. BLUE: Health risk (carcinogen, mutagen, etc.)
e. GRAY: General chemical storage
f. RED 'S': To be stored separately from chemicals of similar code
 Chemicals must not be stored on the floor or on top of shelves. The storage shelf
must have the rails to prevent the fall off.
Organic and inorganic chemicals must be stored in different cabinets.
 Organic solvents must be stored in resistant containers, e.g. glass or teflon. The
cap must be resistant to the solvent and screwed on tight. Solvents are stored
primarily in a metal cupboard or sometimes in a fume hood.
 There must be no open flame near organic solvents, nor must they be kept near
heat.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 53 | P a g e
 Concentrated nitric acid must be stored in designated cabinet.
 Poisons must be stored in designated and locked cabinet.
 Corrosive chemicals must be placed in a location below eye level, e.g. in bottom
shelves of a cabinet or under the sink.
 Cabinet shelves must not be overloaded.
 Upper shelves must not be heavier than lower shelves.
 All shelves must be protected with chemical-resistant, non-absorbent, easy-
cleaning trays with anti-roll lips.
 All chemicals must be placed on these trays and not directly onto the metal surface
of the shelves.
 All cabinets must be kept closed at all times other than during depositing or
withdrawal of chemicals.
 All cabinets must be placed on floor and must be stable.
 Labels indicating the contents of each cabinet must be displayed on the outside of
the cabinet.
 A fire extinguisher must be located near the exit and not near the chemical
cabinets. In the event of an explosion, a fire extinguisher near the explosion area
might be rendered inaccessible or damaged.
 The appropriate type of fire extinguisher, i.e. Class B extinguisher such as carbon
dioxide or foam, to deal with chemical fire must be used. Everyone in the lab must
know to use the fire extinguisher.
 Spill control kits to handle spillage of flammable chemicals, must be available.
 First aid kits must be available and they must be equipped to deal with accidental
ingestion, spillage, etc.
 Periodic checks must be made of the chemical stores in order to ensure that the
conditions of the containers are satisfactory. These include but are not restricted
to:
 The physical state of the primary and secondary containers
 The state of the seals of these containers
 The cleanliness of the containers (salt deposits indicating leakage, etc.).
 The presence of moisture in the bottle or any other form of precipitation and /
or caking.
 Adequate ventilation must be available.
 Bottles of toxic chemicals, once opened, must be tightly recapped, sealed and
placed in a fume hood.
 Chemical bottles / containers in constant use must be placed in chemical-resistant,
non-absorbent, easy-cleaning trays.
 Gas cylinders, hoses and regulators must occasionally be checked for wear and
tear, leaks and functionality. A simple soap-bubble test can be done to check for
leaks.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 54 | P a g e
 All gas cylinders must be secured with chains.
 Empty gas cylinders must not be stored with full cylinders. In the event of a
mistake, empty gas cylinders can cause serious-suck back effect when connected
to pressurized equipment.
3. Chemical Handling
 All lab workers must be familiar with recommended procedures associated with
the chemicals they are dealing and the relevant hazards. When in doubt the MSDS
must be referred to, for information.
 All work involving aqueous hazardous chemicals must be done in fume hoods.
 All Appropriate protective apparel must be worn when working with hazardous
chemicals. These include but are not limited to gloves, masks, aprons, lab coats,
face shields and goggles.
 Hand towel dispensers must be made available in all labs.
 Appropriate gloves for handling corrosives, hot/cold objects, organic solvents and
other specific chemicals must be available.
 When a process is known to result in chemical fumes, wearing appropriate masks
must be mandatory. Please note that normal surgical masks and dusk masks are
not suitable protection against chemical fumes.
 Spilled mercury (e.g. from broken thermometers) must be picked up using a
pipette and stored in a small, tightly sealed and labeled plastic container in the
fume hood.
 Standard Operational Procedures (SOPs) to deal with emergency situations arising
from radioactive, chemical and bio-hazardous accidents must be clearly
displayed in every lab.
Handling of Gases:
 Make sure that you know how to operate the regulator on a gas cylinder before
using it.
 Gas cylinders must be replaced before they are completely empty. Some positive
pressure must be allowed in the used cylinders.
 Check the gas tubing from time to time.
 Poisonous gases and chemicals that give rise to vapors must be experimented
with only in the fume hood.
 Do not light any flame when you smell a gas leak. Beware of flammable gases,
e.g. oxygen and acetylene.
 If you smell something dangerous, raise the alarm and evacuate the lab
immediately. The source must later be traced and action taken by the
appropriate safety personnel.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 55 | P a g e
While handling Liquid Nitrogen:
 Your hands must be protected by thick pair of heavy duty gloves.
 Lab coat must be worn and legs and feet protected.
 Liquid nitrogen must be kept and transported in Dewar flasks.
 Liquid nitrogen splatters easily when pouring, especially if the glassware or
plastic ware is not pre-chilled before use. Hence special caution ought to be
exercised.
Handling of Phenol:
 Phenol must be handled with appropriate protection and in the fume hood.
 Phenol must be stored in resistant containers made of glass or teflon.
 If ones' skin comes in contact with phenol, it must be rinsed immediately with
lots of water, followed by wash with soap and water.
 Spills must be attended to immediately and not left to dry unattended.
 Stains left by chemical spills must be cleaned up immediately.
 Hand towel dispensers must be made available in all labs.
 Appropriate gloves for handling corrosives, hot / cold objects, organic solvents
and other specific chemicals must be available.
 When a process is known to result in chemical fumes, wearing appropriate masks
must be mandatory. Please note that normal surgical masks and dusk masks are
not suitable protection against chemical fumes.
 Spilled mercury (e.g. from broken thermometers) must be picked up using a
pipette and stored in a small, tightly sealed and labeled plastic container in the
fume hood.
4. General Chemical Disposal
Not all chemicals can be thrown into the drain. Ensure that the chemical is safe for
discharge into the sewer. If not, store in empty reagent bottles or carboys for
processing and disposal by a waste disposal company. As a general guideline, strong
flammable and acute toxic chemicals must not be discharged into the sewer.
 Dilute all chemicals that will be thrown into the sewer.
 Acids and bases must be neutralized properly before discharging into the
sewerage system.
 All gels (excluding those stained with EthidiumBromide) must be disposed into
special plastic bags. These bags, when full, must be double wrapped, secured
properly and thrown with normal rubbish for disposal.
 Commingling of chemical waste in waste storage containers must be kept to
confinement separately.
 Where the above is not possible, aqueous waste must be segregated into the
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 56 | P a g e
following groups:
 Halogenated
 Flammable
 Phenol-chloroform
 Flammable chemical waste must be stored in well-ventilated areas to reduce
accumulation of flammable vapors.
 Solid chemical waste must be securely packaged before disposal into normal
trash where they will eventually be incinerated. An exception to this is solids that
sublime at room temperature and produce toxic gases. In such cases, try to
convert the solids to a stable form and chemically inactivate it.
Organic Solvents:
 Solvents are disposed of in specifically-labeled (name of solvent, your name and
your supervisor’s name) waste bottles in a fume hood. Do not pour them down
the sink. Only very small quantities (< 1 ml) may be flushed down the sink with
lots of water.
 Chloroform and acetone must not be poured into the same bottle as they react
to form an explosive chemical.
 Chemical containers must be tagged with information including chemical name,
description, generator’s name and date of disposal.
 All chemical disposal exercises must be documented.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 57 | P a g e
STUDENT’S RIGHTS
& RESPONSIBILITIES
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 58 | P a g e
8.0 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities
8.1 Student’s Rights
All students must become familiar with the academic policies, curriculum requirements, and
associated deadlines as outlined in the University Catalog. The academic advisor shall advise
the student on all matters related to their program of study and will aid the student in the
interpretation of policies whenever necessary.
However, it shall ultimately be the student’s responsibility to meet all stated requirements
for the degree and the policies related thereof. It is also the student’s responsibility to
actively utilize their campus email and the university web site, observe netiquette, observe
the policies on internet use as published and made available in the Student handbook as it
tends to be a major communication resource and is often the primary form of
communication between students.
Gulf Medical University shall maintain an academic environment in which the freedom to
teach, conduct research, learn, and administer the university is protected. Students will
enjoy maximum benefit from this environment by accepting responsibilities commensurate
with their role in the academic community. The principles found herein are designed to
facilitate communication, foster academic integrity, and defend freedoms of inquiry,
discussion, and expression among members of the university community.
8.1.1 Rights in the Pursuit of Education
Students will have the right:
 To pursue an education free from illegal discrimination and to be judged on the basis
of relevant abilities, qualifications, and performance;
 To fair and impartial academic evaluation and a means of recourse through orderly
procedures to challenge action contrary to such standard;
 To an academic environment conducive to intellectual freedom; and
 To a fair and orderly disciplinary process.
8.1.2 Right to Access Records and Facilities
Students will have the right:
 To access their own personal and education records and to have the university
maintain and protect the confidential status of such records, as required by
appropriate legal authority;
 To have access to accurate information regarding tuition, fees and charges, course
availability, general requirements for establishing and maintaining acceptable
academic standing, and graduation requirements;
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 59 | P a g e
8.1.3 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy & Publication
Students will have the right:
 To free inquiry and expression;
 To organize and join associations to promote their common and lawful interests; and
 To be able to protest on university premises in a manner which does not obstruct or
disrupt teaching, research, administration, or other activities authorized by the
university.
8.1.4 Right to Contribute to University Governance and Curriculum
Students will have the right:
 Through student representatives, to participate in formulating and evaluating
institutional policies.
8.2 Student Responsibilities
Students shall be expected to balance these rights with the responsibility to respect the
learning environment for others and for themselves and to make their best effort to meet
academic challenges undertaken. Students will be responsible for compliance with the
University Code of Conduct.
The standards of professional behavior in the educational setting are related to three
domains:
1. Individual Performance;
2. Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community, others and
3. Support of the ethical principles of the medical profession
Individual performance:
 Demonstrates educational experiences (i.e., exams, clinics, rounds, small group
sessions, appointments at the clinical skills center.
 Adheres to dress code consistent with institutional standards.
 Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community.
 Establishes effective rapport.
 Establishes and maintains appropriate boundaries in all learning situations.
 Respectful at all times to all parties involved.
 Demonstrates humanism in all interactions.
 Respects the diversity of race, gender, religion, sexual orientation, age, disability and
socioeconomic status.
 Resolves conflict in a manner that respects the dignity of every person involved.
 Uses professional language being mindful of the environment.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 60 | P a g e
 Maintains awareness and adapts to differences in individual patients including those
related to culture and medical literacy.
 Supports ethical principles of the medical profession.
 Maintains honesty.
 Contributes to an atmosphere conducive to learning and is committed to advance
scientific knowledge.
 Protects patients’ confidentiality.
8.3 GMU Honor Code
The students of Gulf Medical University Ajman, must recognize that they form an essential
part of the medical profession and society. The ‘Honor Code’ lays emphasis on students’
behavior to meet the expectation of their profession, family and general public. The Honor
Code is administered at the White Coat Ceremony. Students are required to read the pledge
and sign an undertaking to observe all the rules as specified in the code.
8.4 Salient Features of the Honor Code
The code strives to emphasize the importance of ethical behavior and compassion in patient
care. It helps a professional to understand the importance of the power of healing when all
health care professionals work together as a team. It guides students to interact among
their fellow colleagues and mentors. The honor code formally acknowledges a sense of
trust, responsibility and professional behavior among students, staff and faculty.
8.5 Breach of Honor Code
The following acts are considered as violation of the honor code:
1. Illegal, unethical and inappropriate academic conduct or professional behavior with
colleagues and mentors either in college, hospital campus or in any professional
gathering.
2. Failure to maintain confidentiality of a patient.
3. Failure to provide the highest level of patient care.
4. Failure to report any situation where the ‘honor code’ has not been followed or
failure to take appropriate action when the ‘honor code’ has been violated.
8.6 Effects of Committing an ‘Honor Offence’
When a student, member of the administrative staff or faculty commits an offense against
the rules of the honor code, it becomes violation of the ‘code’ and is termed as an Honor
Offense. The matter must be reported to the Dean of GMU. The report would be taken to a
committee formed by student and faculty representatives. Once the person is proved guilty,
the Committee will initiate appropriate action depending on the degree of the offense.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 61 | P a g e
UNIVERSITY RESOURCES
AND SERVICES
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 62 | P a g e
9.0 University Resources & Services
9.1 Introduction
The GMU Information and Learning Centre provide year-round reference and information
services and assists students in the development of effective search strategies. Staff
members at the learning center assist students in identifying new and additional resources,
confirming citations and providing instructions on how to use online databases and search
engines.
9.2 Vision
In carrying out this vision, the library will acquire, manage and link information resources
both physical and virtual and will provide quality instruction to empower users to benefit
from the full potential of the universe of knowledge. The library’s information professionals
and staff will ensure that GMU library aims to meet complex information challenges of the
21st
century for life-long learning and excellence in undergraduate, graduate and
professional studies.
9.3 Mission
The mission of the GMU Information & Learning Centre is to provide resources and
instructional material in support of the evolving curriculum. It also provides leadership in
accessing and using information consistent with the GMU. The GMU Learning Centre is
focusing on maintaining and providing access to the state-of-the-art information technology
to meet the current and changing information needs of the GMU community.
9.4 Library
The library at the GMU campus is located on the first floor of the Information and Learning
Center. Library materials are circulated to faculty members, staff and the students for
periods according to the circulation policy.
9.4.1 Timings:
The library remains open from Sunday through Thursday between 8.00 a.m. to 10.00
p.m. and on Saturday between 8.30 a.m. to 6.00 p.m. (Except on official holidays).
9.4.2 Library Resources
 Books
 E-Books (Access Medicine)
 Journals (Online)
 Journals (Hard copy)
 CDs
 Video Tapes
 Online Databases:
Proquest, Access Medicine, Cochrane, UpToDate, USMLEasy, Micromedex
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 63 | P a g e
9.4.3 Library orientation
During the Library Orientation Program, the library staff will give orientation and
bibliographic instructions to the library users on the following topics:
 Use of various electronic resources
 Resources available in particular subjects of interest
 Library rules and services.
9.4.4 Audio Visuals
The library has the facility for viewing medical video tapes and CD ROMs. A collection
of VHS tapes and CDs on latest medical topics are available.
9.4.5 Scanning and printing
Scanning and printing of learning materials without infringing on the copyright law
are provided in the library.
9.4.6 Photocopy
Photocopy services are provided at a nominal charge of one dirham for 10 pages. The
information and learning center abides by national and international copyright laws
in force.
9.4.7 Journal Article Request Service
The GMU users can get copies of Journal articles from the library on request. For
getting a copy of the article, users have to submit Journal Article request to the
library in the prescribed form. Request form is available in the GMU library website.
The applicant will get a copy of the article within three working days, if it is available
in GMU library.
9.4.8 Cataloguing
The GMU library is following Anglo-American Rules (AACR 2) for Cataloguing and the
National Library of Medicine USA coding for the classification system. The GMU
library using “AutoLib System Software”.
9.4.9 Online Public Access Catalogue (OPAC)
The GMU Library provides Online Public Access Catalogue (OPAC) through the library
website (www.gmu.ac.ae/library). The user can search the catalogue by author, title,
subject, ISBN or key word.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 64 | P a g e
9.4.10 Security Gates
GMU central library has two security gates (3M library security system) for the
protection of library resources. The machine details are shown below:
3M Library Security System: The 3M Library Security System consists of several
components including 3Mt Tattle-Tape, circulation accessories, and detection system.
The key to the effectiveness of the system is protecting the library resources with 3M
Tattle-Tape security strips. Only when all library resources have the 3M detection
system (3M Tattle-Tape security strips) , the illegal exit of the resources can be
monitored
Name & Model of the Security Gate: 3 M Library Security Systems - 2301BP Model.
9.5 Library Policy and Procedures
 Adequate library and learning resources are essential to teaching and learning. The
purpose of the library is to support the academic, research, health service and
continuing education programs of the university by providing students, faculty, and
staff with the information resources and services they need to achieve their
educational objectives.
 The library staff work closely with department chairs, faculty, student and community
patrons in determining needs and which resources to obtain and which services to
offer.
 Gulf Medical University maintains an adequate level of professional librarians and
support staff at the Gulf Medical University Campus and Gulf Medical College Hospital
and Research Center.
 The Gulf Medical University selects and purchases appropriate and sufficient print and
non-print materials, including the lease of information databases suitable for the
instructional needs of the university with the goal of providing access to the maximum
amount of relevant information available within the constraints of the libraries’
budget.
 Gulf Medical University provides automated systems in the following areas: online
public access catalog, circulation, cataloging and acquisitions.
 Gulf Medical University provides bibliographic instruction to the university community
and interested groups, including orientations, personal assistance, computer-assisted
instruction and printed information.
 Gulf Medical University provides hours of service to suit the needs of its learning
community.
 Gulf Medical University maintains and continues to improve the facilities and
equipment for housing and using materials.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 65 | P a g e
 Gulf Medical University evaluates resources and services annually via student surveys,
reviews of holdings by library staff and faculty, comparison with similar institutions,
and direct feedback from all users.
9.6 Library Rules and Regulations:
Students are required to abide by the following code of conduct while using library
resources.
 It is mandatory for the graduate students to possess their own laptop for use in the
university.
 Separate areas have been designated in the library for men and women students. The
reading rooms and computer facilities have been arranged accordingly.
 Students are expected to use the designated reading rooms and computer areas
separately marked for men and women in the library.
 Students who are seen in areas other than those specifically designated for their use
are liable to face disciplinary action. Video library facilities shall be arranged on
separate days for men and women students.
 Students are not allowed to sit on the steps or passages near the library or in other
parts of the University.
 Students are reminded that defacing or stealing library material is classified as
misconduct and is liable to invite censure.
 Personal laptops are allowed into the library; however, other personal items and
handbags may be deposited in the area provided before entering the library. No foods
and drinks are allowed inside the library.
 The students are requested to carry Identity Cards at all times. These are coded and are
required to issue books.
 Books may be issued from the GMU campus only. Books may be reserved using online
services. Books may be issued for limited periods up to 2 weeks at a time. The library in
GMCHRC and other affiliated hospitals do not issue books. Instructions on how to
access subscribed online text books and databases are prominently displayed.
 The library staff is available at all times for locating books, CDs, Videos, Journals and
any other library services (such as inter-library loan, accessing electronic resources,
other cooperative arrangements, orientation, training).
Photocopying class handouts is permitted. However, international laws regarding
image reproduction and copyright law shall be strictly followed.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 66 | P a g e
9.7 Circulation Policy and Procedures
GMU circulation policies are designed to permit prompt and equitable access to library
materials. The staff at circulation service desk is focused on meeting the needs of the library
users.
1) Circulation privileges are accorded to those holding valid GMU identification cards.
The ID must be presented on request in order to use the Library facilities and
services. Cards are not transferable.
2) Two books will be issued for a maximum period of two weeks. This can be renewed
once as long as there is no holding request for the same book.
3) Short loan for reference books will be allowed ranging from one hour to a maximum
of three days.
4) A fine of AED 1.00 per day will be levied for over-due books. If the fine is more than
the cost of latest edition of the book, the user has to pay the cost of the latest
edition of the book including procuring expenses equivalent to 10% of cost of book.
Users cannot borrow further books until due items are returned and penalties paid.
5) The users are not allowed to make any marking / underlining / highlighting in the
library books and journals. They should not indulge in any act that may damage the
books / journals. If any page is torn away or damage caused to any book or journal
the borrower will be asked to pay the penalty one and half times the cost of the book
/ journal and also be referred to the disciplinary committee for further action.
6) In case of loss, users have to replace the latest edition of the new book or pay the
cost of the latest edition of the book including procuring expenses equivalent to 10%
of cost of the book.
7) Reservation may be placed for loaned item.
8) The Library will not issue a “No Due Certificate” until all books are returned and fines
are paid.
9.8 Multimedia Labs
The Computer Center located on the ground floor of the Information and Learning Center of
Gulf Medical University shall provide a basic technological infrastructure for all academic
activities.
The Multimedia Lab includes the provision for networks, intra-GMU links and appropriate
hardware and software for administration and academic needs. The Multimedia Lab shall
ensure that the technological infrastructure is used effectively. For this purpose, among
others, the Center assumes a significant role in user support and training.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 67 | P a g e
9.9 Network Infrastructure
The Local Area Network (LAN) Infrastructure encompasses all academic offices, lecture
halls, laboratories, administrative & faculty offices. The network provides high bandwidth
servicing data, voice & video, and is connected to the Internet through two DSL lines, which
is protected behind a secured firewall & monitored 24 X 7.
The Multimedia Lab is a state-of-the-art data center, which houses the GMU servers, and the
backbone network switches and houses the data and software required for administrative
packages as well as fulfilling other faculty, staff and student uses.
All GMU students shall be provided individual accounts so that they can access the system to
obtain current information on all academic matters, access online learning materials and
tools, use discussion forums and interact with faculty. Users can also use the Web mail to
access their e-mail through the Internet. The video conferencing facilities enable video
meetings and distance learning.
9.10 Wi-Fi Network
All wireless access to university networks shall be authenticated by Information Technology
Security (ITS) approved methods. Staff, students, faculty and visitors at the university can
only access the wireless network using this encrypted network.
9.11 Online Resources
GMU has an online e-learning facility to enhance the learning process and help students
improve their knowledge by offering additional instructional material. It allows students to
access the facility from the campus as well as hostels and residences. The Center focuses on
the creation of an environment where all students will have easy access to information
resources by providing innovative technologies and learning resources.
9.12 Servers & Supports
All the computers within the campus are connected to high end rack servers which itself is
supported by power back up of 3 hours and monitored round the clock. The servers are
installed with antivirus, which is updated regularly, and entry is restricted to authorized
members only.
9.13 IT Training
Appropriate training sessions are being conducted for all students at regular intervals
around the year to update them with latest software and learning tools in the field of
Information Technology.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 68 | P a g e
9.14 Internet Services
The information and learning center provides Internet facilities for all students, faculties’
and staff. Search can be carried out freely by individual users or with the help of librarian.
Users can print their search results or directly e-mail them to any registered accounts.
9.15 Technology support for learning
All the class rooms are equipped with adequate technology support comprising computers,
projectors as learning support needs of our institution with local access port for both faculty
and students. Protected Wi-Fi is available to facilitate usage of portable IT gadgets among
the students and staff within the campus.
9.16 IT Support Team
The Gulf Medical University IT Support Desk (Help Desk) is a technical support team that
provides prompt, knowledgeable, courteous computing support services through the
phone, in person and email. The Help Desk is available to everyone who uses the GMU
Computing Service and is the first point of contact for any technical queries.
One of the tasks of the Help Desk is to help members of the GMU to be more productive
through the use of provided IT facilities.
GMU IT Support Team constantly collects valuable feedback about the services and its
quality in a bid to improve what they offer. The GMU IT Support Team was set up to handle
users' initial calls for technical assistance.
9.17 User accesses and Security
Access to operating systems is controlled by a secure login process which ensures:
 Not displaying any previous login information e.g. username.
 Limiting the number of unsuccessful attempts and locking the account if exceeded.
 The password characters being hidden by symbols.
 Displaying a general warning notice that only authorized users are allowed.
 All access to operating systems is via a unique login id that will be audited and can be
traced back to each individual user.
 All University systems, vulnerable to attack by malware must be protected by
antivirus software wherever possible unless a specific exclusion has been granted
and alternative measures have been taken to provide the same degree of protection.
 Centrally Managed Kaspersky Antivirus 8.0 using Kaspersky Security Center protects
client systems running under Microsoft Windows XP, Vista 7, Windows 7, windows 8
and server systems running under Windows Server 2003, 2008 R2 from all types of
malicious programs. The product was designed specifically for high-performance
corporate servers that experience heavy loads.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 69 | P a g e
9.18 E-Learning at GMU
The GMU e-learning shall have an effective system that caters to self-paced personal
learning through resources available over the Internet.
The Gulf Medical University shall use the Moodle as an open source e-learning platform.
Students shall access the e-learning system at any location of their choice, since the system
is completely online. The University has campus-wide Wi-Fi services to facilitate e-learning
practices. Computers with Internet access have been provided in addition at all clinical
training sites in the library and student common rooms and residence halls.
Students are provided instructions on the proper use of the e-learning medium. Accessing
protected computer accounts or other computer functions, knowingly transmitting
computer viruses and unethical use of GMU access is prohibited.
To be granted the use of a computer account, users have to agree to abide by universal
guidelines on use of the computing and Internet services.
Access to the use of computer facilities is through authorized computer accounts. A
computer account consists of a unique log-in ID and a password. Students are requested to
keep their password secret. To activate the GMU account, the user shall be instructed to go
to the GMU website and follow the instructions.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 70 | P a g e
GMC HOSPITAL & RESEARCH
CENTER (GMCH & RC)
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 71 | P a g e
10.0 GMC Hospital & Research Center (GMCH & RC)
Gulf Medical College Hospital and Research Centre, the first teaching hospital under the
private sector in UAE, became operational in October 2002 by the Thumbay Group. With its
unique approach to healthcare, bringing together the best professional expertise and
infrastructure at affordable prices, the hospital constantly strives to fulfill its motto of
"Healing through knowledge and wisdom”.
10.1 Vision
The vision of the hospital is to be recognized as a leading Academic Healthcare Centre
providing high quality patient centric specialty healthcare services to the community
integrated with medical research and clinical training.
10.2 Mission
The mission of the hospital is to provide ethical patient care focused on patient safety, high
quality care and cost effective services. GMC Hospital and Research Centre is committed to
integrate latest trends in education to produce competent healthcare professionals who are
sensitive to the cultural values of the clients they serve.
GMC Hospital and Research Centre will strive to attain the highest quality and accreditation
standards.
GMC Hospital and Research Centre is committed to promote ethical clinical research that
will enhance outcomes of clinical care.
10.3 Clinical Departments and Services
Being a multi-specialty hospital, it houses the departments of Anesthesiology, Accident &
Emergency, Cardiology, Clinical Nutrition, Dermatology & Venereology, Dentistry, ENT,
Family Medicine, General Surgery, Internal Medicine, Neurology, Nephrology, Obstetrics &
Gynecology, Orthopedics, Ophthalmology, Pediatrics & Neonatology, Physical Therapy,
Psychiatry, Gastroenterology, Radiology and Urology and Critical care units (ICU, CCU and
NICU).
Specialized services include a medical imaging department with state of the art equipment
like spiral CT scan, mammography, ultrasound, color Doppler, ultrasound and radiography.
An advanced laboratory caters to the requirements of all the clinical departments and is
equipped for routine and advanced investigations in biochemistry, clinical pathology,
serology and hormone studies.
Student posted in GMC Hospitals for clinical training is required to:
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 72 | P a g e
10.3.1 Do’s
 Procure the GMCH Student Guide Book.*
 Wear student ID badges at all times in the hospital.
 Follow the dress code as stated in the handbook. (refer section: 9.1 - dress code)
 Maintain punctuality, professionalism and ethical behavior at all times when posted
in the hospital.
 Complete the Orientation program of the hospital which includes Infection control &
Fire safety program.
 Submit the vaccination/screening record for Hepatitis B and C Virus.
 Submit the BLS certification (preferable).
 Submit Arabic certification. (for non-Arab students preferable)
 Submit the completed the Patient safety self-assessment form at the end of each
organ system module.
 Maintain 80% attendance in the clinical and theory subjects.
 Attend the CME/CPD programs of the hospital.
 Follow the hospital rules and regulations.
 Be responsible for their personal belongings, and accountable when posted in the
clinics and wards.
 Report to the Office of Academic Affairs for any clarifications / problems faced.
10.3.2 Don’ts
 NOT to involve in activities that disturbs patient care and safety.
 NOT to use mobile phones in the clinics and wards.
 NOT to access the patient information without prior approval. No entries are to be
made in the patient’s file.
 NOT to take history or examine a patient without consent and approval of both the
patient and the faculty.
 NOT to prescribe medications.
 NOT to favor any patients breaking the rules of the hospital.
 NOT to discuss the patient information in public.
 NOT to do any clinical rotation that was missed without approval of the Academic
Affairs office personnel.
 NOT to loiter in the hospital during nights and other timings out of the training.
 NOT to violate any rules of the hospital.
10.3.3 Violation Warning:
 First violation will lead to an oral warning.
 Second violation will lead to a written warning.
 Third violation will be seen in the Students Welfare Committee for disciplinary actions
which may lead to suspension/discontinuation of the training.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 73 | P a g e
*Note: All students posted in GMCHRC are required to procure the GMCHRC Student Guide
Book which states the rules and regulations of the hospital in detail. Students are required to
submit the signed disclaimer form to the academic affairs’ office after reading the Guide book.
Office of Academic Affairs - Gulf Medical College Hospital and Research Center
Prof. Meenu Cherian
Director – Academic Affairs
Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 107, Speed Dial : 8056
Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan
Assistant Director – Academic Affairs
Contact 06-746 3333 Ext: 107, Speed Dial : 8141
Mrs. Sherly Ajay
Academic Coordinator
Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 106, Speed Dial : 8074
Mr. Celso Viernes
Academic Secretary
Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 377, Speed ial:8089
Ms. Namitha
Academic Secretary
Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 377
Ms. Manjusha Latheesh
Academic Secretary
Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 377
Mr. Abdul Razak
Office assistant
Academic Affairs
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 74 | P a g e
STUDENT FINANCE
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 75 | P a g e
11.0. Student Finance
11.1 Student Finance Policy
The University publishes in the catalog, the student handbook and other publications the
university’s financial policy towards tuition fees and other payments for student services
provided.
All tuition fees shall be deposited before completing the registration process either in cash
or by checks payable to GMU due on the date of registration for new admissions. Students
in University rolls must pay all fees before commencement of the academic year.
Students who are unable to pay the full tuition fees upon registration may pay the tuition
fee in two installments after obtaining approval from the management. The first
installment shall be payable on the date of completion of registration (dated current) and
the second installment shall be paid by a postdated check due four months after the first
payment. A penalty shall be levied on all returned checks. The hostel fees along with a
security deposit shall be paid in full before occupying the room in the hostel.
Payment for other student services shall be levied in addition to tuition fee towards
provision of visa, conduct of examinations, issue of ID and Library cards and reissue of a lost
ID or Library card, Lab coat, convocation, issue of certificates verifying bonafides of the
student, issue of duplicate academic transcripts / course certificate / duplicate hall ticket;
replacement of a lost hostel key and annual rent for lockers provided.
Two or more children of the same family shall be entitled each to a 5% reduction in the
tuition fees provided they are registered in the same academic year. The request shall be
supported by the following documents; an application in person, a copy of the schedules of
the course being attended and a copy of their student IDs. Other details shall be provided
by the Office of Accounts.
The University shall arrange scholarship for students who have secured more than 95%
marks in their final higher secondary examinations and if approved by the sponsoring
agencies.
11.2 Tuition Fees* (Academic Year 2013 – 2014)
MBBS Tuition Fee if Paid Yearly
Tuition Fee if Paid in Two
Installments
Phase – I 100,000 51,500
Phase – II Year 1 95,000 49,000
Phase – II Year 2 95,000 49,000
Phase – III Year 1 95,000 49,000
Phase – III Year 2 95,000 49,000
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 76 | P a g e
* All tuition and other fees are subject to revision by the Gulf Medical University's Board of
Governors in accordance with university requirements. Every year, fees are reviewed and subject to
revision. As and when fees are revised, the new fees will be applicable to all existing and new
students. The amounts shown in this document represent fees as currently approved.
11.3 Hostel Fees
Single AED 19000 + AED 1000 Security deposit
Sharing AED 13000 + AED 1000 Security deposit
11.4 Utilities Service Fees
A Compulsory fee of AED 75 per month will be charged to student account in addition to the
respective room rent.
11.5 Registration Fees
Program Fees
MBBS AED 2,000
11.6 Examination Fees
Program Professional Examination
Supplementary Professional
Examination
Phase - I AED 1,500 AED 1,500
Phase - II AED 3,000* AED 3,000*
Phase - III AED 4,000* AED 4,000*
*-includes IFOM examination fees
11.7 Visa Charges
New AED 1,500*
Renewal AED 1,000*
*- Subject to revision
11.8 Caution Deposit Money
Caution Deposit Money AED 1,500 (Refundable)
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 77 | P a g e
11.9 Fees for Other Services
Type of Service Fees (in AED)
Graduation Fee 1,000
Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance 200 per year
Online Examination 200 per year
Compensatory Clinical Posting 100 per day
Application for joining the GMU 150
Bonafide Letter (To whom it may concern) 100
Duplicate Academic Transcript (Course Certificate) 100
Replacing a lost hostel key / locker key 100
Damage to locker 100
Locker annual rent 30
ID Card /Library Card 25
Replacing a lost ID /Library Card 25
Duplicate hall ticket in place of original 25
11.10 Transportation Fees
Destination One Day One Week One Month Six Month One Year
Ajman AED 30 AED 150 AED 400 AED 2,100 AED 3,300
Sharjah AED 50 AED 200 AED 500 AED 2,700 AED 4,400
Dubai AED 70 AED 250 AED 600 AED 3,300 AED 5,500
11.11 Payment of Fees
Fees must be paid in full before completing the registration process either in cash or by
cheque payable to GMU due on the date of registration for new admissions. Students on
GMU rolls must pay all fees before commencement of each semester. However, for those
unable to pay the tuition fees upon registration in full, fees may be paid in two installments
after approval from the management: the first half is paid on the date of completing the
registration (31 August) and the second half by postdated cheque due four months after
the first payment (31 December). Hostel fees must be paid in full prior to joining the hostel.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 78 | P a g e
11.12 Late Fees and Fines
Late payment fee shall invite a penalty of AED 75 per day and any further delay will attract
further charges. Please note that a penalty of AED 500 is imposed on returned checks and
the returned check will not be handed over to the student unless the penalty is paid in cash.
The department heads in the college and the clinical training sites will mark the student
who has failed to pay the fees in time as ‘absent’ until dues are cleared.
11.13 Financial Aid and Scholarships
Two or more children of the same family are entitled each to a 5% reduction in the fees,
when they are registered for the same or different programs in GMU in the same academic
year. Students are requested to apply in person with the necessary documents. GMU will
assist in obtaining financial aid from charitable agencies or commercial banks for needy
students. Further details in this regard may be obtained from the Office of the Accounts
Department.
11.14 Refund of Fees
In the event a student formally withdraws from the university, a grade of W or WF will be
recorded depending on time of withdrawal. The following refund schedule will apply:
Withdrawal from the University
One week before the first day of classes 100% refund
Before the end of the first week of classes 100% refund
During the second week of classes 50% refund
During the third week of classes 25% refund
During / After the fourth week of classes 0% refund
Students withdrawing from the programs after being admitted to GMU on having
completed the registration process by paying the tuition fees will not be refunded the fees
amount paid by them under any circumstances during or after fourth week.
11.15 Revision of Tuition and other Fees
All tuition and other fees are subject to revision by Gulf Medical University’s Board of
Governors in accordance with University requirements.
Every year, fees are reviewed and subject to revision. As and when fees are revised, the
new fees will be applicable to all enrolled and new students. The amounts shown in this
document represent fees as currently approved.
If a student discontinues the academic program for any reason and rejoins/readmits the
program at a later year shall be governed by the tuition and other fees applicable at the
time of his/her rejoining/readmitting the program.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 79 | P a g e
ACADEMIC POLICIES
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 80 | P a g e
12.0 Academic Policies
12.1 Program Completion Policy
All students are expected to study the program and course details provided in the student
handbook and undergraduate catalog. For any one degree all requirements under the terms
of any catalog in effect at or after their admission must be met. Candidates must satisfy all
university requirements and all requirements established by the program faculty. The
individual programs may have higher standards and / or more restrictive requirements as
compared to the university minimum requirements.
The university mandates the following general degree completion requirements in order for
students to receive their degrees. Each graduate student must:
• Be continuously enrolled in the program from admission to graduation.
• Have satisfied all conditions of his or her admission, such as provisional admission.
• Successfully complete a comprehensive examination or equivalent as determined by
the individual degree program.
• Submit a thesis or research project, if required by the academic program, to the
University that meets the format requirements set forth in the College Thesis
Manual.
The students shall fulfill the requirements of each course as prescribed and published and
made available to the students. The student shall be responsible for attending all the classes
and completing the requirements of the chosen program of study. The course completion
and degree requirements of each program are published in the respective sections of the
undergraduate Catalog.
12.2 Academic Progress Policy
Students are expected to attend all classes as per the schedule notified by each college.
Classroom activities are essential to learning and to the application of knowledge. The
student is responsible for knowing and meeting all course requirements, including tests,
assignments, and class participation as indicated by the course instructor. The schedules
shall be published and prominently displayed on the notice boards in the department and
the general notice board of the college and university. It shall also be uploaded and made
available on the e-platform MYGMU and the LAN available in the multimedia labs.
The responsibility for making up work missed during an absence rests with the student.
Students are encouraged to initiate negotiations with the instructor regarding missed work
as early as possible. If a student is unable to attend class on an exam day, the instructor is to
be notified in advance.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 81 | P a g e
Students must complete all clinical requirements. If a student is unable to attend a
scheduled rotation, the student must notify the instructor prior to the rotation time or at
the earliest possible time. Students are responsible for contacting with instructors for
make-up work. All leaves must be approved by the Dean for further consideration.
All leave applications must be approved by Dean for attendance consideration. The dean’s
office reserves the right to accept or reject medical certificates after scrutiny of its
authenticity.
It is the responsibility of the students to interact with the concerned department to verify
and ensure about their attendance particulars from time to time.
In the case of Clinical rotation, a minimum aggregate of 80% attendance is mandatory for
the student to be permitted to appear for the professional examination. Even when the
reason for absence constitutes approved leave, the minimum aggregate of 80% must be
satisfied by compensatory postings.
Attendance shall be entered daily by the department in the Student Management System.
The comprehensive attendance shall be downloaded and displayed prominently each
month and forwarded to the office of the Dean for information and necessary action.
Deficits in attendance shall be noted and brought to the notice of the students / guardians
to enable the student to improve the situation. Academic advising shall be offered by the
faculty and preceptors to delineate the cause of the learning deficit and help the students
to overcome the contributing problems, if any.
The performance at the departmental / semester examinations shall be closely monitored
to identify students with learning difficulties. Academic advising by the faculty and the
preceptors shall be available at all times to resolve the problem.
The attendance deficits and unsatisfactory performance in the continuous assessments
held by the departments and the college shall be used as parameters to identify students
who are not progressing in the courses.
Students shall be regular and punctual at lectures, demonstrations, seminars, practical,
fieldwork and other academic exercises. They shall be required to attend all the allotted
working periods in each of the prescribed courses.
Leave on medical grounds shall be considered only on the recommendation of the Medical
board constituted by the University for a maximum period of 15 days. The Leave application
must be supported by a Medical Certificate issued by a licensed physician preferably from
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 82 | P a g e
any of the GMU affiliated clinical teaching hospitals. A maximum of 15 days leave on medical
grounds may be approved for compensating attendance deficits at the end of a course.
In the credit bearing programs, a maximum of 7 to 8 days medical leave will be considered
in a semester and a maximum of 15 days for an Academic Year.
Students must provide appropriate documents to support leave of absence for purposes
like renewal of residence permit abroad within one week after return to the University. The
period of absence will not be approved if this regulation is not followed.
Students who miss classes in connection with completion of GMU Visa formalities shall be
required to submit supporting documents indicating the date and time of absence, within
three days of completing the procedure. Such leave shall be approved.
Prolonged Absence: Students are required to inform the Dean’s office in writing in
instances of absence from classes or clinical program exceeding 3 months by giving valid
reasons for the absence. The college reserves the right to remove the names of those
students from the rolls for periods exceeding three months and those who fail to inform in
writing giving valid reasons for the absence.
The admissions committee of the university will review absences with prior information in
writing for up to a period of 1 year, before the student is allowed to rejoin the program. The
admissions committee of the university will not consider the case of any student for
rejoining the program if the period of absence exceeds 18 months.
The prescribed courses shall be completed within the specified time periods.
The progress that a student makes in achieving the goals and objectives of the curriculum
are to be regularly evaluated.
Formative Assessment shall be a continuous process carried throughout the academic
period and consists of weekly or end of the topic quizzes, tutorials, computer based tests
and small group discussions.
12.3 Grading, Assessment and Progression Policy
Refer Section: 16.0
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 83 | P a g e
12.4 Online Examination (Exam Soft)
GMU has entered into a license agreement with the Exam Soft Worldwide Inc. USA for
usage of their software for item banking, exam delivery, result scoring and item analysis.
From the AY 2012-13 onwards the mid semester, end semester examinations for the
academic programs wherever applicable shall have online examination of MCQs using exam
soft application.
The students are hereby notified that the online examination will be conducted in the
Testing Center halls I, II & III and in the Multi Media labs. The schedule of the examination for
each program with the details of venue, date & time will be notified by the examination
department.
12.5 International Foundations of Medicine (IFOM) I & II Examination
As per the direction from Commission for Academic Accreditation (CAA), Ministry of Higher
Education & Scientific Research (MOHE&SR), GMU has decided to implement the IFOM
examination (I & II) from the academic year 2013 – 2014 onwards. IFOM examination is used
for the purpose of external benchmarking of students performance in the MBBS program at
the end of Phase II and Phase III. The scores obtained in this examination will be
incorporated into the summative assessments.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 84 | P a g e
MISCONDUCT & DISCIPLINARY
PROCEDURES
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 85 | P a g e
13.0 Misconduct and Disciplinary Procedures
13.1 Student Misconduct & Disciplinary Procedures
13.1.1 Academic Misconduct
The college may discipline a student for academic misconduct, which is defined as any
activity that tends to undermine the academic integrity of the institution and undermine the
educational process. Academic misconduct includes, but is not limited to the following:
a. Cheating
A student must not use or attempt to use unauthorized assistance, materials, information,
or study aids in any academic exercise, including, but not limited to:
 External assistance in professional or any “in class” examination. This prohibition
includes use of books, notes, mobiles, student’s cross talk, etc.
 Use of another person as a substitute in the examination.
 Stealing examination or other source material.
 Use of any unauthorized assistance in a laboratory, or on fieldwork.
 Altering the marks in any way.
 Claiming as his / her own work done by others or the work completed in collaboration
with others.
b. Fabrication
A student must not falsify or invent any information or data in an academic work, including
records or reports, laboratory results, etc.
c. Plagiarism and Copyright Violation
Gulf Medical University takes strong exception to plagiarism and copyright violation by
students, faculty or support staff.
Plagiarism
Plagiarism is using the ideas created and words written by others as one’s own, and without
indicating the source.
Plagiarism encompasses ideas, opinions or theories, facts, statistics, graphs, drawings,
images, photographs, videos, movies, music and other similar intellectual property, with the
exception of information that is categorized under “common knowledge”.
Plagiarism includes:
• Turning in someone else’s work as your own
• Copying ideas from someone else without giving credit
• Failing to put a quotation in quotation marks
• Giving incorrect information about the source of a quotation
• Changing words but copying the sentence structure of a source without giving credit
• Copying so many words or ideas from a source to make up the majority of your work.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 86 | P a g e
Students are reminded that ideas written by researchers or other authorities or the content
appearing in text books, recommended readings or journals need to be paraphrased before
they could be included in your project work, assignment reports, posters or manuscripts.
Paraphrasing involves reading the original text, understanding the meaning and then
presenting the information in your own words: maintaining the original sentence structure
with a few words changed in places is not acceptable paraphrasing.
Copyright Violation
Intellectual property such as, graphs, essays, poems, drawings, images, photographs,
videos, movies, music, statistics and other similar creations automatically become copyright
the day they are made public by the author. Unless the copyright owner has specifically
mentioned that the items are copyright free, using any of these in students’ own
compositions is a copyright violation. The exception to this stipulation is when the user is
covered under “fair use”, which is the limited use of copyright material for research,
scholarship and teaching. In such case the need for obtaining permission from the copyright
owner does not arise.
Preventing Plagiarism
Gulf Medical University requires the students to submit their projects, reports, assignments
and manuscripts prepared as electronic files through the portal that is made available
through the IT Department. While allowing the student to submit the document
instantaneously, the software also checks the document for plagiarism. When detected, the
percentage of similarity and the site where the original document had appeared will be
indicated. As headings of sections and references in the document may be similar to those
that appear in other texts, a 15-20% of similarity is taken as falling within the acceptable limit,
and is not considered as plagiarism.
Deciding on the percentage of plagiarism allowable is empirical, contingent solely upon
evaluator’s discretion. The distinction between what is fair use and what is infringement in a
particular case will not always be clear or easily defined. There is no specific number of
words, lines, or notes that may safely be taken without permission. Acknowledging the
source of the copyrighted material does not substitute for obtaining permission.
The extent of plagiarism is only relevant in determining the form and level of sanction.
Consequences of Plagiarism:
Plagiarism is considered an act of academic misconduct. Plagiarism of any sort or any degree
is not condoned under any circumstances, and students convicted of plagiarism after due
procedures are liable to punitive action by the university authorities.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 87 | P a g e
Academic Misconduct Procedures
(A) Initiation of Proceedings
When a student in a course commits an act of academic misconduct like plagiarism, the
faculty member who has detected the misconduct has the authority to initiate academic
misconduct proceedings against the student. Before this, the faculty is required to hold an
informal meeting with the student concerning the matter. If the faculty member affirms that
the student did commit the act of misconduct as alleged, then at the conclusion of the
informal meeting, the faculty member is required to report the matter to the Student
Welfare Committee in writing.
Upon reviewing the complaint and after enquiry & verification, the committee will forward
the report to the College Council presided over by the Dean. On the consensus reached by
the Council, the Dean has the discretion to decide whether disciplinary proceedings should
be instituted.
A disciplinary proceeding is initiated by the Dean sending a notice to the student who is the
subject of the complaint. The notice sent is to inform the student that charges are pending
and that a hearing has been scheduled. It shall inform the student of the reported
circumstances of the allegedly wrongful conduct.
It also specifies that if the student fails to appear for the meeting, the Dean may re-schedule
the meeting.
The notice shall inform the student that the college council may impose straight -away any
of the below mentioned disciplinary penalties, if it is reasonably believed the failure of non-
appearance is to be without good cause or weigh this as a negative factor in future appeals.
(B) Disposition
When the student appears as required, the Dean shall inform the student as fully as possible
of the facts alleged.
If, after discussion and such further investigation as may be necessary, the Dean determines
that the violation occurred, as alleged, the Dean shall so notify the student and may impose
any one or a combination of the below mentioned sanctions for facts of academic
misconduct. If the student fails to adhere to the sanctions imposed, the student may be
subjected to additional sanctions, including suspension or expulsion. The sanctions include
lowered or failing grade on the particular assignment or the possibility of an additional
administrative sanction, (like the under mentioned) in case the academic misconduct
extends to other deeds
a. A failing grade on the examination, paper, research or creative project;
b. A specified reduction in the course grade;
c. Non-inclusion of scores earned in continuous assessment; and
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 88 | P a g e
d. Multiple Sanctions: More than one of the sanctions listed above may be imposed for
any single violation;
Reprimand and warning - An undertaking is signed by the student not to repeat the offence.
The student may face suspension if she / he engages in the same misconduct again or
commits any other violation.
Suspension - A student may be prohibited from participating in all aspects of college life for
a specified period of time.
The student may appeal against the decision of the Dean to the Provost. The appeal for the
latter decision rests with the discretion of the Provost.
Appeal to and Action by the Provost
The Provost shall inquire into the facts of the appeal and shall discuss the matter individually
with the student, the faculty member, the Dean and make a decision concerning the merits
of the appeal. The Provost may affirm the original decision concerning the disciplinary
sanction to be imposed, reverse the original decision and direct that the complaint be
dismissed; impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation.
The student may appeal against the decision of the Provost to the President. The appeal for
the latter decision rests with the discretion of the President.
Appeal to and Action by the President
The President shall inquire into the facts of the appeal and shall discuss the matter
individually with the student, the faculty member, the Dean, the Provost and make a
decision concerning the merits of the appeal. He may affirm the original decision concerning
the disciplinary sanction to be imposed, reverse the original decision and direct that the
complaint be dismissed; impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation.
13.1.2 Personal Misconduct
13.1.2.1 Personal Misconduct on University Premises
The college may discipline a student for the following acts of personal misconduct, which
occur on college property and its allied teaching sites:
 False accusation of misconduct, forgery, alteration of college document (record,
identification).
 Making a false report on emergency / catastrophe.
 Lewd, indecent or obscene conduct, gesture/s and /or remark/s.
 Disorderly conduct, which interferes with teaching or any other college activity.
 Failure to comply with the directions of authorized college officials.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 89 | P a g e
 Unauthorized possession of college and others' property.
 Physical damage to university related or others' property.
The Committee will place the facts of the case before the College Council, presided over by
the Dean and a decision on the nature of act, and sanction to be imposed is taken. The
nature of the act and the sanction to be imposed is reviewed by the college council,
presided over by the Dean, taking into consideration the following:
(i) Previous act/s of misconduct.
(ii) Record of repeated act/s of misconduct.
13.1.2.2 Personal Misconduct Outside University Premises
The college may discipline a student for acts of personal misconduct that are not committed
on college property, if the acts arise from activities that are being conducted off the campus,
or if the misconduct undermines the security of the GMU community or the integrity of the
educational process.
PERSONAL MISCONDUCT PROCEDURES
(A) Initiation of Proceedings
A report that a student has committed an act of personal misconduct may be filed by any
person; it must be submitted in writing to the Student Welfare Committee.
After reviewing a complaint, after enquiry & verification, the committee will forward the
report to the College Council, presided over by the Dean. On the consensus reached by the
Council, the Dean has the discretion to decide whether disciplinary proceedings should be
instituted.
A disciplinary proceeding is initiated by the Dean sending a notice to the student who is the
subject of the complaint. The notice sent is to inform the student that charges are pending
and that a hearing has been scheduled. It shall inform the student of the reported
circumstances of the allegedly wrongful conduct.
It also specifies that if the student fails to appear for the conference, the Dean may re-
schedule the meeting.
The notice shall inform the student that the college council may impose straight -away any
of the below mentioned disciplinary penalties, if it is reasonably believed the failure of non-
appearance is to be without good cause or weigh this as a negative factor in future appeals.
(B) Disposition
When the student appears as required, the Dean shall inform the student as fully as
possible of the facts alleged.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 90 | P a g e
The student is given a fair opportunity to explain her / his position / views regarding the
allegations leveled against her / him.
If, after discussion and such further investigation as may be necessary, the Dean
determines that the violation occurred, as alleged, the Dean shall so notify the student and
may impose any one or a combination of the below mentioned sanctions for facts of
personal misconduct. If the student fails to adhere to the sanctions imposed, the student
may be subjected to additional sanctions, including suspension or expulsion. The student
may appeal against the decision of the Dean of the college to the Provost of the university.
The sanctions include:
Reprimand and warning - That the student may receive additional sanction/s if the student
engages in the same misconduct again or commits any other violation/s.
Disciplinary probation is for a specified period of time under conditions specified by the
Dean. As a condition of probation, the student may be required to participate in a specific
program, such as a counseling program, a program designed, to stimulate good citizenship
within the college community, or any other activity which would foster civic participation.
Restitution - A student may be required to pay the cost for the replacement or repair of any
property damaged by the student.
Expulsion from University Hostel - A student may be expelled from university hostel and
the student's contract for university hostel may be rescinded.
Suspension - A student may be suspended / debarred from participating in all aspects of
college life for a specified period of time.
Expulsion - A student may be expelled from the university permanently. Furthermore, the
student may not thereafter petition for readmission to the university.
(C) Appeal to and Action by the Provost
The student may appeal against the decision of the Dean of the college to the Provost of the
university, who may take any of the following actions:
 Affirm the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of
misconduct.
 Affirm the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed.
 Reverse the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of
misconduct and direct that the complaint be dismissed.
 Set aside the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed
and impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 91 | P a g e
(D) Appeal to and action by the President
The student may appeal against the decision of the Provost to the President of the
university, who may take any of the following actions:
 Affirm the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of
misconduct.
 Affirm the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed.
 Reverse the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of
misconduct and direct that the complaint be dismissed.
 Set aside the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed
and impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation.
Repeated Misconduct Procedure (Personal)
In cases of repeated personal misconduct by a student, the student welfare committee will
study the advice, recommendation/s and instruction/s imparted by the committee against
the student on previous occasions. Serious warnings or disciplinary proceedings against the
student by the student welfare committee on earlier occasions constitute enough grounds
for the committee to recommend dismissal of the student with immediate effect if the
present episode of misconduct warrants such action.
Procedures for Handling Misconduct by Student Organizations
Academic misconduct proceedings and disciplinary proceedings against individual members
of a student organization are governed by the procedures otherwise applicable to students
alleged to have committed acts of academic misconduct.
GMU procedures for imposing academic and disciplinary sanctions are designed to provide
students with the guarantees of due process and procedural fairness, to ensure equal
protection for all students, and to provide for the imposition of similar sanctions for similar
acts of misconduct.
13.2 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities
13.2.1 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities Policy
The student must become familiar with the academic policies, curriculum requirements, and
associated deadlines as outlined in the undergraduate catalog. The academic advisor shall
advise the student on all matters related to their program of study and will aid the student in
the interpretation of policies whenever necessary.
However, it shall ultimately be the student's responsibility to meet all stated requirements
for the degree and the policies related thereof. It is also the student's responsibility to
actively utilize their campus email and the university web site, observe netiquette, observe
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 92 | P a g e
the policies on internet use as published and made available in the Student handbook as it
tends to be a major communication resource and is often the primary form of
communication between students.
Gulf Medical University shall maintain an academic environment in which the freedom to
teach, conduct research, learn, and administer the university is protected. Students will
enjoy maximum benefit from this environment by accepting responsibilities commensurate
with their role in the academic community. The principles found herein are designed to
facilitate communication, foster academic integrity, and defend freedoms of inquiry,
discussion, and expression among members of the university community.
13.2.2 Rights in the Pursuit of Education
Students will have the right:
 To pursue an education free from illegal discrimination and to be judged on the basis of
relevant abilities, qualifications, and performance;
 To fair and impartial academic evaluation and a means of recourse through orderly
procedures to challenge action contrary to such standard;
 To an academic environment conducive to intellectual freedom; and
 To a fair and orderly disciplinary process.
13.2.3 Right to Access Records and Facilities
Students will have the right:
 To access their own personnel and education records and to have the university
maintain and protect the confidential status of such records, as required by
appropriate legal authority;
 To have access to accurate information regarding tuition, fees and charges, course
availability, general requirements for establishing and maintaining acceptable
academic standing, and graduation requirements.
13.2.4 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy, and Publication
Students will have the right:
 To free inquiry and expression;
 To organize and join associations to promote their common and lawful interests;
 To be able to protest on university premises in a manner which does not obstruct or
disrupt teaching, research, administration, or other activities authorized by the
university;
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 93 | P a g e
13.2.5 Right to Contribute to University Governance and Curriculum
Students will have the right through student representatives, to participate in formulating
and evaluating institutional policies.
13.2.6 Student Responsibilities
Students shall be expected to balance these rights with the responsibility to respect the
learning environment for others and for themselves and to make their best effort to meet
academic challenges undertaken. Students will be responsible for compliance with the
University Code of Conduct.
The standards of professional behavior in the educational setting are related to three
domains:
1) Individual Performance;
2) Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community, others; and
3) Support of the ethical principles of the medical profession, as expanded below:
Individual performance:
 Demonstrates educational experiences (i.e., exams, clinics, rounds, small group
sessions, appointments at the clinical skills center).
 Adheres to dress code consistent with institutional standards.
 Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community.
 Establishes effective rapport.
 Establishes and maintains appropriate boundaries in all learning situations.
 Respectful at all times of all parties involved.
 Demonstrates humanism in all interactions.
 Respects the diversity of race, gender, religion, sexual orientation, age, disability
and socioeconomic status.
 Resolves conflict in a manner that respects the dignity of every person involved.
 Uses professional language being mindful of the environment.
 Maintains awareness and adapts to differences in individual patients.
 Including those related to culture and medical literacy.
 Supports ethical principles of the medical profession.
 Maintains honesty.
 Contributes to an atmosphere conducive to learning and is committed to advance
scientific knowledge.
 Protects patient’s confidentiality.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 94 | P a g e
COLLEGE OF MEDICINE
(CoM)
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 95 | P a g e
14.0 The Integrated MBBS Program
14.1 Goals
1. The graduate will acquire and understand scientific principles of medical knowledge
at the molecular, cellular, organ, whole body and environmental levels of health and
disease. He should be able to apply the current understanding and recent advances
in contemporary basic sciences to promote health, prevent, diagnose and manage
the common health problems of individuals (at different stages of life), families and
communities.
2. The graduate will develop basic clinical skills (interpretive, manipulative, and
procedural) such as the ability to obtain a patient's history, to undertake a
comprehensive physical and mental state examination and interpret the findings, and
to demonstrate competence in the performance of a limited number of basic
technical procedures.
3. The graduates will develop an attitude and practice personal and professional values
necessary for the achievement of high standards of medical practice. This should
enable him to carry out independently the responsibilities of a physician and to
develop further knowledge and skills in order to adapt to the changes in the practice
of medicine throughout his professional career.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 96 | P a g e
14.2 Intended Program Learning Outcomes
Learning
Outcome
Domain
Upon successful completion of the program, the graduate
will be able to:
LO1
Medical
Knowledge
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the key
concepts and principles of biomedical, clinical and
psychosocial sciences and their application in the clinical
context to promote health, and prevent and treat diseases
commonly encountered in the region within the legal and
regulatory framework
LO2
Communication
Skills
Communicate effectively with patients and their families,
colleagues, superiors and members of the public through
written, verbal and electronic means
LO3
Research and
Analytical Skills
Use appropriate statistical tools and research methods to
practice evidence-based medicine, maintain appropriate
documentation and carry out basic research studies
LO4
Professionalism
and Values
Arrive at decisions, take actions and perform assigned duties
paying due attention to cultural diversity, patient
confidentiality and ethical issues; be worthy of trust and
exhibit honesty, fairness, compassion, respect and integrity in
all interactions with patients and their families
LO5 Patient Care
Provide optimum patient care at the level of a basic doctor
through clerking, diagnosing and managing patients,
including performing common emergency and life-saving
procedures, adhering to recommended guidelines and
standard precautions with an awareness of both one's own
limitations and the need to seek the help of an expert when
required in the interests of patient safety
LO6
Leadership and
Teamwork
Function as an effective leader and contribute to the
professional development of peers; be an effective team
member when dealing with peers and superiors in the
discharge of duties and during the process of learning and
appreciate the roles and contributions of colleagues and
other healthcare professionals of the multidisciplinary team
LO7
Personal
Development
Possess qualities of self-evaluation, reflection, self-learning
and time-management skills so that life-long learning could
be undertaken for personal and professional development;
develop critical thinking and problem-solving abilities along
with sufficient personal strengths to cope with the physical
and psychological demands of a career in medicine
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 97 | P a g e
14.3 MBBS Program Structure
Modular System-based Integrated MBBS Curriculum
Phase – I Phase – II Phase - III
Language &
Communication Skills
Blood &
Immune System
P
B
L
BASICCLINICALSKILLS
Endocrine
System
(including
Mammary
Glands)
P
B
L
BASICCLINICALSKILLS
Integumentary
System
MULTISYSTEMMODULES
Blood &
Immune System
CRRI
Psychosocial Sciences
Blood &
Immune System
Cardiovascular
System
Cells, Molecules & Genes
Cardiovascular
System
P
B
L
Reproductive
System
P
B
L
Cardiovascular
System
Respiratory
System
Tissues and Organs
Respiratory
System
Alimentary
System
Respiratory
System
P
B
L
Nervous System
P
B
L
Alimentary
System
Urinary System
Embryogenesis &
Life Cycle
Urinary System
Endocrine
System
(including
Mammary
Glands)
Alimentary
System
P
B
L
Musculo
Skeletal
System
P
B
L
Endocrine
System
(including
Mammary
Glands)
Reproductive
System
Metabolism & Nutrition
Reproductive
System
Nervous System
Urinary System
P
B
L
Integumentary
System
P
B
L
Nervous System
Musculo
Skeletal System
Internal & External
Environment
Musculo
Skeletal System
Integumentary
System
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Year
6
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 98 | P a g e
14.4 Plan of Study
Phase – I (2013 Batch)
Semester Course Duration Weeks
FALLSEMESTER
ORIENTATION Sep 4 , 2013
ORIENTATION MED 101 & MED 102
(Language & Communication Skills)
and (Psychosocial Sciences)
Sep 5 , 2013
MED 101
(Language &
Communication
Skills)
MED 102
(Psychosocial
Sciences)
Sep 8 – 26, 2013
(3 Weeks)
1 - 3
MED 103
(Cells, Molecules & Genes)
Sep 29 – Oct 10, 2013
(2 Weeks)
4 - 5
EID HOLIDAYS
Oct 13 – 17, 2013
(1 Week)
6
MED 103
(Cells, Molecules & Genes)
Oct 20 – Nov 14, 2013
(4 Weeks)
7 - 10
MED 104
(Tissues and Organs)
Nov 17 – Dec 19, 2013
(5 Weeks)
11 - 15
FALL SEMESTER BREAK
Dec 22, 2013 - Jan 2, 2014
(2 Weeks)
16 - 17
MED 104
(Tissues and Organs)
Jan 5 - 9, 2014
(1 Week)
18
MED 105
(Embryogenesis and Life Cycle)
Jan 12 – Feb 6, 2014
(4 Weeks)
19 - 22
STUDY LEAVE
Feb 9 – 13, 2014
(1 Week)
23
SEMESTER I EXAMINATION
Feb 16 – 20, 2014
(1 Week)
24
SPRINGSEMESTER
MED 106
(Metabolism and Nutrition)
Feb 23 – March 27, 2014
(5 Weeks)
25 - 29
SPRING SEMESTER BREAK
March 30 - Apr 10, 2014
(2 Weeks)
30 - 31
MED 106
(Metabolism and Nutrition)
Apr 13 - 17, 2014
(1 Week)
32
MED 107
(Internal and External Environment)
Apr 20 - June 19, 2014
(9 Weeks)
33 - 41
STUDY LEAVE
June 22 - 26, 2014
(1 Week)
42
SEMESTER II EXAMINATION
Jun 29 - July 3, 2014
(1 Week)
43
STUDY LEAVE
July 6 - July 17, 2014
(2 Weeks)
44 - 45
PHASE-I PROFESSIONAL
EXAMINATION
July 20 - 24, 2014
(1 Week)
46
EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 99 | P a g e
Phase – II Year 1 (2012 Batch)
Semester Course Duration Weeks
FALLSEMESTER
ORIENTATION Sep 8, 2013
MED 202
(Blood and Immune System)
Sep 9 – Oct 10, 2013
(5 Weeks)
1 - 5
EID HOLIDAYS
Oct 13 – 17, 2013
(1 Week)
6
MED 202
(Blood and Immune System)
Oct 20 – 24, 2013
(1 Week)
7
MED 203
(Cardiovascular System)
Oct 27 – Dec 19, 2013
(8 Weeks)
8 - 15
FALL SEMESTER BREAK
Dec 22, 2013 - Jan 2, 2014
(2 Weeks)
16 - 17
SEMESTER III EXAMINATION
Jan 5 - 9, 2014
(1 Week)
18
MED 211 & MED 212
(Clinical Block & Research
Methodology)
Jan 12 – Feb 6, 2014
(4 Weeks)
19 - 22
MED 204
(Respiratory System)
Feb 9 – March 20, 2014
(6 Weeks)
23 - 28
SPRINGSEMESTER
MED 212
(Research Methodology)
March 23 - 27, 2014
(1 Week)
29
SPRING SEMESTER BREAK
March 30 - Apr 10, 2014
(2 Weeks)
30 - 31
MED 212
(Research Methodology)
Apr 13 - 17, 2014
(1 Week)
32
MED 205
(Alimentary System)
Apr 20 - June 12, 2014
(8 Weeks)
33 - 40
MED 206
(Urinary System)
June 15 - July 10, 2014
(4 Weeks)
41 - 44
STUDY LEAVE
July 13 - 17, 2014
(1 week)
45
SEMESTER IV EXAMINATION
July 20 - 24, 2014
(1 Week)
46
EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 100 | P a g e
Phase – II Year 2 (2011 Batch)
Semester Course Duration Weeks
FALLSEMESTER
MED 210
(Endocrine System and Mammary
Gland)
Sep 8 – Oct 10, 2013
(5 Weeks)
1 - 5
EID HOLIDAYS
Oct 13 – 17, 2013
(1 Week)
6
(MED 207)
(Reproductive System)
Oct 20 – Dec 5, 2013
(7 Weeks)
7 - 13
MED 211 & 212
(Clinical Block III & Research
Methodology)
Dec 8 - 19, 2013
( 2 Weeks)
14 - 15
FALL SEMESTER BREAK
Dec 22, 2013 – Jan 2, 2014
(2 Weeks)
16 - 17
SEMESTER V EXAMINATION
Jan 5 – 9, 2014
(1 Week)
18
MED 208
(Nervous System)
Jan 12 - March 13, 2014
(9 Weeks)
19 - 27
SPRINGSEMESTER
MED 211 & 212
(Clinical Block IV & Research
Methodology)
March 16 - 27, 2014
(2 Weeks)
28 - 29
SPRING SEMESTER BREAK
March 30, - Apr 10, 2014
(2 Weeks)
30 - 31
MED 209
(Musculoskeletal System)
Apr 13 - May 29, 2014
(7 Weeks)
32 - 38
MED 201
(Integumentary System)
June 1 - 12, 2014
(2 Weeks)
39 - 40
STUDY LEAVE
June 15 - 19, 2014
(1 Week)
41
SEMESTER VI EXAMINATION
June 22 - 26, 2014
(1 Week)
42
STUDY LEAVE
June 29 - July 10, 2014
(2 Weeks)
43 - 44
PHASE II PROFESSIONAL EXAM
July 13 - 17, 2014
(1 Week)
45
ANNOUNCEMENT OF RESULTS
July 20 – 24, 2014
(1 Week)
46
EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 101 | P a g e
Phase – III Year 1 (2010 Batch)
Semester Course Duration Week
FALLSEMESTER
ORIENTATION Sep 4 - 5, 2013
MED 301
(Integumentary System)
Sep 8 – Oct 3, 2013
(4 Weeks)
1 - 4
MED 302
(Blood and Immune System)
Oct 6 - 10, 2013
(1 Week)
5
EID HOLIDAYS
Oct 13 - 17, 2013
(1 Week)
6
MED 302
(Blood and Immune System)
Oct 20 – 31, 2013
(2 Weeks)
7 - 8
MED 304
(Respiratory System)
Nov 3 - 21, 2013
(3 Weeks)
9 - 11
MED 303
(Cardiovascular System)
Nov 24 - Dec 19, 2013
( 4 Weeks)
12 - 15
FALL SEMESTER BREAK
Dec 22, 2013 - Jan 2, 2014
(2 Weeks)
16 - 17
SEMESTER VII EXAMINATION Jan 4, 2014
MED 305
(Alimentary System)
Jan 5 - 30, 2014
(4 Weeks)
18 - 21
SPRINGSEMESTER
MED 306
(Urinary System)
Feb 2 - 20, 2014
(3 Weeks)
22 - 24
MED 310
(Endocrine System)
Feb 23 - March 6, 2014
(2 Weeks)
25 - 26
(MED 307)
(Reproductive System)
March 9 - 27, 2014
(3 Weeks)
27 - 29
SPRING SEMESTER BREAK
March 30- Apr 3, 2014
(1 Week)
30
(MED 307)
(Reproductive System)
Apr 6 - 24, 2014
(3 Weeks)
31 - 33
MED 308
(Nervous System)
Apr 27 - May 29, 2014
(5 Weeks)
34 - 38
MED 309
(Musculoskeletal System)
June 1 -July 10, 2014
(6 Weeks)
39 - 44
STUDY LEAVE
July 13 - 17, 2014
(1 Week)
45
SEMESTER VIII EXAMINATION
July 20 - 24, 2014
(1 Week)
46
EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 102 | P a g e
Phase – III Year 2(2009 Batch)
Semester Course Duration WeekFALLSEMESTER
ORIENTATION Sep 4 - 5, 2013
Clinical Posting 1
Sep 8 – Oct 31, 2013
(8 Weeks)
1 - 8
Clinical Posting 2
Nov 3 – Dec 26, 2013
(8 Weeks)
9 - 16
SEMESTER IX EXAMINATION Dec 28, 2013
Clinical Posting 3
Dec 29, 2013 – Feb 20, 2014
(8 Weeks)
17- 24
SPRINGSEMESTER
Clinical Posting 4
Feb 23 – Apr 17, 2014
(8 Weeks)
25 - 32
Clinical Posting 5
Apr 20 - June 12, 2014
(8 Weeks)
33 - 40
STUDY LEAVE
June 15 - 19, 2014
(1 Week)
41
SEMESTER X EXAMINATION
June 22 - 26, 2014
(1 Week)
42
STUDY LEAVE
June 29 – July 10, 2014
(2 Weeks)
43 - 44
PHASE III PROFESSIONAL EXAM
July 13 - 17, 2014
(1 Week)
45
ANNOUNCEMENT OF RESULTS
July 20 – 24, 2014
(1 Week)
46
EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 103 | P a g e
14.5 Course Descriptions
Phase - I
MED 101: Language & Communication Skills
The course is designed to provide a variety of simulated patient encounter settings to
introduce the basic interpersonal communication processes that help to gain sensitivity to
patient perspectives and to develop a sense of personal awareness, which will help the
student to deal with patients of all ages and both genders in routine and difficult situations
and in the process work effectively as a member of the health care team in real life
encounters. Students will be encouraged to learn medical terminology in common usage
both in English and Arabic to reduce language barriers in an effort to improve their
communication skills.
MED 102: Psychosocial Sciences
This course covers two major themes. Introduction to Behavioral Sciences covers such
topics as psychosocial basis of health, approaches to study of human behavior, methods of
behavioral sciences research, organic basis of behavior and the process of human
development through the life span. Dynamics of Human Behavior helps students to gain
knowledge of the working of the human memory system, consciousnesses and human
behavior, and the principles of learning and reinforcements and its applications. It also
provides students an opportunity to learn the elements of culture and process of
socialization, and their impact on health and illness.
MED 103: Cells, Molecules & Genes
This course introduces the fundamentals of molecular, cellular and genetic processes; the
structure-function relationships of biomolecules with an emphasis on their clinical relevance;
the functions of the biomembranes; and the basic mechanisms of signal transduction. Use of
computer and web-based learning resources in this course serve to promote interactive and
self- directed learning.
MED 104: Tissues & Organs
In this course, the structure and function of the various types of tissues, their organization
to form organs of the different systems in the body are dealt with in an integrated manner
to help in understanding the correlation of structure with function. This will enable the
learner to better correlate the alterations in function due to structural changes in a disease.
Seminars in relevant areas will give the learner an opportunity to develop presentation skills.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 104 | P a g e
MED 105: Embryogenesis & Life Cycle
This course is designed to introduce the normal human development at the various life
stages from conception to old age including embryology, childhood, adolescence, adulthood
and aging in the elderly. The course covers the first few weeks of early human development
from fertilization to formation of the embryo. Students will also learn to appreciate health
as a component of life cycle development.
MED 106: Metabolism & Nutrition
This course deals with the key concepts and principles of nutrition and metabolism that are
necessary for understanding the development of metabolic diseases and the rationale of the
methods employed in their investigations. Opportunities will be provided to work
cooperatively as a member of a group in the preparation and submission of a project when
students will gather and analyze health information in an attempt to identify unhealthy
eating behaviors which increases risk of developing nutritional disorders.
MED 107: Internal & External Environment
This course is the last course in Phase-I of the Integrated Curriculum. This course will help
the students to gain an insight into the challenges human beings face each day of their lives
indoors, at home or at work or outdoors as their bodies are challenged by agents in its
internal and external environments. The student will be introduced to the basic physiological
and pathological responses to the noxious agents at the level of cells, tissues and organs
that in turn is related to the toxicity of the agents which make the difference between
health and disease. The students will realize the magnitude of the preventive measures
made at the level of the individual, the community and globally to achieve the vision of
health for all in the future.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 105 | P a g e
Phase - II
MED 201: Integumentary System
This course has been integrated around the Integumentary System to provide the learner
with a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of
the integumentary system in health and its major deviations in common skin diseases. In
addition, the learner is introduced to the causes, pathogenesis, and pathological basis of
clinical manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing management and
methods of prevention of these disorders.
MED 202: Blood And Immune System
The course presents an overview of the normal structure and functions of the blood and the
immune system and their derangement in disorders of the red cells, leucocytes, platelets
and the lymphoid tissues/organs. The pathophysiology, molecular basis, laboratory findings
and clinical manifestations of anemias, leukemias, and hemorrhagic, thrombotic and
immune disorders will be emphasized through didactics, laboratory exercises and seminars.
Case based discussions through CBL, PBL and settings will encourage development of
problem solving skills.
MED 203: Cardiovascular System
This course has been structured as an integrated study of the human cardiovascular system
and provides instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the human cardiovascular
system. Emphasis is placed on the integration of relevant principles with respect to the
behavior of the normal circulation and its responses to the stress of injury and disease. This
course deals with common cardiovascular disorders, including a study of atherosclerosis,
coronary heart disease and myocardial infarction, hypertension, valvular and congenital
heart disease, infectious heart disease, and heart muscle disorders. Also included is a series
of case presentations dealing with common complications of a variety of cardiac diseases:
cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure and shock. PBL sessions deal with prototype diseases and
provide opportunities to develop problem solving and interpersonal communication skills.
MED 204: Respiratory System
The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal
structure, function and development of human respiratory system using different strategies
and applying the knowledge and skills acquired in understanding the pathophysiology of
various respiratory disorders. The basic principles of management of these disorders with a
focus on disease prevention will be described. The medico legal aspects of specific
respiratory disorders will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology and
management of the lower respiratory tract infections.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 106 | P a g e
MED 205: Alimentary System
The course adopts an integrated organ system- based approach to provide the learner with
a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of the
digestive system and its accessory organs, in health and their major deviations in disease.
Furthermore, the learner is introduced to the aetiopathogenesis, basis of clinical
manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing the pharmacological
management and methods of prevention of common disorders of the digestive system. The
course employs problem based learning (PBL) and a variety of teaching /learning methods to
facilitate interdisciplinary integration, student centered learning and development of
generic competences. Simultaneous introduction of basic clinical skills aims to vertically
integrate learning and prepare the students for clinical clerkship in the next phase.
MED 206: Urinary System
This course has been designed as an integrated study of the urinary system and provides
instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the urinary system. Emphasis is placed on
the integration of relevant principles with respect to the mechanisms of normal excretion
and its responses to health and disease. This course deals with common urinary disorders,
including study of renal failure, glomerular diseases, infections, obstruction and neoplasms
of the urinary tract. Also included is a series of case presentations dealing with common
complications of a variety of urinary tract diseases. PBL courses deal with prototype diseases
and provide opportunities to develop problem-solving skills.
MED 207: Reproductive System
The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal
structure, function and development of the human reproductive system using different
learning strategies to acquire the knowledge and skills required for understanding the
pathophysiology of various reproductive disorders; the rationale for their management
focused on disease prevention. The medico legal aspects of specific disorders will be
studied. The PBL course will deal with the pathophysiology and management of menstrual
disorders.
MED 208: Nervous System
The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal
structure, function and development of the nervous system and the organs of hearing,
vision, taste, smell and touch. The course also serves to introduce the medical students to
individual factors affecting human behavior particularly the micro level psychological
processes such as perception, personality, attitudes, values and motivation. The students
will also have a chance to understand the impact of these factors on the health and well-
being of people in general and on the patient-doctor relationship in specific. The medico
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 107 | P a g e
legal aspects of death will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology, and
management of meningeal infections.
MED 209: Musculoskeletal System
In this course the knowledge of the contribution of the normal structure, function and
development of the bones, joints and muscles in the maintenance of the kinetics of normal
posture and locomotion will help to understand how the physiological and pathological
changes associated with congenital, traumatic, infectious, degenerative, metabolic and
neoplastic musculoskeletal disorders lead to physical disabilities that have a major impact on
the biomechanical function of this organ system particularly following traumatic bone
injuries and degenerative joint disease.
MED 210: Endocrine System & Mammary Gland
This course has been structured to provide an integrated study of the homeostatic
mechanisms regulated by the circulating hormones secreted by the different endocrine
glands. Emphasis has been placed on the normal responses to stress that alter the endocrine
balance and the physiological changes that help to restore homeostasis. This course deals
with common disorders of the hypothalamus and pituitary, thyroid and parathyroid, adrenal,
pancreas that lead to either hyper functioning or hypo functioning metabolic disease states.
The mammary glands have been included as an example of a typical target organ of
hormone action. The PBL course introduces breast diseases, both neoplastic and non-
neoplastic as a prototype of diseases that arises as a complication of .persistent hormonal
imbalance.
MED 211 Clinical Skills Competency Levels I & II
(Introductory Clerkship)
This course is designed to be introduced gradually and progressively and reinforced as
appropriate in each course in the pre-clerkship years in an attempt to vertically integrate the
knowledge of the basic sciences with the practice of the clinical sciences. Communication
skills will be learnt as a prerequisite of general history taking and physical examination to
help elicit the signs and symptoms and is introduced in year one (PHASE I). This will be
followed by a more focused history taking and physical examination as relevant to the
different organ systems in the second and third years (PHASE II). In addition during this
phase, the students will be introduced to the performance of routine technical procedures
related to physical examination to elicit specific diagnostic physical signs. Procedural and
manipulative skills relevant to the organ system under study will be learnt in the safe
environment of the Simulation Lab. Interpretation of results of ECG, laboratory and
radiologic investigations and deviations from the normal will be identified and their
significance will be discussed by a team made up of both clinicians and basic scientists.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 108 | P a g e
These skills will help to develop adequate communication and basic clinical skills in order to
prepare the student to integrate rapidly into the clinical hospital and respond professionally
during real doctor-patient encounters during the clerkship in the fourth and fifth years
(PHASE III) and the final internship year (CRRI)
MED 212 Research - I, II, III
This course is designed to afford the student the opportunity to develop a research proposal
under faculty guidance. The proposal development may involve a literature search,
preliminary experimentation, or a pilot field study. The research would be preliminary but
relevant to the project. The course will be conducted in three parts. In the second year,
Research Methodology is designed to introduce the student to basic concepts and problems
encountered in scientific investigation, including types of data and measurement,
descriptive statistics, inferential statistics, validity, reliability, sampling, hypotheses and
hypothesis testing, literature review and research design. In the third year Research
Protocol Design introduces the student to the scientific development of research protocols
and their key elements. Topics include the differentiation between research design types,
rules for writing protocols, ethical considerations relative to research protocols and the
correct preparation of data collection forms. Upon completion, the student will be able to
identify the primary components of protocols and effectively develop a protocol draft. In
the third year opportunity will be provided for a Research Practicum designed to provide the
student an opportunity to gain practical experience in the design and/or implementation of
research. A student may choose to do a practicum as part of an ongoing faculty research
project or as an independent experience in a community or institutional setting. Selection of
the research topic will depend on individual needs of a student and must be approved by the
student’s academic advisory committee. A faculty member will agree to supervise the
practicum.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 109 | P a g e
Phase - III
MED 301 & 401: Ophthalmology
This course is designed as an introduction to ophthalmology. In addition to attending
didactic sessions, the student will learn to take a good ophthalmic history and perform a
good general eye exam in order to detect common abnormalities of the eye and visual
system. Students will learn to interpret the clinical findings and reach a diagnosis and discuss
their management during case based discussions in the classroom, the outpatient and the
bedside. Students will develop and refine skills in the use of the penlight, ophthalmoscope
and slit lamp and will also have ample opportunity to observe a variety of ophthalmic
surgical procedures, such as sub-conjunctival injection, foreign body removal and
nasolacrimal duct syringing performed in the management of common eye disorders.
MED 302 & 402: Otorhinolaryngology
The didactic lectures provide essential factual information, and the clinical rotations provide
a practical experience. Students will learn to take a relevant history and perform a basic
head and neck exam with equipments available to a primary care practitioner (flashlight,
tongue blade, otoscope) and perform an ear exam by tympanometry and otoscope. The
students will gain increasing experience discussing the clinical findings to reach a diagnosis
of common problems like allergic rhinitis, sinusitis, otitis media, epistaxis, facial fractures,
hearing loss, dizziness, and swallowing disorders and discuss a treatment plan with the
faculty. Students will be able to observe surgical procedures like ear syringing, nasal packing,
tracheostomy, endoscopy and removal of foreign bodies. The student will be able to
perform laryngoscopy and use of tracheostomy tubes on a manikin in the simulation lab.
MED 303 & 403: Medicine and Allied Disciplines
The Medicine clerkship is divided into two rotations one in clerkship year 4 and the other in
year 5. The student will have adequate clinical encounters in both ambulatory and bedside
settings in the outpatient and inpatient departments of the hospital. The student will gain
wide exposure to the medical and conservative management of common acute and chronic
medical disorders. Rotations in allied medical specialties like dermatology and psychiatry will
increase the breadth of the experience to include the management of common skin
disorders and a broad understanding of the human mind and behavior, its normality in
health, abnormality in stress, methods of classifying psychological and psychiatric disorders
and different forms of therapy. It also helps students in gaining an understanding of the
ethical concepts in the field of medicine, the right of patients and the responsibility of health
professionals.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 110 | P a g e
MED 304 & 404: Surgery and Allied Disciplines
The clerkship in Surgery is designed to give the student a broad exposure to the principles of
diagnosis and management of common surgical problems, including surgical emergencies;
the indications and methods for fluid and electrolyte replacement therapy including blood
transfusion, the importance of asepsis, disinfection and sterilization and use of antibiotics,
and lastly, common malignancies and their management and prevention. During the course
of the rotation, the student will be expected to focus on several areas of study, which will
include basic principles of peri-operative management of the patient with a surgical
problem. An awareness of the nature and management of surgical disease is developed by
case oriented small group sessions, rounds and weekly conferences. The surgical experience
will be further widened to include surgical aspects of orthopedics, anesthesia and radiology
Orthopedics includes the principles of recognition and management of common bone and
joint injuries and infections; recognition of congenital and skeletal anomalies for correction
or rehabilitation; importance of metabolic bone diseases, diagnosis of neoplasms affecting
bones; recognition and management of degenerative and rheumatologic diseases of
musculoskeletal system; principles of reconstructive surgery of musculoskeletal system.
Anesthesiology includes principles of the pre-, intra- and post-operative anesthetic
management of the surgical patient with particular emphasis on relief of preoperative
anxiety, intraoperative maintenance of normal oxygenation when normal respiration is
depressed under anesthesia and postoperative pain relief Radiology will include the
identification of normal findings on routine X-rays of chest, abdomen, head and limbs, the
recognition of deviations of normal and their significance in the management of the
underlying disorders.
MED 305 & 405: Obstetrics and Gynecology
In the Obstetrics and Gynecology, the student will gain the skills of gynecologic and
obstetric history taking and physical examination in the outpatient and wards and practical
experience in the delivery room under the close supervision of the staff. The student will
avail these opportunities to reach a diagnosis and discuss the management of gynecologic
and obstetric disorders with the faculty while dealing with patients in the outpatient, the
delivery room, the operation theater and the wards. The performance of procedural skills
like delivering a baby, taking a PAP smear, suturing an episiotomy will be learnt and
practiced in the safe environment of the Simulation Lab. Formal and informal daily teaching
sessions and rounds with the faculty are a part of this clerkship experience.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 111 | P a g e
MED 306 & 406: Pediatrics
The student will learn to obtain clinical history in an age-appropriate and sensitive manner
from a child and or the accompanying adult and conduct a pediatric physical examination
appropriate to the condition and the age of the patient. During presentation of the clinical
findings to the faculty, the student will interpret the clinical findings and available lab results
to suggest a diagnosis and discuss the management of the disease. The student will assess
growth and development and advocate safety measures to prevent injury and disease. Many
case based sessions have been planned to provide alternative clinical experiences. The
simulation lab will allow the learner to practice in a safe environment.
MED 307 & 407: Multisystem Course
This course will deal with themes and topics that cut across all disciplines and involve
multiple organs in a broader perspective. This will enable the learner to see the patient as
whole and appreciate the generalized nature of diseases. Common examples are AIDS,
tuberculosis, hypertension, diabetes mellitus, renal failure, congestive cardiac failure,
sarcoidosis, shock, cirrhosis, trisomies and inborn errors of metabolism. In this course
seminar presentations will be used as the main learning strategy.
INTERNSHIP:
MED 595: Internship
This consists of an on-the-job training for a period of one year wherein the graduate rotates
in different clinical departments on completion of the MBBS program. The graduate gains on
the job experience under the close supervision of his teachers. It also serves to provide
opportunities to attain appropriate higher skill levels as the student has completed the
didactic requirements of the course and is now given opportunities to further improve his
skills and master it before he enters independent practice. The internship experience also
gives an insight into the practice of the chosen profession and is in itself a strong motivating
factor for the learner to continue and pursue higher education and specialize further in the
chosen field of study.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 112 | P a g e
14.6 Clinical Training Sites
Clinical training for the MBBS Program has been arranged at multiple sites:
GMC Hospital and Research Center - This is a 100 bed teaching hospital in Ajman. Students
will receive clinical training here during the first four years including early patient contact
during the first year.
Sheikh Khalifa Bin Zayed Hospital, Ajman - This is a 200 bed MoH Hospital located at Al Jurf
next to GMU. Students will receive clinical training here in the 4th year MBBS and during
internship.
UAQ Hospital, Umm Al Quwain - This is a 180 bed MoH Hospital located in Umm Al Quwain.
Students will receive clinical training here in the 4th year MBBS and during internship.
Mafraq Hospital, Abu Dhabi - This is a 550 bed teaching hospital under the Health Authority,
Abu Dhabi. Students will receive clinical training here in the 5th year MBBS and during
internship.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 113 | P a g e
14.7 Course Outline
Phase - I Courses
Title Language and Communication Skills
Code MED 101
Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I
Duration 3 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Manda Venkatramana
Members Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed, Dr. Erum Khan & Dr. Pankaj Lamba
Participating
departments
Basic and Clinical Science Departments
Pre-requisite None
Co-requisite / s Psychosocial Sciences
Course Description:
The course is designed to provide a variety of simulated patient encounter settings to
introduce the basic interpersonal communication processes that help to gain sensitivity to
patient perspectives and to develop a sense of personal awareness, which will help the
student to deal with patients of all ages and both genders in routine and difficult situations
and in the process work effectively as a member of the health care team in real life
encounters. Students will be encouraged to learn medical terminology in common usage
both in English and Arabic to reduce language barriers in an effort to improve their
communication skills.
Aims:
 Become oriented to the communication tasks of a physician by developing an
appreciation of the interpersonal nature of medical encounters in different clinical
situations.
 Develop basic communication skills and strategies to deal with both routine and
difficult topics and situations encountered in clinical practice.
 Develop basic communication skills and strategies for working with family members,
physician colleagues and other members of the health-care team.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 114 | P a g e
Intended Learning Outcomes
Knowledge
Students should be able to:
 Describe basic interpersonal communication concepts and processes
 Explain the meaning of, and rationale for, patient-centered medicine.
 Define communication tasks that are integral to effective and efficient medical
encounters.
 Explain the place and purpose of basic communication skills and strategies
 Select communication skills and strategies that can be utilized to accomplish
particular communication tasks.
 Generate a list of skills and strategies that might be appropriate for a given difficult
situation
 Describe how family members can influence health outcomes through instrumental
support, social support and patient advocacy, or the lack thereof.
 Outline the roles and goals of health-care team member and strategies for conflict
management and resolution.
Skills
Students should be able to:
 Identify skills and strategies to accomplish the communication tasks.
 Identify methods to deal with difficult situations
 Identify ways to involve family members in patient care.
 Handle appropriately enquiries from family members who act as caregivers.
Attitude
Students should be able to demonstrate:
 Sensitivity to a patient’s perception of his/her illness
 Sensitivity to cultural factors that might influence interactions with patients.
 Sensitivity to personal factors that might influence interactions with patients.
 Awareness of the fact that communication skills can be learned and improved.
 Commitment to learning about difficult topics and situations
 Sensitivity to the uncertainty and anxiety that members of patients’ families
experience.
 Awareness of the fact that they are an important part of the health-care team and
thus bear responsibility for quality patient care.
 Awareness of the fact that each member of the health care team is valuable,
regardless of degree or occupation.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 115 | P a g e
Study plan
Duration (Week) Theme/s Topics
Week 1
Fundamental of
discourse
Small -Group
Communication
Introduction to Language and Communication
skills
Types of communication
Introduction to E- Learning Tools and
Intellectual Properties
Computers for Health Care Professionals
Effective and ineffective communication
Receiving the patient
The presenting complaint
Small group Learning
Past and family history
Social history and telephone consultations
Medical Terminology
Examining a patient
Week 2
Interpersonal
Communication
Reflection: Use of Reflective Diary
Giving results
Communicating with challenging patients
Planning treatment and closing the interview
CARE
Communicating with children and adolescents
Breaking bad news
Week 3
Large - Group
Communication
Introduction to CBL
Communicating with the elderly
Large group communication with emphasis on
education & health
Presentation skills
History chart
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 116 | P a g e
Course Description
This course runs concurrently with MED 101 and covers two major themes. Introduction to
Behavioral Sciences covers such topics as psychosocial basis of health, approaches to study
of human behavior, methods of behavioral sciences research, organic basis of behavior and
the process of human development through the life span. Dynamics of Human Behavior
helps students to gain knowledge of the working of the human memory system,
consciousness and human behavior, and the principles of learning and reinforcements and
its applications. It enables students to acquire skills and knowledge for adaptive behavior. It
also provides students an opportunity to learn the elements of culture and process of
socialization, and their impact on health and illness.
BHS I Introduction to Behavioral Sciences and Bio-psycho-social model of health
BHS II Psychological basis of Human Behavior
BHS III Mental processes and Individual Differences in Behavior
BHS IV Psychopathology and Medical Ethics
BHS I and II will be taken in Phase – I Year 1 and will run parallel with courses 1.
Developmental aspects will be incorporated in Embryogenesis and Life Cycle. BHS III will be
incorporated in course XV – Nervous System in Phase II Year 3. BHS IV will become part of
the Psychiatry Clerkship in Phase III Year 4 and 5.
Aims:
 Become aware of the basic concepts, principles and theories in behavioral sciences
related to human behavior and their application in the health behavior of individuals
and communities.
 Familiarize with the dynamics of human behavior and individual factors affecting
human behavior especially in health care situations
 Gain knowledge about psychological disorders and different forms of therapy.
 Gain understanding of ethical concepts in the field of medicine, and critical thinking
skills for conducting research.
Course Title Psychosocial Sciences
Course Code MED 102
Phase / Year Phase I / Year I – BHS I & II / Semester I
Duration 3 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Radhika Taroor
Members Prof. Elsheba Mathew & Ms. Avula Kameswari
Participating Departments Psychiatry & Sociology
Pre-requisite / s None
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 117 | P a g e
Intended Learning Outcomes:
A. Knowledge
BHSI: Introduction to Behavioral Sciences and Bio-psycho-social model of health
On successful completion of this part of the Course, a student should be able to:
 Outline the contributions of Behavioral Sciences in understanding human behavior
esp. related to health behavior
 Outline contributions of modern Psychology in understanding human behavior,
especially related to health and disease
 Explain the methods of studying behavior
 Describe the Bio-psycho-social model of health
 Outline the biological basis of human behavior
 Explain the sociological basis of human behavior, impact of culture and socialization
on health and illness
BHSII: Psychological basis of Human Behavior:
On successful completion of this part of the Course, a student should be able to:
 Explain the psychological basis of behavior esp. in the Bio-psycho-social model of
health
 Outline the psychosocial aspect of human development through the life span and its
importance in health
 Explain thinking, creativity, conflicts, frustration, emotion, motivation and personality
and their impact on human behavior.
 Explain the coping strategies and common stress reduction methods.
 Describe the psychology of person perception with special reference to doctor-
patient relationship
 Describe the different methods of learning and their importance in behavior
modification.
 List the techniques to improve memory and their uses
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 118 | P a g e
B. Skills
BHSI: Introduction to Behavioral Sciences
On successful completion of this part of the Course, a student should be able to:
 Apply psycho-social theories to explain human behavior and its adaptation
 Identify appropriate methods to gather information on human behavior and
interpret the information.
 Relate to the interplay of biological, psychological and social determinants of human
behavior, health and disease
 Recognize the role of socialization in health and illness
BHSII: Psychological basis of Human Behavior:
On successful completion of this part of the Course a student will be able to:
 Apply the process of human development through the life span, in the health
behavior
 Apply the use of learning methods and memory techniques appropriate to individual
situations
 Analyze the contribution of thinking, creativity, conflicts, frustration, emotion,
motivation and personality in human behavior and its impact on health and disease.
 Apply the use of common stress reduction methods
C. Attitude
BHSI: Introduction to Behavioral Sciences
Students on completion of this part of the Course will be able to:
 Appreciate the Bio-psycho-social model in health and disease
 Show consideration for socially disadvantaged groups
 Appreciate the importance of scientific studies in understanding human behavior.
BHSII: Psychological basis of Human Behavior
Students on completion of this part of the Course will be able to:
 Appreciate that the process of physical, intellectual and social development of
human beings, impact behavior
 Reflect on the importance of psychological processes in human behavior and health
 Acknowledge the relevance of person perception and attribution processes in health,
illness and doctor-patient relationship
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 119 | P a g e
Study plan
Duration
(Week)
Theme Topics
Week 1
Introduction to Behavioral
Sciences
1. Introduction
1.1 Behavioral sciences
1.2 Psychology in health
2. Approaches in studying behavior:
2.1Studying human behavior
3. Biopsychosocial model of health
(BPSM):
3.1 Biological basis:
3.2 Sociological basis:
3.2.1 Socialization: Implications (groups
and leadership)
3.2.2 Culture in health and disease
3.2.3 Social determinants of health
behavior
4. Learning:
4.1 Influenced by nature of learner,
nature of learning material
4.2 Types of learning
4.3 Learning styles
4.4 Learning methods
4.5 Effective learning
Week 2 Dynamics of Human Behavior
5. Psychological basis of behavior:
5.1 Thinking-creativity
5.2 Motivation- Personality
5.3 Conflicts-frustration
5.4 Emotion-stress reduction
5.5 Psychology of:
Patient , Doctor, D-P relationship
Perceptual errors in D-P relationship
6. Memory:
6.1 Types of memory
6.2 Memory techniques, Mind maps
Week 3 Dynamics of Human Behavior
7. Life span development- illness behavior
7.1 Children and adolescents
7.2 Adults
7.3 Death and dying - loss/ grieving
8. Time Management
9. Assertiveness
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 120 | P a g e
Title Cells, Molecules and Genes
Code MED 103
Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I
Duration 6 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Nelofor Sami Khan
Members
Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie, Dr. Anuj Mathur,
Mrs. Suni Ebby, Prof. Edwin D’Souza
Participating Departments
Anatomy, Biochemistry, Psysiology, Pharmacology,
Pathology, Community Medicine & Forensic Medicine
Pre-requisites A good high school background in Chemistry & Biology
Course Description:
This course introduces the fundamentals of molecular, cellular and genetic processes; the
structure-function relationships of biomolecules with an emphasis on their clinical relevance;
the functions of the biomembranes; and the basic mechanisms of signal transduction. Use of
computer and web-based learning resources in this course serve to promote interactive and
self- directed learning.
Aim:
The aim of the course is to provide opportunity to first year medical students in
understanding the basic concepts & principles of the cellular, molecular and genetic
processes operating in healthy humans and prepare them to master key principles and
concepts taught in subsequent medical courses. Students will develop the necessary skills
and attitudes in understanding the scientific basis of medicine.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge
On successful completion of the course a student should be able to demonstrate knowledge
and understanding of the major concepts in cell and molecular biology and the basic
principles of medical genetics under the following themes:
1. Cells:
 Differences between eukaryotic and prokaryotic cell structure & organization;
 Cell diversity in multicellular organisms;
 Structure and functions of cell organelles;
 Cell interactions;
 Structure-function relationships of biomolecules;
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 121 | P a g e
 Mechanisms of membrane transport;
 Structure-function relationships of cell receptors;
 Mechanisms of cell signaling;
 Phases of cell cycle, their regulation and biological significance;
 Mechanisms of cell division (mitosis and meiosis);
 Principles of the techniques used for cell fractionation and their identification;
2. Molecules:
 Classification, structure, functions and structure-function relationships of
macromolecules (proteins, carbohydrates, lipids and nucleotides) ;
 Mechanism of action, kinetics and regulation of enzymes;
 Principles of the techniques used for the isolation, purification and identification of
biomolecules;
3. Genes:
 Structure, function and regulation of genes;
 Organization of human genome;
 Nature and types of genetic variation, mutations and polymorphisms;
 Mechanisms of replication damage and repair of genetic information;
 RNA synthesis, processing and modification;
 Features of genetic code and mechanism of protein biosynthesis;
 Post-transcriptional and post translational modification;
 Regulation of gene expression;
 Structure and function of chromosomes and their roles in meiosis and mitosis;
 Basis for genotype-phenotype correlations;
 Structural chromosomal abnormalities;
 Modes of single gene inheritance;
 Multifactorial inheritance and role of genetic factors in complex diseases;
 Molecular basis of unexpected phenotypes in Mendelian disorders;
 Oncogenes and tumor suppressor genes
Skills
On successful completion of the course, a student should be able to:
 Demonstrate competence in using microscope and other basic laboratory equipment
for biochemical analysis;
 Identify and draw the structures of eukaryotic cells;
 Identify the skeletal structures of all major biomolecules;
 Identify amino acids and sugars in biological fluids using chromatographic
techniques;
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 122 | P a g e
 Identify the various fractions of plasma proteins, lipoproteins and hemoglobin using
electrophoresis techniques;
 Analyze and interpret the results of biochemical experiments performed or
demonstrated in the laboratory;
 Determine the type of Mendelian inheritance from a pedigree (autosomal, X-linked,
dominant, recessive);
 Apply the Hardy Weinberg Equation to calculate frequency of a mutant gene in a
population from the occurrence of a specific tract;
 Calculate an individual’s risk using pedigree analysis and population gene frequency;
 Identify those features of a pedigree for cancer which suggests a high genetic risk.
Attitudes
By the end of the course, a student is expected to demonstrate:
 Awareness of the importance of active learning in acquiring knowledge;
 Awareness of his/ her own limitations in knowledge and a willingness to seek help
from peers, faculty and staff for learning;
 Ability to work as a team leader in various learning activities;
 Awareness of the need to continue learning and contribute to the advancement of
knowledge by participating in seminars and projects;
 Awareness about the rapid advances in the field of molecular biology and genetics;
 Awareness about the ethical issues and emotional dilemmas related to genetic
disorders;
Study Plan:
Duration
(week)
Theme (s) Topics
1
Cells
Molecules
Eukaryotic cell, Intracellular organelles- Structure &
functions, Cell diversity, Cell cycle and mitosis, Meiosis
Introduction to Biomolecules; Amino acids, Peptide bond
and Peptides
2
Cells
Molecules
Structure of cell membranes, Transport mechanisms
across cell membranes, Membrane potentials and action
potentials, Intercellular junctions
Proteins classification& structures, Levels of Protein
structure, Structure - function relationships of fibrous
proteins- Collagen, Protein folding and Denaturation
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 123 | P a g e
3
Molecules
Genes
Identification and characterization of protein structure,
Plasma proteins and their functions, Structure-Function
relationships of hemoglobin, myoglobin and
Immunoglobulins, sickle cell anemia
Morphology of chromosomes and karyotyping,
Cytogenetic Disorders & Numerical Abnormalities,
Structural abnormalities of chromosomes, Mendelian
Inheritance
4
Molecules
Genes
Structure, function and biological significance of simple
and complex carbohydrates, Extracellular matrix-
composition and functions, Enzymes – General
Properties, classification, active site, coenzymes, kinetics
and mechanism of catalysis, regulation of enzyme
activity
Variations in dominant and recessive phenotypes,
Cytogenetic abnormalities, techniques of cytogenetics,
Pedigree analysis, complex diseases and multifactorial
inheritance, Complex diseases- Polygenic and
multifactorial inheritance
5
Molecules
Genes
Sturcutre and functions of simple and complex lipids,,
Eicosanoids & steroids – structure and functions, second
messengers and cell signaling
Organization of the genome, DNA- structure and
function, DNA damage and repair mechanisms,
6 Genes
RNA: structure and function, RNA synthesis, processing
and modifications, Protein biosynthesis and
modifications, DNA based techniques, Regulation of
gene expression
False paternity, Complex diseases: congenital and adult
onset complex diseases, Hardy Weinberg equilibrium,
Complex Diseases: Tools and risk assessment (linkage
and association studies), Genetic Services: Genetic
screening- and counseling
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 124 | P a g e
Title Tissues and Organs
Code MED 104
Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I
Duration 6 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike
Members Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed, Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Dr. Sona Chaturvedi
Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology & Pathology
Pre-requisites MED 101 - 103
Course Description:
In this course, the structure and function of the various types of tissues, their organization
to form organs of the different systems in the body are dealt with in an integrated manner
to help understand the correlation of structure with function. This will enable the learner to
better correlate the alterations in function due to structural changes in a disease. Seminars
in relevant areas will give the learner an opportunity to develop presentation skills.
Aims:
 To provide comprehensive and integrated knowledge of the normal structural and
functional organization of the human body tissues and organs as well as their
interactions for a well-coordinated body function.
 To provide the basis for understanding the clinical correlation of organs or tissues
involved and the structural basis of the disease process.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge
By the end of the course students will be able to:
 Describe and identify the four basic tissues of the body.
 Describe the functions of the basic body tissues and body fluids.
 Explain the anatomical terms and demonstrate the planes of the body in anatomical
position.
 Define body cavities & list their contents
 List the components of each organ system.
 Identify the location of various organs.
 List the main functions of the principal organs of the body.
 Describe how the functions are coordinated.
 Explain the abnormal terms (e.g., atrophy, hypertrophy, hyperplasia etc)
 Relate structure to function of the tissues and organs.
 Relate deviation from normal structure to functional abnormality.
 Outline the major postmortem changes of the human tissues.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 125 | P a g e
Skills
By the end of the course students will be able to:
 Demonstrate the use of a light microscope.
 Identify the characteristic features of the basic tissues under the microscope.
 Preparation and staining of a peripheral blood smear.
 Conduct experiments designed to study the functions of body organs.
 Draw labeled diagrams of the basic tissues.
 Demonstrate the planes of the body.
 Locate and identify all body organs and tissues.
Attitudes
By the end of the course students will:
 Demonstrate an awareness of ethical values when dealing with cadavers & cadaveric
material.
 Adopt a meticulous approach to staining and experiments.
 Appreciate the role of normal structure of tissues and organs in exerting normal
function and vice versa.
 Observe universal safety precautions.
Study Plan:
Duration
(Week)
Themes Sub themes / Topics
Week 1 Tissues – I
Basic tissues -Introduction to the basic four tissues
Epithelium – Types, structure and function correlation
of epithelial cells and Tissues
Connective tissue- Types, structure and function
correlation of C.T. Proper; Interaction of C.T.
components, Pathological changes and
Microstructure of abnormalities of epithelial & C.T.
Fasciae- Structure and function of superficial and deep
fascia
Week 2
Tissues – II
Skeletal Connective Tissue - Microstructure,
Development and Growth, and Pathological changes
in Cartilage and Bones
Bones and joints- Orientation, Gross structure and
Structure function correlation of human skeleton and
classification of bones and joints, Joint movements,
Clinical applications of ossification centers
Muscle- Contractile function, Gross and Microscopic
and structure. Structure and function correlation of
muscular tissue, Pathological changes of muscle
tissue, Microstructure of the abnormalities
Week 3 Tissues - III
Nervous tissue- Conductive mechanism, Microscopic
structure, Structure and function correlation ,
Abnormalities of nervous tissue, Reactions of
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 126 | P a g e
degeneration and regeneration of neurons,
Definitions related to abnormalities in body tissues
Weeks 4 Organs – I
General –
Anatomical planes and body cavities Anatomical
terms, planes and terms of movements of human
body in anatomical position, Body Cavities, Thoracic
Cavity/ Walls of the thorax, Mediastinum
Postmortem Changes in Tissues
Endocrine system- Orientation, Structure-function
correlation and Co-ordination among the endocrine
glands, General function & regulation of hormones
Hemopoietic & Lymphoid tissues- Structure &
function of Hemal tissues, Preparation and staining of
Blood smear , Microstructure of Blood Cells ,
Hemopoiesis , Microstructure of Lymphoid tissues
and organs, Reticulo-endothelial system, Coordination
among lymphoid organs
Microstructure of the abnormalities of blood and
lymphoid tissues
Structure and function correlation of hemolymphoid
tissue
Cardiovascular System- Orientation, gross and
Microscopic structure of Heart and blood vessels and
Structure and function correlation of C.V.S. and types
of circulations, cardiovascular adaptation to function
Respiratory System- Orientation and function of
respiratory system organs Gross and Microscopic
structure of respiratory system organs, Function of
respiratory system organs and Respiration
Week 5 Organs - II
Gastrointestinal Tract- Orientation and function,
Gross structure, Structure-function correlation of GIT
organs, Adaptation of GIT lining to function,
Coordination among GIT organs
Hepatobiliary system- Orientation and function of
Liver, GB and Pancreas
Week 6 Organs - III
Urogenital System
- Orientation and function of urinary tract
organs
- Orientation and function of male genital
organs Contents and relationships of pelvic
organs
- Orientation and function of female genital
organs, Female reproductive cycles
- Anomalies of reproductive cycles
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 127 | P a g e
Title Embryogenesis and Life Cycle
Code MED 105
Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I
Duration 4 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Anu Vinod Ranade
Members
Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari, Dr. Shiny Prabha Mohan
& Dr. Wajiha Ajmal
Participating Departments
Anatomy, Psysiology, Pharmacology,Pathology, Forensic
Medicine, Community Medicine, Psychology, Pediatrics and
Gynecology & Obstetrics
Pre-requisite / s MED 101 - 104
Course Description
This course is designed to introduce the normal human development at the various life
stages from conception to old age including embryology, childhood, adolescence, adulthood
and aging in the elderly. The course covers the first few weeks of early human development
from fertilization to formation of the embryo. Students will also learn to appreciate health
as a component of life cycle development.
Aims:
 Master the terminology based upon embryonic structures and congenital
malformations.
 Understand the process of early human embryogenesis from the stages of
fertilization, cleavage and implantation to embryo body formation
 Understand the phenomena of normal growth and development and the process
through the different phases of the life cycle of a normal human being from infancy,
childhood, adolescence, adulthood, old age and death.
Intended Learning Outcomes
Knowledge
At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the concepts and
explain the basic principles involved in:
 The early stages of early human embryogenesis and the development of extra fetal
tissues (placenta and membranes) including its normal features & abnormalities.
 Normal and abnormal (ectopic) implantation and twinning.
 The role of ultrasound in identifying early intragestational sac anatomy.
 Dysmorphology and teratology, defining terms for congenital anomalies.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 128 | P a g e
 The medico legal aspects of pregnancy.
 The prenatal diagnostic procedures used in identifying abnormal development.
 The growth and development of a human being through a normal life cycle
 The concomitance of physiological and psychological growth cycle
Skills
At the end of this course, the student should be able to:
 Identify the major events occurring in the germinal and fetal period on models,
charts, animations and real time ultrasound or video projections
 Identify the major events occurring in the fetal period on models charts, animations
or video projections
 Identify fetal growth and development on models, charts and real time ultrasound or
video projections
 Recognize major congenital anomalies on charts and video projections
 Record and interpret the measurements from commonly used growth charts and
calculate the Body Mass Index with reference to different phases of growth in a
normal life cycle
Attitudes
At the end of this course, the student should be able to demonstrate:
 Awareness of and sensitivity to issues related to congenital abnormalities and its
impact on the individual and his/her family
 Awareness of and sensitivity to the changing physiological and psychological changes
occurring during the various phases of the life cycle of a human being
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 129 | P a g e
Study Plan
Duration
(Weeks)
Themes/Subthemes Topics
Week 1
EMBRYOGENESIS;
Gametogenesis;
Germinal period;
Development in Week 1 & 2;
Abnormal implantation;
Early Embryo & Placenta;
Embryonic period;
Migration of primordial germ cells & Formation of
Primordial gonads;
Review of Meiosis;
Spermatogenesis & Oogenesis;
Events in Week 1:Fertilization to Implantation
(Pre-implantation phase);
Abnormalities in fertilization-- Ectopic
pregnancy;
Events in Week 2 : Early embryogenesis &
trophoblast formation;
Events in Week 3 : Gastrulation –primitive streak
formation ; notochord
Week 2
Embryonic period;
Formation of Diaphragm;
Placenta and membranes;
Prenatal testing;
Amniotic fluid and umbilical
cord
Events in Week 3 : mesoderm formation-
somites;
Cephalo-caudal and Lateral folding
Intraembryonic coelomic cavities; formation of
diaphragm;
Neural tube formation;
Trophoblast and derivatives;
Formation of diaphragm and its anomalies;
Placenta and its formation;
Prenatal testing for congenital anomalies-CVS,
Amniocentesis, Ultrasound screening;
Infertility, Assisted reproduction;
Amniotic fluid and its functions
Umbilical cord and its contents
Week 3
Overview of fetal period &
fetal circulation;
Multiple gestations;
Common Birth Defects;
Medico legal aspects of
pregnancy;
LIFE CYCLE;
Development of early
middle & late childhood
Physiological & psychosocial
changes in adolescence
Overview of fetal period – Organogenesis
Fetal circulation - Dynamics, Prenatal &
Postnatal;
Twin formation; choriogenecity and
amniogenecity; Twin-twin Transfusion
syndrome; Acardiac twin;
Common Birth defects- chromosomal defects,
teratogens, multifactorial inheritance;
Fetal viability; Fetal death; Infant death
syndrome; In-vitro fertilization;
Superfecundation and superfetalis;
Important milestones in a child from birth till the
age of 5 years.
Normal growth in a child from birth till the age
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 130 | P a g e
of 12 years and recognize any deviations of
growth from normal Plot the weight and height
of a child on a growth chart and comment on
the growth parameters.
Recognition of the developmental delay and
reference to a specialist.
Psychosocial aspects
Attachment and bonding (Infancy).
object permanence; stranger anxiety; cognitive
development; social development
Phsical growth
Physical and endocrinal changes during
puberty in both sexes.
Regulation of the reproductive, nervous &
vascular system.
Psychosocial aspects
Challenges and issues of adolescence
social, emotional and sexual development
Physical growth
Stages of adulthood.
Week 4
Teratogenic effects of drugs in
pregnancy
Pathological aspects in
ageing
Teratogenecity; common congenital
malformations from drugs; high risk periods in
pregnancy
Age related pathologies- old age on the basis of
cellular ageing (senescence) impact of ageing.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 131 | P a g e
Title Metabolism & Nutrition
Code MED 106
Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester 2
Duration 6 weeks
Chairperson Prof. K.G Gomathi
Members
Prof. Shatha Al Sharbatti,
Dr. Kannan Narsimhan & Ms. Fahmida Jafri
Participating Departments
Biochemistry, Physiology, Pharmacology, Pathology,
Community Medicine, Medicine and Dietetics
Pre-requisite / s MED 101 – MED 105
Course description
In this course first year medical students learn the principles and key concepts of nutrition
and metabolism that underlie health and disease states. Role of nutrition and its association
with malnutrition, obesity, and diseases such as anemia and cancer will be stressed upon.
The rationale underlying investigations performed to study various nutritional and metabolic
disorders will also be learnt. The student will, in addition, develop an appreciation of the
importance of proper diet and nutrition and its close association with health and disease.
Aims:
To provide opportunity to first year medical students to:
1. Understand the principles of nutrition and metabolism.
2. Understand the biochemical mechanisms underlying metabolic disorders.
3. Understand the role of investigations in the management of metabolic diseases.
4. Appreciate the importance of diet and nutrition in health and disease.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge
By the end of the course, students should be able to:
1. Discuss the general principles & concepts of nutrition and metabolism.
2. Discuss the key concepts with regards to:
• Nutrition, dietary components and energy balance
• Nutrition in the context of health and disease
• Nutritional disorders of public health importance.
• Micronutrient metabolism
• Bioenergetics
• Carbohydrate metabolism and its regulation
• Lipid metabolism and its regulation.
• Nitrogen metabolism.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 132 | P a g e
• Integration of metabolism.
• Heme metabolism
• Purine and Pyrimidine metabolism.
Skills
By the end of the course students should be able to:
 Calculate the calorie intake of a person based on the diet.
 Calculate energy requirement for a person.
 Calculate BMI and classify for obesity.
 Assess nutritional status using anthropometrical measurements.
 Estimate blood glucose levels and test for reducing sugar in urine.
Attitudes
By the end of the course students should be able to:
 Recognize the relationships between diet, metabolism and disease states.
 Develop awareness of issues concerning nutrition in different populations.
 Appreciate the inter-relationship between the different health professions i.e.
Physicians, Nutritionists, Dieticians
Study Plan
Duration
(Week)
Theme (s) Topics
1
General principles &
concepts of nutrition and
metabolism
Nutritional disorders of
public health importance and
nutritional programs
Introduction to dietary components and metabolic
fuels, caloric values, daily energy expenditure and
dietary assessment. Nutritional intake and
recommendations-Dietary reference values and
WHO recommended dietary goals, Body Mass
Index and obesity
Malnutrition, principles of management of Protein
Energy Malnutrition in the community, nutritional
disorders of public health importance,
fortification, nutritional programs. Psychosocial
factors affecting food intake and food security.
2
Micronutrient metabolism
Nutrition in health and
disease
Functions of the vitamins and minerals, metabolic
role of the essential trace elements, metabolic
basis of the vitamin and trace element deficiency
states.
Nutritional requirements in childhood,
adolescence, pregnancy, lactation, occupational
groups, athletes and in old age. Nutritional
anemias, nutrition and cancer.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 133 | P a g e
3
Bioenergetics, Carbohydrate
and Intermediary metabolism
Intermediary metabolism and its importance in
energy generation Glucose metabolism,
regulation, homeostasis and associated disorders
4
Lipid metabolism and
associated disorders
Fatty acid and cholesterol metabolism,
relationship between diet and cardiovascular
disease.
5
Nitrogen metabolism and
metabolic integration;
Nutritionally essential amino acids, amino acid
metabolism, metabolism of ammonia, catabolism
of carbon skeletons of amino acids and associated
inborn errors of metabolism. Hormones and
metabolism, metabolic changes in conditions such
as hypoglycemia, starvation, Diabetes mellitus;
6
Metabolism of Heme,
Purines, Pyrimidines and
associated disorders
Heme metabolism and associated disorders
Nucleotide metabolism, disorders, uses of
nucleotide analogs
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 134 | P a g e
Title Internal & External Environment
Code MED 107
Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester 2
Duration 9 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Ramesh Ranganathan
Members
Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman, Dr. Kannan Narsimhan
Dr. Priya Sajith, Prof. Hemant Kumar Garg &
Dr. Jenny Cheriathu John
Participating Departments
Physiology, Microbiology, Biochemistry, Pharmacology,
Pathology, Community Medicine and Forensic Medicine
Pre-requisite / s Courses MED 101 – MED 106
Course Description:
This course is the last course in Phase-I of the Integrated Curriculum. This course will help
the students to gain an insight into the challenges human beings face each day of their lives
indoors, at home or at work or outdoors as their bodies are challenged by agents in its
internal and external environments. The student will be introduced to the basic physiological
and pathological responses to the noxious agents at the level of cells, tissues and organs
that in turn is related to the toxicity of the agents which make the difference between
health and disease. The students will realize the magnitude of the preventive measures
made at the level of the individual, the community and globally to achieve the vision of
health for all in the future.
Aims:
The aim of this course is to help the students to:
 Gain understanding of the influence of internal and external environment &
environmental agents on human health based on knowledge of relevant
Epidemiological, Toxicological and Exposure factors.
 Recognize the scientific basis of signs, symptoms, diseases and sources of
exposure relating to common environmental agents and conditions
 Recognize and the role of investigation and epidemiological approaches in the
prevention and control of these diseases.
Intended Learning Outcomes
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 135 | P a g e
Knowledge
By the end of the course students will be able to:
 Understand the magnitude of the impact of environment on the health of the
individual and the community
 Understand the control systems of the body that help to meet the demands of
physiologic stress in the environment
 Understand the innate and adaptive immune responses to environmental agents
 Understand the cellular and tissue responses to noxious agents in the
environment
 Recognize the type and magnitude of infectious diseases that arise as a
consequence of exposure to pathogenic organisms present in the environment
and the basis of antimicrobial therapy in the control of these infectious diseases.
Skills
By the end of the course students will be able to:
 Identify major groups of microorganisms on the basis of morphological, cultural
and biochemical characteristics
 Interpret tonicity, pH and changes in the composition of body fluids
 Identify the prototypical morphologic changes at the gross and microscopic level
in tissues injured due to environmental insults
 Calculate and interpret epidemiological data with relevance to mortality and
morbidity rates and risk
 Retrieve information using library and Internet.
Attitudes
By the end of the course students will be aware of:
 The importance of observing sterile precautions while handling infectious agents
 The importance of teamwork and sensitivity to cultural and personal factors
while collecting epidemiological data
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 136 | P a g e
Study Plan
Duration
(Week)
Theme Subthemes Topics
1
1. Environment and
Health
1.1 Environmental
determinants of health
Concept of environment &
health
2-3
1.2 Biologic agents in the
environment
Microbes – Classification,
Definitions & Nomenclatures,
Growth & Cultural Methods,
Sterilization & Disinfection
4-5
2. Control of internal
environment
2.1 Physiologic responses to
environmental stimuli
Concept of homeostasis,
Control systems in body,
Acclimatization, Adaptation &
Biological Rhythms, Normal
Bacterial Flora, ADME of Drugs
6-7
3. Host response to
environmental stimuli
3.1 Cellular response to
stress and noxious stimuli
Cellular adaptation, Neoplasia,
Cell injury and cell death,
Intracellular & Extracellular
Accumulations
3.2 Immune responses to
environmental agents
Innate & adaptive immunity
3.3 Tissue response to injury
Acute & chronic inflammation,
Tissue Renewal & Repair
8-9
4. Environment and
disease
4.1 Effects of adverse
chemical environment:
Drugs, Heavy Metals, Poisons
4.2 Effects of adverse
physical environment:
Radiations, Extremes of
Temperature, Atmospheric
Pressure Changes, Mechanic
Forces/Troma
4.3 Consequences of
exposure to pathogenic
organisms on the host:
Principles of Disease &
Epidemiology, Microbial
Mechanisms of Pathogenicity
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 137 | P a g e
Phase - II Courses
Title Blood and Immune System
Code MED 202
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 3
Duration 6 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Biswadip Hazarike
Members Dr. Sajith Khan, Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Prof. Edwin D’Souza
Participating Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology,
Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine,
Forensic Medicine & Pediatrics
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
The course presents an overview of the normal structure and functions of the blood and the
immune system and their derangement in disorders of the red cells, leucocytes, platelets
and the lymphoid tissues/organs. The pathophysiology, molecular basis, laboratory findings
and clinical manifestations of anemia, leukemia, hemorrhagic, thrombotic and immune
disorders will be emphasized through didactics, laboratory exercises and seminars. Case
based discussions through CBL, PBL settings will encourage development of problem
solving skills.
Aims:
To acquire knowledge and understanding of common diseases of the blood, bone marrow
and lymphoid organs emphasize the etiology, structural-functional alterations underlying
laboratory findings, clinical features of the disorders and approach to their management and
prevention.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: By the end of the course students should be able to:
 Describe the cellular and molecular changes occurring in hematological diseases.
 Describe the causes, types, principles of diagnosis and management of the common
hematological disorders.
 Describe epidemiology, prevention and rehabilitation of hereditary hematological
disorders.
 Explain immune mechanism and disorders of immune system.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 138 | P a g e
Skills: By the end of the course students should be able to:
 Perform peripheral blood smear and identify normal and abnormal blood cells.
 Perform complete blood count and recognize abnormal blood counts.
 Identify abnormal blood cells in bone marrow smear.
 Interpret screening tests, lab results of hematological disorders.
 Interpret immunological tests.
 Interpret lab results, blood picture and bone marrow picture of blood cell abnormalities.
Attitudes: By the end of the course students should be able to:
 Follow safety guidelines in sample collection, cleanliness and meticulousness in
performing investigations.
 Recognize erroneous or unexpected test values and take appropriate measures.
 Demonstrate awareness of the psychosocial aspects of hereditary anemia.
 Be aware of medico legal implications in traumatic blood loss.
 Be aware of limitations in the management of hematological malignancies.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 139 | P a g e
Title Cardiovascular System
Code MED 203
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 3
Duration 8 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas
Members
Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari, Dr. Priya Sajith, Dr. Liju Susan Mathew,
Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman & Dr. Ehab Mohey Eldin Farag
Participating
Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology,
Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Internal
Medicine, Cardiology & Radiology
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
This course has been structured as an integrated study of the human cardiovascular system
and provides instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the human cardiovascular
system. Emphasis is placed on the integration of relevant principles with respect to the
behavior of the normal circulation and its responses to the stress of injury and disease. This
course deals with common cardiovascular disorders, including a study of atherosclerosis,
coronary heart disease and myocardial infarction, hypertension, valvular and congenital
heart disease, infectious heart disease, and heart muscle disorders. Also included is a series
of case presentations dealing with common complications of a variety of cardiac diseases:
cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure and shock. PBL sessions deal with prototype diseases and
provide opportunities to develop problem solving and interpersonal communication skills.
Aims:
 To provide a course of integrated learning of normal structure and function of the
organs of the cardiovascular system at a molecular, cellular and organ level, including
the way different components of the cardiovascular system are coordinated to
maintain perfusion of tissues under a wide range of physiological states.
 To provide an introduction to abnormal structure and function (Pathology &
Pathophysiology) of the cardiovascular system in selected cardiovascular diseases.
 To provide a scientific basis for the management of selected cardiovascular disorders
as a foundation for future clinical training.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 140 | P a g e
Intended Learning Outcomes
Knowledge: By the end of the course students will be able to:
 Describe the normal structure and function of the different parts of the heart, the aorta
and large elastic arteries, arterioles and capillaries, venules and veins
 Recognize and identify the changes in structure and/or functioning of the cardiovascular
system in the following disease states: valvular heart disease, disarrhythmias,
atherosclerosis and ischemic heart disease, congenital heart disease, hypertension and
common syndromes like heart failure, stroke and shock that arise as complications
 Explain the principles underlying some of the therapeutic interventions that may be
used to modify the course of the disease states listed above, including preventive
measures
Skills: By the end of the course students will be able to:
 Identify normal and abnormal findings in the heart and blood vessels on gross,
microscopic and radiologic examination
 Interpret circulation physics
 Interpret normal and distinguish abnormal ECGs
 Record a blood pressure reading
 Elicit a clinical history in a patient suspected of cardiovascular disease
 Recognize normal and abnormal heart sounds on physical examination
Attitudes: By the end of the course students will be aware of the:
 Importance of lifestyle modification in the prevention and control of heart diseases
 Marked morbidity and mortality associated with cardiovascular disorders and its psycho
social impact on the individual and family
Broad Outline of Course Content (Themes)
The Heart Cardiac Muscle- normal structure, function and dysfunction
The heart as a pump: valve function and valve disease
Regulation of cardiac function and heart failure
Blood supply to the heart and ischemic heart disease
Cardiac electric activity and arrhythmias
The Blood Vessels Large blood vessels and atherosclerosis
Resistance blood vessels and hypertension
Pulmonary circulation and pulmonary hypertension
Capillary function lymphatic system and edema
Circulation Fetal cardiovascular system and congenital heart disease
Exercise and cardiovascular fitness
Hemorrhage and circulatory shock
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 141 | P a g e
Title Respiratory System
Code MED 204
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 4
Duration 6 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Rizwana Burhanuddin Sheikh
Members
Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari, Dr. Sajith Khan,
Dr. Anu Vinod Ranade & Dr. Raji Sharma
Participating Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology,
Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine,
Forensic Medicine & Anesthesiology
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal
structure, function and development of human respiratory system using different strategies
and applying the knowledge and skills acquired in understanding the pathophysiology of
various respiratory disorders. The basic principles of management of these disorders with a
focus on disease prevention will be described. The medico legal aspects of specific
respiratory disorders will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology and
management of the lower respiratory tract infections.
Aims:
The aim of the course is to have an integrated approach to the learning of human respiratory
system focusing on its normal structure-function relationships and their deviations and to
understand the etiopathogenesis, basis for clinical presentations and the principles of
treatment and management of various disorders.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: By the end of the course, students should be able to:
 Explain the normal structure and function and to correlate it with deviations in common
disease conditions.
 Explain the normal development of the respiratory system and list the common
developmental anomalies.
 Describe the etiopathogenesis, structural and functional change, basis of clinical
manifestations, approach to diagnosis, principles of prevention and management of
common disorders of respiratory system.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 142 | P a g e
 Describe the epidemiology of various respiratory disorders.
 Describe the medico legal aspects of asphyxias and respiratory failure.
Skills: By the end of the course, students should be able to:
 Identify the gross and microscopic structure of the respiratory system.
 Identify the anatomical relationships of the various components of the respiratory
system using dissected parts, laboratory models and images.
 Identify deviations in gross and microscopic structure of respiratory system using slides
and images.
 Interpret lung function tests and blood gas reports.
 Demonstrate the use of basic cytological techniques in the diagnosis of respiratory
infections and interpret the results.
 Demonstrate the effect of various drugs on respiratory system using interactive CDs.
 Interpret the results of the biochemical and cytological examination of pleural fluid.
 Identify the bacterial flora in sputum smears in various respiratory infections.
 Perform basic clinical examination, record the normal and abnormal findings and report
the results.
Attitudes: By the end of the module students should be able to demonstrate:
 Awareness and concern about the environmental issues related to respiratory system
affecting the community health.
 Awareness about the medico legal and ethical issues concerning the disorders of the
respiratory system.
Study Plan
Theme 1: Chest wall, Pleura and Diaphragm
Structure, function and development of Chest wall, Pleura and Diaphragm; Respiratory cycle
and lung compliance; Pleural infections and tumors; Medico legal aspects of chest injury and
pulmonary embolism
Theme 2: Upper respiratory tract
Structure, function and development of Upper respiratory tract; Etiopathogenesis of upper
respiratory tract infections; Upper respiratory tract infections of public health importance;
Principles of drug therapy; Cough reflex
Theme 3: Lower respiratory tract
Structure and function of lower respiratory tract including broncho pulmonary
Segments; Lung defense mechanisms; Laboratory diagnosis of lower respiratory tract
infections; Morphology, clinical features and drug therapy of pneumonias
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 143 | P a g e
Theme 4: Airflow in the respiratory system
Functions of airways; Lung function tests; Bronchial asthma
4.4 Chronic obstructive airway disease (COAD); Bronchiectasis; Neoplastic disorders
Theme 5: Ventilation
Ventilation- perfusion matching; Diffusion; Pulmonary edema; Flail chest
Theme 6: Neural and chemical control of breathing
Neural mechanisms; Chemical regulation of breathing; High altitude sickness; Sleep
disordered breathing
Theme 7: Transport of gases and acid base- balance
Transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide; Hypo- and hyper-ventilation; Acid-base balance;
Occupational pulmonary disorders; Respiratory failure; Respiratory distress syndrome;
Ventilator associated infections; Asphyxia and asphyxial deaths.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 144 | P a g e
Title Alimentary System
Code MED 205
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 4
Duration 8 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Shatha Al Sharbatti
Members
Dr. Ramesh Ranganathan, Dr. Nilofer Sami Khan,
Dr. Miral Nagy Fahmy Salama, Dr. Kannan Narsimhan
& Dr. Pradeep Kumar Sharma
Participating Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology,
Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine,
Forensic Medicine, Radiology& Surgery
Pre-requisites Phase I Courses
Course Description
The course adopts an integrated organ system- based approach to provide the learner with
a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of the
digestive system and its accessory organs, in health and their major deviations in disease.
Furthermore, the learner is introduced to the etiopathogenesis, basis of clinical
manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing the pharmacological
management and methods of prevention of common disorders of the digestive system. The
course employs problem based learning (PBL) and a variety of teaching /learning methods to
facilitate interdisciplinary integration, student centered learning and development of
generic competences. Simultaneous introduction of basic clinical skills aims to vertically
integrate learning and prepare the students for clinical clerkship in the next phase.
Aims:
At the end of this course the student should be able to:
 Understand the normal structure and functions of the alimentary system.
 Know the structural and functional changes in the alimentary system due to disease
result in clinical manifestations commonly seen in gastrointestinal disorders.
 Perform and explain some common procedures used to diagnose and manage
diseases of the alimentary system.
 Interpret results of laboratory radiologic investigations commonly performed to
diagnose and manage patients with diseases of the alimentary system.
 Demonstrate awareness of the role of psychosocial aspects in the etiology of
alimentary diseases and their management.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 145 | P a g e
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: By the end of this course students will be able to:
 Understand and explain the structure of the component organs of the GIT and the
associated organs (salivary glands, exocrine pancreas, liver) that are essential for the
functioning of the digestive system and relate these to their key functions.
 Explain the coordinated and integrated functioning of the digestive system.
 Describe the causes, pathogenesis, morphological and functional alterations and
epidemiology of common disorders of digestive system.
 Explain the clinical and laboratory features of these disorders in terms of disruption of
the normal structure and function.
 Outline the principles of management and methods of prevention and medico-legal
aspects of poisoning.
 Recognize the major risk factors, common symptoms and signs of disorders of
gastrointestinal system.
Skills: By the end of the course students should be able to:
 Identify the structures and associated organs of the digestive system, on macroscopic
examination in cadavers, gross specimens as well as on imaging studies.
 Identify the salient light microscopic features of these organs on slides /projected
images.
 Recognize major alterations in morphology (macroscopic) of the foregoing structures in
common disorders.
 Identify common gastrointestinal pathogens on appropriate specimens.
 Obtain the clinical history from a patient with a gastrointestinal disorder.
 Perform complete abdominal examination.
 Interpret the results of a ascetic fluid analysis.
 Interpret the results of liver function tests.
 Explain the steps of procedures like nasogastric intubation, paracentesis, to a patient.
 Perform nasogastric intubation of a manikin.
 Identify normal radiological findings on an X-ray of the abdomen and explain the causes
of deviations from the normal.
Attitudes: By the end of the course, students should be aware of:
 The cultural beliefs of different ethnic groups while performing a per-rectal examination.
 The importance of proper nutrition, hygiene and sanitation in promoting health and
preventing illnesses.
 The role of interactions of the body and mind in manifestations of gastro-intestinal
disorders.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 146 | P a g e
Study plan
Theme 1: Upper GIT - Mouth, Salivary glands, Esophagus, Stomach
Structures in the oral cavity and pharynx, process of mastication and deglutition, Saliva:
composition, functions, control of secretion, Infections of oral cavity and lips, Pathological
conditions of the mouth, Embryology and developmental anomalies of face and upper G.I.T ,
Structural arrangements of esophagus, swallowing (deglutition), control of motility in the
esophagus, dysphagia (mechanisms), , Esophageal reflux, oesophagitis, Barrett’s
esophagus, varicose veins Gross anatomy and functions of the stomach, Gastro esophageal
reflux, gastritis, peptic ulcer, Pre-neoplastic lesions and neoplasms of upper GIT, Main
determinants and risk factors of upper GIT cancers, Imaging of the upper GIT.
Theme 2: Liver, biliary tract and pancreas
Gross anatomy of liver, gall bladder , biliary system and pancreas, Liver function tests,
interpretation, Patterns of hepatic injury Histology of biliary system, Bile production,
secretion and storage, Jaundice and cholestasis, Gallstones &Cholecystitis, Portal circulation,
portal hypertension, Infectious disorders of liver including parasitic infestations , Alcoholic
liver disease, cirrhosis, Hepatomegaly, Neoplasms of Hepatobiliary system, Hepatotoxic
poisons, (Hepatotoxic drugs and chemicals), Antiviral drugs, Pancreas: Development and
functions, Pancreatic juice, Pancreatitis , Neoplasms of pancreas.
Theme 3: Peritoneum and Abdominal wall
Gross and clinical anatomy of peritoneum and peritoneal cavity, Torsion of mesentery
(volvulus) mesenteric cysts, Peritonitis, Subphrenic abscess, trauma, Ascites, Peritoneal fluid
analysis, Abdominal wall:rectus sheath and inguinal canal anatomy and clinical applications,
Emetics and antiemetics.
Theme 4: The Small Intestine
Gross and clinical anatomy of small intestine, Histology of small intestine, Development of
midgut, anomalies, Structure of the intestinal wall: the villous cell types, intestinal
secretions, control of secretions, Intestinal phase of digestion and absorption,
malabsorption syndromes, Infections( viral, bacterial, parasitic), Laxatives and anti-
diarrhoeal drugs, Principles of GIT chemotherapy, Abdominal injuries, Motility in the small
intestine, types of motility, segmentation, control of motility.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 147 | P a g e
Theme 5: Colon, Rectum and Anal Canal
Structure of large intestine (Gross and microscopic )including vermiform appendix,
Histology of large intestine, Secretion, absorption, motility of large intestine and its control,
diverticular disease (definition, mechanisms), fecal incontinence, Hemorrhoids, Prolapse
rectum, anal fissures, Corrosives and irritants, Food Poisoning, Constipation, principles of
therapy ,Appendicitis, Ischiorectal fossa, fistula- in-ano, perianal abscesses, inflammatory
bowel diseases (IBD): ulcerative colitis and Crohn’s disease; pathogenesis, morphological
changes, clinical features, complication and management, Intestinal obstruction, ischemic
bowel disease, Differentiation and growth of intestinal epithelium, Polyps, neoplasms of
intestine, anal canal, Endocrine cells of the GIT and tumors arising from them.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 148 | P a g e
Title Urinary System
Code MED 206
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 4
Duration 4 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Shiny Prabha Mohan
Members
Prof. Hemant Kumar Garg, Dr. May Khalil, Dr. Syed Morteza
Mahmoudi, Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan
Participating
Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology,
Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine,
Medicine, Surgery, Urology & Pediatrics
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
This course has been designed as an integrated study of the urinary system and provides
instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the urinary system. Emphasis is placed on
the integration of relevant principles with respect to the mechanisms of normal excretion
and its responses to health and disease. This course deals with common urinary disorders,
including study of renal failure, glomerular diseases, infections, obstruction and neoplasms
of the urinary tract. Also included is a series of case presentations dealing with common
complications of a variety of urinary tract diseases. PBL courses deal with prototype diseases
and provide opportunities to develop problem-solving skills.
Aims:
To acquire an integrated knowledge on the urinary system and its common disorders. The
knowledge acquired in understanding the normal and abnormal structures and functions of
the urinary system will be applied rationally as a Medical Practitioner, in the diagnosis and
management of common diseases of the urinary system in providing better health care.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: By the end of the course, students should be able to understand:
 Normal development of the urinary system and how congenital defects arise if it is
disturbed.
 Normal structure and function of the urinary system and how these are altered in disease
of the urinary tract.
 Various normal functions of the urinary system.
 Familiarize with common disorders of the urinary system infectious, non-infectious and
congenital defects.
 Principles of the management of recovery of normal functions of the urinary tract.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 149 | P a g e
 Immune responses to external & internal agents may cause glomerular injury and
produce disease.
 Microorganisms producing urinary tract infections.
 Alterations in systemic vascular and metabolic states that secondarily produce urinary
tract disease.
 Role of laboratory investigations and imaging techniques in the diagnosis and
management of diseases of the urinary tract.
 Principles of pharmacologic and non-pharmacologic treatment in the management of
urinary tract disease.
Skills: By the end of the course, students should be able to:
 Identify the morphologic changes in common disorders of the urinary system.
 Perform urethral catheterization in a manikin.
 Interpret the results of the urinary colony count of microbiologic investigations done for
urinary tract infections.
 Interpret results of common radiological and laboratory investigations done to diagnose
urinary tract diseases.
 Distinguish the abnormal values from the normal values of kidney function tests.
 Prepare and examine wet smear of the urine samples and interpret the cytological
findings.
 Observe aseptic techniques in the collection of urinary samples.
Attitudes: By the end of the course, students should be able to:
 Understand the progressive nature of most renal diseases, which contribute to the
morbidity, and mortality of urinary tract diseases.
 Respect the regional, religious and emotional beliefs & needs of the patients.
 Understand the patient’s problem and pay attention with compassion.
 Understand how end-stage renal disease affects the quality of a patient’s life and its
effect on the individual and the family.
Study Plan
Theme 1 Kidney as an organ of excretion
Theme 2 Kidney as organ of homeostasis
Theme 3 Nephritc / Nephrotic syndrome & UTI
Theme 4 PBL week Chronic renal failure / Diabetic nephropathy
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 150 | P a g e
Title Endocrine System & Mammary Gland
Code MED 210
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester V
Duration 5 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie
Members
Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman,
Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Dr. Mahir Khali Ibrahim Jallo
Participating
Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology,
Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Medicine & Surgery
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
This course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of normal
structure, function and development of endocrine system including the mammary glands
using different strategies and applying the knowledge and skills acquired in understanding
the pathophysiology of various endocrine disorders .Each endocrine organ is taken as a
theme and common presentations due to its hypofunction and hyperfunction are studied.
The clinical and laboratory features of the disorders are discussed. PBL week deals with the
structure and function and prototype diseases of mammary gland and provide opportunities
to develop problem solving skills and communication skills.
Aims:
At the completion of the course, the student should have sufficient knowledge about the
structure, function and regulation of major endocrine organs of the body, the endocrine
regulation of different organ systems and common disorders associated with the endocrine
system. The student should understand the role of mammary gland as the target organ for
hormones and its importance in cancer screening programs.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: By the end of the course the student will be able to describe the:
 Normal structure, function and development of endocrine organs and mammary gland;
 Structural and functional relationships among the various endocrine organs;
 Mechanisms for the synthesis, secretion and actions of hormones and their regulation;
 Transport and metabolism of hormones;
 Cellular and clinical effects of over-production and underproduction of hormones;
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 151 | P a g e
 The etiopathogenesis, morphology and clinical features and principles of management of
neoplasms of endocrine glands;
 Abnormal test findings of hypo function and hyper function of endocrine organs &
correlate with clinical features.
 The biological basis of Dynamic Function Tests (Provocative and Suppression) in
endocrine disorders
 Principles of drug therapy of endocrine disorders;
 Epidemiology and prevention of endocrine disorders;
Skills: By the end of the course the student will be able to:
 Eliciting relevant clinical history for endocrine disorders;
 Perform physical examination for endocrine disorders.
 Identify abnormal findings in laboratory reports and correlate the results with hypo-and
hyper-function of endocrine organs;
 Identify different types of insulin preparations, insulin delivery devices & their usage;
 Use glucometer for estimation of blood glucose in diagnosis of Diabetes mellitus;
 Perform Breast examination using simulators;
 Perform FNAC on breast using simulators;
 Identify locations and normal shape and size of endocrine organs using images and
models.
Attitudes: By the end of the course the student will show:
 Concern about the social problems associated with endocrine disorders;
 Awareness about the importance of patient education in the management of diabetes
mellitus.
 Awareness about the psychosocial aspects of (male) gynecomastia;
 Awareness about the importance and promotion of breast feeding;
 Awareness and importance of breast cancer screening programs.
Study Plan
Theme 1 Hypothalamus & Pituitary
Theme 2 Thyroid
Theme 3 Parathyroid
Theme 4 Adrenals
Theme 5 Endocrine Pancreas
Theme 6 Miscellaneous Hormones
Theme 7 Mammary gland
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 152 | P a g e
Title Reproductive system
Code MED 207
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester V
Duration 7 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari
Members Dr. Joshua Ashok, Dr. Lisha Jenny John & Dr. Shanti Fernandez
Participating
Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology,
Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Gynecology,
Urology, Surgery & Dermatology
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal
structure, function and development of the human reproductive system using different
learning strategies to acquire the knowledge and skills required for understanding the
pathophysiology of various reproductive disorders; the rationale for their management
focused on disease prevention. The medico legal aspects of specific disorders will be
studied. The PBL course will deal with the pathophysiology and management of menstrual
disorders.
Aims:
 To understand the normal structure & function of the male and female reproductive
systems and their common disorders.
 To enable the learner to be cognizant of the principles of diagnosis, management and
prevention of these disorders.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: At the end of the course the students will be able to
 Explain the relationship between embryological origin, structure and function of the
male and female reproductive systems.
 Describe the disorders of development of male and female genital systems
 Describe the etiopathogenesis, structural and functional alterations, pathological basis
of salient clinical features, approach to diagnosis, principles of management, and
methods of prevention of :
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 153 | P a g e
 Inflammatory disorders of male and female genital tract
 Tumors and tumor like conditions of male and female genital tract
 Disorders of Tunica vaginalis and spermatic cord
 Vascular disorders of male genital tract
 Menstrual disorders
 Gestational and placental disorders
 Disorders of displacement of uterus
 Explain significance of abnormal findings in an Endometrial Biopsy in common
endometrial disorder
 Be cognizant of microbiological examination and culture sensitivity reports of
specimens from genital tract.
 Recognize normal pregnancy and define terms related to abnormal pregnancy
 List methods of diagnosis of pregnancy
 Explain the rationale for urine and blood tests in Pregnancy
 Describe the stages of Labor
 List the causes for Infertility in both genders, and the methods employed in assessing
the Infertile couple
 Describe the types of Sexual offences and the Medico legal aspects of Impotency
 Recognize normal and abnormal findings of Semen analysis
 Describe the methods of Assisted Reproduction
 List several birth control methods and describe their effectiveness.
 Describe health programs directed to women and children
 Identify causes for maternal and child mortality and morbidity
Skills: At the end of the course the student will be able to:
 Elicit history on Male Infertility and Sexual dysfunction
 Conduct physical examination of Male Genital system on a simulator
 Conduct Pelvic examination of Nullipara and Gravida on a simulator
 Elicit Gynecology history
 Demonstrate techniques of obtaining high vaginal swab
 Demonstrate methods of obtaining PAP smear
 Collect, store & transport urethral and vaginal specimens for microbiological and
cytological examination.
 Conduct Obstetric examination
Attitudes: At the end of the course the student will be able to demonstrate awareness of:
 Demonstrate awareness and sensitivity while performing intimate examination e.g.
male and female genital examination.
 The impact of Sexually Transmitted Diseases on the patient, his/her family, and the
community
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 154 | P a g e
 The need to advise the patient to prevent transmission of STD
 The feelings of the Infertile couple
 The ethical issues of Assisted Reproduction and Abortion
Study Plan
Theme 1 Disorders of Development
Theme 2 Inflammatory Disorders
Theme 3 Male Infertility
Theme 4 Vascular Disorders
Theme 5 Disorders of Tunica Vaginalis and Spermatic Cord
Theme 6 Tumors and Tumor like Disorders
Theme 7 Disorders of Development
Theme 8 Menstrual Disorders
Theme 9 Infection of Female Genital Tract
Theme 10 Displacement of Supporting Structures
Theme 11 Tumors and Tumor like Conditions of Female Genital Tract
Theme 12 Pregnancy
Theme 13 Gestational & Placental Disorders
Theme 14 Contraception, Maternal and Child Health
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 155 | P a g e
Title Nervous System
Code MED 208
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester VI
Duration 9 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari
Members
Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike, Dr. Kannan Narsimhan, Dr. Radhika
Taroor, Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed, Dr. Mohamed Hamdy Ibrahim
Abdalla & Dr. Pankaj Lamba
Participating
Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Pharmacology,
Microbiology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Neurology,
Medicine, Ophthalmology &ENT.
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal
structure, function and development of the nervous system and the organs of hearing,
vision, taste, smell and touch. The course also serves to introduce the medical students to
individual factors affecting human behavior particularly the micro level psychological
processes such as perception, personality, attitudes, values and motivation. The students
will also have a chance to understand the impact of these factors on the health and well-
being of people in general and on the patient-doctor relationship in specific. The medico
legal aspects of death will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology, and
management of meningeal infections.
Aims:
This required system-based block integrates the basic sciences into a study of neuroscience
and behavior in both health and disease. Each of the basic science topics is incorporated in
an integrated body of knowledge covering neuroanatomy, neurophysiology, neurological
correlates, neuropharmacology, neuropathology, human behavior and psychiatry, utilizing
both didactic & self-directed learning methods and clinical models.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: At the end of this course the student will be able to:
 Describe the gross features of the human nervous system including brain and spinal
cord, the meninges and ventricular system, and its blood supply.
 Describe the cell biology of neurons including the structure of neurons, the basis of
synaptic transmission, and the pharmacological control of these processes.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 156 | P a g e
 Define the structural basis and physiological and pharmacological properties of the
pathways that transmit sensory and motor information in the nervous system.
 Describe the etiopathogenesis, structural & functional alterations, pathological basis of
salient clinical features, approach to diagnosis, principles of management & methods of
prevention of common disorders of the nervous system.
 Develop an understanding of the mental processes and individual characteristics of a
person that form the basis of behavior, mental disorders and their treatment, the basis
of psychiatry.
 Develop an understanding of the characteristics of behavioral disorders and the
principles of their treatment that form the basis of psychiatry.
 Describe methods of relieving pain by pharmacologic and non - pharmacologic measures.
 Describe the structure and function of the eye and visual disorders
 Describe the structure and function of the ear and disorders of hearing
 Describe the structure and function of gustatory and olfactory receptors and their
disorders
Skills: At the end of this course the student will be able to:
 Elicit history related to nervous system and behavior disorders
 Perform examination of the nervous system
 Localize lesion to specific levels of the CNS based on application of basic principles to
neurological symptoms.
 Perform Lumbar puncture on a simulator
 Recognize normal and abnormal CSF analysis findings.
 Recognize normal and abnormal radiological and neuroimaging findings
 Identify neurotoxin
 Recognize the individual characteristics and psychological processes in behavior related
to health and sickness
 Perform examination of the eye (torch light, pupillary reactions, visual field, eye
movements, visual acuity, color vision and ophthalmoscopy)
 Perform examination of hearing by tuning fork and audiometer
Attitudes: At the end of this course the student will be able to:
 Appreciate the importance of psychological processes and individual characteristics in
understanding health behavior
 Demonstrate consideration for motivation based disorders.
 Demonstrate awareness of the social & psychological consequences of stigma
(disability/diseases) especially as they relate to the nervous system.
 Appreciate the ethical issues in performing an invasive procedure (LP).
 Demonstrate awareness of cases to be reported for medico legal investigation
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 157 | P a g e
Study Plan
Theme 1 Synaptic transmissions and neurotransmitters
Theme 2 Sensory system and its disorders
Theme 3 Motor system and its disorders
Theme 4 Spinal cord and polyneuropathies
Theme 5-6 The Brain and its disorders
Theme 7 PBL Meningitis
Theme 8 Behavioral disorders
Theme 9 The Eye and its disorders
Theme 10 The Ear, Olfaction and Gustation
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 158 | P a g e
Title Musculoskeletal System
Code MED 209
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester VI
Duration 7 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike
Members Dr. Lisha Jenny John , Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed & Dr. Nishida
Participating Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Pathology, Pharmacology,
Orthopedics, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine,
Orthopedics & Physical Therapy
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
In this course the knowledge of the contribution of the normal structure, function and
development of the bones, joints and muscles in the maintenance of the kinetics of normal
posture and locomotion will help to understand how the physiological and pathological
changes associated with congenital, traumatic, infectious, degenerative, metabolic and
neoplastic musculoskeletal disorders lead to physical disabilities that have a major impact on
the biomechanical function of this organ system particularly following traumatic bone
injuries and degenerative joint disease.
Aims:
 To provide a course of integrated learning of structure and function of the organs
that makes the musculoskeletal system to maintain posture and movements.
 To provide an introduction to abnormal kinetics of the musculoskeletal system in
common musculoskeletal related disorders.
 To provide an understanding of the mechanisms underlying clinical manifestations,
principles in management including rehabilitation in the disorders of the
musculoskeletal system.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: At the end of this course the student will be able to:
 Describe the structure and functions of the musculoskeletal system.
 Explain the basic mechanisms of the structural and functional alterations that occur in
common musculoskeletal disorders and their effects on health.
 Relate the structural functional alteration to clinical manifestations of common
musculoskeletal disorders.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 159 | P a g e
 Explain the role of relevant biochemical, clinical and radiological investigations of the
musculoskeletal system in common disorders.
 Describe the conservative, surgical and rehabilitation measures to alleviate pain, improve
function and to modify the natural history of common musculoskeletal disorders.
Skills: At the end of this course the student will be able to:
 Elicit relevant history related to the musculoskeletal disorders.
 Identify by examination - visual inspection, palpation, and the evaluation of joint motion
(LOOK, FEEL and MOVE) the normality and abnormality of the musculoskeletal system.
 Recognize normal and abnormal findings in biochemical, electrophysiology, imaging
modalities appropriate to the level of training.
Attitudes: At the end of this course the student will be able to:
 Demonstrate polite and considerate interaction with patients and their family members.
 Show respect for patients’ views, privacy and dignity.
 Demonstrate awareness of the psychosocial implications with respect to deformities and
grievous injuries.
 Communicate with patients about their condition, treatment and prognosis in a way they
understand.
 Appreciate the multi-system presentation and multi-disciplinary management of
disorders and recognize the importance of teamwork.
Study Plan
Theme 1 Common Injuries of the Musculoskeletal System
Theme 2 Defects of Metabolism
Theme 3 Inflammatory, Infective and Degenerative Disorders of Synovial Joints.
Theme 4 Primary Muscular Disorders
Theme 5 Tumor &Tumor like Lesions of Bone and Soft Tissue
Theme 6 Congenital Disorders of Muscle, Bone and Joint
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 160 | P a g e
Title Integumentary System
Code MED 201
Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester VI
Duration 2 weeks
Chairperson Dr. Anuj Mathur
Members
Dr. May Khalil, Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman,
Dr. Liju Susan Mathew & Prof. Irene Nirmala Thomas
Participating Departments
Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology,
Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine,
Forensic Medicine, Dermatology & Surgery
Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses
Course Description
This course has been integrated around the Integumentary System to provide the learner
with a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of
the integumentary system in health and its major deviations in common skin diseases. In
addition, the learner is introduced to the causes, pathogenesis, and pathological basis of
clinical manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing management and
methods of prevention of these disorders.
Aims:
To develop an integrated, foundational knowledge and understanding of the Integumentary
system and its common disorders. This understanding will be essential to the development
of learners’ ability to recognize, diagnose, manage and prevent these disorders, which they
may encounter later in their clinical training as well as medical practice. Besides, as the first
course of organ system courses, it is expected to provide structured learning opportunities
that help students apply and consolidate their learning of introductory medical sciences.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: By the end of the course students should be able to:
 Understand and explain the relationship between the embryological origin, structure and
function of skin and its appendages
 Understand the incidence, prevalence and classification of skin disease
 Relate alterations in structure and functions of skin to clinical manifestations and
complications of cutaneous wounds (burns, erosion, ulceration, etc.); explain the
principles of wound healing
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 161 | P a g e
 Describe etio-pathogenesis, structural and functional alterations, common signs and
symptoms, appropriate Laboratory work ups, principles of management and methods of
prevention of common disorders in the following categories:
 Disorders of pigmentation
 Disorders of appendages
 Cutaneous infections
 Inflammatory disorders of skin (including acute and chronic inflammatory
dermatoses, hypersensitivity, reactions, blistering and autoimmune disorders),
 Premalignant lesions and neoplasms of skin
Skills: By the end of the course students will be able to:
 Identify the structural constituents and organization of skin
 Recognize alterations in gross and microscopic structure of skin in each of the disorders
(listed) as appropriate.
 Prepare a gram stain and identify common cutaneous infectious agents by light
microscopy.
 Identify common dermatophytes in a KOH preparation
 Clinical skills:
 Demonstrate the ability to take clinical history in patients with common skin disorders
 Perform a focused physical examination in skin disorders, as appropriate to the level:
 Identify primary and secondary lesions of the skin
 Perform tests to detect skin sensations of touch, pain and temperature
 Differentiate between skin cysts, tumors and ulcers by palpation
 Perform injection techniques (I/D, S/C), tuberculin and allergy testing on simulators
Attitudes: By the end of the course students should be able to:
Demonstrate awareness of the social and psychological consequences of stigma
(disfigurement/ diseases) especially as they relate to skin conditions.
Study Plan
Theme 1 Skin Trauma (Cutaneous wounds)
Theme 2 Skin pigmentation and Disorders of Pigmentation
Theme 3 Skin Appendages, Acne, hair problems and other disorders of skin
Theme 4 Inflammations of the skin (including acute and chronic dermatoses,
hypersensitivity reactions, blistering disorders and autoimmune disorders)
Theme 5 Skin Infections
Theme 6 Premalignant Lesions and Neoplasms
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 162 | P a g e
Phase – III Courses
Title Ophthalmology
Code MED 401
Phase / Year Phase III / Year 4 & Year 5 / Semester VII - X
Duration 6 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Salwa Abd El Razak El Said Attia
Clerkship Coordinator Dr. Pankaj Lamba
Members
Dr. Pradeep Kumar Sharma, Dr. Mohammed Khalid &
Dr. Kannan Narsimhan
Participating Departments
Ophthalmology, Internal Medicine, Physiology &
General Surgery
Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills
Co-requisite / s
Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Gynecology and Obstetrics &
Otorhinolaryngology
Post-requisite / s CRRI
Course Description
This course is designed as an introduction to ophthalmology. In addition to attending
didactic sessions, the student will learn to take a good ophthalmic history and perform a
good general eye exam in order to detect common abnormalities of the eye and visual
system. Students will learn to interpret the clinical findings and reach a diagnosis and discuss
their management during case based discussions in the classroom, the outpatient and the
bedside. Students will develop and refine skills in the use of the penlight, ophthalmoscope
and slit lamp and will also have ample opportunity to observe a variety of ophthalmic
surgical procedures, such as sub-conjunctival injection, foreign body removal and
nasolacrimal duct syringing performed in the management of common eye disorders.
Aims:
The broad goal the teaching students in ophthalmology is to provide such knowledge and
skills to the students that shall enable him to practice as an internist and as a primary eye
care physician, and also to function effectively as a community health leader to assist in the
prevention of blindness and rehabilitation of the visually impaired.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge Outcome: At the end of the course, the student will have knowledge of
1. Common problems affecting eye
2. Principles of management of major ophthalmic emergencies
3. Main systemic diseases affecting the eye
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 163 | P a g e
4. Effects of local and systemic diseases on patient’s vision and the necessary action
required to minimize the sequelae of such diseases.
5. Adverse drug reactions with special references to ophthalmic manifestations.
6. Eye care education for prevention of eye problems
7. Role of primary health center in organization of eye camps
8. Organization of primary health care and the functioning of the ophthalmic
assistant , eye bank organization
Skill Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. Elicit a history pertinent to general health and ocular status
2. Perform diagnostic procedures such as visual acuity testing, examination of eye,
schiotz tonometry, staining for corneal pathology, confrontation perimetry,
subjective refraction including correction of presbyopia and aphakia, direct
ophthalmoscopy, and conjunctival smear examination and cover test.
3. Diagnose and treat common problems affecting the eye
4. Interpret ophthalmic signs in relation to common systemic disorders
5. Perform therapeutic procedures such as subconjunctival injection,
Corneal/Conjunctival foreign body removal, Carbolic cautery for corneal ulcers,
Nasolacrimal duct syringing, and tarsorraphy.
6. Provide first aid in major ophthalmic emergencies
7. Organize community surveys for visual checkup
8. Organize primary eye care service through primary health care centers.
Attitudinal Outcomes
1. Use effective means of communication with the public and individual to motivate for
surgery in cataract, and for eye donation.
2. Establish rapport with his seniors, colleagues, and paramedical workers, so as to
effectively function as a member of the eye care team.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 164 | P a g e
Title Otorhinolaryngology
Code MED 402
Phase / Year Phase III / Year 4 & Year 5 / Semester VII -X
Duration 6 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Tambi Abraham Cherian
Clerkship Coordinator Prof. Meenu Cherian
Members
Dr. Jenny Cheriathu,
Dr. Muhanned Sultan & Dr. Rizwana B Sheikh
Participating Departments
Otorhinolaryngology, General Surgery, Pediatrics &
Community Medicine
Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills
Co-requisite / s Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Ophthalmology, OBG
Post-requisite / s CRRI
Course Description
The didactic lectures provide essential factual information, and the clinical rotations provide
a practical experience. Students will learn to take a relevant history and perform a basic
head and neck exam with equipments available to a primary care practitioner (flashlight,
tongue blade, otoscope) and perform an ear exam by tympanometry and otoscope. The
students will gain increasing experience discussing the clinical findings to reach a diagnosis
of common problems like allergic rhinitis, sinusitis, otitis media, epistaxis, facial fractures,
hearing loss, dizziness, and swallowing disorders and discuss a treatment plan with the
faculty. Students will be able to observe surgical procedures like ear syringing, nasal packing,
tracheostomy, endoscopy and removal of foreign bodies. The student will be able to
perform laryngoscopy and use of tracheostomy tubes on a manikin in the simulation lab.
Aims:
The broad goal of the teaching of undergraduate students in Otorhinolaryngology is that the
undergraduate student should have acquired adequate knowledge and skills for optimally
dealing with common disorders and emergencies of the upper aerodiigestive tract and the
principles of rehabilitation of the hearing impaired.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Describe the basic pathophysiology of common ENT diseases and emergencies
 Adopt the rational use of commonly used drugs, keeping in mind their adverse reactions.
 Suggest common investigative procedures and their interpretations
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 165 | P a g e
Skills: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Examine and diagnose common ENT problems including the pre-malignant and
malignant disorders of the head and neck
 Manage ENT problems at the first level of care and be able to refer whenever necessary
 Carry out minor surgical procedures like ear syringing, ear dressings, nasal packing etc.
 Assist in certain procedures such as tracheostomy, endoscopies and removal of foreign
bodies
Attitudes: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Show awareness of the need to act immediately in emergencies obstruction to air passages
by foreign bodies
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 166 | P a g e
Title Medicine & Allied Disciplines
Code MED 403
Phase / Year / Semester Phase III / Year 4 & Year 5 / Semester VII - X
Duration 28 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Sheikh Altaf Basha
Clerkship Coordinator Prof. Salwa Abd ElZaher Mabrouk
Members
Dr. Ehab M. Esheiba, Dr. Muhanned A Abdul Wahid,
& Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas
Participating Departments
Internal Medicine, Cardiology, Psychiatry, PHC &
Pharmacology
Pre-requisite / s Phase II, Basic clinical skills
Co-requisite / s
Surgery, Pediatrics, Ophthalmology, Gynecology &
Obstetrics, Otorhinolaryngology
Post-requisite / s CRRI
Course Description
The Medicine clerkship is divided into two rotations one in clerkship year 4 and the other in
year 5. The student will have adequate clinical encounters in both ambulatory and bedside
settings in the outpatient and inpatient departments of the hospital. The student will gain
wide exposure to the medical and conservative management of common acute and chronic
medical disorders. Rotations in allied medical specialties like dermatology and psychiatry will
increase the breadth of the experience to include the management of common skin
disorders and a broad understanding of the human mind and behavior, its normality in
health, abnormality in stress, methods of classifying psychological and psychiatric disorders
and different forms of therapy. It also helps students in gaining an understanding of the
ethical concepts in the field of medicine, the right of patients and the responsibility of health
professionals.
Aims:
The broad goal of the teaching of undergraduate students in Medicine is to ensure that the
graduate will have acquired adequate knowledge, skills and behavioral attributes to practice
as a competent entry-level physician.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: At the end of the Clerkship the student will have achieved cognitive proficiency
in:
 Symptomatology, clinical presentation of common disorders affecting the various organ
systems of the body.
 Various diagnostic modalities for the identification and differentiation of the conditions;
the interpretation of the results
 Treatment strategies, which include drug therapy as well as other forms of therapy.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 167 | P a g e
Skills:
At the end of 5th year internal medicine ambulatory clerkship, the student will have
achieved the following professional skills:
 Eliciting a comprehensive history from the patient and analysis of the various aspects of
the patient’s history.
 Performing a general physical examination followed by detailed Systemic Examination.
 Recording the history and findings of physical examination in a proper format and
presenting the case to the clinical tutor / consultant.
 Discussing the cases, identification of the most likely problem (provisional diagnosis),
listing the differential diagnoses, describing the investigative approach, and discussing
the line of management.
 Interpretation of the laboratory data, investigations such as radiographs, imaging
procedures, ECG, microbiology slides etc.
 The student should have observed common diagnostic and therapeutic procedures (at
least each on two occasions) such as – Pleural peritoneal aspirations, Lumbar Puncture,
Bone marrow aspiration, Liver Biopsy, 2 Echocardiography, TMT, Spirometry, Gastric
lavage, blood gas sampling etc. (As measured by acceptable scores in the periodically
conducted OSCE at the end of each clinical rotations and the final professional clinical
examination)
Attitudes: The student will have acquired the attitudinal skills to:
 Accept the patient’s welfare as the first priority
 Respect, protect and value patient’s right to privacy
 Demonstrate the ability to participate in team work. (eg. project work)
 Willingness to participate in group learning activities such as seminars and symposia
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 168 | P a g e
Title Surgery and Allied Disciplines
Code MED 404
Phase / Year / Semester Phase III / Year 4 & 5 / Semester VII -X
Duration 20 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Yasien Malallah Taher
Clerkship Coordinator Dr. Mohammed Sohby
Members
Dr. Amit Chaturvedi, Dr. Sona Chaturvedi
& Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike
Participating Departments General Surgery, Orthopedics, Anesthesiology & Anatomy
Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical Skills
Co-requisite / s
Medicine, Pediatrics, Gynecology & Obstetrics,
Ophthalmology and Otorhinolaryngology
Post-requisite/ s CRRI
Course Description
The clerkship in Surgery is designed to give the student a broad exposure to the principles of
diagnosis and management of common surgical problems, including surgical emergencies;
the indications and methods for fluid and electrolyte replacement therapy including blood
transfusion, the importance of asepsis, disinfection and sterilization and use of antibiotics,
and lastly, common malignancies and their management and prevention. During the course
of the rotation, the student will be expected to focus on several areas of study, which will
include basic principles of peri-operative management of the patient with a surgical
problem. An awareness of the nature and management of surgical disease is developed by
case oriented small group sessions, rounds and weekly conferences. The surgical experience
will be further widened to include surgical aspects of orthopedics, anesthesia and radiology
Orthopedics includes the principles of recognition and management of common bone and
joint injuries and infections; recognition of congenital and skeletal anomalies for correction
or rehabilitation; importance of metabolic bone diseases, diagnosis of neoplasms affecting
bones; recognition and management of degenerative and rheumatological diseases of
musculoskeletal system; principles of reconstructive surgery of musculoskeletal system.
Anesthesiology includes principles of the pre-, intra- and post-operative anesthetic
management of the surgical patient with particular emphasis on relief of preoperative
anxiety, intraoperative maintenance of normal oxygenation when normal respiration is
depressed under anesthesia and postoperative pain relief Radiology will include the
identification of normal findings on routine X-rays of chest, abdomen, head and limbs, the
recognition of deviations of normal and their significance in the management of the
underlying disorders.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 169 | P a g e
Aim:
The broad goal of teaching undergraduate students in Surgery is to produce graduates
capable of delivering efficient first contact surgical care.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
 Describe etiology, pathophysiology, principles of diagnosis and management of common
surgical problems including emergencies.
 Define indications and methods for fluid and electrolyte replacement therapy including
blood transfusion.
 Define asepsis, disinfection and sterilization and recommend judicious use of antibiotics.
 Describe common malignancies in the country and their management including
prevention.
 Enumerate different types of anesthetic agents, their indications, mode of
administration, contraindications and side effects.
Skills:
 Elicit a comprehensive history on all surgical patients.
 Identify and diagnose simple conditions like an abscess, thyroid swellings, superficial
tumors, breast lumps and abdominal masses.
 List a differential diagnosis for each of the above conditions in the order of priority.
 Evaluate patients with varicose veins, peripheral arterial disease and diabetic foot ulcers
clinically.
 Perform clinical examination of trauma patients and explain the basics of the initial care
of these patients e.g. A,B&C.
 Interpret common hematologic abnormalities (anemia, Leukocytosis, etc. ) and correlate
them with the clinical condition.
 Decide which investigations are mandatory in patients with common surgical problems
e.g. acute abdomen
 Interpret urine examination reports especially with reference to the presence of
hematuria and pyuria, and correlate the findings clinically. On the basis of the normal
values for: fasting and post prandial blood sugars, blood urea and S. creatinine, Liver
function tests, coagulation parameters and S. electrolytes and correlate these with the
clinical features.
 Interpret plain and contrast X – ray films especially of the abdomen and the GIT (Barium
series) and explain the basics of evaluation of abdominal CT films.
 Explain to the patient the modalities of vascular imaging – Doppler / angiogram and the
indications for these clinically.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 170 | P a g e
 Recognize shock, especially hemorrhagic / septic shock and describe the principles of
fluid management.
 Demonstrate basic techniques of dressing of wounds
 Demonstrate basic techniques of bandaging
 Identify clinical conditions that require surgical intervention and list the pre-operative
corrective measures required in common surgical problems. E.g.: Correction of fluid /
electrolyte balance, Correction of anemia
 Explain the principles of monitoring patients after surgery – urine output, vital
parameters, role of recording central venous pressure etc.
 Perform physical examination of patients with disorders of the musculoskeletal system.
 Identify common musculoskeletal injuries
 Differentiate between life / limb threatening injuries from others.
 Identify common musculoskeletal infections.
 Identify congenital and skeletal abnormalities.
 Identify metabolic bone disorders.
 Recognize tumors and tumor-like conditions of bones and soft tissues
 Diagnose degenerative and rheumatological diseases of musculoskeletal system.
 Recognize abnormalities of Musculoskeletal system in x-rays
 Interpret laboratory results in various diseases of the musculoskeletal system.
Attitudes:
 Demonstrate ability to communicate with the patient and attendants and explain about
the diagnosis and modalities of treatment available with the risks of each type of therapy
 Demonstrate willingness to practice ethical medicine and to respect patient’s rights for
confidentiality of Information
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 171 | P a g e
Title Obstetrics & Gynecology
Code MED 405
Phase / Year Phase III / Year 4 & 5 / Semester VII -X
Duration 10 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Mawahib Abd Salman
Clerkship Coordinator Dr. Shanthi Fernandes
Members
Dr. Tarek Fowzy, Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan &
Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari
Participating Departments Obstetrics & Gynecology, Radiology, Urology & Physiology
Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills
Co-requisites / s
Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Ophthalmology &
Otorhinolaryngology
Post-requisites / s CRRI
Course Description
In the Obstetrics and Gynecology, the student will gain the skills of gynecologic and
obstetric history taking and physical examination in the outpatient and wards and practical
experience in the delivery room under the close supervision of the staff. The student will
avail of these opportunities to reach a diagnosis and discuss the management of
gynecologic and obstetric disorders with the faculty while dealing with patients in the
outpatient, the delivery room, the operation theater and the wards. The performance of
procedural skills like delivering a baby, taking a PAP smear, suturing an episiotomy will be
learnt and practiced in the safe environment of the Simulation Lab. Formal and informal
daily teaching sessions and rounds with the faculty are a part of this clerkship experience.
Aims:
The broad goal of the teaching of undergraduate students in Obstetrics and Gynecology is
that he/she should acquire understanding of anatomy, physiology and pathophysiology of
the reproductive system and gain the ability to optimally manage common conditions
affecting it.
Intended Learning Outcomes:
By the end of the Obstetric clerkship the student should achieve cognitive proficiency in:
Knowledge:
 Physiological changes in pregnancy, the common symptoms & signs of pregnancy.
 Normal pelvis, abnormal pelvic types.
 Normal and abnormal labor
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 172 | P a g e
 Normal & abnormal puerperium
 Routine antenatal care, antenatal advice, routine antenatal investigations – blood
investigations, ultrasound scan.
 High risk pregnancies, abnormal presentations
 Complications of labor
Skill:
 To elicit a comprehensive history, and calculate Expected Date of Delivery from the date
of Last Menstrual Period, determine gestational age in weeks.
 To analyze and document in clinical history in proper chronological order.
 Perform general examination; check vital signs, and breast examination.
 To perform the various obstetric maneuvers including auscultation for the fetal heart
sounds.
 To perform per speculum & digital examination in pregnancy and if necessary assess the
pelvis & Bishop’s score (cervical assessment)
Attitudinal Outcomes:
 Demonstrate readiness to follow ethical guidelines related to pregnancy
 Demonstrate readiness to consider the patient’s welfare as first priority
 Recognize the importance of protecting & valuing patient’s privacy
 Demonstrate willingness to accept teamwork in providing medical care
By the end of the Gynecology clerkship the student should have achieved cognitive
proficiency in:
Knowledge:
 Symptomatology & presentation of common gynecological disorders.
 Various methods of contraception.
 Appropriate investigations to be performed to aid in the diagnosis & to interpret the
results. Eg: S.BHCG in titer for cases of ectopic pregnancies & molar pregnancies, etc.
Ultrasound Scan.
 Treatment strategies, medical & surgical.
Skills:
 Elicit a comprehensive history & analyze it, record in chronological order.
 Perform general physical examination; check vitals, thyroid & breast examination,
abdomen examination, per speculum & per vaginal examination.
 Prepare a pap smear; collect high vaginal swab & cervical swab.
 Make provisional diagnosis & list differential diagnosis.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 173 | P a g e
 Order relevant investigations & discuss the line of management.
 Interpret the investigations results like Pap smear report, semen analysis report,
Histopathology report of cervical punch biopsy & D&C, HSG (Hystero-salphingogram),
vaginal swab report, ultrasound etc.
 Observed common procedures in the OPD like IUCD insertion, colposcopy, cervical
cauterization, endometrial biopsy, and Incision of Bartholin’s abscess.
 Attended & observed surgical procedures (at least 2 each) like fractional curettage,
Diagnostic D&C, Marsupilization of Bartholin’s cyst, Incision & drainage of Bartholin’s
abscess myomectomy, hysterectomy – Abdominal & vaginal.
Attitude:
 Observe medical ethics to consider patients welfare as first priority
 Protecting & valuing patients privacy
 Spirit of teamwork
 Respect for teachers and for fellow students
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 174 | P a g e
Title Pediatrics
Code MED 406
Phase / Year / Semester Phase III / Year 4 & 5 / Semester VII -X
Duration 10 weeks
Chairperson Prof. Mahmoud Shamseldeen
Clerkship Coordinator Prof. Ignatius Edwin D’Souza
Members
Dr. Wesam Khadum, Dr. Malini Vijayan & Prof. Ishtiyaq
Ahmed Shaafie
Participating Departments
Pediatrics, Dermatology, Obstetrics & Gynecology and
Biochemistry
Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills
Co-requisite / s
Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Gynecology & Obstetrics,
Ophthalmology& Otorhinolaryngology
Post-requisite / s CRRI
Course Description
The student will learn to obtain clinical history in an age-appropriate and sensitive manner
from a child and or the accompanying adult and conduct a pediatric physical examination
appropriate to the condition and the age of the patient. During presentation of the clinical
findings to the faculty, the student will interpret the clinical findings and available lab results
to suggest a diagnosis and discuss the management of the disease. The student will assess
growth and development and advocate safety measures to prevent injury and disease. Many
case based sessions have been planned to provide alternative clinical experiences. The
simulation lab will allow the learner to practice in a safe environment.
Aims:
The broad goal of teaching undergraduate students in Pediatrics is to acquire adequate
knowledge and appropriate skills for optimally dealing with major health problems of
children to ensure their optimal growth and development.
Intended Learning Outcomes: At the conclusion of the clerkship in Pediatrics, the student
should be able to:
 Recognize common developmental and medical problems in infants and children
 Elicit a comprehensive history that includes perinatal, developmental, nutritional and
family history and immunization history in communication with the child’s parents.
 Conduct an adequate physical examination in sick children of different age group.
 Explain developmental milestones in a child and use the information in assessment of
infants and children.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 175 | P a g e
 Recognize the specific requirements in neonates and identify differences in the
presentation of clinical problems in this age group compared to children in the older age
group.
 Describe the appropriate investigations that would help in confirming the diagnosis in
common problems in infants and children.
 Describe the principles of administration of drugs in children and explain the rationale
 Describe and assist in resuscitative procedures in the new born.
 Participate in clinical problem solving sessions and demonstrate the ability for data
search and analysis
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 176 | P a g e
14.8 Typical Week
14.8.1 PHASE – I
Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
8.30 am –
9.30 am
Formative Quiz Lecture Lecture Lecture Lecture
9.30 am –
10.30 am
Discussion on
Quiz
Lecture Lecture
Preparation
for Seminar
Lecture
10.30 am –
11.00 am
T E A B R E A K
11.00 am –
01.00 pm
CBL Part I
(Brainstorming)
Practical / CAL /
SDL
Practical / SDL /
Self Study
Integrated
Seminar
Mini-project
on Health
Days /
Preceptor
Meeting / SDL
01.00 pm –
01.30 pm
L U N C H B R E A K
01.30 pm –
03.30 pm
CBL Self Study
Practical/SDL/
Self Study
Practical/CAL/SDL
CBL Self
Study
CBL Part II
(Review and
Entry)
03.30 pm –
04.30 pm
Faculty office hours- You can meet faculty members in their offices to clarify doubts
and ask for advice related to academics
Multimedia rooms (Computer Labs) will be used only for CAL sessions.
For SDL, students will use books and own laptops (If needed).
14.8.2 PHASE – II Year 1
Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
8.30 am –
9.30 am
Lecture Lecture Lecture
BCS Batches A
& B
Lecture
9.30 am –
10.30 am
CA Lecture Lecture Lecture
10.30 am –
11.00 am
T E A B R E A K
11.00 am –
01.00 pm
CBL Part – I
Batches
A & B
Practical / Video
/ Reading
Assignments
Batch A / B
SDL / CAL /
Practical
Batch A / B
BCS
Batches
A & B
*SDL
Seminar
preparation
01.00 pm –
01.30 pm
L U N C H B R E A K
01.30 pm –
03.30 pm
SDL – CBL (LO)
Batches
A & B
Practical / Video
/ Reading
Assignments
Batch A / B
Resource
session
Batches
A & B
CBL Part – II SS
BCS: Basic Clinical Skills CBL: Case Based Learning SS: Self Study
SDL: Self Directed Learning LO: Learning Objectives CA: Continuous Assessment CAL:
Computer Assisted Learning
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 177 | P a g e
14.8.3 PHASE – II Year 2
Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
8.30 am –
9.30 am
Lecture CA Lecture Lecture
BCS Batches
A & B9.30 am –
10.30 am
Lecture Lecture Lecture Lecture
10.30 am –
11.00 am
T E A B R E A K
11.00 am –
01.00 pm
CAL / Practical
Batch A / B
CBL – SDL
Seminar
preparation /
SDL / CAL /
Practical
Batch A / B
SDL / CAL /
Practical
Batch A / B
BCS
Batches
A & B
01.00 pm –
01.30 pm
L U N C H B R E A K
01.30 pm –
03.30 pm
CBL Part – I
Batch A & B
CAL / Practical
Batch A / B
SDL / CAL /
Practical
Batch A / B
CBL Resource
Session / SDL /
CAL / Practical
Batch A / B
CBL Part – II /
SDL / CAL /
Practical
BCS: Basic Clinical Skills CBL: Case Based Learning S: Seminar
SDL: Self Directed Learning LO: Learning Objectives CA: Continuous Assessment
CAL: Computer Assisted Learning
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 178 | P a g e
14.8.4 PHASE – III Year 1
Day * 8.00 am – 01.00 pm
01.00 –
01.30 pm
01.30 - 3.00 pm 3.00 – 4.00 pm
Sunday
① Journal Club / Clinical
Society Meeting
Case Based
Learning (CBL)
Expert Forum
Ward Round & Clinics
B
Monday Ward Round & Clinics
R
Tuesday
② Grand Rounds
E
Ward Round & Clinics
A
Wednesday Ward Round & Clinics
K
② Grand Rounds
Thursday Ward Round & Clinics
Lecture /
Multidisciplinary
Seminar
Lecture /
Multidisciplinary
Seminar
Note:
* Reporting time depends on Clinical Site requirements
① Journal Club meeting 1st
Sunday of the month
Clinical Society meeting every 3rd
Sunday of the month
② Grand Rounds scheduled every 3rd
Wednesday & 4th
Tuesday of the month
14.8.5 PHASE – III Year 2
Clinic Theory
Day * 8.00 am – 09.00 am
9.00 am to
12.00 pm
12.00 pm –
01.30 pm
01.30 -
3.00 pm
3.00 –
4.00 pm
Sunday Morning Reporting
Ward rounds
/ Clinics
B
SGL Tutorial
Monday Grand Rounds R
Tuesday Morning Reporting E
Wednesday Morning Reporting A
Thursday Morning Reporting K
* Reporting time depends on Clinical Site requirements
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 179 | P a g e
14.9 PBL Week
14.9.1 PHASE – II Year 1
Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
8.30 am –
9.30 am
PBL Part – I
Batches A & B
(5 groups)
SDL /
Resource
Session
SDL /
Resource
Session BCS Batches A
& B
Expert Forum
9.30 am –
10.30 am
SDL SDL
10.30 am –
11.00 am
T E A B R E A K
11.00 am –
01.00 pm
SDL
SDL /
Resource
Session
SDL
BCS
Batches
A & B
SDL
01.00 pm –
01.30 pm
L U N C H B R E A K
01.30 pm –
03.30 pm
SDL / Resource
Session
SDL /
Resource
Session
PBL Part – II
Batches
A & B
PBL Part – III
Batches
A & B
CA
MEQ
BCS: Basic Clinical Skills PBL: Problem Based Learning SDL: Self Directed Learning
CA: Continuous Assessment MEQ: Modifies Essay Questions
14.9.2 PHASE – II Year 2
Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
8.30 am – 9.30
am
PBL Part – I
Batches A & B
(5 groups)
SDL /
Resource
Session
PBL Part – II
Batches A & B
SDL / Resource
Session BCS
Batches A & B9.30 am –
10.30 am
SDL SDL
10.30 am –
11.00 am
T E AB R E A K
11.00 am –
01.00 pm
SDL
SDL /
Resource
Session
SDL
PBL Part – III
Batches A & B
BCS
01.00 pm –
01.30 pm
L U N C H B R E A K
01.30 pm –
03.30 pm
SDL /
Resource
Session
SDL /
Resource
Session
SDL /
Resource
Session
Expert Forum MEQ
BCS: Basic Clinical Skills PBL: Problem Based Learning SDL: Self Directed Learning
CA: Continuous Assessment MEQ: Modifies Essay Questions
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 180 | P a g e
15.0 List of Text Books, Reference Books, Recommended Readings
Phase – I
Course Title: MED 101 Language and Communication Skills
1. McCullagh Marie, Wright, Ros. Good Practice: Communication Skills in English for the
Medical Practitioner (Student's Book). Cambridge University Press; 2008. ISBN:
9780521755900
2. Glendinning, Eric H, Holmstrom, Beverly A.S. English in Medicine. Cambridge
University Press; 2008. ISBN: 9780521606660.
3. Glendinning Eric H, Howard Ron. Professional English in Use Medicine. Cambridge
University Press; 2007. ISBN: 9780521682015.
Additional Readings:
 Beebe Steven A, Beebe Susan J, Ivy Diana K. Communication Principles for a Lifetime.
Volume 1: Principles of Communication
Volume 2: Interpersonal Communication
Volume 3: Communicating in Groups and Teams
Volume 4: Presentational Speaking. Pearson Benjamin Cummings; 2009. ISBN:
9780205593576
 Gamble Teri Kwal, Gamble Michael. Communication Works. McGraw Hill; 2006.
ISBN: 9780073534220.
 Lloyd Margaret, Bor Robert. Communication Skills for Medicine. Churchill
Livingstone; 2004. ISBN: 0443074119.
 Bickley Lynn S. Bates Pocket Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking.
Lippincott William & Wilkins; 2004. ISBN: 0781738180 .
 Abdel Hamid El-Hawary. Medical Terminology: Made Easy. UAE: Gulf Medical College,
Ajman; 2000.
 Jean M.Denneril. Medical Terminology Made Easy. 4th
ed. Delmar Cengage Learning;
2006. ISBN-10: 1401898847, ISBN-13: 978-1401898847
 JeHarned. Medical Terminology Made Easy. Tobey Press; 2010
ISBN-10:1446525457, ISBN-13: 978-1446525456
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 181 | P a g e
Course Title: MED 102 Psychosocial Sciences
1. Myers David G. Psychology. 9th
ed. Worth Publishers; 2009. ISBN: 978-1429215978
2. Graham Scambler. Sociology as Applied to Medicine. 6th
ed. Saunders; 2008.
Additional Readings:
 Atkinson and Hilgards. Introduction to Psychology.15th
ed. Harcourt; 2009. ISBN:
9781844807284
 Myers David G. Exploring Psychology. 8th
ed. Worth Publishers; 2009. ISBN: 978-
1429238267.
 Barbara Fadem. Behavioral Science in Medicine. 2nd
ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins;
2012. ISBN: 978-1609136642.
 Sadock Benjamin J, Sadock Virginia A. Kaplan and Sadock's Synopsis of Psychiatry:
Behavioral Sciences. 10th
ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2007. ISBN: 978-
0781773270.
 Mitchell Feldman, John Christensen. Behavioral Medicine: A Guide for Clinical
Practice. 3rd
ed. McGraw-Hill Medical; 2007. ISBN: 978-0071438605.
Course Title: MED 103 Cells, Molecules and Genes
1. Eroschenko Victor P. diFiore's Atlas of Histology: With Functional Correlations. 12th
ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN: 978-1451113419.
2. Murray Robert. Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry. 29th
ed. Mcgraw Hill Professional;
2012. ISBN: 978-0071792776
3. Westman Judith A. Medical Genetics for the Modern Clinician. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins; 2005. ISBN: 978-0781757607.
Additional Readings:
 Vinay Kumar, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th
ed.
Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.
 Alberts Bruce, Johnson, Alexander. Molecular Biology of the Cell. 5th
ed. Garland
Science; 2007. ISBN: 978-0815341055
 Thomas M. Devlin. Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. 7th
ed. John
Wiley & Sons; 2010. ISBN: 978-0470281734.
 Korf Bruce R. Human Genetics and Genomics. 3rd
ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2006.
ISBN-13: 978-0632046560.
 Denniston Katherine, Topping Joseph. General, Organic & Biochemistry. 7th
ed.
McGraw-Hill; 2010. ISBN: 978-0077354800.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 182 | P a g e
Course Title: MED 104 Tissues and Organs
1. Elaine N. Marieb, Katja N. Hoehn. Human Anatomy & Physiology. 9th
ed. Benjamin
Cummings; 2012. ISBN: 978-0321694157
2. Moore, Keith L, Dalley, Arthur F. Clinically Oriented Anatomy. 6th
ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ISBN: 978-0781775250
3. Eroschenko Victor P. diFiore's Atlas of Histology: with Functional Correlations. 12th
ed.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN: 978-1451113419.
Additional Readings:
 Tortora Gerard J, Derrickson Bryan H. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. 13th
ed.
Wiley; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0470565100.
 Hall John E. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th
ed. Saunders; 2010.
ISBN-13: 978-1416045748.
 Arthur Anne, M.R. Grant's Atlas of Anatomy. 13th
ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins;
2012. ISBN-13: 978-1608317561.
 Vinay Kumar, Abul Abbas, Jon C. Aster. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease.
8th
ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.
 Young Barbara, Stewart William, O'Dowd Geraldine. Wheater's Basic Pathology: A
Text, Atlas and Review of Histopathology. 5th
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2009. ISBN-13:
978-0443067976.
Course Title: MED 105 Embryogenesis and Life Cycle
1. Moore Keith L, Persaud T. V. N. Before We Are Born. 8th
ed. Saunders; 2012. ISBN-13:
978-1437720013.
2. Stevens Vivian M, Redwood, Susan K. Rapid Review Behavioral Science. 2nd
ed.
Mosby; 2006. ISBN-13: 978-0323045711.
Additional Readings:
 Schoenwolf Gary C, Bleyl Steven B, Brauer Philip R. Larsen's Human Embryology. 4th
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-0443068119.
 Sadler Thomas W. Langman's Medical Embryology. 12th
ed. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1451113426.
 Sigelman Carol K, Rider Elizabeth A. Life-Span Human Development. 7th
ed.
Wadsworth Publishing; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1111342739
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 183 | P a g e
Course Title: MED 106 Nutrition and Metabolism
1. Mann Jim, Truswell Stewart. Essentials of Human Nutrition. 4th
ed. Oxford University
Press; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0199566341.
2. Pamela Champe. Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews: Biochemistry. 4th
ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ASIN: B005RQJ1SY
Additional Readings:
 Bronk J Ramsey. Human Metabolism. Pearson Higher Education; 1999.
ISBN-13: 978-0582026551.
 Geissler Catherine, Powers Hilary. Human Nutrition. 12th
ed. Churchill Livingstone;
2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702031182
 Devlin Thomas M. Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. 7th
ed. John
Wiley & Sons; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0470281734.
 Bender David A. Introduction to Nutrition and Metabolism. 4th
ed. CRC Press; 2007.
ISBN-13: 978-1420043129
 Murray Robert, Rodwell Victor. Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry. 29th
ed. McGraw-Hill
Medical; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0071765763.
Course Title: MED 107 Internal & External Environment
1. Ananthanarayan R, JayaramPaniker, C.K. Ananthanarayan and Paniker's Textbook of
Microbiology. 8th
ed. Universities Press; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-8173716744
2. Goering Richard, Dockrell Hazel. Mims' Medical Microbiology. 5th
ed. Saunders; 2012.
ISBN-13: 978-0723436010.
3. Park K. Park’s Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine. 19th
ed. BanarsidasBhanot
Publishers; 2007. ISBN 8190128280.
4. Hall John E. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th
ed. Saunders; 2010.
ISBN-13: 978-1416045748
5. Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease.
8th
ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.
6. Katzung Bertram, Masters Susan. Basic and Clinical Pharmacology. 12th
ed. McGraw-
Hill Medical; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0071764018.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 184 | P a g e
Reference Books:
 Chatterjee K. D. Parasitology: Protozoology & Helminthology. 13th
ed. CBS Publishers
& Distributors Private Limited; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-8123918105
 Widmaier Eric, Raff Hershel. Vander's Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body
Function with ARIS. 11th
ed. McGraw-Hill; 2007. ISBN-13: 978-0077216092.
 Rosenstock Linda, Cullen Mark, Brodkin Carl. Textbook of Clinical Occupational and
Environmental Medicine. 2nd
ed. Saunders; 2004. ISBN-13: 978-0721689746.
 Brunton Laurence, Chabner Bruce. Goodman and Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis
of Therapeutics. 12th
ed. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0071624428.
Videos and CD ROMs:
 Interactive Case Study CD Companion to Robbins and Cotran Pathologic Basis of
Disease 7th
Ed.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 185 | P a g e
Phase – II
Textbooks:
1. McCullagh Marie, Wright Ros. Good Practice: Communication Skills in English for the
Medical Practitioner / Student's Books. Cambridge University Press; 2008. ISBN :
9780521755900
2. Glendinning Eric H, Holmstrom Beverly A.S. English in Medicine. Cambridge Press;
2008. ISBN: 9780521606660.
3. Glendinning Eric H, Howard Ron. Professional English in Use Medicine. Cambridge
University Press; 2007. ISBN: 9780521682015.
4. David G. Myers. Psychology. 9th
ed. Worth Publishers; 2009. ISBN: 978-1429215978
5. Graham Scambler. Sociology as Applied to Medicine. 6th
ed. Saunders; 2008.
6. Vian M. Stevens, Susan K. Redwood. Rapid Review Behavioral Science. 2nd
ed. Mosby;
2006. ISBN-13: 978-0323045711.
7. Victor P. Eroschenko. diFiore's Atlas of Histology: with Functional Correlations. 12th
ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN: 978-1451113419.
8. Elaine N. Marieb, Katja N. Hoehn. Human Anatomy & Physiology with Mastering. 8th
ed. Benjamin Cummings; 2010. ISBN : 978-0321694157
9. Keith L. Moore, Arthur F. Dalley. Clinically Oriented Anatomy. 6th
ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ISBN: 978-0781775250
10. John E. Hall. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th
ed. Saunders; 2010.
ISBN-13: 978-1416045748.
11. Judith A. Westman . Medical Genetics for the Modern Clinician. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins; 2005. ISBN: 978-0781757607.
12. Moore Keith. Before we are Born. 8th
ed. Saunders; 2012. ISBN-10:1416037055.
13. Robert Murray. Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry. 29th
ed. Mcgraw Hill Professional;
2012. ISBN: 978-0071792776
14. Harvey Richard A, Ferrier Denise R. Biochemistry (Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews
Series). 5th
ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1608314126
15. Jim Mann, Stewart Truswell. Essentials of Human Nutrition. 4th
ed. Oxford University
Press; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0199566341.
16. Ananthanarayan R, C.K.JayaramPaniker. Ananthanarayan and Paniker's Textbook of
Microbiology. 8th
ed. Universities Press; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-8173716744
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 186 | P a g e
17. Richard Goering, Hazel Dockrell . Mims Medical Microbiology. 5th
ed. Saunders; 2012.
ISBN-13: 978-0723436010.
18. Vinay Kumar, Abul K. Abbas, Jon C Aster. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of
Disease. 8th
ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN: 978-1416031215
19. Park K. Park’s Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine. 19th
ed. BanarsidasBhanot
Publishers; 2007. ISBN 8190128280.
20. Bertram Katzung, Susan Masters. Basic and Clinical Pharmacology. 12th
ed. McGraw-
Hill Medical; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0071764018.
Course Title: MED 201 Integumentary System
Textbook:
1. MacKie Rona M. Clinical Dermatology. 5th
ed. USA: Oxford University Press; 2003.
ISBN: 978-0198525806.
Additional Readings:
 Campbell Mary K, Farrell Shawn O. Biochemistry. 7th
ed. Brooks Cole; 2011.
ISBN-13: 978-0840068583.
 Williams Norman S, Bulstrode Christopher J.K, O'Connell P Ronan. Bailey and Love's
Short Practice of Surgery. 25th
ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2008.
ISBN-13: 978-0340939321.
Course Title: MED 202 Blood and Immune System
Textbooks:
1. Hoffbrand A.V, Moss P.A.H. Essential Hematology. 6th
ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2011.
ISBN-13: 978-1405198905.
2. Playfair J.H.L, Chain B.M. Immunology at a Glance. 9th
ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2009.
ISBN-13: 978-1405180528.
Additional Readings:
1. Colledge Nicki R, Walker Brian R, Ralston Stuart H. Davidsons Principles and Practice
of Medicine. 21st
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702030857
2. Abbas Abul K, Lichtman Andrew H. Cellular and Molecular Immunology. 7th
ed.
Saunders; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1437715286.
3. Hoffbrand A. Victor. Color Atlas of Clinical Hematology. 4th
ed. Mosby; 2009.
ISBN-13: 978-0323044530.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 187 | P a g e
Course Title: MED 203 Cardiovascular System
Textbooks:
1. Noble Alan, Johnson Robert, Thomas Alan, Bass Paul. The Cardiovascular System:
Systems of the Body Series. 2nd
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-
0702033742.
2. Dubin Dale. Rapid Interpretation of EKG’s. 6th
ed. Cover Pub Co; 2000.
ISBN-13: 978-0912912066.
3. Hampton John R. The ECG Made Easy. 7th
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2008.
ISBN 9780443068263.
Additional Readings:
 Katz Arnold M. Physiology of the Heart. 5th
ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2010.
ISBN-13: 978-1608311712.
 Lilly Leonard S. Pathophysiology of Heart Disease. 5th
ed. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1605477237.
 Colledge Nicki R, Walker Brian R, Ralston Stuart H. Davidsons Principles and Practice
of Medicine. 21st
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702030857.
 Aaronson Philip I, Ward Jeremy P.T. The Cardiovascular System at a Glance. 4th
ed.
Wiley-Blackwell; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0470655948.
Course Title: MED 204 Respiratory System
Textbook:
1. Davies Andrew, Moores Carl. The Respiratory System: Basic Science and Clinical
Conditions. 2nd
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010.ISBN-13: 978-0702033704.
Additional Readings:
 Ward Jeremy P.T, Ward Jane, Leach Richard M, Wiener Charles M. The Respiratory
System at a Glance. 3rd
ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1405199193.
 Gardenhire Douglas S. Rau's Respiratory Care Pharmacology. 8th
ed. Mosby; 2011.
ISBN-13: 978-0323075282.
 West John B. Pulmonary Pathophysiology: The Essentials. 8th
ed. Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-1451107135.
 Rao Nagesh kumar G. Textbook of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology. 2nd
ed. Jaypee
Brothers Medical Pub; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-8184487060.
CDs: Robbins Interactive CD-Rom for respiratory diseases.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 188 | P a g e
Course Title: MED 205 Alimentary System
Textbook:
1. Margaret E. Smith. The Digestive System. 2nd
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-
9780702033674
Additional Readings:
1. Smith Fred. J. Taylor's Principles and Practice of Medical Jurisprudence. Vol 2 of 2.
Gale, Making of Modern Law; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1240137978.
2. Rose Suzanne. Gastrointestinal and Hepatobiliary Pathophysiology. 2nd
ed. Hayes
Barton Press; 2004. ISBN-13: 978-1593771812.
3. Johnson Leonard R. Gastrointestinal Physiology. 7th
ed. Mosby; 2006.
ISBN-13: 978-0323033916.
4. Chatterjee K D. Parasitology: Protozoology & Helminthology. 13th
ed. CBS Publishers
& Distributors Private Limited; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-8123918105.
Course Title: MED 206 Urinary System
Textbook:
1. Field Michael, Pollock Carol, Harris David. The Renal System: Basic Science and Clinical
Conditions. 2nd
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-9780702033711
Online resources – Get your username & password from the librarian.
http://www.accessmedicine.com/resourceTOC.aspx?resourceID=57
Course Title: MED 207 Reproductive System
Textbook:
1. Heffner Linda J, Schust Danny J. Reproductive System at a Glance. 3rd
ed. Wiley-
Blackwell; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1405194525.
Reference Textbooks:
 Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto and Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of
Disease. 8th
ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.
 Frohlich Edward D.Rypins Basic Sciences Review. 18th
ed. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins; 2001. ISBN-13: 978-0781725187.
 DeGown Richard L, Brown Donald D. DeGowin's Diagnostic Examination. 9th
ed.
McGraw-Hill Professional; 2008.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 189 | P a g e
 Neville F Hacker. Essentials of Obstetrics and Gynecology. 5th
ed. Saunders; 2009.
ISBN-13: 978-1416059400.
 Tortora Gerard J, Derrickson Bryan H. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. 13th
ed.
Wiley; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0470565100.
 Williams Norman S, Bulstrode Christopher J.K, O'Connell P Ronan. Bailey and Love's
Short Practice of Surgery. 25th
ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2008.
ISBN-13: 978-0340939321.
 Park K. Park’s Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine. 19th
ed. BanarsidasBhanot
Publishers; 2007. ISBN 8190128280.
Course Title: MED 208 Central Nervous System
Textbooks:
1. Hirsch Martin C; Kramer Thomas. Neuroanatomy: 3 D- Stereoscopic Atlas of the
Human Brain. Springer; 2013 (reprint). ISBN 978-3642636097.
2. Hall John E. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th
ed. Saunders; 2010.
ISBN-13: 978-1416045748.
3. Barker Roger A, Barasi Stephen, Neal Michael J. Neuroscience at a Glance. 3rd
ed.
Wiley-Blackwell; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-1405150453.
4. Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease.
8th
ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.
5. Gilroy John. Basic Neurology. McGraw Hill; 2000. ISBN 007115289x.
Course Title: MED 209 Musculoskeletal System
Textbook:
1. Sambrook Philip, Schrieber Leslie, Taylor Thomas K, Ellis Andrew. The
Musculoskeletal System: Systems of the Body Series. 2nd
ed. Churchill Livingstone;
2010.ISBN-13: 978-0702033773.
References Textbooks:
 Hamblen David L, Simpson Hamish. Adams’s Outline of Fractures Including Joint
Injuries. 12th
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2007. ISBN-13: 978-0443102974.
 Moore Keith L, Dalley Arthur F, Agur Anne M.R. Clinically Oriented Anatomy. 6th
ed.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0781775250.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 190 | P a g e
 Young Barbara, Lowe James S, Stevens Alan, Heath John W, Deakin Philip J.
Wheater's Functional Histology: A Text and Color Atlas. 5th
ed. Churchill Livingstone;
2006. ISBN-13: 978-0443068508.
 Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease.
8th
ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.
Course Title: MED 210 Endocrine System
Textbook:
1. Hinson Joy, Raven Peter, Chew Shern. The Endocrine System - Basic Science and
Clinical Conditions. Churchill Livingstone; 2006. ISBN 9780443062377.
Additional Readings:
 Guyton A C, Hall J E. Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th
ed. Philadelphia: W.B.
Sauders: 2010
 Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotrans Pathologic Basis of
Disease. 8th
ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.
 Niewoehner Catharine B. Endocrine Pathophysiology. 2nd
ed. Hayes Barton Press;
2004. ISBN-13: 978-1593771744.
Reference Books:
 Jameson Larry J.Harrison's Endocrinology. 2nd
ed. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2010.
ISBN-13: 978-0071741446.
 Larsen P Reed, Kronenberg Henry M, MelmedShlomo, Polonsky Kenneth. Williams
Textbook of Endocrinology. 12th
ed. Saunders; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1437703245.
 Gardner David G, Shoback Dolores. Greenspans Basic and Clinical Endocrinology. 9th
ed. McGraw-Hill Medical; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0071622431.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 191 | P a g e
Phase - III
Internal Medicine
1. College Nicki R, Walker Brian R, Ralston Stuart H. Davidson's Principles and Practice
of Medicine. 21st
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702030857.
2. Alguire Patrick C. Internal Medicine Essentials for Clerkship Students 2007 – 2008.
American College of Physicians; 2006. ISBN – 9781930513822.
3. Douglas Graham, Nicol Fiona, Robertson Colin. Macleod's Clinical Examination. 12th
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0443068485.
4. Wolff Klaus, Johnson Richard. Fitzpatrick's Color Atlas and Synopsis of Clinical
Dermatology. 6th
ed. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0071599757.
General Surgery
1. Williams Norman S, Bulstrode Christopher J.K, O'Connell P Ronan. Bailey and Love's
Short Practice of Surgery. 25th
ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-
0340939321.
2. Adams George A, Adams Gregg A, Garland, Adella M, Shatney, Clayton H, Sherck John
P, Wren Sherry M. Surgery Clerkship Guide. Mosby; 2004. ISBN - 9780323018579.
3. Ciocca Rocco G, Rettie, Candice S, Lowry Stephen F. Learning Surgery: The Surgery
Clerkship Manual. Springer; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1441919786.
4. Browse Norman L., Black John, Burnand Kevin G.,Thomas William E.G. Browse’s
Interoduction to the Symptoms and Signs of Surgical Disease. Hodder Arnold; 2005.
ISBN: 9780340815793
5. Das.S. A Manual on Clinical Surgery. 9th
ed. S.Das’s Publications; 2011.
ISBN:9788190568104
6. Crowther Christy L. Primary Orthopedic Care. 2nd
ed. Mosby; 2004. ISBN 0323023657.
7. Courtney M. Twwnsend. Sabiston textbook of Surgery. The Biological basis of
modern surgical practice. 19th
ed. Sounders; 2012. ISBN - 9781437715606
Obstetrics & Gynecology
1. Beckmann. Obstetrics and Gynecology. 6th
ed. William & Wilkins; 2010.
ISBN 9780781788076.
2. Baker Philip N. Obstetrics by Ten Teachers. 19th
ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2011.
ISBN-13: 978-0340983539.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 192 | P a g e
3. Monga Ash. Gynecology by Ten Teachers. 19th
ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2011.
ISBN-13: 978-0340983546.
Pediatrics
1. Kliegman Robert M, Stanton Bonita M.D, Geme Joseph St., Schor Nina F, Behrman
Richard E. Nelson Textbook of Pediatrics. 19th
ed. Saunders; 2011.
ISBN-13: 978-1437707557.
2. Woodhead Jerold C. Pediatric Clerkship Guide. 2nd
ed. Mosby; 2008.
ISBN-13: 978-0323043335.
Otorhinolaryngology
1. Dhillon R.S. Ear Nose & Throat and Head and Neck Surgery: An Illustrated Color Text.
3rd
ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2011. ISBN 9780443073113.
2. Dhingra P L. Diseases of Ear, Nose and Throat. 4th
ed. Elsevier Science; 2007.
ISBN 9788131203279.
Ophthalmology
1. Kanski Jack J. Clinical Ophthalmology: A Systematic Approach. 7th
ed. Saunders; 2011.
ISBN-13: 978-0702040931.
2. Khurana A K. Comprehensive Ophthalmology. 4th
ed. New Age international (P) Ltd.;
2007. ISBN 9788122420418.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 193 | P a g e
16.0 Grading, Assessment and Progression Policies
Grading Policy:
Classification Marks scored in percentage Letter Grade
Excellent > = 86 A
Good 76-85 B
Pass 65-75 C
Fail < 65 F
Assessment Policy:
Assessments in each Phase will be both formative and summative.
Phase I Assessment Plan
Continuous Assessment: 60% & Professional Examination: 40%
Project Work
Participation in
Quizzes
Course Work
Semester
Examinations
Professional
Examination
5% 5% 20% 30% 40%
Formative Assessments:
This includes:
 Informal class tests
 Assignments
 Weekly quizzes (MCQ / SAQ / MEQ / OSPE)
 End-course test (Theory / Practical) with feedback on performance
 Assessment of student learning outcomes by faculty
 Student self-assessment of learning outcomes
Summative Assessments:
A. Project work: Mini-project in Phase I
It is a group activity undertaken by Phase I students and mini-projects based on WHO
declared Health Days and are assessed for group activity, team work, and communication
skills.
B. Participation in Quizzes:
Student participation in the formative assessment (s) is mandatory and will count for a
maximum of 5% of the summative evaluation in the course.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 194 | P a g e
C. Course Work:
The matrix for the course work assessment and the marks allocated for each activity in
Phase I are as follows:
Activity Phase I Contributory Marks
Seminars 15
CBL log book 15
CBL / SGL / Tutor Evaluation 15
Practical Record book 15
Assignments 10
CBL Peer Evaluation 05
Reflection 05
Total 80
D. Semester Examinations:
 Two semester examinations will be conducted during Phase I and shall contribute
30% of marks towards overall summative assessment
 Each course will contribute to the semester examination proportionate to their
contact hours
 Each semester examination will assess the syllabi covered during the respective
semester as follows:
 Semester 1 examination: Cell, Molecules & Genes, Tissues & Organs, Embryogenesis
& Life Cycle
 Semester 2 examination: Metabolism & Nutrition, Internal & External Environment
E. Professional Examination:
Phase I Professional Examination will be conducted at the end of Semester 2 as a
combination of theory, practical and viva voce.
The Theory Examination will be in the form of online MCQs and EMIs; SAQs, and MEQs; it
shall be integrated and made up of 2 papers, each of 3 hours duration:
 Paper I (Cell, Molecules & Genes, Tissues & Organs, Embryogenesis & Life Cycle)
 Paper II (Metabolism & Nutrition, Internal & External Environment)
The practical examination will be in the form of OSPE; Viva Voce will form part of the
practical examination.
The student must appear for each component of the examination (Theory paper I, Theory
paper II, Practical and Viva Voce). Absence in any one component shall be considered as a
disqualification from the examination.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 195 | P a g e
Eligibility for appearing in the Professional examination for Phase I require that the student
fulfills the following criteria:
 It is mandatory to attend all courses in the Phase
 The student should have not less than 80% attendance in each course of the Phase
 In addition, the student should have a cumulative attendance of not less than 80% for
the Phase
 The student should have a continuous assessment marks of not less than 60%
 Any student who has not fulfilled the above attendance and / or continuous
assessment criteria will be detained from appearing for the professional examination
and made to repeat a year
Re-sit Examination for Phase I
 Those students who appeared for the Professional Examination and failed will have a
chance to appear for the Re-sit Examination which will be held within 6 weeks after
the regular Final Examination is conducted
 The students who fail in the Re-sit Examination shall be on probation and would have
to re-register and repeat the year along with the next regular batch
 They would then take the Final Examination at the end of the repeat year on
satisfaction of the eligibility criteria
 Those students who fail again in the Final Examination after the repeat year, will have
the final chance to appear in the second Re-sit Examination held within 6 weeks of
the Final Examination
 Those who fail in the second Re-sit examination will be asked to leave the program
 Absenteeism will be considered as an attempt
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 196 | P a g e
Phase II Assessment Plan
Continuous Assessment: 60% & Professional Examination: 40%
Project Work
Participation in
Quizzes
Course Work
Semester
Examinations
Professional
Examination
5% 5% 20% 30% 40%
Formative Assessments:
This includes:
 Informal class tests
 Assignments
 Weekly quizzes (MCQ / SAQ / MEQ / OSPE / OSCE)
 End-course test (Theory / Practical) with feedback on performance
 Assessment of student learning outcomes by faculty
 Student self-assessment of learning outcomes
Summative Assessments:
A. Research Project in Phase II
The evaluation of Research (Project work) for 40 marks (5%) shall be done by the project
supervisors under the direction of Department of Community Medicine and students in small
groups are required to carry out a research project and present as a requirement of the
curriculum and to be eligible to appear for the Phase II professional examination.
B. Participation in Quizzes
Student participation in the formative assessment (s) is mandatory and will count for a
maximum of 5% of the summative evaluation in the course.
C. Course Work
The matrix for the course work assessment and the marks allocated for each activity in
Phase II are as follows:
Activity Phase II Contributory Marks
Seminars 30
CBL log book 30
CBL / PBL / SGL / Tutor Evaluation 30
Clinical skills Log book 30
Practical Record book 20
Assignments 10
CBL Peer Evaluation 10
Total 160
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 197 | P a g e
D. Semester Examinations:
 Four semester examinations will be conducted over the period of 2 years of Phase II and
shall contribute 30% of marks towards overall summative assessment
 Each course will contribute to the semester examination proportionate to their contact
hours
 Each semester examination will assess the syllabi covered during the respective
semester as follows:
 Semester 3 examination: Blood and Immune system and Cardiovascular system
 Semester 4 examination: Respiratory system, Alimentary system and Urinary system
 Semester 5 examination: Endocrine system and Reproductive system
 Semester 6 examination: Nervous system, Musculoskeletal system and
Integumentary system
 Each semester examination will have a theory and practical component
 The theory component of the semester examinations will consist of online MCQs and
SAQs / MEQs
 The practical component of the semester examination will comprise of OSPE / OSCE and
Viva Voce
E. Professional Examination
Phase II Professional Examination will be conducted at the end of Semester 6 as a
combination of theory, practical and viva-voce.
Components Portions Composition Duration Mode
Theory Paper I
All organ-system
courses
Only MCQ consisting of
160 test-items 4 hrs. Online
Theory Paper II
Integrating all organ-
systems
Only SAQ & MEQ 3 hrs.
‘Paper-and-
pencil’
Practical
Examination
Integrated among
courses
Integrated OSPE /
OSCE (including orals)
- Face-to-face
The Theory paper I is the International Federation of Medicine (IFOM) – Basic Sciences
examination conducted online by the National Board of Medical Examiners (NBME).
The student must appear for each component of the examination (Theory paper I, Theory
paper II, Practical and Viva Voce). Absence in any one component shall be considered as a
disqualification from the examination.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 198 | P a g e
Eligibility for appearing in the Professional examination for Phase II requires that the
student fulfill the following criteria:
 It is mandatory to attend all courses in the Phase
 The student should have not less than 80% attendance in each course of the Phase
 In addition, the student should have an cumulative attendance of not less than 80%
for the Phase
 The student should have a continuous assessment marks of not less than 60%
 If the student has less than 80% attendance and or less than 60% CA, he or she shall
be detained from appearing for the Professional Examination
 From 2012 batch onwards, a student who has not fulfilled the above attendance and /
or continuous assessment criteria will be detained from appearing for the
Professional Examination and made to repeat a year and those who appeared for the
professional examination and failed alone would be permitted to take the re-sit
examination.
Re-sit Examination for Phase II
 Those students who were detained due to lack of attendance and / or continuous
assessment marks (till 2011 batch) or those students who appeared for the Final
Examination and failed will have a chance to appear for the Re-sit Examination which
will be held within 6 weeks after the regular Final Examination is conducted for Phase
II
 The students who fail in the Re-sit Examination shall be on probation and would have
to re-register and repeat the year along with the next regular batch
 They would then take the Final Examination at the end of the repeat year on
satisfaction of the eligibility criteria
 Those students who fail again in the Final Examination after the repeat year, will have
the final chance to appear in the second Re-sit Examination held within 6 weeks of
the Final Examination
 Those who fail in the second Re-sit examination will be asked to leave the program
 Absenteeism will be considered as an attempt
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 199 | P a g e
Phase III Assessment Plan
Continuous Assessment: 60% & Professional Examination: 40%
Phase III Quizzes Course Work
Semester
Examinations
Professional
Examination
Total
% 10% 20% 30% 40% 100%
Marks 100 200 300 400 1000
Formative Assessment:
This includes:
 Direct Observation of Clinical Skills (DOCS)
 Assessment of clinical skills and attitudes by clinical supervisors and other members of
the health care delivery team
 Faculty assessment of case presentations and case discussions by the student followed
by feedback
 Assessment of student learning outcomes by faculty
 Student self-assessment of learning outcomes
Summative Assessments:
A. Quizzes:
Includes:
 Course tests conducted at the end of each course in Phase III year 1
 OSCE conducted at the end of each rotation in Phase III year 1 & 2
 Professional attributes throughout the rotations (Punctuality / Discipline,
Communication Skills, Professional behavior towards patients & peers, Data gathering)
 Contributes 10% or 100 / 1000 marks towards overall summative assessment
B. Course Work: 20% amounting to 200 / 1000 is distributed as:
Activity Phase III
Mark
Distribution
IV MBBS
(GMCH)
V MBBS
(Al Mafraq)
Seminars 10 10 -
Tutor evaluation of SGL 20 10 10
CBL records 10 10 -
Clinical log book 40 10 30
DOCS 60 30 30
General Clinics 30 30 -
RIME 30 - 30
Total 200 100 100
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 200 | P a g e
C. Semester Examinations:
 Four semester examinations shall be conducted in Phase III as follows:
 Semester 7 & 8 examinations in Phase III, year 1 (IV MBBS)
 Semester 9 & 10 examinations in Phase III year 2 (V MBBS)
 Semester 7 & 9 examinations will have only theory component as all students do not
have an uniform clinical learning experience at this point
 Semester 8 & 10 will have theory and integrated OSCE components as all students
would have completed a 40-week clinical rotation
 Semester 9 examination will be conducted in GMU and will comprise of 5 different
papers for the 5 different clinical groups of students; they would be tested in the
respective portions covered in their clinical & classroom teaching sessions.
 The 4 semester examinations together will contribute 30% of marks (300 / 1000) towards
overall summative assessment
D. Professional examination: Clinical 60% & Theory 40%
Components Portions Composition Duration Mode
Theory Paper I
All organ-system
courses
Only MCQ consisting
of 160 test-items 4 hrs. Online
Theory Paper II
Integrating all organ-
systems
Only SAQ & MEQ 3 hrs.
‘Paper-and-
pencil’
Clinical
Examination
Integrated among
clinical disciplines
Integrated OSCE
(including orals)
- Face-to-face
The Theory paper I is the International Federation of Medicine (IFOM) – Clinical Sciences
examination conducted online by the National Board of Medical Examiners (NBME).
Eligibility for appearing in the Phase III Professional examination requires that the student
fulfill the following criteria:
 It is mandatory to attend all courses / clinical rotations in Phase III
 The student should have not less than 80% attendance in each course / clinical
rotation of Phase III
 In addition, the student should have a cumulative attendance of not less than 80% for
Phase III
 The student should have a continuous assessment marks of not less than 60%
 If the student has less than 80% attendance and or less than 60% CA, he or she shall
be detained from appearing for the Professional Examination
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 201 | P a g e
Re-sit Examination for Phase III
 Those students who were detained due to lack of attendance and / or continuous
assessment marks or those students who appeared for the Final Examination and
failed will have a chance to appear for the Re-sit Examination which will be held
within 6 months after the regular Final Examination is conducted
 These students will undergo remedial clinical rotations in core disciplines before the
resit examination
 Those students who fail in the re-sit examination will have to again repeat the
clerkship in the core disciplines of Internal Medicine, General Surgery, Obstetrics and
Gynecology, and Pediatrics and they will have the final chance to appear for the
second Re-sit Examination held after 6 months of the first re-sit examination
 Those who fail in the second Re-sit examination will be asked to leave the program
 Absenteeism will be considered as an attempt
Requirements for Passing the Professional / Re-sit Examination (Phase I / II / III)
 The student must appear for each component (Theory paper I, Theory paper II,
Practical / Clinical and Viva-Voce) of the examination
 Absence in any one component shall be considered as a disqualification from the
examination
 An aggregate score of 65% in both theory and practical / clinical examinations is
required for passing the professional examination
Academic Progression Policy
 The progress of students through the semesters within each Phase would be
continuous
 Those students who fail in Phase I / II examinations will not be allowed to progress to
the next phase
 Those students who fail in Phase III examinations will not be eligible to commence
the internship
Degree Completion Requirements:
The student will be commended for the award of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of
Surgery Degree upon:
 Being continuously enrolled in the program from admission to graduation
 Having satisfied all conditions of his or her admission
 Attaining a minimum attendance of not less than 80% in each course and in each
Phase
 Submission of a research project
 Successful completion of a comprehensive professional examination (Phase III) with
an overall score of not less than 65%
 Successful completion of 52 weeks of Compulsory Resident Rotating Internship
(CRRI) program with satisfactory evaluation
 The student shall complete the program within a maximum period of 10 years.
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 202 | P a g e
17.0 Deans List of Toppers
MBBS Phase – I Professional Examination (2012 Batch) - July 2013
Reg. No. Name
Max.
Mark
Marks
Obtained
Percentage
2012M046 Ms. Shahd Munir Odeh Farajallah 400 365 91
2012M002 Ms. Munira Abubakar Matawalle 400 353 88
2012M016 Mr. Mohammad Sazzadul Huque 400 352 88
MBBS Phase – II Professional Examination (2010 Batch) - July 2013
Reg. No. Name
Max.
Mark
Marks
Obtained
Percentage
2010M025 Mr. Mehdi Saeedan 800 737 92
2010M029 Ms. Rose Sneha George 800 719 90
2010M026 Ms. Yasmin Ghazvini Kor 800 706 88
MBBS Phase – III Professional Examination (2008 Batch) - July 2013
Reg. No. Name
Max.
Mark
Marks
Obtained
Percentage
2008M010 Ms. Gowri Karuppasamy 1000 895 90
2008M007 Ms. Fatima Bala Shehu 1000 841 84
2008M003 Ms. Falak Abdul Jabbar Sayed 1000 830 83
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 203 | P a g e
18.0 Administrators & Faculty
Administrators
Mr. Thumbay Moideen Founder President
Prof. Gita Ashok Raj Provost
Dr. P.K. Menon Director, Administration
Prof. Mohammed Arifulla Dean, Admissions & Registers
Prof. R. Chandramouli Dean, Assessment & Evaluation
Prof. Manda Venkatramana Dean, College of Medicine
Dr. Ghaith Jassim Jaber Al Eyd Associate Dean, College of Medicine
Dr. Joshua Ashok Associate Dean Student Affairs
Prof. K.G. Gomathi Associate Dean, Admissions & Registers
Dr. Rizwana B Shaikh Associate Dean, Assessment & Evaluation
List of Faculty Members
Faculty of Biomedical Sciences
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. R. Chandramouli
MSc – 1972
PhD - 1981
University of Madras, India
Dean Assessment &
Evaluation and Professor and
Head of the Department of
Physiology
Prof. Bushra Hasan
Elshafei Elzawahry
M.B.B.Ch – 1983
MSc – 1993
MD (PhD) - 1997
Al-Azhar University, Egypt
Professor, Department of
Physiology
Prof. Hemant Kumar Garg
MBBS – 1984
MD - 1992
Aligarh Muslim University, India Professor of Pharmacology
Prof. Jayakumary
Muttappallymyalil
MBBS – 1993
MD - 1998
Bangalore University, India
Professor of Community
Medicine
Prof. K. G. Gomathi
MSc. – 1985
PhD - 1993
All India Institute of Medical
Sciences, India
Associate Dean – Admission
& Registers and Professor,
Department of Biochemistry
Dr. Ramesh Ranganathan
MBBS – 1994
MD - 2001
NTR University of Health
Sciences, India
Associate Dean – Graduate
Studies and Associate
Professor & Head of the
Department of Microbiology
Dr. Joshua Ashok
MBBS - 1984
MD - 1992
University of Madras, India
M.G.R. University, India
Associate Dean – Student
Affairs and Associate
Professor & Head of the
Department of Forensic
Medicine
Dr. Rizwana Burhanuddin
Shaikh
MBBS - 1992
MD - 1999
Bangalore University, India
Kevempu University, India
Associate Dean, Assessment
& Evaluation and Associate
Professor, Department of
Community Medicine
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 204 | P a g e
Dr. Nelofar Sami Khan
MSc. – 1994
PhD - 1998
Aligarh Muslim University, India
Associate Professor,
Department of Biochemistry
Dr. Razia Khanam
B. Pharm – 1997
M. Pharm – 1999
PhD - 2006
Hamdard University, India
Associate Professor of
Pharmacology
Dr. Ghaith Jassim Jaber
Al Eyd*
MBChB - 1995
MSc. - 1999
PhD - 2005
Al-Nahrain University, Iraq
Associate Dean – College of
Medicine and Associate
Professor, Department of
Pathology
Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas
MBBS – 1995
MD - 2002
Dr. M.G.R. Medical University,
India
Assistant Professor,
Department of
Pharmacology
Dr. May Khalil Ismail
MSc. – 1986
PhD - 2006
Colarado State University, USA
University of Mosul, Iraq
Assistant Professor,
Department of Biochemistry
Dr. Nisha Shantha
Kumari
MBBS – 1999
MD – 2005
DNB - 2005
University of Kerala, India
University of Kerala, India
National Board of
Examinations, India
Assistant Professor,
Department of Physiology
Dr. Anuj Mathur
MBBS – 1996
MD - 2004
University of Rajasthan, India
Assistant Professor of
Microbiology
Dr. Sajit Khan Ahmed
Khan
MBBS – 1995
MD - 2006
Bangalore University, India
Annamalai University, India
Assistant Professor,
Department of Microbiology
Dr. Biswadip Hazarika
MBBS – 1990
MD – 2004
Dibrugarh University, India
Assistant Professor of
Pathology
Dr. Anu Vinod Ranade
MSc – 1996
PhD - 2007
MAHE, Manipal – India
Assistant Professor of
Anatomy
Dr. Miral Nagy Fahmy
Salama
MB.B.Ch – 1996
MSc – 2002
MD - 2007
Ain Shams University, Egypt
Assistant Professor of
Anatomy
Dr. Kannan Narsimhan
MBBS – 1998
MD - 2004
Pondicherry University, India
Assistant Professor of
Physiology
Dr. Faheem Ahmed
Khanzada
MBBS – 1998
MPH - 2006
University of Karachi, Pakistan
University of Malaya, Malaysia
Senior Lecturer, Department
of Community Medicine
Dr. Mohammad
Mesbahuzzaman
MBBS – 1998
MD - 2011
University of Dhaka,
Bangladesh
Lecturer, Department of
Pathology
Ms. Soofia Ahmed
MSc – 1986
MPhil - 1989
University of Karachi, Pakistan
Lecturer, Department of
Physiology
Dr. Shiny Prabha Mohan
MBBS – 2003
MD - 2008
University of Kerala, India
Lecturer, Department of
Pathology
Ms. Suni Ebby
BSc – 1996
MSc - 1999
Kerala University, India
MG University, India Lecturer in Anatomy
Dr. Lisha Jenny John
MBBS – 2003
MD - 2008
Rajiv Ghandhi University of
Health Sciences, India
Lecturer in Pharmacology
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 205 | P a g e
Dr. Liju Susan Mathew
MBBS – 2006
MS - 2010
Gulf Medical University, UAE
Baba Farid University of Health
Sciences, India
Lecturer, Department of
Anatomy
Ms. Devapriya Finney
Shadroch
BSc – 1985
MSc - 1988
University of Madras, India
Lecturer, Department of
Microbiology
Dr. Nishida
Chandrasekharan
MBBS – 2005
MS (Ortho) - 2006
Manipal Academy of Higher
Education, India
Kathmandu University, Nepal
Lecturer, Simulation Centre
Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed
MBBS – 1996
DCP - 2000
Bangalore University, India
Rajiv Ghandhi University of
Health Sciences, India
Demonstrator, Department
of Pathology
Dr. Nada A. Kadhum*
MBChB - 2000 Al Mustanseria University, Iraq
Demonstrator, Department
of Anatomy
Dr. Elias Alkayal
MBBS – 2006
Masters in General
Pathology - 2010
University of Aleppo, Syria
Demonstrator, Department
of Pathology
Dr. Priya Sajith
MBBS – 1995
Diploma in Clinical
Pathology - 2001
Dr. MGR Medical University,
India
University of Kerala, India
Demonstrator, Department
of Microbiology and
Coordinator CCE&CO
Dr. Syed Morteza
Mahmoudi
MBBS – 2011
Gulf Medical University, Ajman,
UAE
Demonstrator, Dept. of
Anatomy
Dr. Erum Khan MBBS - 2001 University of Punjab, Pakistan Simulation Instructor
Dr. Zannatul Ferdous
MBBS – 2007
MPH – 2010
University of Science &
technology, Bangladesh
North South University,
Bangladesh
Clinical Tutor
Dr. Farhat Fatima MBBS – 2007 University of Karachi, Pakistan Clinical Tutor
Dr. Lubna Ahmed MBBS – 2007 University of Karachi, Pakistan
Clinical Tutor
Dr. Rida Zainab MBBS – 2011
University of Health Sciences,
Pakistan
Clinical Tutor
*on Sabbatical Leave
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 206 | P a g e
Faculty of Clinical Sciences
Internal Medicine
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Shaik Altaf Basha
MBBS - 1974
MD - 1978
University of Madras, India
Clinical Professor & Head of
the Department
Prof. Salwa Abdelzaher
Mabrouk
M.B.B.Ch – 1976
M.S - 1982
M.D - 1992
Ain Shams University, Egypt Clinical Professor
Dr. Mahir Khalil Ibrahim
Jallo
M.B.B.Ch - 1981
Certificate of Arab
Board of Internal
Medicine - 1992
University of Mosul, Iraq
Arab Board of Medical
Specialization
Clinical Associate Professor
Dr. Mohammed Khalid
MBBS – 2002
MD – 2007
MRCP - 2011
Rajiv Gandhi University of
Medical Science, India
Manipal University, India
The Royal College of
Physicians, UK
Clinical Lecturer
Cardiology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Ehab Moheyeldin Farag
Esheiba
M.B.B.Ch – 1995
Diploma in Internal
Medicine – 1999
MSc - 2004
MRCP - 2009
Alexandria University, Egypt
Cairo University, Egypt
Zagazigu University, Egypt
The Royal College of
Physicians, UK
Clinical Assistant Professor &
Head of the Department
Dr. Mohamed Ahmed
Mohamed Fathi Ahmed
MBBS – 1995
MSc – 2003 Alexandria University, Egypt Clinical Lecturer
Neurology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Adnan Jalkhi
MD – 1987
PhD - 1995
Aleppo University, Syria
Saint Petersburg Postgraduate
Medical Academy
Clinical Associate Professor
Dr. Mohamed Hamdy
Ibrahim Abdalla
M.B.B.Ch – 1999
MSc – 2005
MD - 2008
Ain Shams University, Egypt Clinical Assistant Professor
Dermatology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Irene Nirmala
Thomas
MBBS – 1986
MD – 1997
Diploma in
Dermatology –
2004
University of Madras, India
Dr. MGR University, India
Royal College of Physicians &
Surgeons of Glasgow, UK
Clinical Professor and Head
of the Department
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 207 | P a g e
Dr. Wesam Khadum
M.B.B.Ch - 1992
FICMS - 2005
Al-Mustanseriah University,
Iraq
Iraqi Commission for Medical
Specialization
Clinical Assistant Professor
Psychiatry
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Mohanad Abdulrahman
Abdul Wahid
MBChB - 1984
FICMS - 1999
(Psychiatry)
Al Mustansiriya, University, Iraq
Iraqi Commission for Medical
Specialization, Iraq
Clinical Lecturer & Head
of the Department
General Surgery
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Yassin Malallah Taher
Al-Musawi
MBChB - 1974
FRCS - 1983
Baghdad University, Iraq
Royal College of Surgeons,
Glasgow - U.K
Clinical Professor &
Head of the
Department
Prof. Manda Venkatramana
MBBS - 1987
MS - 1990
FRCS - 2001
Saurashtra University, India
Saurashtra University, India
Royal College of Surgeons,
Edinburg, U.K
Dean College of
Medicine and Clinical
Professor
Dr. Pradeep Kumar Sharma
MBBS – 1984
MS – 1997
MRCS - 2010
Andhra University, India
University of Mumbai
Royal College of Surgeons in
Ireland
Clinical Associate
Professor
Dr. Mohanad Mohamad
Sultan
MBChB - 1996
FICMS – 2004
CABS – 2004
MRCS - 2008
Al Mustansiriya University, Iraq
Iraqi Commission for Medical
Specialization, Iraq
Arab Commission of Medical
Specialization, Syria
Royal College of Physicians &
Surgeons of Glasgow, UK
Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Mohamed Sobhy Badr
Sobei
MBBCh – 2001
MSc – 2005
Al Azhar University, Egypt Clinical Lecturer
Orthopedics
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Sujaad Al Badran
MBChB - 1972
FRCS – 1984
Mosul University, Iraq
Royal College of Surgeons,
Edinburg – UK
Clinical Associate
Professor & Head of
the Department
Dr. Amit Chaturvedi
MBBS - 1993
MS – 1999
DNB - 1999
MNAMS - 2004
Nagpur University, India
University of Calcutta, India
National Board of
Examinations, India
National Academy of Medical
Sciences, India
Clinical Associate
Professor
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 208 | P a g e
Radiology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Tarek Fawzy Abdou Abd
El Ghaffar
MBBCh - 1988
MSc - 1993
Cairo University, Egypt
Clinical Lecturer & Head
of the Department
Anesthesiology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Raji Sharma MBBS – 1989
MD - 1998
Kerala University, India
University of Mumbai, India
Clinical Associate
Professor & Head of the
Department
Dr. Sona Chaturvedi
MBBS - 1994
MD - 2001
Nagpur University, India
Nagpur University, India
Clinical Assistant
Professor
Dr. Arun Kumar Muthu
Subramanian
MBBS – 1994
MD - 1999
Dr. MGR University, India
Gandhi Medical College, India
Clinical Lecturer
Urology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan
MBBS – 1985
MS – 1996
MRCS - 2007
Punjab University, Pakistan
The Royal College of Surgeons
of Edinburg, UK
Assistant Director
Academic Affairs and
Clinical Associate
Professor & Head of the
Department
Otorhinolaryngology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Tambi Abraham
Cherian
M.B.B.S – 1984
DLO - 1989
MS – 1992
DNB - 1992
Madras University, India
Dr. MGR University, India
Dr. MGR University, India
National Board of
Examinations, India
Clinical Professor and
Head of the Department
Prof. Meenu Khurana
Cherian
MBBS – 1987
DLO – 1991
MS - 1994
Madras University, India
Dr. MGR University, India
Dr. MGR University, India
Director Academic
Affairs and Clinical
Professor
Dr. Effat Radwan Isaa
Radwan
M.B.B.Ch.B - 1969
MS - 1983
University of Cairo, Egypt
Ain Shams University, Egypt
Clinical Lecturer
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 209 | P a g e
Ophthalmology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Salwa Abd El-Razak
Attia
MBBCh – 1975
MS – 1981
Fellowship in Cornea
and Refractive Surgery
– 1991
MD - 2000
Alexandria University, Egypt
Alexandria University, Egypt
Atlanta University, USA
Alexandria University, Egypt
Clinical Professor & Head
of the Department
Dr. Pankaj Lamba
MBBS – 1997
Diploma in
Ophthalmology – 2001
DNB – 2004
FRCS - 2004
Nagpur University, India
Aligarh Muslim University,
India
National Board of
Examinations, India
Royal College of Physicians &
Surgeons, UK
Clinical Assistant
Professor
Obstetrics & Gynecology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Mawahib Abd
Salman Al Biate
M.B.Ch.B - 1980
Arab Board for Medical
Specialization
DGO - 1988
Basrah University, Iraq
Arab Board, Syria
College of Mustansiriya, Iraq
Clinical Professor & Head
of the Department
Dr. Kasturi Anil
Mummigatti
MBBS - 1981
MD - 1986
Bangalore University, India Clinical Professor
Dr. Prashanth Hegde
MBBS – 1992
MD – 2003
DNB - 2004
Mysore University, India
All India Institute of Medical
Sciences, India
National Board of
Examinations, India
Clinical Assistant
Professor
Dr. Shanti Therese
Fernandes
MBBS – 1998
MD - 2002
Manipal Academy of Higher
Education, India
Clinical Assistant
Professor
Dr. Malini Vijayan
MBBS – 1990
DGO – 2003
DNB - 2005
MG University, India
Kerala University, India
National Board of
Examinations , India
Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Wajiha Ajmal
MBBS – 1997
FCPS - 2005
University of Peshawar,
Pakistan
College of Physicians &
Surgeons, Pakistan
Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Dipti Navanitlal Shah
MBBS – 1994
Diploma in OBG - 1997
The Maharaja Sayajirao
University of Baroda, India
Clinical Tutor
Pediatrics
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Mahmoud Elsayed
Attia Shamseldeen
M.B.B.Ch - 1976
MSc - 1981
MD - 1985
Al Azhar University, Egypt
Clinical Professor & Head
of the Department
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 210 | P a g e
Prof. Imad Oudah Emnakher
Al Sadoon
MB.Ch.B – 1976
DCH – 1983
MRCP – 1983
FRCP - 1985
University of Basrah, Iraq
The Royal College of
Physicians of London, UK
Clinical Professor
Prof. Ignatius Edwin
D’Souza
MBBS – 1991
MD - 1996
MRCPCH - 2007
Bangalore University, India
Post Graduate Institute of
Medical Education &
Research, India
Royal College of Pediatrics &
Child Health, U.K
Clinical Professor
Dr. Jenny Cheriathu
MBBS – 2001
DCH –
DNB - 2009
University of Mumbai, India
Shivaji University, India
National Board of
Examinations, India
Clinical Lecturer
Faculty of Graduate Studies
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Gita Ashok Raj
MBBS – 1970
MD - 1979
MNAMS – 1981 (Morbid
Anatomy)
Shivaji University, India
All India Institute of Medical
Sciences, India
National Board of Examinations,
India
Professor & Head of the
Department of
Pathology
Prof. Mohammed Arifulla
MSc – 1973
PhD - 1984
University of Mysore, India
University of Madras, India
Professor & Head of the
Department of
Pharmacology
Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed
Shaafie
MBBS – 1977
MD – 1983
Kashmir University, India
Chandigarh University, India
Professor & Head of the
Department of
Biochemistry
Prof. Shatha Saeed
Hamed Al Sharbathi
MBChB – 1976
DCM – 1985
MSc – 1989
PhD - 1998
Baghdad University, Iraq
Professor & Head of the
Department of
Community Medicine
Prof. Elsheba Mathew
MBBS - 1977
MD - 1986
M Phil - 1994
Madras University, India
Madras University, India
Mahatma Gandhi University,
India
Professor, Department
of Community Medicine
Prof. Joyce Jose
MBBS – 1984
MD - 1990
Kerala University
Mahatma Gandhi University,
India
Professor, Department
of Pathology
Prof. Mandar Vilas
Ambike
MBBS – 1989
MS - 1996
Shivaji University, India
Pune University, India
Professor & Head of the
Department of
Anatomy
Prof. Anoop Kumar
Agarwal
Master of Veterinary
Science – 1985
PhD – 1988
Haryana Agriculture University,
India
Postgraduate Institute of
Medical Education & Research,
India
Professor of
Pharmacology
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 211 | P a g e
Prof. Jayadevan
Sreedharan
MSc (Statistics) – 1990
PhD (Statistics) – 2000
Diploma in Cancer
Prevention – 2002
PhD (Epidemiology) -
2008
Annamalai University, India
Kerala University, India
National Cancer Institute, USA
Tampere University, Finland
Assistant Director
Statistical Support
Facility and Professor of
Biostatistics
Dr. Preetha Jayasheela
Shetty
MSc – 2000
BEd – 2006
PhD - 2011
Mangalore University, India
Bharatiya Shiksha Parishad, India
Osmaniya University, India
Assistant Professor in
Cytogenetics &
Molecular Biology
Dr. Victor Raj Mohan
Chandrasekaran
MSc – 2001
Ph.D - 2006
Bharathiar University, India
University of Madras, India
Assistant Professor of
Toxicology
Dr. Kartik Janak Dave
MBBS – 1990
MD - 1993
Gujarat University, India
Lecturer, Dept. of
Pathology
Dr. Nehmat El Banna EP.
Ziad El Banna
MBBS – 2000
MS CP - 2012
The Lebanese University,
Lebanon
Gulf Medical University, UAE
Graduate Program
Coordinator and
Demonstrator
Centre for Advanced Biomedical Research & Innovation (CABRI)
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Prof. Palat Krishna Menon
MBBS – 1981
MD – 1989
PhD - 1996
University of Pune, India
University of Pune, India
Rajiv Gandhi University of
Health Sciences, India
Director CABRI &
Professor of Research
Dr. Tatjana Ille
MD – 1993
MSc – 1995
PhD - 1999
University of Belgrade,
Serbia
Professor of Statistics
Dr. Monalisa Panda
MBBS – 2000
MD - 2008
Utkal University, India
University of Mumbai, India
Technical Scientist CABRI
& Adjunct Lecturer
General Education Faculty
English Language
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Mr. Clint Freeman
BA – 1991
MA - 2009
IOWA State University, USA
IOWA State University, USA
Adjunct Instructor
Information Technology
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Mr. Suraj Kochuthoppil
Sebastian
MSc (Software
Engineering) - 2010
Sathyabama University, India Adjunct Lecturer
Physics
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Meena Varma V K
BSc – 1988
MSc – 1990
PhD - 1997
Mahatma Gandhi University,
India
University of Kerala, India
University of Kerala, India
Adjunct Lecturer
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 212 | P a g e
Mathematics
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Ms. Rejitha Biju
BSc – 2001
MSc – 2003
BEd - 2004
Mahatma Gandhi University,
India
Adjunct Instructor
Behavioral Science
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Radhika Taroor
MPhil – 2006
PhD - 2011
Bharathiar University, India
Mother Teresa Women’s
University, India
Adjunct Assistant
Professor
Human Behavior & Socialization
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Ms. Avula Kameswari
BA – 1996
MA – 1998
BEd - 2007
Nagarjuna University, India Adjunct Instructor
Islamic Studies
Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation
Dr. Ahmed Sebihi
Bachelor in Theology –
1992
MA – 2008
PhD - 2011
Amir Abd Al-Qadir University,
Algeria
Universiti Sains Malaysia,
Malaysia
Adjunct Instructor
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 213 | P a g e
List of Faculty – Mafraq Hospital
Department: Obstetrics & Gynecology
No. Name Title
1 Dr. Mini Ravi Consultant
2 Dr. Karim Medhat Elmasry Consultant
3 Dr. Farha Consultant
4 Dr. Shabnam Faheem Ahamed Specialist
5 Dr. Zakiya Specialist
6 Dr. Mercy Beljouri Specialist
7 Dr. Deepti Kansal Specialist
8 Dr. Soumya Srivastava Specialist
Department: Pediatrics
9 Dr. Ali Memon Consultant
10 Dr. Waseem Fathalla Consultant
11 Dr. Asma Deeb Consultant
12 Dr. Faisal Ezzeddin Consultant
13 Dr. Fathima Hashem ibrahim Consultant
14 Dr. Khaled Zameel Consultant
15 Dr. Laila Obaid Qambar Obaid Consultant
16 Dr. Saggaff Al Saggaff Consultant
17 Dr. Anwar Wajdi Sallam Consultant
18 Dr. Wafa Naji Jaber Specialist
19 Dr. Mohamed Yasser Abd El Specialist
20 Dr. Amer Mehmood Khan Specialist
21 Dr. Shahid Rashid Specialist
22 Dr. Sajeev Vengalath Specialist
23 Dr. Ahmad Abdel Aziz Specialist
24 Dr. Khaled Mohammed Al Baiti Specialist
25 Dr. Salwa Adam Specialist
26 Dr. Dina Ahmed Saleh Specialist
27 Dr. Nishar Ahmed Bathoolunnisa Manager of Dietetics
Department: Internal Medicine
28 Dr. Ahmed Osman Shatila Consultant
29 Dr. Ahmed Mohsin Ibn Mahfoudh Consultant
30 Dr. Udugama Ajit Goonetileke Consultant
31 Dr. Amine Rekab Consultant
32 Dr. Ashraf Mohd El Ghul Consultant
33 Dr. Baher al Homsi Consultant
34 Dr. Mahamad Tarek Bakri Consultant
35 Dr. Nahlla Dolly Consultant
36 Dr. Aladdin Maarroui Consultant
37 Dr. Aref Ahmad Chehal Consultant
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 214 | P a g e
38 Dr. Babar Navid Hassan Consultant
39 Dr. Thar El Baage Consultant
40 Dr. Iman Aboobacker Consultant
41 Dr. Mike Muhannad Bismar Consultant
42 Dr. Mustafa Al Maini Consultant
43 Dr. Shobhit Sinha Consultant
44 Dr. Samer Muhammad Nuhaily Consultant
45 Dr. Sarah Hussain Khan Consultant
46 Dr. Shakkir Hussain Specialist
47 Dr. Ahmed Shahat Saber Shehata Specialist
48 Dr. Farooq Ahmad Mir Specialist
49 Dr. P. C. Sudhir Kumar Specialist
50 Dr. Lidia Sanchez-Riera Specialist Physician
51 Dr. Syed Yousef Abbas Medical Practitioner
Department: Surgery
52 Dr. Abdul Karim Al Fahim Consultant
53 Dr. Yasir Ali Ahmed Suliman Consultant
54 Dr. Ateq Mohsen Consultant
55 Dr. Abdul Nasser Hachem Consultant
56 Dr. Hanaa Madani Consultant
57 Dr. Rashid Al Shaeel Consultant
58 Dr. Seliman Gebran Consultant
59 Dr. Bader Abdullah Al Hashmi Consultant
60 Dr. Michael Stephen Ajemian Consultant
61 Dr. Fawzi Al Ayoubi Consultant
62 Dr. Nahed Ahmed Balalaa Specialist
63 Dr. Mohd. Rahmatulla Korambayil Specialist
64 Dr. Nijamuddin Syed Specialist
65 Dr. Raj Kumar Manickam Specialist
66 Dr. Shakkir Hussain Specialist
67 Dr. Mohd Husin Al Fahil Specialist
68 Dr. Amin Mohamed El Helw Specialist
69 Dr. Ziayazan sabbah Specialist
70 Dr. Abdul Nasser Koroth Specialist
71 Dr. Farook Bacha Specialist
72 Dr. Heyssam Gibboui Specialist
Department: PHC
73 Dr. Bassam Khaled Specialist
74 Dr. Khulood Obaid Specialist
75 Dr. Medhat Sayed Specialist
76 Dr. Raiham Mohamed Yousef Specialist
77 Dr. George Cherian Medical Practitioner
78 Dr. Habib Khan Medical Practitioner
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 215 | P a g e
79 Dr. Inshirah Awadh Medical Practitioner
80 Dr. Javed Memon Medical Practitioner
81 Dr. Khalid Hassan Medical Practitioner
82 Dr. Mohammed Elyas Medical Practitioner
83 Dr. Mona Mohammed Medical Practitioner
84 Dr. Najla Mohd. Medical Practitioner
85 Dr. Saly Phillip Medical Practitioner
86 Dr. Shirley Lewis Medical Practitioner
87 Dr. Sumaya Abdel Moneim Medical Practitioner
88 Dr. Tauheed Najmul Qamar Medical Practitioner
89 Dr. Amani Ramses Medical Practitioner
90 Dr. Elsayeda Khafagy Medical Practitioner
91 Dr. Fatima Al Mahmood Medical Practitioner
92 Dr. Gamal Sulaiman Medical Practitioner
Department: Psychiatry
93 Dr. Abdulnaser Arida Consultant
94 Dr. Hassan Said Ahmed Consultant
95 Dr. Mohamad Al Garhy Consultant
96 Dr. Tarek Shahrour Consultant
97 Dr. Alaa Ibrahim Haweel Consultant
98 Dr. Ahmad Almai Consultant
99 Dr. Gamal Mousa Consultant
100 Dr. Adel El Shiekh Consultant
101 Dr. Medhat El Sabbahi Consultant
102 Dr. Mufeed M.S. Raoof Specialist
103 Dr. Ahmad El Boraie Specialist
Department: Ophthalmology
104 Dr. Khaled Abuhaleeqa Consultant
105 Dr. Ramzi Ghanem Consultant
106 Dr. Rani Jacob Specialist
Department: ENT
107 Dr. Mondy Hammad Consultant
108 Dr. Amin Al-Menhaly Consultant
109 Dr. Hilal Omar Specialist
110 Dr. Sanooj Sayed Specialist
111 Dr. Zafeer Ahmed Specialist
Department: Accident & Emergency
112 Dr. Jehad Awad Consultant
113 Dr. Biniam Tesfayohannes Consultant
114 Dr. Jamal Saadah Consultant
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 216 | P a g e
List of Faculty – Umm Al Quwain Hospital
Department: Anesthesia – ICU
Department: Internal Medicine
Dr. Mohammed Taisser
Almasry
MRCP (1) 1987
Consultant – Head
of Department
(teaching skill)
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Salah Eldin Taha Elebidi
MD Cardiology
1988
Consultant (teaching
skill)
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Mustafa Sayed Abdul Aziz MD 2001
Consultant –
Associate Professor
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Hassan Ahmed Hassane MRCP Consultant
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Jafar Sadik Mahdi Arab Board
Consultant (teaching
skill)
Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Mohammed Abdul
Maksood Mansor
Diploma
Medicine 1996
Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Akram Yousef Alkhaldi MBBS GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Mohammed Islam MBBS GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Name Degree MOH Designation GMU Rank
Dr. Osama Ahmed Zayed MD (Anes)
Consultant-Head of
Department -
Professor
Director Clerkship &
HOD Anesthesia
Dr. Ahmed Abdel Wahab
Hassanien
MD (Anes) 1989
Consultant –
Associate Professor
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Obey Mohammed El
Hasan Shaker
MD (Anes) 1991
Consultant –
Professor
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Iffat Haque Kadri MD 1994 Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Mohamad Galal Gheith MSc (Anes) 1996 Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Mohammed Abdulla
Mohamed Elsayed
MSc (Anes) 1995 Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Ghassan Nouri Awad MD (Anes) Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 217 | P a g e
Department: Nephrology
Dr. Medhat Ali Ahmed Aref MD 2000
Consultant – Head of
Department –
Associate Professor
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Hosam Mohammed Abdullah
Abdellatif
MSc, MRCP Specialist
Adjunct Clinical
Lecturer
Department: Ophthalmology
Dr. Haifa Abdulghani Nassief FRCS
Consultant-Head of
Department-Associate
Professor
Adjunct Clinical Assoc.
Professor
Department: ENT
Dr. Mohammad Magdy Zakaria MD (ENT)
Consultant-Head of
Department-Professor
Adjunct Clinical Assoc.
Professor
Dr. Akram Awad Metwally MD (ENT) Consultant - Lecturer
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Syed Zubair Ahmed Hashmi Specialist
Department: PHC
Dr. Mustafa Taha El Shabrawy GP - Head of Department Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Sameh Mohamed Abdel Satar Abu El Khair GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 218 | P a g e
List of Faculty – Sheikh Khalifa Bin Zayed Hospital
Medical Department
Orthopedics Department
Dr. Waguih El Sissi MD, Ortho 1980
Consultant A &
H. O. D
Adjunct Clinical Assoc.
Professor
Dr. Mohamed Fahmy
MBBS, MSc
Ortho 1987,
FRCS-1996
Consultant A
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Magdy Helmy Ibrahim Aly
Elbaroudy
MBBCh, MS
ortho 1987,
FRCS 2000
Consultant A
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Raad Abdulla Salman FICMS - 1994 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Karim Mohd Saied MS Ortho 2000 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Vinith Zachariah John
MBBS, DNB &
MCH (Orth)
Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Emad Aziz Tawfik
Masters (Orth)
2007
Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Ramadan K. R Arafa MBBS 2002 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Name Degree MOH Designation GMU Rank
Dr. Fadhil Al Douri
MB,Ch.B, MRCP
(UK) 1979, FRCP
(London) 1991
Consultant A, HOD Director, Clerkship & H O D
Medicine
Dr. Fadil H. K. Alazawi
Iraqi Board MRCP
(UK)
Consultant B
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Ismail Al Bagdadi
MBChB, MBBD,
MD 1998,
Cardiology -
Romania
Consultant B
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Medhat Mukhtar
MBBS, MSc
Medicine 1989
Specialist A
Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Rhamadan AlSaeed
MRCP Part I
(2005), Dip Emerg.
Med 2004
GP
Clinical Tutor
Dr. Ayman Abdel Moti
Younes
MBBS 2004 GP Clinical Tutor
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 219 | P a g e
Pediatrics Department
Dr. Nadim Ahmed Khan
Diplomate ABP
1995
Consultant A &
H. O. D.
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Mohamed Ziad Al
Zawahry
MSc (Ped)
1986, MD (Ped)
1997
Consultant B
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Raef Jamal
Masters (Ped)
1987
Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Khalid Ibrahim Al Awadhi
Dip. (Ped)
1992
Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Mohammad Habbal MBBS GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Surgical Department
Dr. Abdul Moti Younes
MD – 1977, FRCS
- 1977
Consultant A &
H.O.D
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Abdel Khaleq Yousef FRCS 1987 Consultant A
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Hesham Abdul Moniem
MSc, MD (Surg)
- 1997
Consultant A
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Abdel Aal Qassim FICS 2002 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Sabah Kaddouri
Polish Board
(Surg), FMAS
2010
Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Mohammed Redha
Iraq Board
2001, European
Board of
Urology (FEBU)
2005, FRCS
Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Zaher Abdel Muttalaf
Iraqi Board
2005
Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Eltegani Elmasaad
Eltayeib
MRCS 2011 GP Adjunct clinical Tutor
Dermatology Department
Dr. Haythem A.G Musa PhD, 1985
Consultant A &
HOD
Adjunct Clinical
Lecturer
Dr. Shifa Al-Halabi MSc. Derma Specialist B
Adjunct Clinical
Lecturer
MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 220 | P a g e
Emergency Department
Dr. Abdel Karim Mahmoud
Helmy
MD Int Med
Consultant A &
HOD
Adjunct Clinical Asst.
Professor
Dr. Raeed Al Safadi MBBS 2000 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Ahmed Abou Saada MSc (Orth) GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Ahamed Ali Mohamed GP
Dr. Ahmed Abdel Halim GP
Dr. Wael Jalal Al Sayed El
Bahtiti
GP
PHC
Dr. Sana Hassoun MD (Pedia) 1985 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Lujain M Alhiti MBChB Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
Dr. Iman Ahmed Ismail
DRCOG 2002,
MRCP 2004
Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Eihab Abdelrahman Saleh MBBS 2001 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Rawdah AL Safadi MBChB 1989 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Suzan Refaat Hassan MSc (Pedia) GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Dr. Wathib Abdulsamad
Hameed
MBChB GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
Learn from the world
Growth Through Innovation
P. O. Box: 4184, Ajman, United Arab Emirates • Tel.: +971 6 7431333 • Fax: +971 6 7431222
E-mail: gmcajman@emirates.net.ae • Website: www.gmu.ac.ae • www.gmchospital.com
FOLLOW US ON
www.facebook.com/gulfmedicaluniversity
www.youtube.com/thumbaytv

More Related Content

PDF
2015-2016 Annual Report
PDF
uv gullas medical college admissions 2020
PPTX
Study MBBS Abroad Phoenix Overseas Education Consultancy
DOCX
VP, Cancer Nursing Opportunity
PDF
Jagadguru sri shivarathreeswara university prospectus 2016 17 educationiconne...
PDF
Cyberjaya University College of Medical Science - University Prospectus 2019
PPTX
Thumbay Group - Growth Through Innovation
PPTX
Overseas medical education2
2015-2016 Annual Report
uv gullas medical college admissions 2020
Study MBBS Abroad Phoenix Overseas Education Consultancy
VP, Cancer Nursing Opportunity
Jagadguru sri shivarathreeswara university prospectus 2016 17 educationiconne...
Cyberjaya University College of Medical Science - University Prospectus 2019
Thumbay Group - Growth Through Innovation
Overseas medical education2

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Race Reva University – Shaping Future Leaders in Artificial Intelligence
PPTX
Virtual and Augmented Reality in Current Scenario
PDF
David L Page_DCI Research Study Journey_how Methodology can inform one's prac...
PDF
FORM 1 BIOLOGY MIND MAPS and their schemes
PDF
What if we spent less time fighting change, and more time building what’s rig...
PDF
My India Quiz Book_20210205121199924.pdf
PDF
BP 505 T. PHARMACEUTICAL JURISPRUDENCE (UNIT 1).pdf
PDF
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
PDF
BP 704 T. NOVEL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS (UNIT 2).pdf
PDF
Mucosal Drug Delivery system_NDDS_BPHARMACY__SEM VII_PCI.pdf
PPTX
A powerpoint presentation on the Revised K-10 Science Shaping Paper
PDF
LEARNERS WITH ADDITIONAL NEEDS ProfEd Topic
DOCX
Cambridge-Practice-Tests-for-IELTS-12.docx
PDF
Empowerment Technology for Senior High School Guide
PPTX
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
PDF
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART (3) REALITY & MYSTERY.pdf
PDF
Skin Care and Cosmetic Ingredients Dictionary ( PDFDrive ).pdf
PDF
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY- PART (1) WHO ARE WE.pdf
PDF
Journal of Dental Science - UDMY (2021).pdf
PDF
English Textual Question & Ans (12th Class).pdf
Race Reva University – Shaping Future Leaders in Artificial Intelligence
Virtual and Augmented Reality in Current Scenario
David L Page_DCI Research Study Journey_how Methodology can inform one's prac...
FORM 1 BIOLOGY MIND MAPS and their schemes
What if we spent less time fighting change, and more time building what’s rig...
My India Quiz Book_20210205121199924.pdf
BP 505 T. PHARMACEUTICAL JURISPRUDENCE (UNIT 1).pdf
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
BP 704 T. NOVEL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS (UNIT 2).pdf
Mucosal Drug Delivery system_NDDS_BPHARMACY__SEM VII_PCI.pdf
A powerpoint presentation on the Revised K-10 Science Shaping Paper
LEARNERS WITH ADDITIONAL NEEDS ProfEd Topic
Cambridge-Practice-Tests-for-IELTS-12.docx
Empowerment Technology for Senior High School Guide
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART (3) REALITY & MYSTERY.pdf
Skin Care and Cosmetic Ingredients Dictionary ( PDFDrive ).pdf
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY- PART (1) WHO ARE WE.pdf
Journal of Dental Science - UDMY (2021).pdf
English Textual Question & Ans (12th Class).pdf
Ad
Ad

Handbook for MBBS Students-2013-2014

  • 1. www.gmu.ac.ae STUDENT HANDBOOK A Y 2013 - 2014 GMU COLLEGE OF MEDICINE INTEGRATED MBBS PROGRAM
  • 3. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 3 | P a g e C O N T E N TS Introduction 8 GMU Vision & Mission Statement 9 From the President’s Desk 10 Message from the Provost 11 Message from the Dean, College of Medicine 12 About the Student Handbook 13 1.0 Academic Calendar 15 2.0 University Divisions & Academic Programs 18 3.0 License & Recognition 20 4.0 The Campus 22 5.0 Location Map 24 6.0 Undergraduate Admission Policies & Procedures 26 6.1 Policy Statement 6.2 Undergraduate Admission Requirements 6.3 Admission Process 6.4 Documents Required for Admission 6.5 Transfer Admissions Policy and Procedures 6.6 Transfer within GMU 6.7 Re-admission
  • 4. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 4 | P a g e 7.0 Student Services 32 7.1 Office of Student Affairs 7.2 Counseling Services 7.2.1 Student Counseling Policy 7.2.2 Academic Counseling Policy 7.2.3 Personal Counseling 7.2.4 Student Activities Policy 7.3 GMU Undergraduate Student Council 7.3.1 Student Council Executive Board 7.3.2 Student Publications 7.3.3 Student Behavior 7.4 Student Academic Services 7.4.1 The Dean’s Office 7.4.2 Office of Student Affairs 7.4.3 Career Service Office 7.4.3.1 Career Service Policy 7.4.4 Financial Aid Office 7.5 Health Services 7.5.1 Health Services Policy 7.6 Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance 7.7 Student Records Policy 7.8 Information Release Policy 7.9 Plagiarism and Copyright Policy 7.10 Dress Code 7.11 Dining Services 7.12 Recreational Facilities 7.13 Student Support Services 7.14 GMU Physical Facilities 7.14.1 Lecture Halls 7.14.2 GMU Testing Center 7.14.3 Common Rooms & Lockers 7.14.4 Masjid 7.14.5 Mail Box 7.14.6 GMU Hostel 7.15 Transportation 7.16 Telephone 7.17 Classroom & Laboratory Protocol 7.18 Student Identification 7.19 University Entrance 7.20 Car Parking in the Campus 7.21 Information on Safety Issues
  • 5. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 5 | P a g e 8.0 Students’ Rights & Responsibilities 58 8.1 Student Rights 8.1.1 Rights in the Pursuit of Education 8.1.2 Right to access Records and Facilities 8.1.3 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy & Publication 8.1.4 Right to contribute to University Governance and Curriculum 8.2 Students’ Responsibilities 8.3 GMU Honor Code 8.4 Salient Features of the Honor Code 8.5 Breach of Honor Code 8.6 Effects of Committing an ‘Honor Offence’ 9.0 University Resources and Services 62 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Vision 9.3 Mission 9.4 Library 9.4.1 Timings 9.4.2 Library Resources 9.4.3 Library Orientation 9.4.4 Audio Visuals 9.4.5 Scanning and Printing 9.4.6 Photocopy 9.4.7 Journal Article Request Service 9.4.8 Cataloguing 9.4.9 Online Public Access Catalogue (OPAC) 9.4.10 Security Gates 9.5 Library Policy and Procedures 9.6 Library Rules & Regulations 9.7 Circulation Policy and Procedures 9.8 Multimedia Labs 9.9 Network Infrastructure 9.10 Wi-Fi Network 9.11 Online Resources 9.12 Servers & Supports 9.13 IT Training 9.14 Internet Services 9.15 Technology Support for Learning 9.16 IT Support Team 9.17 User accesses and Security 9.18 E-Learning at GMU
  • 6. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 6 | P a g e 10.0 GMC Hospital & Research Center (GMCH & RC) 71 10.1 Vision 10.2 Mission 10.3 Clinical Departments & Services 10.3.1 Do’s 10.3.2 Don’ts 10.3.3 Violation Warning 11.0 Student Finance 75 11.1 Student Finance Policy 11.2 Tuition Fees 11.3 Hostel Fees 11.4 Utilities Service Fees 11.5 Registration Fees 11.6 Examination Fees 11.7 Visa Charges 11.8 Caution Deposit 11.9 Fees for Other Services 11.10 Transportation Fees 11.11 Payment of Fees 11.12 Late Fees and Fines 11.13 Financial Aid and Scholarships 11.14 Refund of Fees 11.15 Revision of Tuition and Other Fees 12.0 Academic Policies 80 12.1 Program Completion Policy 12.2 Academic Progress Policy 12.3 Grading, Assessment and Progression Policy 12.4 Online Examination (Exam Soft) 12.5 International Foundations of Medicine (IFOM) I & II Examinations 13.0 Misconduct & Disciplinary Procedures 85 13.1 Student Misconduct & Disciplinary Procedures 13.1.1 Academic Misconduct 13.1.2 Personal Misconduct 13.1.2.1 Personal Misconduct on University Premises 13.1.2.2Personal Misconduct Outside University Premises 13.2 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities 13.2.1 Student Rights and Responsibilities Policy 13.2.2 Rights in the Pursuit of Education
  • 7. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 7 | P a g e 13.2.3 Right to Access Records and Facilities 13.2.4 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy & Publication 13.2.5 Right to Contribute to University Governance and Curriculum 13.2.6 Student’s Responsibilities 14.0 The Integrated MBBS Program 95 14.1 Goals 14.2 Intended Program Learning Outcomes 14.3 MBBS Program Structure 14.4 Plan of Study 14.5 Course Descriptions 14.6 Clinical Training Sites 14.7 Course Outline 14.8 Typical Week 14.9 PBL Week 15.0 List of Text Books, Reference Books, Recommended Readings 180 15.0 Grading, Assessment & Progression Policies 193 16.0 Dean’s List of Toppers 202 17.0 Administrators & Faculty 203
  • 8. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 8 | P a g e Introduction MBBS Student handbook is meant to provide information and guidelines on the various services and MBBS program offered by College of Medicine (CoM) at GMU. It contains sections covering admission procedure, general rules and regulations, student support services, curriculum details, departments and examination policies. Each section has been listed in the contents so that you can refer quickly to areas of particular interest to you. Please note that attendance in various courses arranged by the college is mandatory and this has been repeatedly stressed in the handbook. Every effort has been made to provide accurate and up to date information. Additional information useful to students will be regularly displayed on the college notice board. Students are also advised to get in touch with course coordinators for any academic difficulties. We hope that the handbook will help and guide you during the new academic year at CoM.
  • 9. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 9 | P a g e GMU Vision Statement The Vision of Gulf Medical University is to be a leading contributor to the continuous improvement of the nation’s health care delivery system through the pursuit of excellence in medical education, biomedical research and health care services. The University aspires to provide a unique learning experience of high quality to our students and produce graduates whose competence will help them to make a significant contribution to the health of the community through pursuit of academia, research and health care. The University aspires to attract the best of students by offering a variety of excellent programs supported by quality administration and student support services. The University aspires to be known for excellence and impact of its research on the educational milieu of the nation and the outcomes of clinical care. The University aspires to be an integral part of the community through transfer of knowledge, continuous dialogue with the country’s health care planners and enhanced community service. GMU Mission Statement It is the Mission of the Gulf Medical University to strengthen and promote excellence in medical education, biomedical research and patient care. GMU is committed to prepare a highly skilled health workforce made up of health care professionals, health management and support workers and health science investigators in order to meet the health care needs of the nation and the region. GMU will strive to produce health care professionals who will integrate the advances in research with the best clinical practices. GMU will promote health services, which incorporate the latest advances in scientific knowledge in a manner that supports education and research for the benefit of the community.
  • 10. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 10 | P a g e From the President’s Desk Dear Students, It gives me great pleasure to welcome you to the portals of Gulf Medical University where we are entering into an exciting new era! You are beginning a new chapter in your life here at Gulf Medical University. It will be a challenging yet exciting and illuminating journey for you. I am grateful to the Almighty Allah for the remarkable development the Gulf Medical University has undergone in the last 15 years, where the University has been able to make its mark in Medical Education, Healthcare and Research. We aspire to be among the best in the region, and we're making it happen right now. We have embarked on a journey of making GMU as a Research Based University in the coming years. Our students coming in from 67 nations around the world thrive in our culture of dynamism and innovation. We are proud of our traditions, our current standing and our vision for the future. GMU students come from every corner of the world to invest in education that inspires challenges and prepares them to be globally competitive. Eventually they discover a world of opportunities to explore new possibilities, new ideas and new perspectives to prepare them for life in their chosen career paths. Our students find in GMU a rich, vibrant, innovative, and enriching academic experience. The newly launched Center for Advanced Biomedical Research and Innovation (CABRI) has been established to evolve, integrate, and develop multi-disciplinary research and enhance the teaching activities of the university. It will also provide advanced diagnostic research and testing services in the areas of Allergies, Diabetes, Cardiovascular Disease and Hereditary diseases. Newer fields like Proteomics, Metabolomics and Genomics will be explored. The Center for Quality Enhancement (CQE) has been established as a central facility to enhance Quality within the University, the hospitals and laboratories of the group. The GMC Hospitals one among the Clinical Training sites for the students of the Gulf Medical University is now expanding rapidly with new hospitals in Dubai, Ajman, Sharjah and Ras Al Khaimah being added to enhance the clinical training facilities to students of Gulf Medical University. The latest expansions include the 25,000 sq.ft. modern simulation center to be made available for clinical training in the forthcoming academic year. I invite you to join us in this exciting journey into a bright future with a University that is talented, dedicated, and caring. We wish you a happy and fruitful time during your study in the Gulf Medical University. Thumbay Moideen Founder President - GMU Board of Governors
  • 11. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 11 | P a g e Welcome Note from the Provost Dear Students, On behalf of the President, the faculty, administration and the student body, I am delighted to welcome you to the Gulf Medical University also known as GMU! The university learning community will now be made up of students working to become practicing physicians, pharmacists, dentists and physical therapists, a multi professional group very much like the multi professional healthcare delivery teams of the 21st Century. We hope at GMU as you “Study together today to work together tomorrow” you will share the large pool of knowledge and experience that is available in the different health related disciplines with each other and grow to respect the contribution made by each health profession to provide comprehensive health care to the community you will together serve in the future. Members of the faculty, as well as students and staff have helped building this institution that is attracting regional, national and international attention. With a faculty committed to maintaining strong academic standards for our students and ourselves and the commitment of the administration and staff in every aspect of our mission and your contribution as a member of the university community we will together realize the potential to deliver the vision of GMU. The leadership of the faculty and staff at GMU is engaged in efforts to strengthen teaching, learning, research and creativity both at the undergraduate and graduate levels. GMU’s mission is focused on assuring the quality of its programs to the university student population. With the establishment of the Center for Advanced Biomedical Research and Innovation (CABRI), active research combined with public service shall further strengthen opportunities for learning. As you become familiar with the campus, your mentors and your peers you will surely be impressed with the multifaceted and rich academic environment. We are confident that your contributions to the lives of fellow students, your chosen career field and the university will be marked by excellence. Welcome. Prof. Gita Ashok Raj MD; MNAMS Provost - Gulf Medical University
  • 12. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 12 | P a g e Message from the Dean, College of Medicine Greetings from College of Medicine, GMU! College of Medicine in its over 15 years of existence has remained undiminished in its endeavor to impart quality education and clinical training to our undergraduate medical students. We follow the organ-system based integrated curriculum incorporating elements of innovative trends in medical education. Students receive good clinical exposure to a large number and a wide variety of clinical cases as they are posted in Hospitals under Ministry of Health and Al Mafraq Hospital, Abu Dhabi under SEHA in addition to our own GMC Hospital at Ajman for their clerkship training in order to become safe practitioners of the future. I take this opportunity to thank MoH, SEHA & GMC Hospitals for offering their clinical training sites for our students. Every student undertakes a research project by the end of third year that enables to imbibe the quality of a scientist early in their training. Emphasis on evidence-based approach to decision making, participation in community services, professionalism and ethics form important elements of the curriculum. Students are trained to become self-learners and life- long learners in order to adapt to the ever-changing advances in the medical field. College of Medicine is offering a number of short and long-term courses including AHA accredited Life Support Courses as part of continuing medical education. It is a reality for majority of students graduating from College of Medicine and wanting to update their knowledge and skills or pursue further studies, to look upon their alma mater to provide the same. The multi-national and multi-cultural mix of student diaspora is encouraged to participate in a wide variety of extra-curricular activities like cultural and ethnic day celebrations, debate and sports competitions. I thank our Founder President; Mr.Thumbay Moideen to provide us with constant guidance and support and today under his leadership and vision, College of Medicine is the ultimate destination for any student aspiring to be a successful doctor. Dear students, welcome to the College of Medicine, GMU for a promising and glorious future! Prof. Manda Venkatramana, MS, FRCSEd, PGDHPE Dean, College of Medicine, GMU Professor of Surgery
  • 13. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 13 | P a g e About The Student Handbook This handbook is a source of important information regarding Gulf Medical University (GMU) policies, regulations, rules, procedures and facilities which will be very useful to students during their studies. The material contained herein is a supplement to the Catalog and other information distributed to the students by GMU. Every effort has been made to provide students with complete and accurate information. The University reserves the right to change program, requirements and to modify, amend or revoke any rule/s, regulation/s and / or financial schedules. However, the information published in this handbook shall be valid for the academic year for which it is published.
  • 14. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 14 | P a g e ACADEMIC CALENDAR
  • 15. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 15 | P a g e 1.0 Academic Calendar 2013 Day Events Jul 31 Tue Last day for application for admission Aug 31 All days Registration period Aug 15 Thu Last day for payment of tuition and other fees for all returning students** FALL SEMESTER Sep 4 Wed Fall Semester begin 1st Year MBBS (Phase – I) Students and Parents welcome session Reopening for returning 4th Year (Phase – III Year 1) students Reopening for returning 5th Year (Phase – III Year 2) students at Mafraq Hospital, Abu Dhabi Sep 8 Sun Reopening for returning 2nd Year (Phase – II Year 1) students Reopening for returning 3rd Year (Phase – II Year 2) students Sep 26 Thu White Coat Ceremony Oct 13 - 17 Sun –Thu *Eid Al Adha Holiday Nov 4 Mon *Islamic New Year Holiday Nov 5 - 6 Tue & Wed GMU Annual Scientific Meeting Dec 2 Mon National Day Holiday Dec 22 – Jan 2 Sun – Thu Fall Semester Break for the I, II, III & IV Year MBBS students Dec 28 Sat Phase – III Year 2 Semester – 9 Examination 2014 Jan 1 Wed New Year Holiday Jan 4 Sat Phase – III Year 1 Semester – 7 Examination begins Jan 5 Sun Phase – II Year 2 Semester – 5 Examination begins Jan 6 Mon Phase – II Year 1 Semester – 3 Examination begins Jan 9 Thu V Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins IV Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins Jan 13 Mon *Al Moulid Al Nabawi Holiday Feb 2 Sun Phase – III Re-sit Examination begins Feb 9 Sun Final MBBS Part – II Professional Supplementary Examination begins Feb 10 Mon Final MBBS Part – I Professional Supplementary Examination begins Feb 16 Sun Phase – I Semester – 1 Examination begins
  • 16. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 16 | P a g e SPRING SEMESTER Feb 23 Sun Spring Semester begin Mar 20 Thu Annual Sports Day Mar 21 Fri GMU Global Day Mar 22 Sat GMU Literary Day Mar 30 – Apr 10 Sun - Thu Spring Semester Break for the I, II, III Year MBBS Students May 26 Mon *Israa Al Mihraj Holiday Jun 16 Mon V Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins Jun 22 Sun Phase – III Year 2 Semester – 10 (theory & OSCE) Examination begins Phase – II Year 2 Semester – 6 Examination begins Jun 29 Sun Phase – I Semester – 2 Examination begins Jun 28 Sat *Holy month of Ramadan Starts Jun 30 Mon IV Year MBBS Sessional Examination begins Jul 6 Sun Final MBBS Part – II Professional Examination begins Jul 13 Sun Phase – III Professional Examination begins Phase – II Professional Examination begins Final MBBS Part – I Professional Examination begins Jul 20 Sun Phase – I Professional Examination begin Phase – III Year 1 Semester – 8 Examination begins Phase – II Year 1 Semester – 4 Examination begins Jul 27 – Aug 31 Sat Eid Al Fitr Holidays & Summer vacation * Islamic holidays are determined after sighting the moon. Thus actual dates of holidays may not coincide with the dates in this calendar. **All tuition and other fees are subject to revision by Gulf Medical University’s Board of Governors in accordance with University requirements. Every year, fees are reviewed and subject to revision. As and when fees are revised, the new fees will be applicable to all enrolled and new students. The amount shown in this document represent fees as currently approved.
  • 17. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 17 | P a g e UNIVERSITY DIVISIONS & ACADEMIC PROGRAMS
  • 18. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 18 | P a g e 2.0 University Divisions and Academic Programs The University has six academic divisions offering following degree and non-degree programs. College of Medicine (CoM)  Bachelor of Medicine & Bachelor of Surgery (MBBS) Program  Bachelor of Biomedical Sciences (BBMS) Program College of Pharmacy (CoP)  Doctor of Pharmacy (PharmD) Program College of Dentistry (CoD)  Doctor of Dental Medicine (DMD) Program College of Allied Health Sciences (CoAHS)  Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) Program College of Graduate Studies (CoGS)  Master of Science in Clinical Pathology (MS CP)  Master in Public Health (MPH)  Master in Toxicology (MTox)  Diploma in Toxicology (DipTox)  Masters in Human Reproductive Biology (MHRB)  Master of Physical Therapy (MPT) Center for Continuing Education and Community Outreach (CCE&CO)  Non degree programs
  • 19. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 19 | P a g e LICENSE & RECOGNITION
  • 20. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 20 | P a g e 3.0 License & Recognition The following programs have received Initial Accreditation from Commission for Academic Accreditation, Ministry of Higher Education & Scientific Research (CAA MOHE&SR), AbuDhabi – UAE. SI.No Program Month &Year of Initial Accreditation 1 Bachelor of Medicine & Bachelor of Surgery (MBBS) September 2004 2 Bachelor of Physiotherapy (BPT) June 2005 3 Doctor of Pharmacy (PharmD) August 2008 4 Doctor of Dental Medicine (DMD) September 2008 5 Master of Science in Clinical Pathology (MS CP) January 2009 6 Master in Public Health (MPH) July 2010 7 Master in Toxicology (MTox) July 2010 8 Diploma in Toxicology (Dip Tox) July 2010 9 Masters in Human Reproductive Biology (MHRB) December 2012 10 Master of Physical Therapy (MPT) May 2013 11 Bachelor of Biomedical Sciences (BBMS) October 2013 Gulf Medical University is listed in the WHO World Directory of Medical Schools and in the Eastern Mediterranean Regional Office (EMRO), WHO website. http://www.emro.who.int/hped/ Gulf Medical College is listed as an accredited / recognized medical school in the International Medical Education Directory (IMED) published by Foundation of Advancement of International Medical Education and Research (FAIMER) at the website http://imed.ecfmg.org/
  • 21. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 21 | P a g e THE CAMPUS
  • 22. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 22 | P a g e 4.0 The Campus The Gulf Medical University is located in the Al Jarf area in the northern emirate of Ajman on a vast stretch of land extending up to a 100,000 sq.mtrs and a built area of 1,90,000 sq.ft. It has laboratories, classrooms and administration buildings, a standalone building that houses the library and the modern multimedia centers, a cafeteria, multi-cuisine restaurant and a sports complex with courts for lawn tennis, basketball, volley ball and lush green grounds for cricket and football and the vacant grounds have been earmarked for the future multispecialty hospital, the residence halls for students and living quarters for the staff and faculty. The Gulf Medical College Hospital and Research Center is located a few miles away on the side of a main arterial road entering Ajman from the neighboring emirate of Sharjah and currently serves as the teaching hospital for GMU. The affiliated hospitals are located in the different emirates: Mafraq Hospital in Abu Dhabi (HAAD), Sheikh Khalifa Hospital in Ajman, Umm Al Quwain Hospital in UAQ and Ajman Municipality Public Health Clinic. The GMU Campus includes modern facilities with classrooms, laboratories and learning center that are appropriately equipped with up-to-date instructional and educational aids. GMU encourages social, cultural and other extra-curricular activities and sports to enhance a comprehensive personality development. The spacious campus spotted with greenery contains student rest rooms, prayer halls, indoor and outdoor sports facilities, first aid clinic, and student car parking. The facilities are well connected with each other making it easy for students to move from one area to another.
  • 23. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 23 | P a g e LOCATION MAP
  • 24. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 24 | P a g e 5.0 Location Map
  • 25. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 25 | P a g e UNDERGRADUATE ADMISSION POLICIES & PROCEDURES
  • 26. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 26 | P a g e 6.0 Undergraduate Admission Policies & Procedures 6.1 Policy Statement Gulf Medical University admits students irrespective of their national origin, color, gender or religion to all the rights, privileges, activities and programs offered by the university. The University stands for the highest moral and academic standards consistent with the heritage and cultural background of the United Arab Emirates and shall aspire for national and international recognition of its programs and degrees. The University sets high standards for previous academic performance to attract student of high caliber and to meet and exceed the standards of high retention, low attrition and outstanding academic performance required to fulfill the accreditation standards for every program offered by the University. 6.2 Undergraduate Admission Requirements  Applicants shall meet all criteria for admission into each programs offered by the University as laid down in the Standards published by the Commission for Academic Accreditation, Ministry of Higher Education and Scientific Research, UAE.  The applicant must have completed a minimum of 12 years of education in school and passed subjects in Physics, Chemistry and Biology in higher secondary school.  The applicant must have secured a minimum of 80% marks as per U.A.E. Secondary School education standards or its equivalent in each of the three science subjects (Physics, Chemistry, Biology)  Students who complete their secondary school education as per UK curriculum must have completed at least two of the three science subjects (Physics, Chemistry, Biology) in ‘AS’ levels or ‘A’ levels provided they have passed in all the three subjects in their ‘O’ levels. The minimum grade required is B/C in AS/A level in Chemistry, Biology or Physics.  A score of at least 28 of IB (International Baccalaureate) and for holders of American Diploma a minimum score of 80% is required in addition to a SAT II score of at least 550 in Biology.  An aggregate score of 75% for Pakistan Board, 80% for Indian State Board and 75% for Indian Central Board while the minimum score of 70% in each subject of Biology, Physics and Chemistry is required.  The applicant must have completed 17 years of age on or before the 31st of December of the year of admission.
  • 27. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 27 | P a g e  The applicant must have proficiency in spoken and written English and Science terminology.  The applicant must have passed the English language proficiency test such as TOEFL or IELTS. A minimum score of 500 TOEFL (173 CBT, 61 iBT) or its equivalent in a standardized English language test, such as 5.0 for IELTS or any other equivalent internationally recognized test.  The applicant shall appear for a written MCQ test and a personal interview before the GMU Admissions Committee.  The Admissions Committee shall evaluate all applicants for both cognitive and non- cognitive traits demonstrating their aptitude for the chosen area of study.  Applicants shall submit all academic documents and official transcripts / credits / grades / marks duly attested by the Ministry of Education, U.A.E. and Ministry of Foreign Affairs, U.A.E. or U.A.E. Embassy in their country on admission into the program.  Applicant shall submit a copy of the Equivalency Certificate issued by the Ministry of Education – U.A.E.  Applicant shall submit a copy of the Emirates ID.  Students of Indian nationality are required to obtain an “Eligibility Certificate” from the Medical Council of India / Dental Council of India, New Delhi before they seek admission into the MBBS / DMD program.  On admission, the student shall submit a copy of the individual’s birth certificate or proof of age, the applicant’s passport, and a copy of UAE nationality ID (Khulasat Al- Kayd), a Certificate of Good Conduct. A medical fitness certificate including blood test results, fifteen recent colour photographs, a written pledge by the applicant agreeing to comply with University rules and regulations, the application form duly filled up with complete details, a receipt for payment of a non-refundable fee towards admission. All information regarding admissions shall appear in the Catalog, Institutional website and in any other forms of advertisement circulated by the University. 6.3 Admission Process This is carried out in several stages: 1) Advertisement in the media: Information in the media will include details of the programs, colleges of the university, admissions criteria and online registration form. 2) Scrutiny of information: The Admissions Committee scrutinizes the credentials of the applicant with reference to the high school education: courses, grades in the qualifying examinations and the overall suitability of the applicant for admission into the program. The committee would also inform the applicant regarding the need for any additional documents that may be required.
  • 28. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 28 | P a g e 3) Short listing: Applicants whose credentials have been accepted as adequate by the Admissions Committee are informed about the date and time for a personal interview that would be conducted in Gulf Medical University, Ajman. GMU will provide necessary help concerning visa arrangements for students from outside UAE. 4) Personal Interview: The Admissions Committee of GMU will conduct the personal interview. The committee follows a protocol for the interview that will last approximately 45 minutes. The conversation during the interview will be in English. This will be in an informal atmosphere and the applicant will be given ample opportunity to respond to the questions in a relaxed manner. After the personal interview, the Admissions Committee will submit its recommendations to the Provost concerning the suitability of the candidate for admission. 5) Provost Approval: The Provost of GMU will finalize admissions after studying the recommendations of the Admissions Committee. The decision of the Provost on matters concerning admissions shall be final. 6) Academic Advising: GMU is committed to provide academic advising in order to advise students in the development and pursuit of academic objectives consistent with their life goals and the available opportunities at the university. 7) Medical Fitness: Students admitted to GMU are required to submit a Medical Fitness certificate soon after they have registered on the University rolls. The Medical Examination in this connection will be carried out in GMC Hospital & Research Center, Ajman. 8) Enrollment: Candidates who are finally selected for admission are required (within the time announced on the notification of selection) to submit a letter of acceptance to the Provost, along with the fee in cash or by demand draft in favor of Gulf Medical University, Ajman payable at Ajman, U.A.E. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in cancellation of the admission. 6.4Documents Required for Admission:  Application form with all entries completed  Attested copy of High School Mark Sheet  Certificate of English language proficiency test  True copy of applicant's passport  Fifteen recent passport-size photographs  Emirates ID copy  Equivalency certificate issued by the Ministry of Education, UAE
  • 29. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 29 | P a g e 6.5 Transfer Admissions Policy and Procedures: Students shall be considered for transfer only as per the following Transfer Admissions Policy of the University:  Only students from a federal or licensed institution in the U.A.E. or a recognized Foreign Institution of higher learning shall be eligible for admission by transfer.  All transfer students shall meet the English Language proficiency requirements of the program to which they are transferred.  All transfer students shall submit official transcripts before admission to the Program in which they are transferred.  All transfer students shall submit official transcripts of credit earned from all institutions of higher education previously attended before admission to undergraduate programs.  Only students who are in good academic standing (a minimum cumulative grade point average of 2.0 on a 4.0. scale, or equivalent) for transfer to an undergraduate program of study similar to that from which the student is transferring shall be accepted for admission.  Students who are not in good standing shall be transferred only to a program in a field different from the one from which the student is transferring.  The University shall transfer undergraduate program credits only for courses relevant to the degree that provide equivalent learning outcomes and in which the student earned a grade of B (2.0 on a 4.0 scale) or better;  The University shall inform applicants for transfer admissions or re-admission of the transfer credits earned for previous courses.  The University shall limit transferred credit hours to less than 50% of the total credit hours required for the program.  The University shall not grant credit twice for substantially the same course taken at two different institutions.  The University shall allow the transfer of credits for clinical training only when done in the U.A.E.; in exceptional circumstances, in which case waiver of this condition shall be sought from the CAA, MoHESR before admission.  On admission, the student shall submit a copy of the individual’s birth certificate or proof of age, the applicant’s passport and a copy of UAE nationality ID (Khulasat Al-Kayd), a Certificate of Good Conduct, a medical fitness certificate including blood test results, six recent color photographs, a written pledge by the applicant to comply with University rules and regulations, the application form duly filled up with complete details and a receipt for payment of a non-refundable fee towards admission.
  • 30. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 30 | P a g e 6.6 Transfer within GMU The students' wishes are taken into consideration when applying to the programs of Gulf Medical University. However, they will be allowed to transfer to other programs available in the university according to established rules based on the recommendations of the Admissions Committee. 6.7 Re-admission Students who are on leave for a period of one year must apply for re-admission to the program through the Admissions Office.  Students in Good Standing: Students who are absent on approved leaves must apply for re-admission before they will be permitted to register for the semester.  Students Suspended for misconduct: Students who have been rusticated from the university and under probation must apply for readmission and may be readmitted after serving the suspension period.  Students on academic probation: Students who fail to meet the minimum GPA requirement but have satisfied other requirements may be allowed to register as a non-matriculate student for a probationary period. Non matriculated students who achieve a minimum GPA of 2.0 can be readmitted, provided they meet all the other requirements.
  • 31. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 31 | P a g e STUDENT SERVICES
  • 32. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 32 | P a g e 7.0. Student Services 7.1 Office of Student Affairs The Office of Student Affairs supports and complements the mission of the University and its academic programs by creating a comfortable, safe and secure environment that contributes to the success of the students’ educational mission and personal growth. It helps to involve students in the university community by providing appropriate student organizations, activities, publications and opportunities for interaction with faculty, staff and peers outside the classroom. 7.2 Counseling Services 7.2.1 Student Counseling Policy All counseling sessions are conducted with the utmost regard to confidentiality and all records kept by Counselor are treated as confidential. Information shared with a counselor is not released to anyone outside the Counseling Services office. Information may be released under the following exceptions, if,  the student gives written permission to disclose information (In that instance, the student determines what information is to be released and to whom.) or  A student presents a danger to himself / herself or to another person. Students meeting with a counselor shall be encouraged to discuss any concerns that they have about confidentiality. 7.2.2 Academic Counseling Policy Student advising is part of the academic duties of every faculty member. The Dean or Chair of the Academic Unit assigns advisors so that the number of advisees per faculty member is as small as possible. Each student shall have an appointed full-time faculty advisor. This does not preclude informal advising with a student regarding progress in the courses being taught. Student advising is not limited to registering students, but encompasses all aspects of academic advising, including selection of electives, counseling on any academic difficulty/ ies or problem encountered, and monitoring the academic progress of advisees.
  • 33. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 33 | P a g e An academic advising guide has been prepared by the Provost’s office and is distributed to all academic advisors. Students receive notification of their faculty advisor and a listing of all students and advisors is available in the Academic Advising Center (AAC). Prior to actual course registration, faculty are available to advisees during their scheduled office hours to discuss academic programs and issues related to vocational, career and educational goals. A record is kept of the advisory meetings. Faculty advisors assigned to the Office of Advising, Assessment and Counseling Center shall coordinate further referrals. Adjunct faculty is not to be responsible for the academic advisement of their students. 7.2.3 Personal Counseling Professional counseling is available for personal problems (i.e., financial, career, home, health) especially if you have;  Physical complaints when no medical causes can be found.  Excessive anxiety for examinations / accommodation / or home sickness.  Lack of interest in daily activities.  An unusual amount of irritability or fear to mingle with friends.  Not been able to cope with studies.  Inability to concentrate.  Personality changes that can’t be explained such as sudden shifts in mood / behavior. Referrals are made to the office of Admission & Registers regarding regulations concerning questions of transfer; to the Accounts Office regarding financial aid issues; to the Career Counselor’s Office regarding career or job placement issues; by the Dean Student Affairs who attends to all student activities, discipline issues, university policy etc. 7.2.4 Student Activities Policy The Office of Student Affairs offer comprehensive programs and services that foster an educational environment conducive to the overall development of students. The Office of the Dean of Student Affairs oversees all departments catering to various student services and serves as an advocate for students in the development of University policy. The Office is also responsible for administering the University code of conduct (judicial policies). Information on specific programs and services particularly athletic, cultural and literary like GMU Global day celebrations, intercollegiate Sports meet, debates, presentations at scientific meetings, health exhibitions shall be published in the Student handbook,
  • 34. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 34 | P a g e University Catalog and displayed prominently on Student Notice Boards, the University Website and MYGMU e-platform to encourage participation by all students in these events. 7.3 GMU Undergraduate Student Council The GMU student council comprises of representatives elected from the various academic programs. GMU Student Council shall have representation in faculty committees such as Academic Council, College Council, Student Affairs Committee, Curriculum Development Committee, Library Council, Sports, Culture & Literary Committee, Campus Health, Campus Safety and Security Committee. The student council comprises of class representatives. Each class will elect student representatives who would coordinate the curricular and extracurricular activities of the class. Each class will elect two representatives comprising one male and one female. The class representatives will be elected following an approved election procedure and the procedure consists of the following stages:  Nominations of the candidates are submitted to the Dean / Associate Dean of Student Affairs.  The Dean / Associate Dean of Student Affairs will supervise the voting and declare the results of the election.  The names of the elected class representatives will be announced to the University.  Elected student representatives will be invited to the Office of the Dean / Associate Dean of Student Affairs where they will sign a formal document accepting their duties and responsibilities as elected members of the student council.  The elected representatives from the student council will represent in different committees.  The University reserves the right to remove student representatives from their office on disciplinary grounds and/or inadequate performance. Duties and Responsibilities of Student Representatives 1. To interact with other students in the class and collect data on matters pertaining to the teaching program, examinations and student welfare measures. 2. To bring to the notice of the faculty, Associate Dean or the Dean any matter/s relating to student activities, which require modification/s or corrective measures. 3. To attend meetings of Student Council with the Associate Deans and the Dean at regular intervals. The members of the Student Council are expected to come prepared with the agenda for such meetings so that all relevant points can be discussed in an orderly manner.
  • 35. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 35 | P a g e 4. To identify any personal problem of the students which require immediate or urgent intervention and brings it to the notice of the faculty, Associate Deans or the Dean. 5. To recommend effective measures relating to student activities (academics, discipline and welfare). 6. To act as a healthy and reliable link between the students on one hand and the members of faculty and administration on the other. 7.3.1 Student Council Executive Board Elected representatives from the Student Council form the Student Council Executive Board comprising one student from each program who will attend the respective college council meetings called for by the Deans of the respective colleges. The university reserves the right to remove any student representative from their elected office on disciplinary grounds and / or inadequate performance. Students indulging in Academic or Personal misconduct will not be allowed to be elected for Class Representative or Member of Student Council Executive Board; and those holding these posts already stand to be disqualified. 7.3.2 Student Publications Students write, edit and publish a newsletter (Previously ‘GMU Pulse’, under name change at present), which is an essential feature that chronicles student life at GMU. The students’ newsletter expresses their sense of commitment and degree of cooperation as well as their awareness of the educational and social issues that affect life in the GMU. The newsletter reflects the make-up of the GMU and it appears in two languages - Arabic and English. 7.3.3 Student Behavior  All students are expected to maintain decorum and decency in conducting themselves in the Campus.  Men and women students should not be seen together anywhere in the campus including the central hall, corridors, learning center or cafeteria. Members of faculty have been requested to be on the vigil about this and have been authorized to censure any student violating this regulation. 7.4 Student Academic Services 7.4.1 The Dean’s Office The Office of the Dean oversees all departments catering to various student academic services.
  • 36. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 36 | P a g e 7.4.2 Office of Student Affairs Office of Student Affairs coordinates all matters concerning student council, student welfare, career guidance, alumni affairs, student health, placement, student discipline, residential halls, transportation, student publication, student activities and sports. Student may approach the Associate Dean Student Affairs to resolve issues regarding student affairs and student support services. 7.4.3 Career Service Office The University has a full time Career Counselor. 7.4.3.1 Career Service Policy The Career Counselor shall be available at all hours on all working days throughout the year; Students are encouraged to meet the Career Counselor and discuss their career plans. All students are encouraged to avail of clinical training at sites available in the country and abroad during the summer break. The students are encouraged to seek help in preparing their curriculum vitae. Students shall also be helped in filling application forms for taking various licensing examinations being held in the country and abroad. The career counselor collects and disseminates information about the various hospitals, institutions and universities offering internship and residency programs in the country and abroad. The career counselor shall encourage graduates to keep in touch with the alma mater through the University’s website, correspondence and telephone. The Career Counselor maintains a register of GMU Alumni. The Career Office also keeps a record of employment of all Alumni and seeks evaluation of the GMU graduate as an employee. The Career Counselor shall submit reports periodically to update the Alumni records in the Center for Quality Enhancement (CQE). 7.4.4 Financial Aid Office Information on financial aid may be obtained from the Chief Accounts Officer of the Gulf Medical University.
  • 37. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 37 | P a g e Refer to Section 11.13 under Financial Aid and Scholarships in this document for further details. 7.5 Health Services A First Aid Room is available in the GMU campus. All GMU students shall be eligible for medical treatment in the GMCHRC. 7.5.1 Health Services Policy In order to streamline the health care needs of GMU students, a Campus Medical Center has been established. This will provide care in the following areas: o First Aid Service at GMU o Referral to GMC Hospital o Coordination between GMU & GMC Hospital The student Management System has been linked with that of the hospital for easy identification of student for treatment. As part of the registration procedures, every student must be covered for health services under one of the two following plans. Plan – I is compulsory for all GMU sponsored students. This provides medical benefits under the GMCHRC Health Card. Plan II is compulsory for others who are officially enrolled in health insurance plans with their families. Students shall be required to present the Student ID as identification document on registering for medical treatment. The Office of the Academic Affairs at GMCHRC shall make arrangements for access to health care facilities at the hospital and to encourage students to undergo vaccination. It is compulsory for all GMU students to have a valid Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance. Students shall be informed regarding the benefits of immunization and testing for communicable diseases and encouraged to undertake appropriate immunizations and tests. 7.6 Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance As per the Ministry of Health (MoH) guidelines, all students undergoing clinical training at various hospitals are required to have a valid Clinical Training – Third Party Liability Insurance. This insurance cover is restricted to training hours only and / or whilst
  • 38. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 38 | P a g e participating in indoor and/or outdoor university activities under university’s expressed authorization including transportation from and to training centre by university vehicles. 7.7 Student Records Policy  The University shall maintain confidentiality of student records. The student records shall be stored in safe custody and only authorized personnel shall have access to them.  Transcripts shall be issued only upon the signed request of the parent or the student. Under no circumstances shall the student records be released to any third party without the knowledge of the student or the student’s parent.  All official records shall be signed by the Provost of the University whose signatures only shall be recognized outside the bounds of GMU.  A progress report shall be sent regularly to the contact address to inform the guardians about the ward’s progress.  The records policy shall be published in the student handbook for information. The Office of the Dean Admissions & Registers shall maintain the student’s permanent academic record and requests to view the individual’s record must be made to the Office of the Dean Admissions & Registers.  The program office of academic program in which a student is enrolled also maintains student files that are considered non-permanent. Students have the right to access their program file except documents where access has been waived (e.g. recommendation forms).  A student must submit an application to the Dean Admissions & Registers office to obtain access to his/her program academic record. The Dean Admissions & Registers Office shall ensure:  The continuous maintenance and back up of student records with one set stored in a secure location, preferably off-site in a vault or fireproof cabinet.  Special security measures to protect and back up computer-generated and stored records.  Confidentiality of records.  A definition of what constitutes the permanent record of each student; the right of access to student records, including students’ access to their own records.  The authority to manage and update student records.  Appropriate retention and disposal of records. 7.8 Information Release Policy  The University shall neither deny nor effectively prevent current or former students of the University the right to inspect and review their education records.  Students shall be granted access to their records within a reasonable period of time after filing a request. Students have the right to request the amendment of their
  • 39. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 39 | P a g e education records to ensure that the records are not inaccurate, misleading or otherwise in violation of their privacy or other rights.  The University shall not release or provide access to education records, except “directory” information, without the written consent of the student to any individual, agency or organization.  The University is, however, authorized to provide access to student records to Campus officials and employees who have legitimate educational interests in such access. These persons are those who have responsibilities in connection with the academic, administrative, or service functions of the university and who have reason for using student records connected with their academic or other university responsibilities. Disclosure may also be made to other persons, Ministry and Government officials or organizations under certain conditions (e.g. as part of an accreditation or program evaluation; in response to a court order, audit in connection with financial aid; or to institutions to which the student is transferring).  The University shall designate the following items as “directory” information: student name, addresses, telephone numbers, major field of study, participation in officially recognized activities and sports, dates of attendance, degrees and awards received, most recent previous school attended and photograph. The University may disclose any of those items without prior written consent, unless notified in writing on the form available from the Dean Admissions & Registers.  Confidentiality of information shall be highly respected at GMU. If students wish that any of their education record shall be available to anyone, a consent form shall be available in the Office Admissions and Registers. If there is no consent form, information will not be disclosed except to the appropriate person(s) in connection with an emergency, if the knowledge of such information is necessary to protect the health or safety of the student or other persons.  Under no circumstances shall the student records be released to any third party without the prior knowledge of the student or the student’s parent. 7.9 Plagiarism and Copyright Policy: Plagiarism is defined as “a piece of writing that has been copied from someone else and is presented as being your own work”. The student should cite the sources if they use someone else’s ideas. If the student include copyrighted material in their thesis, they are responsible for obtaining written permission from the copyright holder. The Gulf Medical University takes no responsibility in this regard. To avoid plagiarism, student must mention the sources properly using footnotes, endnotes or references, inclusion of illustrative graphs, charts etc. which are copyrighted sources, permission letter should be included.
  • 40. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 40 | P a g e Copyright is legal protection of intellectual property. As thesis is legally classified as publication and an intellectual property of the student, during the preparation of thesis, the student should consider the copyright laws regarding the protection of original work. Copyright ownership means that the student has the exclusive right to print, reprint, copy, sell, and prepare derivative works based on their work. 7.10 Dress Code Professional Dress Students should at all times maintain a neat and clean appearance, and dress in attire that is appropriate. When students are functioning as medical / health professionals, either with clinical patients or simulated patients, dress must be appropriate and professional. A professional image increases credibility, patient’s trust, respect, and confidence. In addition, because medical and health sciences students utilize facilities on campus where patients and the public are present, professional dress and appearance are also expected even when students are not engaged in patient care. In addition, most of the clinical facilities have specific dress code policies that must also be followed. Furthermore, Photo I.D. badges are to be worn at all times. Violation of the dress code can have detrimental consequences for patient care and could damage the reputation of the institution. Flagrant and repeated violations of the dress code may be deemed to signify a lack of insight or maturity on the part of the individual student and call for counseling and discipline. The immediate supervisor may choose to discuss initial violations of the dress code directly with the student. Serious or repeated violations may be subject to disciplinary action.  Students of GMU are expected to maintain decorum in their dress code in accordance with the dignity of the medical profession and of the institution.  Traditional dresses are allowed for only U.A.E nationals.  Students must wear white coats with identity cards / badges on entering the campus / clinical sites and must wear the coats as long as they are inside the campus / clinical sites. The white coat must be clean and well maintained and of acceptable quality. The white coat must be worn fully buttoned.  The security and duty staff have the right to reject admission to any student into the campus when not properly dressed or when not wearing the white coats.  White coats are to be worn only inside the college and hospital premises. Students should not wear white coats in public places such as supermarkets.  Women students must take special care in avoiding skin tight and revealing dress. They must have their hair properly tied up and must not keep the hair loose. All women students must wear dress, which reaches down to the ankle level.  Students must wear dress that does not hinder practical or clinical work.
  • 41. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 41 | P a g e 7.11 Dining Services GMU provides modern dining services in the campus where meals are served at a reasonable price. The dining facilities are provided at 3 locations in the campus and 2 in the GMC hospital. The ‘Terrace’ a multi cuisine restaurant located in the campus serves all the Arab, Continental & Asian cuisines. 7.12 Recreational Facilities State of the art recreational facilities are provided in the Body & Soul Health Club, a gymnastic unit of GMU. Membership is provided to the students at a concessional rate and they can enjoy all facilities including swimming. World class Basketball, Volleyball courts, Tennis courts, Cricket & Football fields have been located in the campus. Separate indoor Table Tennis facility for male and female students has been provided. The sports committee announces inter-collegiate sports events every year wherein interested students can participate. 7.13 Student Support Services Faculty in-charge/ Name Tel.No: 06 7431333 Coordinators Hostel : Dr. Joshua Ashok Ext. 317 Mrs. Sherly Ajay Ext. 384 Sports & First Aid: Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie Ext. 211 Cultural Activities: Mr. Vignesh Unadkat Ext. 240 Library: Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas Ext. 316 Administrative Assistance: Accounts: Mr. Aslam Hameed Ext. 300 Library: Mr. Diaz Idiculla Ext. 221 Mr. Ansal Ext. 221 Common Rooms, Common utilities and Transport: Mr. Subeesh Ext. 219 Audio Visual Aids: Mr. Supreeth / Mr. Bilal Ext. 222 Visa and Health Card: Mr. Fayaz Mohammed Ext. 238 Photocopy Section, Mail Boxes and Sub store Mr. Sakthi Ext. 283
  • 42. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 42 | P a g e 7.14 GMU Physical Facilities 7.14.1 Lecture Halls The lectures are usually held in the four main lecture halls - Lecture Hall I, Lecture Hall II, Lecture Hall III and Lecture Hall IV. In addition the demonstration rooms located close to laboratories are used in teaching smaller classes for lectures, group discussions, seminars and tutorials. The graduate students have their classrooms in the teaching / learning center. 7.14.2 GMU Testing Center The state-of-the-art GMU testing center is the latest addition to the ever-growing facilities of Gulf Medical University. This new unit is capable of accommodating placement tests, examinations or any other form of testing through a sophisticated technical set-up. With a capacity of holding up to 88 participants, the centre has all modern facilities. To meet the standards required for international testing regulations, invigilators are supported with adequate number of CCTV cameras in each testing halls. The testing center has a data processing room where post-test analysis of scores could be done or the central valuation room for the examiners to value paper based tests. Access to the center and examination halls is user-friendly to people with special needs (wide elevator and doors). 7.14.3 Common Rooms & Lockers Separate common rooms with locker facility are available for male and female students. Locker keys may be obtained from the Administrative office. In the event of any damages to the lockers or loss of keys, a fine of AED 100 is levied. Only materials pertaining to academic and learning needs are to be kept in the lockers; strict disciplinary action is taken if any objectionable material is found in the lockers. 7.14.4 Masjid Separate entrance for men and women with ablution facilities are provided in the Masjid. 7.14.5 Mail Box All incoming postal mail would be kept in the designated area close to the photocopying section. 7.14.6 GMU Hostel Separate hostel facilities for male and female students are provided on request. Resident wardens in the hostels take care of student needs. Indoor games and Internet facilities are available for recreation and study.
  • 43. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 43 | P a g e A. Aim: The Office of Student Affairs support and complement the mission of the college and its academic program by creating a comfortable and safe environment that contributes to the success of resident students’ educational progress and personal growth. The hostel offers a learning environment that fosters self-dependence, respect for social and communal norms, and tolerance of cultural diversity. The residence halls provide opportunities for residents to improve their leadership, communication and social skills, which support their academic development. B. Hostels GMC Girls Hostel Ajman Single / Sharing rooms GMC Boys Hostel Ajman Single / Sharing rooms C. Hostel Fees details Students who are sent out of the hostel on disciplinary action will not be eligible to get refund of the rent. Hostel Single Sharing Ajman 19000/- + 1000 security deposit 13000/- + 1000 security deposit D. Hostel Regulations These rules have been formulated to help the students to study comfortably in the hostel, to ensure their safety and maintain discipline. All the inmates of the hostels are to strictly adhere to these rules. 1. Right of Occupancy a. GMU students who have paid or arranged for the payment of their hostel fees, tuition and other college fees have the right to reside. b. Rent is charged for one academic year extending from the beginning of the academic year to the end. c. Request of renewal to be submitted and paid before the next academic year. The room is confirmed only on payment. d. Students leaving the hostel in the middle of an academic year are not eligible for refund of the rent. e. Student has the right to report to the Warden, Hostel In charge or Office of Student Affairs in case of any difficulty faced during her / his stay in the hostel. 2. Security a. To ensure the security of all students, all GMU hostels are protected by security staff / warden for 24 hrs. throughout the year.
  • 44. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 44 | P a g e 3. Facility a. Air conditioned room with kitchen and bathroom, cot with mattress and quilt, fridge, study table and chair, wooden cupboard, micro-oven. b. Water cooler provided in each floor, common washing area, computer lab and exercise room. c. Cleaning, transportation and fulltime warden. 4. Curfew a. During week days (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, & Thursday) all resident female students are expected to be in their respective dorms by 9:00 p.m. and male students by 9:30 pm b. During weekends (Friday & Saturday) female students must report back before 10:00 p.m. and male students report back before 11:00 p.m. c. Daily attendance of hostel students will be conducted and submitted to the Hostel In-charge and Office of Student Affairs. d. The hostel Warden monitors the attendance records regularly for tardiness and absences. Repeated violation of attendance regulations will be reported to the Office of Student Affairs. e. Students require prior permission from the warden before leaving the hostel for shopping. Details about their movement in such cases should be entered in a movement register maintained for this purpose. f. Hostel doors will be closed by 11:00 pm. Violation of the curfew timings and hostel regulations may result in the cancellation of the hostel facility. 5. Weekend / Vacation out-pass policy a. Female students who wish to go out to visit their parents or relatives must obtain prior permission from their parents or nominated guardians on each occasion. b. A letter must be faxed /email to the Office of Hostel In-charge (fax no: 06-7468989 or email: sherly@gmu.ac.ae or Warden Daisy Thomas, email: daisythomas@gmu.ac.ae Warden Subaida, email: subaidarakefa@gmu.acae) well in advance for prior approval. c. Student should fill out the out-pass form before leaving.
  • 45. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 45 | P a g e 6. Inter-visitation a. GMU students who are not residents of the hostel and parents are not permitted to stay in the hostel. b. On emergency purpose, one–day stay of non-residents (current GMU student/ GMU student’s sister), concerned student requires to take prior approval (at least 3 days before) from the Office of Student Affairs. A visitor fee of AED 100/- per day will be charged. Student is requested to submit the receipt of payment on entry to the hostel. c. Hostel students may be permitted to have visitors / friends in the visiting area and will not be permitted to take them to their rooms. d. GMU students visiting hostel inmates are required to fill the form and take the approval from the Warden. e. Outsiders other than parents or nominated guardians are not allowed inside the hostels. Parents are allowed to visit their ward’s room only on the first day of the University or on emergency situation upon approval. 7. Smoking / Alcohol / Drugs a. Smoking, seesha and using drugs / alcohol are strictly prohibited in GMU hostels. b. If a student is found using drug / alcohol / seesha etc., he / she will face severe disciplinary consequences. 8. Littering a. Since the hostels are the residents’ second home, all students are expected to maintain cleanliness inside the halls. b. Rooms are inspected periodically for cleanliness. c. Students are also expected to regularly empty the garbage in their rooms. d. In the event a student room is found to be in a dirty state, the Student Affairs office has the right to charge the student for getting it cleaned. 9. Cable / TV / Internet / Computer Room a. Students are allowed to have Television of their own. b. Hostel has the Wi-Fi connections on all floors and an additional computer room with internet connection is provided for learning purpose. c. Computer /Internet usage will be viewed seriously and any misuse will entail discontinuing the facility.
  • 46. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 46 | P a g e 10. Exercise area (Girls’ Hostel Safeer area) a. Students are provided with tread mills for exercise. b. Students utilizing need to sign in the usage of time in the register. 11. Meals and Cafeteria a. Micro-oven and Fridge has been provided for warming and storing of food. b. Procuring ordered food from outside restaurants should be delivered before 10:00 pm. Any late deliveries will not be permitted. c. The facility of hostel delivery of food is arranged from the University Terrace Restaurant (Contact no: 06-7430002) 12. Transportation  Hostel students are provided transport facility to the University.  On regular class days, University bus has been arranged as per following schedule:- Time Main Girls Hostel (Safeer area) Girls Hostel (Jurf) Boys Hostel Pick up to the University First trip : 8:00 am Second trip : 8:10 am 8:15 am 8:15 am Pick up from University 3:45 pm 3:45 pm 3:45 pm  Transport facility is also provided for hostel students during summer and semester break holidays. Request for transport signed by the Warden has to be filled and submitted to the Transport department for approval.  Transport is NOT provided for weekend travels. 13. Concerning Fire Codes a. A fire alarm sound indicates that an emergency situation exists. b. Students are required to switch OFF the electrical equipments after use. In case any room is found to have the oven, A/c or any other electrical equipment ON unnecessarily, the office reserves the right to ask the student to pay the electricity charges. c. Cooking indoors with charcoal or any open flame device, burning candles is prohibited. d. In case of complaint regarding malfunctioning switches or any other electrical equipment needs to be reported to the Warden immediately or written in the complaint book.
  • 47. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 47 | P a g e 14. Entering / Transfer of rooms a. GMU officials including Hostel Supervisor and Warden may enter student room in an emergency. b. Students will be informed in case of maintenance work to be done or college officials entering their rooms. c. Male members are not allowed inside the girls’ hostel except male maintenance staff on approval will be accompanied by the Warden. d. Requests for a transfer to another room are to be forwarded through the Warden’s office. 15. Laundry a. Washers and dryers are located in the hostel. The Laundry room will be closed by 11:00 p.m. 16. Furniture a. Students are strictly forbidden from removing any of their room furniture. b. Hostel students are required to obtain special approval from the hostel in- charge to bring own furniture. 17. Storage a. Storage rooms are NOT available in hostels. b. Students need to clear their belongings on leaving the hostel. The belongings will be moved outside once the student leaves the hostel. c. Institution will not be responsible for student’s belongings once the student leaves the hostel. 18. Medical Facilities a. Students should report any injury or illness immediately to the Warden without delay so that necessary medical attention could be arranged. b. All GMU students are eligible for medical treatment in GMC hospital. Students are required to present the Student ID as identification document to register for medical treatment.
  • 48. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 48 | P a g e 19. Student responsibilities a. Students must take care of their personal belongings and the management will not be responsible for any loss or damage. On leaving the hostel, student is required to clear all her / his belongings. b. Students must maintain cleanliness and discipline in the hostel. All property and fittings should be handled with care. If a student is found to be responsible for any damages, the cost of repair / replacement will be recovered from the student. c. Students are required to abide by the advice and decisions of the Warden on all matters pertaining to life in the hostels. d. Students are required to abide by any other rules or regulations, which the Dean, the Supervisor or the Warden may feel necessary to introduce from time to time. e. Students are required to submit the No Objection letter from parent and fill up the out-pass /clearance form when staying outside or when vacating the hostel. f. Students are required to submit the clearance form to the office of the Warden before vacating the room and submit a copy to the accounts department for refund of deposit. 20. Actions Prohibited a. Student should NOT break the curfew timings. b. Student should NOT write on walls, lifts, doors of the hostel. c. Student should NOT bring in any pets (cat, puppy, bird etc.) into the hostel. d. Student should NOT remove furniture, or install personal locks for rooms. e. Student should NOT insert / fix holes or hooks in walls, floors or ceiling. f. Student should NOT refuse to follow the instructions from the Warden or security personnel who is only performing his/her duties. g. Students are NOT allowed to decorate the exterior of rooms, corridors or other common areas. h. Student should NOT shout or create disturbances for any residential room. i. Student should NOT drop or throw any solid object or liquid from windows. j. Student should NOT harass or verbally abuse any resident or staff member living in the hostel. k. Student should NOT host overnight guest / parent without obtaining prior approval from the Office of student affairs / Hostel In-charge.
  • 49. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 49 | P a g e Following actions are taken for those who break the rules of the hostel i. First warning with letter issued to student. ii. Second and final warning with letter issued and copy to parents and the respective College Dean iii. Third – student penalized / expelled from the accommodation. Any breach of the above rules by the inmates may result in their, being deprived of the privilege of occupying the room besides rendering themselves liable to pay such damages, as may be claimed by the authorities. Also there will be NO refund of fees in the event of denial of hostel accommodation on grounds of misconduct (academic or personal). ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- I have read and understood the above rules and regulations of the hostel and will follow the same. _________________ ______________________ _________ Student’s Signature Parent’s Signature: Date: 21. Whom to Contact in an Emergency Dr. Joshua Ashok Associate Dean, Student Affairs Tel : 06- 743 1333 Ext: 317 Mobile: 050-7447921 Mrs. Sherly Ajay Ladies Hostel In-charge Tel : 06-7431333 Ext:384 Mobile: 050-7276958 Mr. Subish Manager, General Services Tel : 06-743 1333 Ext: 219 Mobile: 050-7467155 Mrs. Daisy Thomas Warden, GMU Ajman Girls Hostel Tel: 06-7464881 Mobile: 050-5103981 Mrs. Zubaida Warden, GMU Ajman New Girls Hostel Tel: 06-7496255 Mobile: 050 - 3649007 7.15 Transportation Bus facilities, to commute from residences to GMU and other clinical locations, are available to the hostel students free of cost. Day scholars are provided transport on request and on payment of stipulated fees. Students requiring transport facilities should contact the Transport Department for all transport needs.
  • 50. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 50 | P a g e 7.16 Telephone Prepaid telephone booths are located in the central hall. 7.17 Class Room & Laboratory Protocol Separate entrances are designated for men and women students in the Lecture Halls and Laboratories. Students are strictly advised to follow these.  Attendance will not be granted to late comers to lectures and practical.  Students are not allowed to bring food and drinks into the lecture rooms and laboratories.  Lab coats must be worn only during laboratory work, ambulatory and bedside teaching activities.  Students should use equipment and property of the institution with care and should not indulge in destruction or damage to any of the equipment & property. If a student is found to be responsible for any such damage, the repair / replacement cost for the same shall be recovered from the student.  Students who require audio visual equipment for presentations should organize this with the help of the Administrative Assistant for Student Affairs. Students should fill in the request form for this and hand over the same at least 3 days before their presentation.  Visitors are not permitted to attend lectures and laboratories except with the prior written approval of the Dean.  Students should leave the lecture halls as soon as the lectures are over. Lingering on in the hall alone or in groups is not permitted. Lecture halls will be locked soon after the lectures are over and will be opened only 15 minutes before the commencement of lectures. 7.18 Student Identification  All students are required to submit passport size photos to be fixed on their ID cards.  The Student ID must be worn at all times and must be presented on demand in the campus, clinical sites and examinations.  Loss of ID cards must be reported to the Dean’s office and replacement card can be obtained after payment of AED 25. 7.19 University Entrance Separate entrances are designated for men and women students. These should be strictly adhered to. Parents, relatives and friends who drop the students in the college and drive them back are requested to respect this and drop or collect the students only from the designated areas. Students are not allowed to walk through the main foyer doors or sit in the entrance area. This area is meant for guests and visitors to the college.
  • 51. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 51 | P a g e 7.20 Car Parking in the Campus  Cars should be parked in the allocated positions for men and women students separately in an orderly manner. Only cars belonging to the President, Trustees and other visiting dignitaries are allowed to be parked in the main portico area. The College administration reserves the right to tow away any vehicle, which has been parked in an unauthorized manner or place.  Dangerous driving practices, creating inconvenience or risk to others and damage to property within the college campus are punishable offences. 7.21 Information on Safety Issues GMU adheres to and adopts the guidelines on safety issues, which covers safety aspects under the categories- Laboratory and Chemical safety. Excerpt from the University Laboratory Safety Manual is provided. Laboratory Safety 1. General 1.1 Take care not to run around in the laboratories unless a situation [e.g. Emergency] warrants the same. 1.2 Laboratory dress code:  Laboratory coat must be worn while pursuing laboratory work but be removed while visiting a non-laboratory environment, e.g. office, canteen, toilet, and computer room.  No smoking is permitted at any time in or near the laboratory.  Long-sleeved laboratory coats must be worn to protect against chemical spills and prevent exposure to radiation and UV light.  Latex gloves must be worn when handling toxic chemicals and, bacteria. However, do not use such gloves in the course of simple chores like opening doors, answering telephones, at the keyboard, to cite some examples.  Safety goggles or spectacles must be worn while working with hazardous chemicals or radioactive materials.  Use the face-mask when using the UV trans-illuminator.  Mandatory use of close footwear [E.g. No open-toed shoes, sandals and slippers] when working in the laboratory and while handling also working hazardous chemicals or radioactive materials.  Long hair or loose clothing must be secured before commencing work to avoid the possibility of their entanglement in equipment, or contact with chemicals or possibility of a fire accident.  Wearing a Walkman/radio head phone while working is prohibited.
  • 52. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 52 | P a g e 1.3 Waste disposal:  Appropriate bag must be used to dispose hazardous and non-hazardous waste. The specially designed safety bag must only be used for disposal of hazardous waste and not for non-hazardous waste disposal. Non-hazardous waste can be disposed in the general household garbage bag.  Broken glass and needles must be disposed in a sharps bin or plastic container.  Acid, organic solvent, and radioactive waste must be disposed in the designated bottles or containers (see Chemistry and Radiation Safety for detail). 2. Electrical outlet usage:  To avoid power overloading, ideally, one electrical outlet must be connected only to one equipment  If the outlet is used for more than one connection, the adaptor with the Singapore Productivity and Standard Board (PSB) logo (i.e. PSB approved adaptors) must be used. Chemical Safety 1. General  Working alone with hazardous chemicals (particularly after office hours) must be discouraged in all laboratories involved in such experimental work. 2. Chemical Storage  The general properties and storage characteristics of each chemical must be indicated by a colored sticker on the chemical containers. The suggested color codes are: a. RED: Flammable b. WHITE: Corrosive c. YELLOW: Reactive d. BLUE: Health risk (carcinogen, mutagen, etc.) e. GRAY: General chemical storage f. RED 'S': To be stored separately from chemicals of similar code  Chemicals must not be stored on the floor or on top of shelves. The storage shelf must have the rails to prevent the fall off. Organic and inorganic chemicals must be stored in different cabinets.  Organic solvents must be stored in resistant containers, e.g. glass or teflon. The cap must be resistant to the solvent and screwed on tight. Solvents are stored primarily in a metal cupboard or sometimes in a fume hood.  There must be no open flame near organic solvents, nor must they be kept near heat.
  • 53. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 53 | P a g e  Concentrated nitric acid must be stored in designated cabinet.  Poisons must be stored in designated and locked cabinet.  Corrosive chemicals must be placed in a location below eye level, e.g. in bottom shelves of a cabinet or under the sink.  Cabinet shelves must not be overloaded.  Upper shelves must not be heavier than lower shelves.  All shelves must be protected with chemical-resistant, non-absorbent, easy- cleaning trays with anti-roll lips.  All chemicals must be placed on these trays and not directly onto the metal surface of the shelves.  All cabinets must be kept closed at all times other than during depositing or withdrawal of chemicals.  All cabinets must be placed on floor and must be stable.  Labels indicating the contents of each cabinet must be displayed on the outside of the cabinet.  A fire extinguisher must be located near the exit and not near the chemical cabinets. In the event of an explosion, a fire extinguisher near the explosion area might be rendered inaccessible or damaged.  The appropriate type of fire extinguisher, i.e. Class B extinguisher such as carbon dioxide or foam, to deal with chemical fire must be used. Everyone in the lab must know to use the fire extinguisher.  Spill control kits to handle spillage of flammable chemicals, must be available.  First aid kits must be available and they must be equipped to deal with accidental ingestion, spillage, etc.  Periodic checks must be made of the chemical stores in order to ensure that the conditions of the containers are satisfactory. These include but are not restricted to:  The physical state of the primary and secondary containers  The state of the seals of these containers  The cleanliness of the containers (salt deposits indicating leakage, etc.).  The presence of moisture in the bottle or any other form of precipitation and / or caking.  Adequate ventilation must be available.  Bottles of toxic chemicals, once opened, must be tightly recapped, sealed and placed in a fume hood.  Chemical bottles / containers in constant use must be placed in chemical-resistant, non-absorbent, easy-cleaning trays.  Gas cylinders, hoses and regulators must occasionally be checked for wear and tear, leaks and functionality. A simple soap-bubble test can be done to check for leaks.
  • 54. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 54 | P a g e  All gas cylinders must be secured with chains.  Empty gas cylinders must not be stored with full cylinders. In the event of a mistake, empty gas cylinders can cause serious-suck back effect when connected to pressurized equipment. 3. Chemical Handling  All lab workers must be familiar with recommended procedures associated with the chemicals they are dealing and the relevant hazards. When in doubt the MSDS must be referred to, for information.  All work involving aqueous hazardous chemicals must be done in fume hoods.  All Appropriate protective apparel must be worn when working with hazardous chemicals. These include but are not limited to gloves, masks, aprons, lab coats, face shields and goggles.  Hand towel dispensers must be made available in all labs.  Appropriate gloves for handling corrosives, hot/cold objects, organic solvents and other specific chemicals must be available.  When a process is known to result in chemical fumes, wearing appropriate masks must be mandatory. Please note that normal surgical masks and dusk masks are not suitable protection against chemical fumes.  Spilled mercury (e.g. from broken thermometers) must be picked up using a pipette and stored in a small, tightly sealed and labeled plastic container in the fume hood.  Standard Operational Procedures (SOPs) to deal with emergency situations arising from radioactive, chemical and bio-hazardous accidents must be clearly displayed in every lab. Handling of Gases:  Make sure that you know how to operate the regulator on a gas cylinder before using it.  Gas cylinders must be replaced before they are completely empty. Some positive pressure must be allowed in the used cylinders.  Check the gas tubing from time to time.  Poisonous gases and chemicals that give rise to vapors must be experimented with only in the fume hood.  Do not light any flame when you smell a gas leak. Beware of flammable gases, e.g. oxygen and acetylene.  If you smell something dangerous, raise the alarm and evacuate the lab immediately. The source must later be traced and action taken by the appropriate safety personnel.
  • 55. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 55 | P a g e While handling Liquid Nitrogen:  Your hands must be protected by thick pair of heavy duty gloves.  Lab coat must be worn and legs and feet protected.  Liquid nitrogen must be kept and transported in Dewar flasks.  Liquid nitrogen splatters easily when pouring, especially if the glassware or plastic ware is not pre-chilled before use. Hence special caution ought to be exercised. Handling of Phenol:  Phenol must be handled with appropriate protection and in the fume hood.  Phenol must be stored in resistant containers made of glass or teflon.  If ones' skin comes in contact with phenol, it must be rinsed immediately with lots of water, followed by wash with soap and water.  Spills must be attended to immediately and not left to dry unattended.  Stains left by chemical spills must be cleaned up immediately.  Hand towel dispensers must be made available in all labs.  Appropriate gloves for handling corrosives, hot / cold objects, organic solvents and other specific chemicals must be available.  When a process is known to result in chemical fumes, wearing appropriate masks must be mandatory. Please note that normal surgical masks and dusk masks are not suitable protection against chemical fumes.  Spilled mercury (e.g. from broken thermometers) must be picked up using a pipette and stored in a small, tightly sealed and labeled plastic container in the fume hood. 4. General Chemical Disposal Not all chemicals can be thrown into the drain. Ensure that the chemical is safe for discharge into the sewer. If not, store in empty reagent bottles or carboys for processing and disposal by a waste disposal company. As a general guideline, strong flammable and acute toxic chemicals must not be discharged into the sewer.  Dilute all chemicals that will be thrown into the sewer.  Acids and bases must be neutralized properly before discharging into the sewerage system.  All gels (excluding those stained with EthidiumBromide) must be disposed into special plastic bags. These bags, when full, must be double wrapped, secured properly and thrown with normal rubbish for disposal.  Commingling of chemical waste in waste storage containers must be kept to confinement separately.  Where the above is not possible, aqueous waste must be segregated into the
  • 56. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 56 | P a g e following groups:  Halogenated  Flammable  Phenol-chloroform  Flammable chemical waste must be stored in well-ventilated areas to reduce accumulation of flammable vapors.  Solid chemical waste must be securely packaged before disposal into normal trash where they will eventually be incinerated. An exception to this is solids that sublime at room temperature and produce toxic gases. In such cases, try to convert the solids to a stable form and chemically inactivate it. Organic Solvents:  Solvents are disposed of in specifically-labeled (name of solvent, your name and your supervisor’s name) waste bottles in a fume hood. Do not pour them down the sink. Only very small quantities (< 1 ml) may be flushed down the sink with lots of water.  Chloroform and acetone must not be poured into the same bottle as they react to form an explosive chemical.  Chemical containers must be tagged with information including chemical name, description, generator’s name and date of disposal.  All chemical disposal exercises must be documented.
  • 57. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 57 | P a g e STUDENT’S RIGHTS & RESPONSIBILITIES
  • 58. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 58 | P a g e 8.0 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities 8.1 Student’s Rights All students must become familiar with the academic policies, curriculum requirements, and associated deadlines as outlined in the University Catalog. The academic advisor shall advise the student on all matters related to their program of study and will aid the student in the interpretation of policies whenever necessary. However, it shall ultimately be the student’s responsibility to meet all stated requirements for the degree and the policies related thereof. It is also the student’s responsibility to actively utilize their campus email and the university web site, observe netiquette, observe the policies on internet use as published and made available in the Student handbook as it tends to be a major communication resource and is often the primary form of communication between students. Gulf Medical University shall maintain an academic environment in which the freedom to teach, conduct research, learn, and administer the university is protected. Students will enjoy maximum benefit from this environment by accepting responsibilities commensurate with their role in the academic community. The principles found herein are designed to facilitate communication, foster academic integrity, and defend freedoms of inquiry, discussion, and expression among members of the university community. 8.1.1 Rights in the Pursuit of Education Students will have the right:  To pursue an education free from illegal discrimination and to be judged on the basis of relevant abilities, qualifications, and performance;  To fair and impartial academic evaluation and a means of recourse through orderly procedures to challenge action contrary to such standard;  To an academic environment conducive to intellectual freedom; and  To a fair and orderly disciplinary process. 8.1.2 Right to Access Records and Facilities Students will have the right:  To access their own personal and education records and to have the university maintain and protect the confidential status of such records, as required by appropriate legal authority;  To have access to accurate information regarding tuition, fees and charges, course availability, general requirements for establishing and maintaining acceptable academic standing, and graduation requirements;
  • 59. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 59 | P a g e 8.1.3 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy & Publication Students will have the right:  To free inquiry and expression;  To organize and join associations to promote their common and lawful interests; and  To be able to protest on university premises in a manner which does not obstruct or disrupt teaching, research, administration, or other activities authorized by the university. 8.1.4 Right to Contribute to University Governance and Curriculum Students will have the right:  Through student representatives, to participate in formulating and evaluating institutional policies. 8.2 Student Responsibilities Students shall be expected to balance these rights with the responsibility to respect the learning environment for others and for themselves and to make their best effort to meet academic challenges undertaken. Students will be responsible for compliance with the University Code of Conduct. The standards of professional behavior in the educational setting are related to three domains: 1. Individual Performance; 2. Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community, others and 3. Support of the ethical principles of the medical profession Individual performance:  Demonstrates educational experiences (i.e., exams, clinics, rounds, small group sessions, appointments at the clinical skills center.  Adheres to dress code consistent with institutional standards.  Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community.  Establishes effective rapport.  Establishes and maintains appropriate boundaries in all learning situations.  Respectful at all times to all parties involved.  Demonstrates humanism in all interactions.  Respects the diversity of race, gender, religion, sexual orientation, age, disability and socioeconomic status.  Resolves conflict in a manner that respects the dignity of every person involved.  Uses professional language being mindful of the environment.
  • 60. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 60 | P a g e  Maintains awareness and adapts to differences in individual patients including those related to culture and medical literacy.  Supports ethical principles of the medical profession.  Maintains honesty.  Contributes to an atmosphere conducive to learning and is committed to advance scientific knowledge.  Protects patients’ confidentiality. 8.3 GMU Honor Code The students of Gulf Medical University Ajman, must recognize that they form an essential part of the medical profession and society. The ‘Honor Code’ lays emphasis on students’ behavior to meet the expectation of their profession, family and general public. The Honor Code is administered at the White Coat Ceremony. Students are required to read the pledge and sign an undertaking to observe all the rules as specified in the code. 8.4 Salient Features of the Honor Code The code strives to emphasize the importance of ethical behavior and compassion in patient care. It helps a professional to understand the importance of the power of healing when all health care professionals work together as a team. It guides students to interact among their fellow colleagues and mentors. The honor code formally acknowledges a sense of trust, responsibility and professional behavior among students, staff and faculty. 8.5 Breach of Honor Code The following acts are considered as violation of the honor code: 1. Illegal, unethical and inappropriate academic conduct or professional behavior with colleagues and mentors either in college, hospital campus or in any professional gathering. 2. Failure to maintain confidentiality of a patient. 3. Failure to provide the highest level of patient care. 4. Failure to report any situation where the ‘honor code’ has not been followed or failure to take appropriate action when the ‘honor code’ has been violated. 8.6 Effects of Committing an ‘Honor Offence’ When a student, member of the administrative staff or faculty commits an offense against the rules of the honor code, it becomes violation of the ‘code’ and is termed as an Honor Offense. The matter must be reported to the Dean of GMU. The report would be taken to a committee formed by student and faculty representatives. Once the person is proved guilty, the Committee will initiate appropriate action depending on the degree of the offense.
  • 61. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 61 | P a g e UNIVERSITY RESOURCES AND SERVICES
  • 62. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 62 | P a g e 9.0 University Resources & Services 9.1 Introduction The GMU Information and Learning Centre provide year-round reference and information services and assists students in the development of effective search strategies. Staff members at the learning center assist students in identifying new and additional resources, confirming citations and providing instructions on how to use online databases and search engines. 9.2 Vision In carrying out this vision, the library will acquire, manage and link information resources both physical and virtual and will provide quality instruction to empower users to benefit from the full potential of the universe of knowledge. The library’s information professionals and staff will ensure that GMU library aims to meet complex information challenges of the 21st century for life-long learning and excellence in undergraduate, graduate and professional studies. 9.3 Mission The mission of the GMU Information & Learning Centre is to provide resources and instructional material in support of the evolving curriculum. It also provides leadership in accessing and using information consistent with the GMU. The GMU Learning Centre is focusing on maintaining and providing access to the state-of-the-art information technology to meet the current and changing information needs of the GMU community. 9.4 Library The library at the GMU campus is located on the first floor of the Information and Learning Center. Library materials are circulated to faculty members, staff and the students for periods according to the circulation policy. 9.4.1 Timings: The library remains open from Sunday through Thursday between 8.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m. and on Saturday between 8.30 a.m. to 6.00 p.m. (Except on official holidays). 9.4.2 Library Resources  Books  E-Books (Access Medicine)  Journals (Online)  Journals (Hard copy)  CDs  Video Tapes  Online Databases: Proquest, Access Medicine, Cochrane, UpToDate, USMLEasy, Micromedex
  • 63. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 63 | P a g e 9.4.3 Library orientation During the Library Orientation Program, the library staff will give orientation and bibliographic instructions to the library users on the following topics:  Use of various electronic resources  Resources available in particular subjects of interest  Library rules and services. 9.4.4 Audio Visuals The library has the facility for viewing medical video tapes and CD ROMs. A collection of VHS tapes and CDs on latest medical topics are available. 9.4.5 Scanning and printing Scanning and printing of learning materials without infringing on the copyright law are provided in the library. 9.4.6 Photocopy Photocopy services are provided at a nominal charge of one dirham for 10 pages. The information and learning center abides by national and international copyright laws in force. 9.4.7 Journal Article Request Service The GMU users can get copies of Journal articles from the library on request. For getting a copy of the article, users have to submit Journal Article request to the library in the prescribed form. Request form is available in the GMU library website. The applicant will get a copy of the article within three working days, if it is available in GMU library. 9.4.8 Cataloguing The GMU library is following Anglo-American Rules (AACR 2) for Cataloguing and the National Library of Medicine USA coding for the classification system. The GMU library using “AutoLib System Software”. 9.4.9 Online Public Access Catalogue (OPAC) The GMU Library provides Online Public Access Catalogue (OPAC) through the library website (www.gmu.ac.ae/library). The user can search the catalogue by author, title, subject, ISBN or key word.
  • 64. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 64 | P a g e 9.4.10 Security Gates GMU central library has two security gates (3M library security system) for the protection of library resources. The machine details are shown below: 3M Library Security System: The 3M Library Security System consists of several components including 3Mt Tattle-Tape, circulation accessories, and detection system. The key to the effectiveness of the system is protecting the library resources with 3M Tattle-Tape security strips. Only when all library resources have the 3M detection system (3M Tattle-Tape security strips) , the illegal exit of the resources can be monitored Name & Model of the Security Gate: 3 M Library Security Systems - 2301BP Model. 9.5 Library Policy and Procedures  Adequate library and learning resources are essential to teaching and learning. The purpose of the library is to support the academic, research, health service and continuing education programs of the university by providing students, faculty, and staff with the information resources and services they need to achieve their educational objectives.  The library staff work closely with department chairs, faculty, student and community patrons in determining needs and which resources to obtain and which services to offer.  Gulf Medical University maintains an adequate level of professional librarians and support staff at the Gulf Medical University Campus and Gulf Medical College Hospital and Research Center.  The Gulf Medical University selects and purchases appropriate and sufficient print and non-print materials, including the lease of information databases suitable for the instructional needs of the university with the goal of providing access to the maximum amount of relevant information available within the constraints of the libraries’ budget.  Gulf Medical University provides automated systems in the following areas: online public access catalog, circulation, cataloging and acquisitions.  Gulf Medical University provides bibliographic instruction to the university community and interested groups, including orientations, personal assistance, computer-assisted instruction and printed information.  Gulf Medical University provides hours of service to suit the needs of its learning community.  Gulf Medical University maintains and continues to improve the facilities and equipment for housing and using materials.
  • 65. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 65 | P a g e  Gulf Medical University evaluates resources and services annually via student surveys, reviews of holdings by library staff and faculty, comparison with similar institutions, and direct feedback from all users. 9.6 Library Rules and Regulations: Students are required to abide by the following code of conduct while using library resources.  It is mandatory for the graduate students to possess their own laptop for use in the university.  Separate areas have been designated in the library for men and women students. The reading rooms and computer facilities have been arranged accordingly.  Students are expected to use the designated reading rooms and computer areas separately marked for men and women in the library.  Students who are seen in areas other than those specifically designated for their use are liable to face disciplinary action. Video library facilities shall be arranged on separate days for men and women students.  Students are not allowed to sit on the steps or passages near the library or in other parts of the University.  Students are reminded that defacing or stealing library material is classified as misconduct and is liable to invite censure.  Personal laptops are allowed into the library; however, other personal items and handbags may be deposited in the area provided before entering the library. No foods and drinks are allowed inside the library.  The students are requested to carry Identity Cards at all times. These are coded and are required to issue books.  Books may be issued from the GMU campus only. Books may be reserved using online services. Books may be issued for limited periods up to 2 weeks at a time. The library in GMCHRC and other affiliated hospitals do not issue books. Instructions on how to access subscribed online text books and databases are prominently displayed.  The library staff is available at all times for locating books, CDs, Videos, Journals and any other library services (such as inter-library loan, accessing electronic resources, other cooperative arrangements, orientation, training). Photocopying class handouts is permitted. However, international laws regarding image reproduction and copyright law shall be strictly followed.
  • 66. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 66 | P a g e 9.7 Circulation Policy and Procedures GMU circulation policies are designed to permit prompt and equitable access to library materials. The staff at circulation service desk is focused on meeting the needs of the library users. 1) Circulation privileges are accorded to those holding valid GMU identification cards. The ID must be presented on request in order to use the Library facilities and services. Cards are not transferable. 2) Two books will be issued for a maximum period of two weeks. This can be renewed once as long as there is no holding request for the same book. 3) Short loan for reference books will be allowed ranging from one hour to a maximum of three days. 4) A fine of AED 1.00 per day will be levied for over-due books. If the fine is more than the cost of latest edition of the book, the user has to pay the cost of the latest edition of the book including procuring expenses equivalent to 10% of cost of book. Users cannot borrow further books until due items are returned and penalties paid. 5) The users are not allowed to make any marking / underlining / highlighting in the library books and journals. They should not indulge in any act that may damage the books / journals. If any page is torn away or damage caused to any book or journal the borrower will be asked to pay the penalty one and half times the cost of the book / journal and also be referred to the disciplinary committee for further action. 6) In case of loss, users have to replace the latest edition of the new book or pay the cost of the latest edition of the book including procuring expenses equivalent to 10% of cost of the book. 7) Reservation may be placed for loaned item. 8) The Library will not issue a “No Due Certificate” until all books are returned and fines are paid. 9.8 Multimedia Labs The Computer Center located on the ground floor of the Information and Learning Center of Gulf Medical University shall provide a basic technological infrastructure for all academic activities. The Multimedia Lab includes the provision for networks, intra-GMU links and appropriate hardware and software for administration and academic needs. The Multimedia Lab shall ensure that the technological infrastructure is used effectively. For this purpose, among others, the Center assumes a significant role in user support and training.
  • 67. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 67 | P a g e 9.9 Network Infrastructure The Local Area Network (LAN) Infrastructure encompasses all academic offices, lecture halls, laboratories, administrative & faculty offices. The network provides high bandwidth servicing data, voice & video, and is connected to the Internet through two DSL lines, which is protected behind a secured firewall & monitored 24 X 7. The Multimedia Lab is a state-of-the-art data center, which houses the GMU servers, and the backbone network switches and houses the data and software required for administrative packages as well as fulfilling other faculty, staff and student uses. All GMU students shall be provided individual accounts so that they can access the system to obtain current information on all academic matters, access online learning materials and tools, use discussion forums and interact with faculty. Users can also use the Web mail to access their e-mail through the Internet. The video conferencing facilities enable video meetings and distance learning. 9.10 Wi-Fi Network All wireless access to university networks shall be authenticated by Information Technology Security (ITS) approved methods. Staff, students, faculty and visitors at the university can only access the wireless network using this encrypted network. 9.11 Online Resources GMU has an online e-learning facility to enhance the learning process and help students improve their knowledge by offering additional instructional material. It allows students to access the facility from the campus as well as hostels and residences. The Center focuses on the creation of an environment where all students will have easy access to information resources by providing innovative technologies and learning resources. 9.12 Servers & Supports All the computers within the campus are connected to high end rack servers which itself is supported by power back up of 3 hours and monitored round the clock. The servers are installed with antivirus, which is updated regularly, and entry is restricted to authorized members only. 9.13 IT Training Appropriate training sessions are being conducted for all students at regular intervals around the year to update them with latest software and learning tools in the field of Information Technology.
  • 68. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 68 | P a g e 9.14 Internet Services The information and learning center provides Internet facilities for all students, faculties’ and staff. Search can be carried out freely by individual users or with the help of librarian. Users can print their search results or directly e-mail them to any registered accounts. 9.15 Technology support for learning All the class rooms are equipped with adequate technology support comprising computers, projectors as learning support needs of our institution with local access port for both faculty and students. Protected Wi-Fi is available to facilitate usage of portable IT gadgets among the students and staff within the campus. 9.16 IT Support Team The Gulf Medical University IT Support Desk (Help Desk) is a technical support team that provides prompt, knowledgeable, courteous computing support services through the phone, in person and email. The Help Desk is available to everyone who uses the GMU Computing Service and is the first point of contact for any technical queries. One of the tasks of the Help Desk is to help members of the GMU to be more productive through the use of provided IT facilities. GMU IT Support Team constantly collects valuable feedback about the services and its quality in a bid to improve what they offer. The GMU IT Support Team was set up to handle users' initial calls for technical assistance. 9.17 User accesses and Security Access to operating systems is controlled by a secure login process which ensures:  Not displaying any previous login information e.g. username.  Limiting the number of unsuccessful attempts and locking the account if exceeded.  The password characters being hidden by symbols.  Displaying a general warning notice that only authorized users are allowed.  All access to operating systems is via a unique login id that will be audited and can be traced back to each individual user.  All University systems, vulnerable to attack by malware must be protected by antivirus software wherever possible unless a specific exclusion has been granted and alternative measures have been taken to provide the same degree of protection.  Centrally Managed Kaspersky Antivirus 8.0 using Kaspersky Security Center protects client systems running under Microsoft Windows XP, Vista 7, Windows 7, windows 8 and server systems running under Windows Server 2003, 2008 R2 from all types of malicious programs. The product was designed specifically for high-performance corporate servers that experience heavy loads.
  • 69. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 69 | P a g e 9.18 E-Learning at GMU The GMU e-learning shall have an effective system that caters to self-paced personal learning through resources available over the Internet. The Gulf Medical University shall use the Moodle as an open source e-learning platform. Students shall access the e-learning system at any location of their choice, since the system is completely online. The University has campus-wide Wi-Fi services to facilitate e-learning practices. Computers with Internet access have been provided in addition at all clinical training sites in the library and student common rooms and residence halls. Students are provided instructions on the proper use of the e-learning medium. Accessing protected computer accounts or other computer functions, knowingly transmitting computer viruses and unethical use of GMU access is prohibited. To be granted the use of a computer account, users have to agree to abide by universal guidelines on use of the computing and Internet services. Access to the use of computer facilities is through authorized computer accounts. A computer account consists of a unique log-in ID and a password. Students are requested to keep their password secret. To activate the GMU account, the user shall be instructed to go to the GMU website and follow the instructions.
  • 70. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 70 | P a g e GMC HOSPITAL & RESEARCH CENTER (GMCH & RC)
  • 71. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 71 | P a g e 10.0 GMC Hospital & Research Center (GMCH & RC) Gulf Medical College Hospital and Research Centre, the first teaching hospital under the private sector in UAE, became operational in October 2002 by the Thumbay Group. With its unique approach to healthcare, bringing together the best professional expertise and infrastructure at affordable prices, the hospital constantly strives to fulfill its motto of "Healing through knowledge and wisdom”. 10.1 Vision The vision of the hospital is to be recognized as a leading Academic Healthcare Centre providing high quality patient centric specialty healthcare services to the community integrated with medical research and clinical training. 10.2 Mission The mission of the hospital is to provide ethical patient care focused on patient safety, high quality care and cost effective services. GMC Hospital and Research Centre is committed to integrate latest trends in education to produce competent healthcare professionals who are sensitive to the cultural values of the clients they serve. GMC Hospital and Research Centre will strive to attain the highest quality and accreditation standards. GMC Hospital and Research Centre is committed to promote ethical clinical research that will enhance outcomes of clinical care. 10.3 Clinical Departments and Services Being a multi-specialty hospital, it houses the departments of Anesthesiology, Accident & Emergency, Cardiology, Clinical Nutrition, Dermatology & Venereology, Dentistry, ENT, Family Medicine, General Surgery, Internal Medicine, Neurology, Nephrology, Obstetrics & Gynecology, Orthopedics, Ophthalmology, Pediatrics & Neonatology, Physical Therapy, Psychiatry, Gastroenterology, Radiology and Urology and Critical care units (ICU, CCU and NICU). Specialized services include a medical imaging department with state of the art equipment like spiral CT scan, mammography, ultrasound, color Doppler, ultrasound and radiography. An advanced laboratory caters to the requirements of all the clinical departments and is equipped for routine and advanced investigations in biochemistry, clinical pathology, serology and hormone studies. Student posted in GMC Hospitals for clinical training is required to:
  • 72. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 72 | P a g e 10.3.1 Do’s  Procure the GMCH Student Guide Book.*  Wear student ID badges at all times in the hospital.  Follow the dress code as stated in the handbook. (refer section: 9.1 - dress code)  Maintain punctuality, professionalism and ethical behavior at all times when posted in the hospital.  Complete the Orientation program of the hospital which includes Infection control & Fire safety program.  Submit the vaccination/screening record for Hepatitis B and C Virus.  Submit the BLS certification (preferable).  Submit Arabic certification. (for non-Arab students preferable)  Submit the completed the Patient safety self-assessment form at the end of each organ system module.  Maintain 80% attendance in the clinical and theory subjects.  Attend the CME/CPD programs of the hospital.  Follow the hospital rules and regulations.  Be responsible for their personal belongings, and accountable when posted in the clinics and wards.  Report to the Office of Academic Affairs for any clarifications / problems faced. 10.3.2 Don’ts  NOT to involve in activities that disturbs patient care and safety.  NOT to use mobile phones in the clinics and wards.  NOT to access the patient information without prior approval. No entries are to be made in the patient’s file.  NOT to take history or examine a patient without consent and approval of both the patient and the faculty.  NOT to prescribe medications.  NOT to favor any patients breaking the rules of the hospital.  NOT to discuss the patient information in public.  NOT to do any clinical rotation that was missed without approval of the Academic Affairs office personnel.  NOT to loiter in the hospital during nights and other timings out of the training.  NOT to violate any rules of the hospital. 10.3.3 Violation Warning:  First violation will lead to an oral warning.  Second violation will lead to a written warning.  Third violation will be seen in the Students Welfare Committee for disciplinary actions which may lead to suspension/discontinuation of the training.
  • 73. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 73 | P a g e *Note: All students posted in GMCHRC are required to procure the GMCHRC Student Guide Book which states the rules and regulations of the hospital in detail. Students are required to submit the signed disclaimer form to the academic affairs’ office after reading the Guide book. Office of Academic Affairs - Gulf Medical College Hospital and Research Center Prof. Meenu Cherian Director – Academic Affairs Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 107, Speed Dial : 8056 Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan Assistant Director – Academic Affairs Contact 06-746 3333 Ext: 107, Speed Dial : 8141 Mrs. Sherly Ajay Academic Coordinator Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 106, Speed Dial : 8074 Mr. Celso Viernes Academic Secretary Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 377, Speed ial:8089 Ms. Namitha Academic Secretary Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 377 Ms. Manjusha Latheesh Academic Secretary Contact: 06-746 3333 Ext: 377 Mr. Abdul Razak Office assistant Academic Affairs
  • 74. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 74 | P a g e STUDENT FINANCE
  • 75. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 75 | P a g e 11.0. Student Finance 11.1 Student Finance Policy The University publishes in the catalog, the student handbook and other publications the university’s financial policy towards tuition fees and other payments for student services provided. All tuition fees shall be deposited before completing the registration process either in cash or by checks payable to GMU due on the date of registration for new admissions. Students in University rolls must pay all fees before commencement of the academic year. Students who are unable to pay the full tuition fees upon registration may pay the tuition fee in two installments after obtaining approval from the management. The first installment shall be payable on the date of completion of registration (dated current) and the second installment shall be paid by a postdated check due four months after the first payment. A penalty shall be levied on all returned checks. The hostel fees along with a security deposit shall be paid in full before occupying the room in the hostel. Payment for other student services shall be levied in addition to tuition fee towards provision of visa, conduct of examinations, issue of ID and Library cards and reissue of a lost ID or Library card, Lab coat, convocation, issue of certificates verifying bonafides of the student, issue of duplicate academic transcripts / course certificate / duplicate hall ticket; replacement of a lost hostel key and annual rent for lockers provided. Two or more children of the same family shall be entitled each to a 5% reduction in the tuition fees provided they are registered in the same academic year. The request shall be supported by the following documents; an application in person, a copy of the schedules of the course being attended and a copy of their student IDs. Other details shall be provided by the Office of Accounts. The University shall arrange scholarship for students who have secured more than 95% marks in their final higher secondary examinations and if approved by the sponsoring agencies. 11.2 Tuition Fees* (Academic Year 2013 – 2014) MBBS Tuition Fee if Paid Yearly Tuition Fee if Paid in Two Installments Phase – I 100,000 51,500 Phase – II Year 1 95,000 49,000 Phase – II Year 2 95,000 49,000 Phase – III Year 1 95,000 49,000 Phase – III Year 2 95,000 49,000
  • 76. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 76 | P a g e * All tuition and other fees are subject to revision by the Gulf Medical University's Board of Governors in accordance with university requirements. Every year, fees are reviewed and subject to revision. As and when fees are revised, the new fees will be applicable to all existing and new students. The amounts shown in this document represent fees as currently approved. 11.3 Hostel Fees Single AED 19000 + AED 1000 Security deposit Sharing AED 13000 + AED 1000 Security deposit 11.4 Utilities Service Fees A Compulsory fee of AED 75 per month will be charged to student account in addition to the respective room rent. 11.5 Registration Fees Program Fees MBBS AED 2,000 11.6 Examination Fees Program Professional Examination Supplementary Professional Examination Phase - I AED 1,500 AED 1,500 Phase - II AED 3,000* AED 3,000* Phase - III AED 4,000* AED 4,000* *-includes IFOM examination fees 11.7 Visa Charges New AED 1,500* Renewal AED 1,000* *- Subject to revision 11.8 Caution Deposit Money Caution Deposit Money AED 1,500 (Refundable)
  • 77. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 77 | P a g e 11.9 Fees for Other Services Type of Service Fees (in AED) Graduation Fee 1,000 Third Party Liability (TPL) Insurance 200 per year Online Examination 200 per year Compensatory Clinical Posting 100 per day Application for joining the GMU 150 Bonafide Letter (To whom it may concern) 100 Duplicate Academic Transcript (Course Certificate) 100 Replacing a lost hostel key / locker key 100 Damage to locker 100 Locker annual rent 30 ID Card /Library Card 25 Replacing a lost ID /Library Card 25 Duplicate hall ticket in place of original 25 11.10 Transportation Fees Destination One Day One Week One Month Six Month One Year Ajman AED 30 AED 150 AED 400 AED 2,100 AED 3,300 Sharjah AED 50 AED 200 AED 500 AED 2,700 AED 4,400 Dubai AED 70 AED 250 AED 600 AED 3,300 AED 5,500 11.11 Payment of Fees Fees must be paid in full before completing the registration process either in cash or by cheque payable to GMU due on the date of registration for new admissions. Students on GMU rolls must pay all fees before commencement of each semester. However, for those unable to pay the tuition fees upon registration in full, fees may be paid in two installments after approval from the management: the first half is paid on the date of completing the registration (31 August) and the second half by postdated cheque due four months after the first payment (31 December). Hostel fees must be paid in full prior to joining the hostel.
  • 78. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 78 | P a g e 11.12 Late Fees and Fines Late payment fee shall invite a penalty of AED 75 per day and any further delay will attract further charges. Please note that a penalty of AED 500 is imposed on returned checks and the returned check will not be handed over to the student unless the penalty is paid in cash. The department heads in the college and the clinical training sites will mark the student who has failed to pay the fees in time as ‘absent’ until dues are cleared. 11.13 Financial Aid and Scholarships Two or more children of the same family are entitled each to a 5% reduction in the fees, when they are registered for the same or different programs in GMU in the same academic year. Students are requested to apply in person with the necessary documents. GMU will assist in obtaining financial aid from charitable agencies or commercial banks for needy students. Further details in this regard may be obtained from the Office of the Accounts Department. 11.14 Refund of Fees In the event a student formally withdraws from the university, a grade of W or WF will be recorded depending on time of withdrawal. The following refund schedule will apply: Withdrawal from the University One week before the first day of classes 100% refund Before the end of the first week of classes 100% refund During the second week of classes 50% refund During the third week of classes 25% refund During / After the fourth week of classes 0% refund Students withdrawing from the programs after being admitted to GMU on having completed the registration process by paying the tuition fees will not be refunded the fees amount paid by them under any circumstances during or after fourth week. 11.15 Revision of Tuition and other Fees All tuition and other fees are subject to revision by Gulf Medical University’s Board of Governors in accordance with University requirements. Every year, fees are reviewed and subject to revision. As and when fees are revised, the new fees will be applicable to all enrolled and new students. The amounts shown in this document represent fees as currently approved. If a student discontinues the academic program for any reason and rejoins/readmits the program at a later year shall be governed by the tuition and other fees applicable at the time of his/her rejoining/readmitting the program.
  • 79. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 79 | P a g e ACADEMIC POLICIES
  • 80. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 80 | P a g e 12.0 Academic Policies 12.1 Program Completion Policy All students are expected to study the program and course details provided in the student handbook and undergraduate catalog. For any one degree all requirements under the terms of any catalog in effect at or after their admission must be met. Candidates must satisfy all university requirements and all requirements established by the program faculty. The individual programs may have higher standards and / or more restrictive requirements as compared to the university minimum requirements. The university mandates the following general degree completion requirements in order for students to receive their degrees. Each graduate student must: • Be continuously enrolled in the program from admission to graduation. • Have satisfied all conditions of his or her admission, such as provisional admission. • Successfully complete a comprehensive examination or equivalent as determined by the individual degree program. • Submit a thesis or research project, if required by the academic program, to the University that meets the format requirements set forth in the College Thesis Manual. The students shall fulfill the requirements of each course as prescribed and published and made available to the students. The student shall be responsible for attending all the classes and completing the requirements of the chosen program of study. The course completion and degree requirements of each program are published in the respective sections of the undergraduate Catalog. 12.2 Academic Progress Policy Students are expected to attend all classes as per the schedule notified by each college. Classroom activities are essential to learning and to the application of knowledge. The student is responsible for knowing and meeting all course requirements, including tests, assignments, and class participation as indicated by the course instructor. The schedules shall be published and prominently displayed on the notice boards in the department and the general notice board of the college and university. It shall also be uploaded and made available on the e-platform MYGMU and the LAN available in the multimedia labs. The responsibility for making up work missed during an absence rests with the student. Students are encouraged to initiate negotiations with the instructor regarding missed work as early as possible. If a student is unable to attend class on an exam day, the instructor is to be notified in advance.
  • 81. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 81 | P a g e Students must complete all clinical requirements. If a student is unable to attend a scheduled rotation, the student must notify the instructor prior to the rotation time or at the earliest possible time. Students are responsible for contacting with instructors for make-up work. All leaves must be approved by the Dean for further consideration. All leave applications must be approved by Dean for attendance consideration. The dean’s office reserves the right to accept or reject medical certificates after scrutiny of its authenticity. It is the responsibility of the students to interact with the concerned department to verify and ensure about their attendance particulars from time to time. In the case of Clinical rotation, a minimum aggregate of 80% attendance is mandatory for the student to be permitted to appear for the professional examination. Even when the reason for absence constitutes approved leave, the minimum aggregate of 80% must be satisfied by compensatory postings. Attendance shall be entered daily by the department in the Student Management System. The comprehensive attendance shall be downloaded and displayed prominently each month and forwarded to the office of the Dean for information and necessary action. Deficits in attendance shall be noted and brought to the notice of the students / guardians to enable the student to improve the situation. Academic advising shall be offered by the faculty and preceptors to delineate the cause of the learning deficit and help the students to overcome the contributing problems, if any. The performance at the departmental / semester examinations shall be closely monitored to identify students with learning difficulties. Academic advising by the faculty and the preceptors shall be available at all times to resolve the problem. The attendance deficits and unsatisfactory performance in the continuous assessments held by the departments and the college shall be used as parameters to identify students who are not progressing in the courses. Students shall be regular and punctual at lectures, demonstrations, seminars, practical, fieldwork and other academic exercises. They shall be required to attend all the allotted working periods in each of the prescribed courses. Leave on medical grounds shall be considered only on the recommendation of the Medical board constituted by the University for a maximum period of 15 days. The Leave application must be supported by a Medical Certificate issued by a licensed physician preferably from
  • 82. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 82 | P a g e any of the GMU affiliated clinical teaching hospitals. A maximum of 15 days leave on medical grounds may be approved for compensating attendance deficits at the end of a course. In the credit bearing programs, a maximum of 7 to 8 days medical leave will be considered in a semester and a maximum of 15 days for an Academic Year. Students must provide appropriate documents to support leave of absence for purposes like renewal of residence permit abroad within one week after return to the University. The period of absence will not be approved if this regulation is not followed. Students who miss classes in connection with completion of GMU Visa formalities shall be required to submit supporting documents indicating the date and time of absence, within three days of completing the procedure. Such leave shall be approved. Prolonged Absence: Students are required to inform the Dean’s office in writing in instances of absence from classes or clinical program exceeding 3 months by giving valid reasons for the absence. The college reserves the right to remove the names of those students from the rolls for periods exceeding three months and those who fail to inform in writing giving valid reasons for the absence. The admissions committee of the university will review absences with prior information in writing for up to a period of 1 year, before the student is allowed to rejoin the program. The admissions committee of the university will not consider the case of any student for rejoining the program if the period of absence exceeds 18 months. The prescribed courses shall be completed within the specified time periods. The progress that a student makes in achieving the goals and objectives of the curriculum are to be regularly evaluated. Formative Assessment shall be a continuous process carried throughout the academic period and consists of weekly or end of the topic quizzes, tutorials, computer based tests and small group discussions. 12.3 Grading, Assessment and Progression Policy Refer Section: 16.0
  • 83. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 83 | P a g e 12.4 Online Examination (Exam Soft) GMU has entered into a license agreement with the Exam Soft Worldwide Inc. USA for usage of their software for item banking, exam delivery, result scoring and item analysis. From the AY 2012-13 onwards the mid semester, end semester examinations for the academic programs wherever applicable shall have online examination of MCQs using exam soft application. The students are hereby notified that the online examination will be conducted in the Testing Center halls I, II & III and in the Multi Media labs. The schedule of the examination for each program with the details of venue, date & time will be notified by the examination department. 12.5 International Foundations of Medicine (IFOM) I & II Examination As per the direction from Commission for Academic Accreditation (CAA), Ministry of Higher Education & Scientific Research (MOHE&SR), GMU has decided to implement the IFOM examination (I & II) from the academic year 2013 – 2014 onwards. IFOM examination is used for the purpose of external benchmarking of students performance in the MBBS program at the end of Phase II and Phase III. The scores obtained in this examination will be incorporated into the summative assessments.
  • 84. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 84 | P a g e MISCONDUCT & DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES
  • 85. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 85 | P a g e 13.0 Misconduct and Disciplinary Procedures 13.1 Student Misconduct & Disciplinary Procedures 13.1.1 Academic Misconduct The college may discipline a student for academic misconduct, which is defined as any activity that tends to undermine the academic integrity of the institution and undermine the educational process. Academic misconduct includes, but is not limited to the following: a. Cheating A student must not use or attempt to use unauthorized assistance, materials, information, or study aids in any academic exercise, including, but not limited to:  External assistance in professional or any “in class” examination. This prohibition includes use of books, notes, mobiles, student’s cross talk, etc.  Use of another person as a substitute in the examination.  Stealing examination or other source material.  Use of any unauthorized assistance in a laboratory, or on fieldwork.  Altering the marks in any way.  Claiming as his / her own work done by others or the work completed in collaboration with others. b. Fabrication A student must not falsify or invent any information or data in an academic work, including records or reports, laboratory results, etc. c. Plagiarism and Copyright Violation Gulf Medical University takes strong exception to plagiarism and copyright violation by students, faculty or support staff. Plagiarism Plagiarism is using the ideas created and words written by others as one’s own, and without indicating the source. Plagiarism encompasses ideas, opinions or theories, facts, statistics, graphs, drawings, images, photographs, videos, movies, music and other similar intellectual property, with the exception of information that is categorized under “common knowledge”. Plagiarism includes: • Turning in someone else’s work as your own • Copying ideas from someone else without giving credit • Failing to put a quotation in quotation marks • Giving incorrect information about the source of a quotation • Changing words but copying the sentence structure of a source without giving credit • Copying so many words or ideas from a source to make up the majority of your work.
  • 86. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 86 | P a g e Students are reminded that ideas written by researchers or other authorities or the content appearing in text books, recommended readings or journals need to be paraphrased before they could be included in your project work, assignment reports, posters or manuscripts. Paraphrasing involves reading the original text, understanding the meaning and then presenting the information in your own words: maintaining the original sentence structure with a few words changed in places is not acceptable paraphrasing. Copyright Violation Intellectual property such as, graphs, essays, poems, drawings, images, photographs, videos, movies, music, statistics and other similar creations automatically become copyright the day they are made public by the author. Unless the copyright owner has specifically mentioned that the items are copyright free, using any of these in students’ own compositions is a copyright violation. The exception to this stipulation is when the user is covered under “fair use”, which is the limited use of copyright material for research, scholarship and teaching. In such case the need for obtaining permission from the copyright owner does not arise. Preventing Plagiarism Gulf Medical University requires the students to submit their projects, reports, assignments and manuscripts prepared as electronic files through the portal that is made available through the IT Department. While allowing the student to submit the document instantaneously, the software also checks the document for plagiarism. When detected, the percentage of similarity and the site where the original document had appeared will be indicated. As headings of sections and references in the document may be similar to those that appear in other texts, a 15-20% of similarity is taken as falling within the acceptable limit, and is not considered as plagiarism. Deciding on the percentage of plagiarism allowable is empirical, contingent solely upon evaluator’s discretion. The distinction between what is fair use and what is infringement in a particular case will not always be clear or easily defined. There is no specific number of words, lines, or notes that may safely be taken without permission. Acknowledging the source of the copyrighted material does not substitute for obtaining permission. The extent of plagiarism is only relevant in determining the form and level of sanction. Consequences of Plagiarism: Plagiarism is considered an act of academic misconduct. Plagiarism of any sort or any degree is not condoned under any circumstances, and students convicted of plagiarism after due procedures are liable to punitive action by the university authorities.
  • 87. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 87 | P a g e Academic Misconduct Procedures (A) Initiation of Proceedings When a student in a course commits an act of academic misconduct like plagiarism, the faculty member who has detected the misconduct has the authority to initiate academic misconduct proceedings against the student. Before this, the faculty is required to hold an informal meeting with the student concerning the matter. If the faculty member affirms that the student did commit the act of misconduct as alleged, then at the conclusion of the informal meeting, the faculty member is required to report the matter to the Student Welfare Committee in writing. Upon reviewing the complaint and after enquiry & verification, the committee will forward the report to the College Council presided over by the Dean. On the consensus reached by the Council, the Dean has the discretion to decide whether disciplinary proceedings should be instituted. A disciplinary proceeding is initiated by the Dean sending a notice to the student who is the subject of the complaint. The notice sent is to inform the student that charges are pending and that a hearing has been scheduled. It shall inform the student of the reported circumstances of the allegedly wrongful conduct. It also specifies that if the student fails to appear for the meeting, the Dean may re-schedule the meeting. The notice shall inform the student that the college council may impose straight -away any of the below mentioned disciplinary penalties, if it is reasonably believed the failure of non- appearance is to be without good cause or weigh this as a negative factor in future appeals. (B) Disposition When the student appears as required, the Dean shall inform the student as fully as possible of the facts alleged. If, after discussion and such further investigation as may be necessary, the Dean determines that the violation occurred, as alleged, the Dean shall so notify the student and may impose any one or a combination of the below mentioned sanctions for facts of academic misconduct. If the student fails to adhere to the sanctions imposed, the student may be subjected to additional sanctions, including suspension or expulsion. The sanctions include lowered or failing grade on the particular assignment or the possibility of an additional administrative sanction, (like the under mentioned) in case the academic misconduct extends to other deeds a. A failing grade on the examination, paper, research or creative project; b. A specified reduction in the course grade; c. Non-inclusion of scores earned in continuous assessment; and
  • 88. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 88 | P a g e d. Multiple Sanctions: More than one of the sanctions listed above may be imposed for any single violation; Reprimand and warning - An undertaking is signed by the student not to repeat the offence. The student may face suspension if she / he engages in the same misconduct again or commits any other violation. Suspension - A student may be prohibited from participating in all aspects of college life for a specified period of time. The student may appeal against the decision of the Dean to the Provost. The appeal for the latter decision rests with the discretion of the Provost. Appeal to and Action by the Provost The Provost shall inquire into the facts of the appeal and shall discuss the matter individually with the student, the faculty member, the Dean and make a decision concerning the merits of the appeal. The Provost may affirm the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed, reverse the original decision and direct that the complaint be dismissed; impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation. The student may appeal against the decision of the Provost to the President. The appeal for the latter decision rests with the discretion of the President. Appeal to and Action by the President The President shall inquire into the facts of the appeal and shall discuss the matter individually with the student, the faculty member, the Dean, the Provost and make a decision concerning the merits of the appeal. He may affirm the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed, reverse the original decision and direct that the complaint be dismissed; impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation. 13.1.2 Personal Misconduct 13.1.2.1 Personal Misconduct on University Premises The college may discipline a student for the following acts of personal misconduct, which occur on college property and its allied teaching sites:  False accusation of misconduct, forgery, alteration of college document (record, identification).  Making a false report on emergency / catastrophe.  Lewd, indecent or obscene conduct, gesture/s and /or remark/s.  Disorderly conduct, which interferes with teaching or any other college activity.  Failure to comply with the directions of authorized college officials.
  • 89. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 89 | P a g e  Unauthorized possession of college and others' property.  Physical damage to university related or others' property. The Committee will place the facts of the case before the College Council, presided over by the Dean and a decision on the nature of act, and sanction to be imposed is taken. The nature of the act and the sanction to be imposed is reviewed by the college council, presided over by the Dean, taking into consideration the following: (i) Previous act/s of misconduct. (ii) Record of repeated act/s of misconduct. 13.1.2.2 Personal Misconduct Outside University Premises The college may discipline a student for acts of personal misconduct that are not committed on college property, if the acts arise from activities that are being conducted off the campus, or if the misconduct undermines the security of the GMU community or the integrity of the educational process. PERSONAL MISCONDUCT PROCEDURES (A) Initiation of Proceedings A report that a student has committed an act of personal misconduct may be filed by any person; it must be submitted in writing to the Student Welfare Committee. After reviewing a complaint, after enquiry & verification, the committee will forward the report to the College Council, presided over by the Dean. On the consensus reached by the Council, the Dean has the discretion to decide whether disciplinary proceedings should be instituted. A disciplinary proceeding is initiated by the Dean sending a notice to the student who is the subject of the complaint. The notice sent is to inform the student that charges are pending and that a hearing has been scheduled. It shall inform the student of the reported circumstances of the allegedly wrongful conduct. It also specifies that if the student fails to appear for the conference, the Dean may re- schedule the meeting. The notice shall inform the student that the college council may impose straight -away any of the below mentioned disciplinary penalties, if it is reasonably believed the failure of non- appearance is to be without good cause or weigh this as a negative factor in future appeals. (B) Disposition When the student appears as required, the Dean shall inform the student as fully as possible of the facts alleged.
  • 90. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 90 | P a g e The student is given a fair opportunity to explain her / his position / views regarding the allegations leveled against her / him. If, after discussion and such further investigation as may be necessary, the Dean determines that the violation occurred, as alleged, the Dean shall so notify the student and may impose any one or a combination of the below mentioned sanctions for facts of personal misconduct. If the student fails to adhere to the sanctions imposed, the student may be subjected to additional sanctions, including suspension or expulsion. The student may appeal against the decision of the Dean of the college to the Provost of the university. The sanctions include: Reprimand and warning - That the student may receive additional sanction/s if the student engages in the same misconduct again or commits any other violation/s. Disciplinary probation is for a specified period of time under conditions specified by the Dean. As a condition of probation, the student may be required to participate in a specific program, such as a counseling program, a program designed, to stimulate good citizenship within the college community, or any other activity which would foster civic participation. Restitution - A student may be required to pay the cost for the replacement or repair of any property damaged by the student. Expulsion from University Hostel - A student may be expelled from university hostel and the student's contract for university hostel may be rescinded. Suspension - A student may be suspended / debarred from participating in all aspects of college life for a specified period of time. Expulsion - A student may be expelled from the university permanently. Furthermore, the student may not thereafter petition for readmission to the university. (C) Appeal to and Action by the Provost The student may appeal against the decision of the Dean of the college to the Provost of the university, who may take any of the following actions:  Affirm the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of misconduct.  Affirm the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed.  Reverse the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of misconduct and direct that the complaint be dismissed.  Set aside the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed and impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation.
  • 91. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 91 | P a g e (D) Appeal to and action by the President The student may appeal against the decision of the Provost to the President of the university, who may take any of the following actions:  Affirm the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of misconduct.  Affirm the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed.  Reverse the original decision that the student did commit the alleged act of misconduct and direct that the complaint be dismissed.  Set aside the original decision concerning the disciplinary sanction to be imposed and impose a different sanction, amounting to commutation. Repeated Misconduct Procedure (Personal) In cases of repeated personal misconduct by a student, the student welfare committee will study the advice, recommendation/s and instruction/s imparted by the committee against the student on previous occasions. Serious warnings or disciplinary proceedings against the student by the student welfare committee on earlier occasions constitute enough grounds for the committee to recommend dismissal of the student with immediate effect if the present episode of misconduct warrants such action. Procedures for Handling Misconduct by Student Organizations Academic misconduct proceedings and disciplinary proceedings against individual members of a student organization are governed by the procedures otherwise applicable to students alleged to have committed acts of academic misconduct. GMU procedures for imposing academic and disciplinary sanctions are designed to provide students with the guarantees of due process and procedural fairness, to ensure equal protection for all students, and to provide for the imposition of similar sanctions for similar acts of misconduct. 13.2 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities 13.2.1 Student’s Rights and Responsibilities Policy The student must become familiar with the academic policies, curriculum requirements, and associated deadlines as outlined in the undergraduate catalog. The academic advisor shall advise the student on all matters related to their program of study and will aid the student in the interpretation of policies whenever necessary. However, it shall ultimately be the student's responsibility to meet all stated requirements for the degree and the policies related thereof. It is also the student's responsibility to actively utilize their campus email and the university web site, observe netiquette, observe
  • 92. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 92 | P a g e the policies on internet use as published and made available in the Student handbook as it tends to be a major communication resource and is often the primary form of communication between students. Gulf Medical University shall maintain an academic environment in which the freedom to teach, conduct research, learn, and administer the university is protected. Students will enjoy maximum benefit from this environment by accepting responsibilities commensurate with their role in the academic community. The principles found herein are designed to facilitate communication, foster academic integrity, and defend freedoms of inquiry, discussion, and expression among members of the university community. 13.2.2 Rights in the Pursuit of Education Students will have the right:  To pursue an education free from illegal discrimination and to be judged on the basis of relevant abilities, qualifications, and performance;  To fair and impartial academic evaluation and a means of recourse through orderly procedures to challenge action contrary to such standard;  To an academic environment conducive to intellectual freedom; and  To a fair and orderly disciplinary process. 13.2.3 Right to Access Records and Facilities Students will have the right:  To access their own personnel and education records and to have the university maintain and protect the confidential status of such records, as required by appropriate legal authority;  To have access to accurate information regarding tuition, fees and charges, course availability, general requirements for establishing and maintaining acceptable academic standing, and graduation requirements. 13.2.4 Right to Freedom of Association, Expression, Advocacy, and Publication Students will have the right:  To free inquiry and expression;  To organize and join associations to promote their common and lawful interests;  To be able to protest on university premises in a manner which does not obstruct or disrupt teaching, research, administration, or other activities authorized by the university;
  • 93. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 93 | P a g e 13.2.5 Right to Contribute to University Governance and Curriculum Students will have the right through student representatives, to participate in formulating and evaluating institutional policies. 13.2.6 Student Responsibilities Students shall be expected to balance these rights with the responsibility to respect the learning environment for others and for themselves and to make their best effort to meet academic challenges undertaken. Students will be responsible for compliance with the University Code of Conduct. The standards of professional behavior in the educational setting are related to three domains: 1) Individual Performance; 2) Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community, others; and 3) Support of the ethical principles of the medical profession, as expanded below: Individual performance:  Demonstrates educational experiences (i.e., exams, clinics, rounds, small group sessions, appointments at the clinical skills center).  Adheres to dress code consistent with institutional standards.  Relationships with students, faculty, staff, patients and community.  Establishes effective rapport.  Establishes and maintains appropriate boundaries in all learning situations.  Respectful at all times of all parties involved.  Demonstrates humanism in all interactions.  Respects the diversity of race, gender, religion, sexual orientation, age, disability and socioeconomic status.  Resolves conflict in a manner that respects the dignity of every person involved.  Uses professional language being mindful of the environment.  Maintains awareness and adapts to differences in individual patients.  Including those related to culture and medical literacy.  Supports ethical principles of the medical profession.  Maintains honesty.  Contributes to an atmosphere conducive to learning and is committed to advance scientific knowledge.  Protects patient’s confidentiality.
  • 94. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 94 | P a g e COLLEGE OF MEDICINE (CoM)
  • 95. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 95 | P a g e 14.0 The Integrated MBBS Program 14.1 Goals 1. The graduate will acquire and understand scientific principles of medical knowledge at the molecular, cellular, organ, whole body and environmental levels of health and disease. He should be able to apply the current understanding and recent advances in contemporary basic sciences to promote health, prevent, diagnose and manage the common health problems of individuals (at different stages of life), families and communities. 2. The graduate will develop basic clinical skills (interpretive, manipulative, and procedural) such as the ability to obtain a patient's history, to undertake a comprehensive physical and mental state examination and interpret the findings, and to demonstrate competence in the performance of a limited number of basic technical procedures. 3. The graduates will develop an attitude and practice personal and professional values necessary for the achievement of high standards of medical practice. This should enable him to carry out independently the responsibilities of a physician and to develop further knowledge and skills in order to adapt to the changes in the practice of medicine throughout his professional career.
  • 96. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 96 | P a g e 14.2 Intended Program Learning Outcomes Learning Outcome Domain Upon successful completion of the program, the graduate will be able to: LO1 Medical Knowledge Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the key concepts and principles of biomedical, clinical and psychosocial sciences and their application in the clinical context to promote health, and prevent and treat diseases commonly encountered in the region within the legal and regulatory framework LO2 Communication Skills Communicate effectively with patients and their families, colleagues, superiors and members of the public through written, verbal and electronic means LO3 Research and Analytical Skills Use appropriate statistical tools and research methods to practice evidence-based medicine, maintain appropriate documentation and carry out basic research studies LO4 Professionalism and Values Arrive at decisions, take actions and perform assigned duties paying due attention to cultural diversity, patient confidentiality and ethical issues; be worthy of trust and exhibit honesty, fairness, compassion, respect and integrity in all interactions with patients and their families LO5 Patient Care Provide optimum patient care at the level of a basic doctor through clerking, diagnosing and managing patients, including performing common emergency and life-saving procedures, adhering to recommended guidelines and standard precautions with an awareness of both one's own limitations and the need to seek the help of an expert when required in the interests of patient safety LO6 Leadership and Teamwork Function as an effective leader and contribute to the professional development of peers; be an effective team member when dealing with peers and superiors in the discharge of duties and during the process of learning and appreciate the roles and contributions of colleagues and other healthcare professionals of the multidisciplinary team LO7 Personal Development Possess qualities of self-evaluation, reflection, self-learning and time-management skills so that life-long learning could be undertaken for personal and professional development; develop critical thinking and problem-solving abilities along with sufficient personal strengths to cope with the physical and psychological demands of a career in medicine
  • 97. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 97 | P a g e 14.3 MBBS Program Structure Modular System-based Integrated MBBS Curriculum Phase – I Phase – II Phase - III Language & Communication Skills Blood & Immune System P B L BASICCLINICALSKILLS Endocrine System (including Mammary Glands) P B L BASICCLINICALSKILLS Integumentary System MULTISYSTEMMODULES Blood & Immune System CRRI Psychosocial Sciences Blood & Immune System Cardiovascular System Cells, Molecules & Genes Cardiovascular System P B L Reproductive System P B L Cardiovascular System Respiratory System Tissues and Organs Respiratory System Alimentary System Respiratory System P B L Nervous System P B L Alimentary System Urinary System Embryogenesis & Life Cycle Urinary System Endocrine System (including Mammary Glands) Alimentary System P B L Musculo Skeletal System P B L Endocrine System (including Mammary Glands) Reproductive System Metabolism & Nutrition Reproductive System Nervous System Urinary System P B L Integumentary System P B L Nervous System Musculo Skeletal System Internal & External Environment Musculo Skeletal System Integumentary System Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6
  • 98. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 98 | P a g e 14.4 Plan of Study Phase – I (2013 Batch) Semester Course Duration Weeks FALLSEMESTER ORIENTATION Sep 4 , 2013 ORIENTATION MED 101 & MED 102 (Language & Communication Skills) and (Psychosocial Sciences) Sep 5 , 2013 MED 101 (Language & Communication Skills) MED 102 (Psychosocial Sciences) Sep 8 – 26, 2013 (3 Weeks) 1 - 3 MED 103 (Cells, Molecules & Genes) Sep 29 – Oct 10, 2013 (2 Weeks) 4 - 5 EID HOLIDAYS Oct 13 – 17, 2013 (1 Week) 6 MED 103 (Cells, Molecules & Genes) Oct 20 – Nov 14, 2013 (4 Weeks) 7 - 10 MED 104 (Tissues and Organs) Nov 17 – Dec 19, 2013 (5 Weeks) 11 - 15 FALL SEMESTER BREAK Dec 22, 2013 - Jan 2, 2014 (2 Weeks) 16 - 17 MED 104 (Tissues and Organs) Jan 5 - 9, 2014 (1 Week) 18 MED 105 (Embryogenesis and Life Cycle) Jan 12 – Feb 6, 2014 (4 Weeks) 19 - 22 STUDY LEAVE Feb 9 – 13, 2014 (1 Week) 23 SEMESTER I EXAMINATION Feb 16 – 20, 2014 (1 Week) 24 SPRINGSEMESTER MED 106 (Metabolism and Nutrition) Feb 23 – March 27, 2014 (5 Weeks) 25 - 29 SPRING SEMESTER BREAK March 30 - Apr 10, 2014 (2 Weeks) 30 - 31 MED 106 (Metabolism and Nutrition) Apr 13 - 17, 2014 (1 Week) 32 MED 107 (Internal and External Environment) Apr 20 - June 19, 2014 (9 Weeks) 33 - 41 STUDY LEAVE June 22 - 26, 2014 (1 Week) 42 SEMESTER II EXAMINATION Jun 29 - July 3, 2014 (1 Week) 43 STUDY LEAVE July 6 - July 17, 2014 (2 Weeks) 44 - 45 PHASE-I PROFESSIONAL EXAMINATION July 20 - 24, 2014 (1 Week) 46 EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
  • 99. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 99 | P a g e Phase – II Year 1 (2012 Batch) Semester Course Duration Weeks FALLSEMESTER ORIENTATION Sep 8, 2013 MED 202 (Blood and Immune System) Sep 9 – Oct 10, 2013 (5 Weeks) 1 - 5 EID HOLIDAYS Oct 13 – 17, 2013 (1 Week) 6 MED 202 (Blood and Immune System) Oct 20 – 24, 2013 (1 Week) 7 MED 203 (Cardiovascular System) Oct 27 – Dec 19, 2013 (8 Weeks) 8 - 15 FALL SEMESTER BREAK Dec 22, 2013 - Jan 2, 2014 (2 Weeks) 16 - 17 SEMESTER III EXAMINATION Jan 5 - 9, 2014 (1 Week) 18 MED 211 & MED 212 (Clinical Block & Research Methodology) Jan 12 – Feb 6, 2014 (4 Weeks) 19 - 22 MED 204 (Respiratory System) Feb 9 – March 20, 2014 (6 Weeks) 23 - 28 SPRINGSEMESTER MED 212 (Research Methodology) March 23 - 27, 2014 (1 Week) 29 SPRING SEMESTER BREAK March 30 - Apr 10, 2014 (2 Weeks) 30 - 31 MED 212 (Research Methodology) Apr 13 - 17, 2014 (1 Week) 32 MED 205 (Alimentary System) Apr 20 - June 12, 2014 (8 Weeks) 33 - 40 MED 206 (Urinary System) June 15 - July 10, 2014 (4 Weeks) 41 - 44 STUDY LEAVE July 13 - 17, 2014 (1 week) 45 SEMESTER IV EXAMINATION July 20 - 24, 2014 (1 Week) 46 EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
  • 100. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 100 | P a g e Phase – II Year 2 (2011 Batch) Semester Course Duration Weeks FALLSEMESTER MED 210 (Endocrine System and Mammary Gland) Sep 8 – Oct 10, 2013 (5 Weeks) 1 - 5 EID HOLIDAYS Oct 13 – 17, 2013 (1 Week) 6 (MED 207) (Reproductive System) Oct 20 – Dec 5, 2013 (7 Weeks) 7 - 13 MED 211 & 212 (Clinical Block III & Research Methodology) Dec 8 - 19, 2013 ( 2 Weeks) 14 - 15 FALL SEMESTER BREAK Dec 22, 2013 – Jan 2, 2014 (2 Weeks) 16 - 17 SEMESTER V EXAMINATION Jan 5 – 9, 2014 (1 Week) 18 MED 208 (Nervous System) Jan 12 - March 13, 2014 (9 Weeks) 19 - 27 SPRINGSEMESTER MED 211 & 212 (Clinical Block IV & Research Methodology) March 16 - 27, 2014 (2 Weeks) 28 - 29 SPRING SEMESTER BREAK March 30, - Apr 10, 2014 (2 Weeks) 30 - 31 MED 209 (Musculoskeletal System) Apr 13 - May 29, 2014 (7 Weeks) 32 - 38 MED 201 (Integumentary System) June 1 - 12, 2014 (2 Weeks) 39 - 40 STUDY LEAVE June 15 - 19, 2014 (1 Week) 41 SEMESTER VI EXAMINATION June 22 - 26, 2014 (1 Week) 42 STUDY LEAVE June 29 - July 10, 2014 (2 Weeks) 43 - 44 PHASE II PROFESSIONAL EXAM July 13 - 17, 2014 (1 Week) 45 ANNOUNCEMENT OF RESULTS July 20 – 24, 2014 (1 Week) 46 EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
  • 101. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 101 | P a g e Phase – III Year 1 (2010 Batch) Semester Course Duration Week FALLSEMESTER ORIENTATION Sep 4 - 5, 2013 MED 301 (Integumentary System) Sep 8 – Oct 3, 2013 (4 Weeks) 1 - 4 MED 302 (Blood and Immune System) Oct 6 - 10, 2013 (1 Week) 5 EID HOLIDAYS Oct 13 - 17, 2013 (1 Week) 6 MED 302 (Blood and Immune System) Oct 20 – 31, 2013 (2 Weeks) 7 - 8 MED 304 (Respiratory System) Nov 3 - 21, 2013 (3 Weeks) 9 - 11 MED 303 (Cardiovascular System) Nov 24 - Dec 19, 2013 ( 4 Weeks) 12 - 15 FALL SEMESTER BREAK Dec 22, 2013 - Jan 2, 2014 (2 Weeks) 16 - 17 SEMESTER VII EXAMINATION Jan 4, 2014 MED 305 (Alimentary System) Jan 5 - 30, 2014 (4 Weeks) 18 - 21 SPRINGSEMESTER MED 306 (Urinary System) Feb 2 - 20, 2014 (3 Weeks) 22 - 24 MED 310 (Endocrine System) Feb 23 - March 6, 2014 (2 Weeks) 25 - 26 (MED 307) (Reproductive System) March 9 - 27, 2014 (3 Weeks) 27 - 29 SPRING SEMESTER BREAK March 30- Apr 3, 2014 (1 Week) 30 (MED 307) (Reproductive System) Apr 6 - 24, 2014 (3 Weeks) 31 - 33 MED 308 (Nervous System) Apr 27 - May 29, 2014 (5 Weeks) 34 - 38 MED 309 (Musculoskeletal System) June 1 -July 10, 2014 (6 Weeks) 39 - 44 STUDY LEAVE July 13 - 17, 2014 (1 Week) 45 SEMESTER VIII EXAMINATION July 20 - 24, 2014 (1 Week) 46 EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
  • 102. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 102 | P a g e Phase – III Year 2(2009 Batch) Semester Course Duration WeekFALLSEMESTER ORIENTATION Sep 4 - 5, 2013 Clinical Posting 1 Sep 8 – Oct 31, 2013 (8 Weeks) 1 - 8 Clinical Posting 2 Nov 3 – Dec 26, 2013 (8 Weeks) 9 - 16 SEMESTER IX EXAMINATION Dec 28, 2013 Clinical Posting 3 Dec 29, 2013 – Feb 20, 2014 (8 Weeks) 17- 24 SPRINGSEMESTER Clinical Posting 4 Feb 23 – Apr 17, 2014 (8 Weeks) 25 - 32 Clinical Posting 5 Apr 20 - June 12, 2014 (8 Weeks) 33 - 40 STUDY LEAVE June 15 - 19, 2014 (1 Week) 41 SEMESTER X EXAMINATION June 22 - 26, 2014 (1 Week) 42 STUDY LEAVE June 29 – July 10, 2014 (2 Weeks) 43 - 44 PHASE III PROFESSIONAL EXAM July 13 - 17, 2014 (1 Week) 45 ANNOUNCEMENT OF RESULTS July 20 – 24, 2014 (1 Week) 46 EID & SUMMER HOLIDAYS July 27 - Aug 31, 2014
  • 103. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 103 | P a g e 14.5 Course Descriptions Phase - I MED 101: Language & Communication Skills The course is designed to provide a variety of simulated patient encounter settings to introduce the basic interpersonal communication processes that help to gain sensitivity to patient perspectives and to develop a sense of personal awareness, which will help the student to deal with patients of all ages and both genders in routine and difficult situations and in the process work effectively as a member of the health care team in real life encounters. Students will be encouraged to learn medical terminology in common usage both in English and Arabic to reduce language barriers in an effort to improve their communication skills. MED 102: Psychosocial Sciences This course covers two major themes. Introduction to Behavioral Sciences covers such topics as psychosocial basis of health, approaches to study of human behavior, methods of behavioral sciences research, organic basis of behavior and the process of human development through the life span. Dynamics of Human Behavior helps students to gain knowledge of the working of the human memory system, consciousnesses and human behavior, and the principles of learning and reinforcements and its applications. It also provides students an opportunity to learn the elements of culture and process of socialization, and their impact on health and illness. MED 103: Cells, Molecules & Genes This course introduces the fundamentals of molecular, cellular and genetic processes; the structure-function relationships of biomolecules with an emphasis on their clinical relevance; the functions of the biomembranes; and the basic mechanisms of signal transduction. Use of computer and web-based learning resources in this course serve to promote interactive and self- directed learning. MED 104: Tissues & Organs In this course, the structure and function of the various types of tissues, their organization to form organs of the different systems in the body are dealt with in an integrated manner to help in understanding the correlation of structure with function. This will enable the learner to better correlate the alterations in function due to structural changes in a disease. Seminars in relevant areas will give the learner an opportunity to develop presentation skills.
  • 104. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 104 | P a g e MED 105: Embryogenesis & Life Cycle This course is designed to introduce the normal human development at the various life stages from conception to old age including embryology, childhood, adolescence, adulthood and aging in the elderly. The course covers the first few weeks of early human development from fertilization to formation of the embryo. Students will also learn to appreciate health as a component of life cycle development. MED 106: Metabolism & Nutrition This course deals with the key concepts and principles of nutrition and metabolism that are necessary for understanding the development of metabolic diseases and the rationale of the methods employed in their investigations. Opportunities will be provided to work cooperatively as a member of a group in the preparation and submission of a project when students will gather and analyze health information in an attempt to identify unhealthy eating behaviors which increases risk of developing nutritional disorders. MED 107: Internal & External Environment This course is the last course in Phase-I of the Integrated Curriculum. This course will help the students to gain an insight into the challenges human beings face each day of their lives indoors, at home or at work or outdoors as their bodies are challenged by agents in its internal and external environments. The student will be introduced to the basic physiological and pathological responses to the noxious agents at the level of cells, tissues and organs that in turn is related to the toxicity of the agents which make the difference between health and disease. The students will realize the magnitude of the preventive measures made at the level of the individual, the community and globally to achieve the vision of health for all in the future.
  • 105. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 105 | P a g e Phase - II MED 201: Integumentary System This course has been integrated around the Integumentary System to provide the learner with a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of the integumentary system in health and its major deviations in common skin diseases. In addition, the learner is introduced to the causes, pathogenesis, and pathological basis of clinical manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing management and methods of prevention of these disorders. MED 202: Blood And Immune System The course presents an overview of the normal structure and functions of the blood and the immune system and their derangement in disorders of the red cells, leucocytes, platelets and the lymphoid tissues/organs. The pathophysiology, molecular basis, laboratory findings and clinical manifestations of anemias, leukemias, and hemorrhagic, thrombotic and immune disorders will be emphasized through didactics, laboratory exercises and seminars. Case based discussions through CBL, PBL and settings will encourage development of problem solving skills. MED 203: Cardiovascular System This course has been structured as an integrated study of the human cardiovascular system and provides instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the human cardiovascular system. Emphasis is placed on the integration of relevant principles with respect to the behavior of the normal circulation and its responses to the stress of injury and disease. This course deals with common cardiovascular disorders, including a study of atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease and myocardial infarction, hypertension, valvular and congenital heart disease, infectious heart disease, and heart muscle disorders. Also included is a series of case presentations dealing with common complications of a variety of cardiac diseases: cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure and shock. PBL sessions deal with prototype diseases and provide opportunities to develop problem solving and interpersonal communication skills. MED 204: Respiratory System The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal structure, function and development of human respiratory system using different strategies and applying the knowledge and skills acquired in understanding the pathophysiology of various respiratory disorders. The basic principles of management of these disorders with a focus on disease prevention will be described. The medico legal aspects of specific respiratory disorders will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology and management of the lower respiratory tract infections.
  • 106. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 106 | P a g e MED 205: Alimentary System The course adopts an integrated organ system- based approach to provide the learner with a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of the digestive system and its accessory organs, in health and their major deviations in disease. Furthermore, the learner is introduced to the aetiopathogenesis, basis of clinical manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing the pharmacological management and methods of prevention of common disorders of the digestive system. The course employs problem based learning (PBL) and a variety of teaching /learning methods to facilitate interdisciplinary integration, student centered learning and development of generic competences. Simultaneous introduction of basic clinical skills aims to vertically integrate learning and prepare the students for clinical clerkship in the next phase. MED 206: Urinary System This course has been designed as an integrated study of the urinary system and provides instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the urinary system. Emphasis is placed on the integration of relevant principles with respect to the mechanisms of normal excretion and its responses to health and disease. This course deals with common urinary disorders, including study of renal failure, glomerular diseases, infections, obstruction and neoplasms of the urinary tract. Also included is a series of case presentations dealing with common complications of a variety of urinary tract diseases. PBL courses deal with prototype diseases and provide opportunities to develop problem-solving skills. MED 207: Reproductive System The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal structure, function and development of the human reproductive system using different learning strategies to acquire the knowledge and skills required for understanding the pathophysiology of various reproductive disorders; the rationale for their management focused on disease prevention. The medico legal aspects of specific disorders will be studied. The PBL course will deal with the pathophysiology and management of menstrual disorders. MED 208: Nervous System The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal structure, function and development of the nervous system and the organs of hearing, vision, taste, smell and touch. The course also serves to introduce the medical students to individual factors affecting human behavior particularly the micro level psychological processes such as perception, personality, attitudes, values and motivation. The students will also have a chance to understand the impact of these factors on the health and well- being of people in general and on the patient-doctor relationship in specific. The medico
  • 107. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 107 | P a g e legal aspects of death will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology, and management of meningeal infections. MED 209: Musculoskeletal System In this course the knowledge of the contribution of the normal structure, function and development of the bones, joints and muscles in the maintenance of the kinetics of normal posture and locomotion will help to understand how the physiological and pathological changes associated with congenital, traumatic, infectious, degenerative, metabolic and neoplastic musculoskeletal disorders lead to physical disabilities that have a major impact on the biomechanical function of this organ system particularly following traumatic bone injuries and degenerative joint disease. MED 210: Endocrine System & Mammary Gland This course has been structured to provide an integrated study of the homeostatic mechanisms regulated by the circulating hormones secreted by the different endocrine glands. Emphasis has been placed on the normal responses to stress that alter the endocrine balance and the physiological changes that help to restore homeostasis. This course deals with common disorders of the hypothalamus and pituitary, thyroid and parathyroid, adrenal, pancreas that lead to either hyper functioning or hypo functioning metabolic disease states. The mammary glands have been included as an example of a typical target organ of hormone action. The PBL course introduces breast diseases, both neoplastic and non- neoplastic as a prototype of diseases that arises as a complication of .persistent hormonal imbalance. MED 211 Clinical Skills Competency Levels I & II (Introductory Clerkship) This course is designed to be introduced gradually and progressively and reinforced as appropriate in each course in the pre-clerkship years in an attempt to vertically integrate the knowledge of the basic sciences with the practice of the clinical sciences. Communication skills will be learnt as a prerequisite of general history taking and physical examination to help elicit the signs and symptoms and is introduced in year one (PHASE I). This will be followed by a more focused history taking and physical examination as relevant to the different organ systems in the second and third years (PHASE II). In addition during this phase, the students will be introduced to the performance of routine technical procedures related to physical examination to elicit specific diagnostic physical signs. Procedural and manipulative skills relevant to the organ system under study will be learnt in the safe environment of the Simulation Lab. Interpretation of results of ECG, laboratory and radiologic investigations and deviations from the normal will be identified and their significance will be discussed by a team made up of both clinicians and basic scientists.
  • 108. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 108 | P a g e These skills will help to develop adequate communication and basic clinical skills in order to prepare the student to integrate rapidly into the clinical hospital and respond professionally during real doctor-patient encounters during the clerkship in the fourth and fifth years (PHASE III) and the final internship year (CRRI) MED 212 Research - I, II, III This course is designed to afford the student the opportunity to develop a research proposal under faculty guidance. The proposal development may involve a literature search, preliminary experimentation, or a pilot field study. The research would be preliminary but relevant to the project. The course will be conducted in three parts. In the second year, Research Methodology is designed to introduce the student to basic concepts and problems encountered in scientific investigation, including types of data and measurement, descriptive statistics, inferential statistics, validity, reliability, sampling, hypotheses and hypothesis testing, literature review and research design. In the third year Research Protocol Design introduces the student to the scientific development of research protocols and their key elements. Topics include the differentiation between research design types, rules for writing protocols, ethical considerations relative to research protocols and the correct preparation of data collection forms. Upon completion, the student will be able to identify the primary components of protocols and effectively develop a protocol draft. In the third year opportunity will be provided for a Research Practicum designed to provide the student an opportunity to gain practical experience in the design and/or implementation of research. A student may choose to do a practicum as part of an ongoing faculty research project or as an independent experience in a community or institutional setting. Selection of the research topic will depend on individual needs of a student and must be approved by the student’s academic advisory committee. A faculty member will agree to supervise the practicum.
  • 109. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 109 | P a g e Phase - III MED 301 & 401: Ophthalmology This course is designed as an introduction to ophthalmology. In addition to attending didactic sessions, the student will learn to take a good ophthalmic history and perform a good general eye exam in order to detect common abnormalities of the eye and visual system. Students will learn to interpret the clinical findings and reach a diagnosis and discuss their management during case based discussions in the classroom, the outpatient and the bedside. Students will develop and refine skills in the use of the penlight, ophthalmoscope and slit lamp and will also have ample opportunity to observe a variety of ophthalmic surgical procedures, such as sub-conjunctival injection, foreign body removal and nasolacrimal duct syringing performed in the management of common eye disorders. MED 302 & 402: Otorhinolaryngology The didactic lectures provide essential factual information, and the clinical rotations provide a practical experience. Students will learn to take a relevant history and perform a basic head and neck exam with equipments available to a primary care practitioner (flashlight, tongue blade, otoscope) and perform an ear exam by tympanometry and otoscope. The students will gain increasing experience discussing the clinical findings to reach a diagnosis of common problems like allergic rhinitis, sinusitis, otitis media, epistaxis, facial fractures, hearing loss, dizziness, and swallowing disorders and discuss a treatment plan with the faculty. Students will be able to observe surgical procedures like ear syringing, nasal packing, tracheostomy, endoscopy and removal of foreign bodies. The student will be able to perform laryngoscopy and use of tracheostomy tubes on a manikin in the simulation lab. MED 303 & 403: Medicine and Allied Disciplines The Medicine clerkship is divided into two rotations one in clerkship year 4 and the other in year 5. The student will have adequate clinical encounters in both ambulatory and bedside settings in the outpatient and inpatient departments of the hospital. The student will gain wide exposure to the medical and conservative management of common acute and chronic medical disorders. Rotations in allied medical specialties like dermatology and psychiatry will increase the breadth of the experience to include the management of common skin disorders and a broad understanding of the human mind and behavior, its normality in health, abnormality in stress, methods of classifying psychological and psychiatric disorders and different forms of therapy. It also helps students in gaining an understanding of the ethical concepts in the field of medicine, the right of patients and the responsibility of health professionals.
  • 110. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 110 | P a g e MED 304 & 404: Surgery and Allied Disciplines The clerkship in Surgery is designed to give the student a broad exposure to the principles of diagnosis and management of common surgical problems, including surgical emergencies; the indications and methods for fluid and electrolyte replacement therapy including blood transfusion, the importance of asepsis, disinfection and sterilization and use of antibiotics, and lastly, common malignancies and their management and prevention. During the course of the rotation, the student will be expected to focus on several areas of study, which will include basic principles of peri-operative management of the patient with a surgical problem. An awareness of the nature and management of surgical disease is developed by case oriented small group sessions, rounds and weekly conferences. The surgical experience will be further widened to include surgical aspects of orthopedics, anesthesia and radiology Orthopedics includes the principles of recognition and management of common bone and joint injuries and infections; recognition of congenital and skeletal anomalies for correction or rehabilitation; importance of metabolic bone diseases, diagnosis of neoplasms affecting bones; recognition and management of degenerative and rheumatologic diseases of musculoskeletal system; principles of reconstructive surgery of musculoskeletal system. Anesthesiology includes principles of the pre-, intra- and post-operative anesthetic management of the surgical patient with particular emphasis on relief of preoperative anxiety, intraoperative maintenance of normal oxygenation when normal respiration is depressed under anesthesia and postoperative pain relief Radiology will include the identification of normal findings on routine X-rays of chest, abdomen, head and limbs, the recognition of deviations of normal and their significance in the management of the underlying disorders. MED 305 & 405: Obstetrics and Gynecology In the Obstetrics and Gynecology, the student will gain the skills of gynecologic and obstetric history taking and physical examination in the outpatient and wards and practical experience in the delivery room under the close supervision of the staff. The student will avail these opportunities to reach a diagnosis and discuss the management of gynecologic and obstetric disorders with the faculty while dealing with patients in the outpatient, the delivery room, the operation theater and the wards. The performance of procedural skills like delivering a baby, taking a PAP smear, suturing an episiotomy will be learnt and practiced in the safe environment of the Simulation Lab. Formal and informal daily teaching sessions and rounds with the faculty are a part of this clerkship experience.
  • 111. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 111 | P a g e MED 306 & 406: Pediatrics The student will learn to obtain clinical history in an age-appropriate and sensitive manner from a child and or the accompanying adult and conduct a pediatric physical examination appropriate to the condition and the age of the patient. During presentation of the clinical findings to the faculty, the student will interpret the clinical findings and available lab results to suggest a diagnosis and discuss the management of the disease. The student will assess growth and development and advocate safety measures to prevent injury and disease. Many case based sessions have been planned to provide alternative clinical experiences. The simulation lab will allow the learner to practice in a safe environment. MED 307 & 407: Multisystem Course This course will deal with themes and topics that cut across all disciplines and involve multiple organs in a broader perspective. This will enable the learner to see the patient as whole and appreciate the generalized nature of diseases. Common examples are AIDS, tuberculosis, hypertension, diabetes mellitus, renal failure, congestive cardiac failure, sarcoidosis, shock, cirrhosis, trisomies and inborn errors of metabolism. In this course seminar presentations will be used as the main learning strategy. INTERNSHIP: MED 595: Internship This consists of an on-the-job training for a period of one year wherein the graduate rotates in different clinical departments on completion of the MBBS program. The graduate gains on the job experience under the close supervision of his teachers. It also serves to provide opportunities to attain appropriate higher skill levels as the student has completed the didactic requirements of the course and is now given opportunities to further improve his skills and master it before he enters independent practice. The internship experience also gives an insight into the practice of the chosen profession and is in itself a strong motivating factor for the learner to continue and pursue higher education and specialize further in the chosen field of study.
  • 112. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 112 | P a g e 14.6 Clinical Training Sites Clinical training for the MBBS Program has been arranged at multiple sites: GMC Hospital and Research Center - This is a 100 bed teaching hospital in Ajman. Students will receive clinical training here during the first four years including early patient contact during the first year. Sheikh Khalifa Bin Zayed Hospital, Ajman - This is a 200 bed MoH Hospital located at Al Jurf next to GMU. Students will receive clinical training here in the 4th year MBBS and during internship. UAQ Hospital, Umm Al Quwain - This is a 180 bed MoH Hospital located in Umm Al Quwain. Students will receive clinical training here in the 4th year MBBS and during internship. Mafraq Hospital, Abu Dhabi - This is a 550 bed teaching hospital under the Health Authority, Abu Dhabi. Students will receive clinical training here in the 5th year MBBS and during internship.
  • 113. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 113 | P a g e 14.7 Course Outline Phase - I Courses Title Language and Communication Skills Code MED 101 Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I Duration 3 weeks Chairperson Prof. Manda Venkatramana Members Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed, Dr. Erum Khan & Dr. Pankaj Lamba Participating departments Basic and Clinical Science Departments Pre-requisite None Co-requisite / s Psychosocial Sciences Course Description: The course is designed to provide a variety of simulated patient encounter settings to introduce the basic interpersonal communication processes that help to gain sensitivity to patient perspectives and to develop a sense of personal awareness, which will help the student to deal with patients of all ages and both genders in routine and difficult situations and in the process work effectively as a member of the health care team in real life encounters. Students will be encouraged to learn medical terminology in common usage both in English and Arabic to reduce language barriers in an effort to improve their communication skills. Aims:  Become oriented to the communication tasks of a physician by developing an appreciation of the interpersonal nature of medical encounters in different clinical situations.  Develop basic communication skills and strategies to deal with both routine and difficult topics and situations encountered in clinical practice.  Develop basic communication skills and strategies for working with family members, physician colleagues and other members of the health-care team.
  • 114. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 114 | P a g e Intended Learning Outcomes Knowledge Students should be able to:  Describe basic interpersonal communication concepts and processes  Explain the meaning of, and rationale for, patient-centered medicine.  Define communication tasks that are integral to effective and efficient medical encounters.  Explain the place and purpose of basic communication skills and strategies  Select communication skills and strategies that can be utilized to accomplish particular communication tasks.  Generate a list of skills and strategies that might be appropriate for a given difficult situation  Describe how family members can influence health outcomes through instrumental support, social support and patient advocacy, or the lack thereof.  Outline the roles and goals of health-care team member and strategies for conflict management and resolution. Skills Students should be able to:  Identify skills and strategies to accomplish the communication tasks.  Identify methods to deal with difficult situations  Identify ways to involve family members in patient care.  Handle appropriately enquiries from family members who act as caregivers. Attitude Students should be able to demonstrate:  Sensitivity to a patient’s perception of his/her illness  Sensitivity to cultural factors that might influence interactions with patients.  Sensitivity to personal factors that might influence interactions with patients.  Awareness of the fact that communication skills can be learned and improved.  Commitment to learning about difficult topics and situations  Sensitivity to the uncertainty and anxiety that members of patients’ families experience.  Awareness of the fact that they are an important part of the health-care team and thus bear responsibility for quality patient care.  Awareness of the fact that each member of the health care team is valuable, regardless of degree or occupation.
  • 115. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 115 | P a g e Study plan Duration (Week) Theme/s Topics Week 1 Fundamental of discourse Small -Group Communication Introduction to Language and Communication skills Types of communication Introduction to E- Learning Tools and Intellectual Properties Computers for Health Care Professionals Effective and ineffective communication Receiving the patient The presenting complaint Small group Learning Past and family history Social history and telephone consultations Medical Terminology Examining a patient Week 2 Interpersonal Communication Reflection: Use of Reflective Diary Giving results Communicating with challenging patients Planning treatment and closing the interview CARE Communicating with children and adolescents Breaking bad news Week 3 Large - Group Communication Introduction to CBL Communicating with the elderly Large group communication with emphasis on education & health Presentation skills History chart
  • 116. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 116 | P a g e Course Description This course runs concurrently with MED 101 and covers two major themes. Introduction to Behavioral Sciences covers such topics as psychosocial basis of health, approaches to study of human behavior, methods of behavioral sciences research, organic basis of behavior and the process of human development through the life span. Dynamics of Human Behavior helps students to gain knowledge of the working of the human memory system, consciousness and human behavior, and the principles of learning and reinforcements and its applications. It enables students to acquire skills and knowledge for adaptive behavior. It also provides students an opportunity to learn the elements of culture and process of socialization, and their impact on health and illness. BHS I Introduction to Behavioral Sciences and Bio-psycho-social model of health BHS II Psychological basis of Human Behavior BHS III Mental processes and Individual Differences in Behavior BHS IV Psychopathology and Medical Ethics BHS I and II will be taken in Phase – I Year 1 and will run parallel with courses 1. Developmental aspects will be incorporated in Embryogenesis and Life Cycle. BHS III will be incorporated in course XV – Nervous System in Phase II Year 3. BHS IV will become part of the Psychiatry Clerkship in Phase III Year 4 and 5. Aims:  Become aware of the basic concepts, principles and theories in behavioral sciences related to human behavior and their application in the health behavior of individuals and communities.  Familiarize with the dynamics of human behavior and individual factors affecting human behavior especially in health care situations  Gain knowledge about psychological disorders and different forms of therapy.  Gain understanding of ethical concepts in the field of medicine, and critical thinking skills for conducting research. Course Title Psychosocial Sciences Course Code MED 102 Phase / Year Phase I / Year I – BHS I & II / Semester I Duration 3 weeks Chairperson Dr. Radhika Taroor Members Prof. Elsheba Mathew & Ms. Avula Kameswari Participating Departments Psychiatry & Sociology Pre-requisite / s None
  • 117. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 117 | P a g e Intended Learning Outcomes: A. Knowledge BHSI: Introduction to Behavioral Sciences and Bio-psycho-social model of health On successful completion of this part of the Course, a student should be able to:  Outline the contributions of Behavioral Sciences in understanding human behavior esp. related to health behavior  Outline contributions of modern Psychology in understanding human behavior, especially related to health and disease  Explain the methods of studying behavior  Describe the Bio-psycho-social model of health  Outline the biological basis of human behavior  Explain the sociological basis of human behavior, impact of culture and socialization on health and illness BHSII: Psychological basis of Human Behavior: On successful completion of this part of the Course, a student should be able to:  Explain the psychological basis of behavior esp. in the Bio-psycho-social model of health  Outline the psychosocial aspect of human development through the life span and its importance in health  Explain thinking, creativity, conflicts, frustration, emotion, motivation and personality and their impact on human behavior.  Explain the coping strategies and common stress reduction methods.  Describe the psychology of person perception with special reference to doctor- patient relationship  Describe the different methods of learning and their importance in behavior modification.  List the techniques to improve memory and their uses
  • 118. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 118 | P a g e B. Skills BHSI: Introduction to Behavioral Sciences On successful completion of this part of the Course, a student should be able to:  Apply psycho-social theories to explain human behavior and its adaptation  Identify appropriate methods to gather information on human behavior and interpret the information.  Relate to the interplay of biological, psychological and social determinants of human behavior, health and disease  Recognize the role of socialization in health and illness BHSII: Psychological basis of Human Behavior: On successful completion of this part of the Course a student will be able to:  Apply the process of human development through the life span, in the health behavior  Apply the use of learning methods and memory techniques appropriate to individual situations  Analyze the contribution of thinking, creativity, conflicts, frustration, emotion, motivation and personality in human behavior and its impact on health and disease.  Apply the use of common stress reduction methods C. Attitude BHSI: Introduction to Behavioral Sciences Students on completion of this part of the Course will be able to:  Appreciate the Bio-psycho-social model in health and disease  Show consideration for socially disadvantaged groups  Appreciate the importance of scientific studies in understanding human behavior. BHSII: Psychological basis of Human Behavior Students on completion of this part of the Course will be able to:  Appreciate that the process of physical, intellectual and social development of human beings, impact behavior  Reflect on the importance of psychological processes in human behavior and health  Acknowledge the relevance of person perception and attribution processes in health, illness and doctor-patient relationship
  • 119. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 119 | P a g e Study plan Duration (Week) Theme Topics Week 1 Introduction to Behavioral Sciences 1. Introduction 1.1 Behavioral sciences 1.2 Psychology in health 2. Approaches in studying behavior: 2.1Studying human behavior 3. Biopsychosocial model of health (BPSM): 3.1 Biological basis: 3.2 Sociological basis: 3.2.1 Socialization: Implications (groups and leadership) 3.2.2 Culture in health and disease 3.2.3 Social determinants of health behavior 4. Learning: 4.1 Influenced by nature of learner, nature of learning material 4.2 Types of learning 4.3 Learning styles 4.4 Learning methods 4.5 Effective learning Week 2 Dynamics of Human Behavior 5. Psychological basis of behavior: 5.1 Thinking-creativity 5.2 Motivation- Personality 5.3 Conflicts-frustration 5.4 Emotion-stress reduction 5.5 Psychology of: Patient , Doctor, D-P relationship Perceptual errors in D-P relationship 6. Memory: 6.1 Types of memory 6.2 Memory techniques, Mind maps Week 3 Dynamics of Human Behavior 7. Life span development- illness behavior 7.1 Children and adolescents 7.2 Adults 7.3 Death and dying - loss/ grieving 8. Time Management 9. Assertiveness
  • 120. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 120 | P a g e Title Cells, Molecules and Genes Code MED 103 Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I Duration 6 weeks Chairperson Dr. Nelofor Sami Khan Members Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie, Dr. Anuj Mathur, Mrs. Suni Ebby, Prof. Edwin D’Souza Participating Departments Anatomy, Biochemistry, Psysiology, Pharmacology, Pathology, Community Medicine & Forensic Medicine Pre-requisites A good high school background in Chemistry & Biology Course Description: This course introduces the fundamentals of molecular, cellular and genetic processes; the structure-function relationships of biomolecules with an emphasis on their clinical relevance; the functions of the biomembranes; and the basic mechanisms of signal transduction. Use of computer and web-based learning resources in this course serve to promote interactive and self- directed learning. Aim: The aim of the course is to provide opportunity to first year medical students in understanding the basic concepts & principles of the cellular, molecular and genetic processes operating in healthy humans and prepare them to master key principles and concepts taught in subsequent medical courses. Students will develop the necessary skills and attitudes in understanding the scientific basis of medicine. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge On successful completion of the course a student should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the major concepts in cell and molecular biology and the basic principles of medical genetics under the following themes: 1. Cells:  Differences between eukaryotic and prokaryotic cell structure & organization;  Cell diversity in multicellular organisms;  Structure and functions of cell organelles;  Cell interactions;  Structure-function relationships of biomolecules;
  • 121. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 121 | P a g e  Mechanisms of membrane transport;  Structure-function relationships of cell receptors;  Mechanisms of cell signaling;  Phases of cell cycle, their regulation and biological significance;  Mechanisms of cell division (mitosis and meiosis);  Principles of the techniques used for cell fractionation and their identification; 2. Molecules:  Classification, structure, functions and structure-function relationships of macromolecules (proteins, carbohydrates, lipids and nucleotides) ;  Mechanism of action, kinetics and regulation of enzymes;  Principles of the techniques used for the isolation, purification and identification of biomolecules; 3. Genes:  Structure, function and regulation of genes;  Organization of human genome;  Nature and types of genetic variation, mutations and polymorphisms;  Mechanisms of replication damage and repair of genetic information;  RNA synthesis, processing and modification;  Features of genetic code and mechanism of protein biosynthesis;  Post-transcriptional and post translational modification;  Regulation of gene expression;  Structure and function of chromosomes and their roles in meiosis and mitosis;  Basis for genotype-phenotype correlations;  Structural chromosomal abnormalities;  Modes of single gene inheritance;  Multifactorial inheritance and role of genetic factors in complex diseases;  Molecular basis of unexpected phenotypes in Mendelian disorders;  Oncogenes and tumor suppressor genes Skills On successful completion of the course, a student should be able to:  Demonstrate competence in using microscope and other basic laboratory equipment for biochemical analysis;  Identify and draw the structures of eukaryotic cells;  Identify the skeletal structures of all major biomolecules;  Identify amino acids and sugars in biological fluids using chromatographic techniques;
  • 122. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 122 | P a g e  Identify the various fractions of plasma proteins, lipoproteins and hemoglobin using electrophoresis techniques;  Analyze and interpret the results of biochemical experiments performed or demonstrated in the laboratory;  Determine the type of Mendelian inheritance from a pedigree (autosomal, X-linked, dominant, recessive);  Apply the Hardy Weinberg Equation to calculate frequency of a mutant gene in a population from the occurrence of a specific tract;  Calculate an individual’s risk using pedigree analysis and population gene frequency;  Identify those features of a pedigree for cancer which suggests a high genetic risk. Attitudes By the end of the course, a student is expected to demonstrate:  Awareness of the importance of active learning in acquiring knowledge;  Awareness of his/ her own limitations in knowledge and a willingness to seek help from peers, faculty and staff for learning;  Ability to work as a team leader in various learning activities;  Awareness of the need to continue learning and contribute to the advancement of knowledge by participating in seminars and projects;  Awareness about the rapid advances in the field of molecular biology and genetics;  Awareness about the ethical issues and emotional dilemmas related to genetic disorders; Study Plan: Duration (week) Theme (s) Topics 1 Cells Molecules Eukaryotic cell, Intracellular organelles- Structure & functions, Cell diversity, Cell cycle and mitosis, Meiosis Introduction to Biomolecules; Amino acids, Peptide bond and Peptides 2 Cells Molecules Structure of cell membranes, Transport mechanisms across cell membranes, Membrane potentials and action potentials, Intercellular junctions Proteins classification& structures, Levels of Protein structure, Structure - function relationships of fibrous proteins- Collagen, Protein folding and Denaturation
  • 123. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 123 | P a g e 3 Molecules Genes Identification and characterization of protein structure, Plasma proteins and their functions, Structure-Function relationships of hemoglobin, myoglobin and Immunoglobulins, sickle cell anemia Morphology of chromosomes and karyotyping, Cytogenetic Disorders & Numerical Abnormalities, Structural abnormalities of chromosomes, Mendelian Inheritance 4 Molecules Genes Structure, function and biological significance of simple and complex carbohydrates, Extracellular matrix- composition and functions, Enzymes – General Properties, classification, active site, coenzymes, kinetics and mechanism of catalysis, regulation of enzyme activity Variations in dominant and recessive phenotypes, Cytogenetic abnormalities, techniques of cytogenetics, Pedigree analysis, complex diseases and multifactorial inheritance, Complex diseases- Polygenic and multifactorial inheritance 5 Molecules Genes Sturcutre and functions of simple and complex lipids,, Eicosanoids & steroids – structure and functions, second messengers and cell signaling Organization of the genome, DNA- structure and function, DNA damage and repair mechanisms, 6 Genes RNA: structure and function, RNA synthesis, processing and modifications, Protein biosynthesis and modifications, DNA based techniques, Regulation of gene expression False paternity, Complex diseases: congenital and adult onset complex diseases, Hardy Weinberg equilibrium, Complex Diseases: Tools and risk assessment (linkage and association studies), Genetic Services: Genetic screening- and counseling
  • 124. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 124 | P a g e Title Tissues and Organs Code MED 104 Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I Duration 6 weeks Chairperson Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike Members Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed, Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Dr. Sona Chaturvedi Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology & Pathology Pre-requisites MED 101 - 103 Course Description: In this course, the structure and function of the various types of tissues, their organization to form organs of the different systems in the body are dealt with in an integrated manner to help understand the correlation of structure with function. This will enable the learner to better correlate the alterations in function due to structural changes in a disease. Seminars in relevant areas will give the learner an opportunity to develop presentation skills. Aims:  To provide comprehensive and integrated knowledge of the normal structural and functional organization of the human body tissues and organs as well as their interactions for a well-coordinated body function.  To provide the basis for understanding the clinical correlation of organs or tissues involved and the structural basis of the disease process. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge By the end of the course students will be able to:  Describe and identify the four basic tissues of the body.  Describe the functions of the basic body tissues and body fluids.  Explain the anatomical terms and demonstrate the planes of the body in anatomical position.  Define body cavities & list their contents  List the components of each organ system.  Identify the location of various organs.  List the main functions of the principal organs of the body.  Describe how the functions are coordinated.  Explain the abnormal terms (e.g., atrophy, hypertrophy, hyperplasia etc)  Relate structure to function of the tissues and organs.  Relate deviation from normal structure to functional abnormality.  Outline the major postmortem changes of the human tissues.
  • 125. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 125 | P a g e Skills By the end of the course students will be able to:  Demonstrate the use of a light microscope.  Identify the characteristic features of the basic tissues under the microscope.  Preparation and staining of a peripheral blood smear.  Conduct experiments designed to study the functions of body organs.  Draw labeled diagrams of the basic tissues.  Demonstrate the planes of the body.  Locate and identify all body organs and tissues. Attitudes By the end of the course students will:  Demonstrate an awareness of ethical values when dealing with cadavers & cadaveric material.  Adopt a meticulous approach to staining and experiments.  Appreciate the role of normal structure of tissues and organs in exerting normal function and vice versa.  Observe universal safety precautions. Study Plan: Duration (Week) Themes Sub themes / Topics Week 1 Tissues – I Basic tissues -Introduction to the basic four tissues Epithelium – Types, structure and function correlation of epithelial cells and Tissues Connective tissue- Types, structure and function correlation of C.T. Proper; Interaction of C.T. components, Pathological changes and Microstructure of abnormalities of epithelial & C.T. Fasciae- Structure and function of superficial and deep fascia Week 2 Tissues – II Skeletal Connective Tissue - Microstructure, Development and Growth, and Pathological changes in Cartilage and Bones Bones and joints- Orientation, Gross structure and Structure function correlation of human skeleton and classification of bones and joints, Joint movements, Clinical applications of ossification centers Muscle- Contractile function, Gross and Microscopic and structure. Structure and function correlation of muscular tissue, Pathological changes of muscle tissue, Microstructure of the abnormalities Week 3 Tissues - III Nervous tissue- Conductive mechanism, Microscopic structure, Structure and function correlation , Abnormalities of nervous tissue, Reactions of
  • 126. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 126 | P a g e degeneration and regeneration of neurons, Definitions related to abnormalities in body tissues Weeks 4 Organs – I General – Anatomical planes and body cavities Anatomical terms, planes and terms of movements of human body in anatomical position, Body Cavities, Thoracic Cavity/ Walls of the thorax, Mediastinum Postmortem Changes in Tissues Endocrine system- Orientation, Structure-function correlation and Co-ordination among the endocrine glands, General function & regulation of hormones Hemopoietic & Lymphoid tissues- Structure & function of Hemal tissues, Preparation and staining of Blood smear , Microstructure of Blood Cells , Hemopoiesis , Microstructure of Lymphoid tissues and organs, Reticulo-endothelial system, Coordination among lymphoid organs Microstructure of the abnormalities of blood and lymphoid tissues Structure and function correlation of hemolymphoid tissue Cardiovascular System- Orientation, gross and Microscopic structure of Heart and blood vessels and Structure and function correlation of C.V.S. and types of circulations, cardiovascular adaptation to function Respiratory System- Orientation and function of respiratory system organs Gross and Microscopic structure of respiratory system organs, Function of respiratory system organs and Respiration Week 5 Organs - II Gastrointestinal Tract- Orientation and function, Gross structure, Structure-function correlation of GIT organs, Adaptation of GIT lining to function, Coordination among GIT organs Hepatobiliary system- Orientation and function of Liver, GB and Pancreas Week 6 Organs - III Urogenital System - Orientation and function of urinary tract organs - Orientation and function of male genital organs Contents and relationships of pelvic organs - Orientation and function of female genital organs, Female reproductive cycles - Anomalies of reproductive cycles
  • 127. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 127 | P a g e Title Embryogenesis and Life Cycle Code MED 105 Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester I Duration 4 weeks Chairperson Dr. Anu Vinod Ranade Members Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari, Dr. Shiny Prabha Mohan & Dr. Wajiha Ajmal Participating Departments Anatomy, Psysiology, Pharmacology,Pathology, Forensic Medicine, Community Medicine, Psychology, Pediatrics and Gynecology & Obstetrics Pre-requisite / s MED 101 - 104 Course Description This course is designed to introduce the normal human development at the various life stages from conception to old age including embryology, childhood, adolescence, adulthood and aging in the elderly. The course covers the first few weeks of early human development from fertilization to formation of the embryo. Students will also learn to appreciate health as a component of life cycle development. Aims:  Master the terminology based upon embryonic structures and congenital malformations.  Understand the process of early human embryogenesis from the stages of fertilization, cleavage and implantation to embryo body formation  Understand the phenomena of normal growth and development and the process through the different phases of the life cycle of a normal human being from infancy, childhood, adolescence, adulthood, old age and death. Intended Learning Outcomes Knowledge At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the concepts and explain the basic principles involved in:  The early stages of early human embryogenesis and the development of extra fetal tissues (placenta and membranes) including its normal features & abnormalities.  Normal and abnormal (ectopic) implantation and twinning.  The role of ultrasound in identifying early intragestational sac anatomy.  Dysmorphology and teratology, defining terms for congenital anomalies.
  • 128. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 128 | P a g e  The medico legal aspects of pregnancy.  The prenatal diagnostic procedures used in identifying abnormal development.  The growth and development of a human being through a normal life cycle  The concomitance of physiological and psychological growth cycle Skills At the end of this course, the student should be able to:  Identify the major events occurring in the germinal and fetal period on models, charts, animations and real time ultrasound or video projections  Identify the major events occurring in the fetal period on models charts, animations or video projections  Identify fetal growth and development on models, charts and real time ultrasound or video projections  Recognize major congenital anomalies on charts and video projections  Record and interpret the measurements from commonly used growth charts and calculate the Body Mass Index with reference to different phases of growth in a normal life cycle Attitudes At the end of this course, the student should be able to demonstrate:  Awareness of and sensitivity to issues related to congenital abnormalities and its impact on the individual and his/her family  Awareness of and sensitivity to the changing physiological and psychological changes occurring during the various phases of the life cycle of a human being
  • 129. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 129 | P a g e Study Plan Duration (Weeks) Themes/Subthemes Topics Week 1 EMBRYOGENESIS; Gametogenesis; Germinal period; Development in Week 1 & 2; Abnormal implantation; Early Embryo & Placenta; Embryonic period; Migration of primordial germ cells & Formation of Primordial gonads; Review of Meiosis; Spermatogenesis & Oogenesis; Events in Week 1:Fertilization to Implantation (Pre-implantation phase); Abnormalities in fertilization-- Ectopic pregnancy; Events in Week 2 : Early embryogenesis & trophoblast formation; Events in Week 3 : Gastrulation –primitive streak formation ; notochord Week 2 Embryonic period; Formation of Diaphragm; Placenta and membranes; Prenatal testing; Amniotic fluid and umbilical cord Events in Week 3 : mesoderm formation- somites; Cephalo-caudal and Lateral folding Intraembryonic coelomic cavities; formation of diaphragm; Neural tube formation; Trophoblast and derivatives; Formation of diaphragm and its anomalies; Placenta and its formation; Prenatal testing for congenital anomalies-CVS, Amniocentesis, Ultrasound screening; Infertility, Assisted reproduction; Amniotic fluid and its functions Umbilical cord and its contents Week 3 Overview of fetal period & fetal circulation; Multiple gestations; Common Birth Defects; Medico legal aspects of pregnancy; LIFE CYCLE; Development of early middle & late childhood Physiological & psychosocial changes in adolescence Overview of fetal period – Organogenesis Fetal circulation - Dynamics, Prenatal & Postnatal; Twin formation; choriogenecity and amniogenecity; Twin-twin Transfusion syndrome; Acardiac twin; Common Birth defects- chromosomal defects, teratogens, multifactorial inheritance; Fetal viability; Fetal death; Infant death syndrome; In-vitro fertilization; Superfecundation and superfetalis; Important milestones in a child from birth till the age of 5 years. Normal growth in a child from birth till the age
  • 130. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 130 | P a g e of 12 years and recognize any deviations of growth from normal Plot the weight and height of a child on a growth chart and comment on the growth parameters. Recognition of the developmental delay and reference to a specialist. Psychosocial aspects Attachment and bonding (Infancy). object permanence; stranger anxiety; cognitive development; social development Phsical growth Physical and endocrinal changes during puberty in both sexes. Regulation of the reproductive, nervous & vascular system. Psychosocial aspects Challenges and issues of adolescence social, emotional and sexual development Physical growth Stages of adulthood. Week 4 Teratogenic effects of drugs in pregnancy Pathological aspects in ageing Teratogenecity; common congenital malformations from drugs; high risk periods in pregnancy Age related pathologies- old age on the basis of cellular ageing (senescence) impact of ageing.
  • 131. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 131 | P a g e Title Metabolism & Nutrition Code MED 106 Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester 2 Duration 6 weeks Chairperson Prof. K.G Gomathi Members Prof. Shatha Al Sharbatti, Dr. Kannan Narsimhan & Ms. Fahmida Jafri Participating Departments Biochemistry, Physiology, Pharmacology, Pathology, Community Medicine, Medicine and Dietetics Pre-requisite / s MED 101 – MED 105 Course description In this course first year medical students learn the principles and key concepts of nutrition and metabolism that underlie health and disease states. Role of nutrition and its association with malnutrition, obesity, and diseases such as anemia and cancer will be stressed upon. The rationale underlying investigations performed to study various nutritional and metabolic disorders will also be learnt. The student will, in addition, develop an appreciation of the importance of proper diet and nutrition and its close association with health and disease. Aims: To provide opportunity to first year medical students to: 1. Understand the principles of nutrition and metabolism. 2. Understand the biochemical mechanisms underlying metabolic disorders. 3. Understand the role of investigations in the management of metabolic diseases. 4. Appreciate the importance of diet and nutrition in health and disease. Learning Outcomes: Knowledge By the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. Discuss the general principles & concepts of nutrition and metabolism. 2. Discuss the key concepts with regards to: • Nutrition, dietary components and energy balance • Nutrition in the context of health and disease • Nutritional disorders of public health importance. • Micronutrient metabolism • Bioenergetics • Carbohydrate metabolism and its regulation • Lipid metabolism and its regulation. • Nitrogen metabolism.
  • 132. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 132 | P a g e • Integration of metabolism. • Heme metabolism • Purine and Pyrimidine metabolism. Skills By the end of the course students should be able to:  Calculate the calorie intake of a person based on the diet.  Calculate energy requirement for a person.  Calculate BMI and classify for obesity.  Assess nutritional status using anthropometrical measurements.  Estimate blood glucose levels and test for reducing sugar in urine. Attitudes By the end of the course students should be able to:  Recognize the relationships between diet, metabolism and disease states.  Develop awareness of issues concerning nutrition in different populations.  Appreciate the inter-relationship between the different health professions i.e. Physicians, Nutritionists, Dieticians Study Plan Duration (Week) Theme (s) Topics 1 General principles & concepts of nutrition and metabolism Nutritional disorders of public health importance and nutritional programs Introduction to dietary components and metabolic fuels, caloric values, daily energy expenditure and dietary assessment. Nutritional intake and recommendations-Dietary reference values and WHO recommended dietary goals, Body Mass Index and obesity Malnutrition, principles of management of Protein Energy Malnutrition in the community, nutritional disorders of public health importance, fortification, nutritional programs. Psychosocial factors affecting food intake and food security. 2 Micronutrient metabolism Nutrition in health and disease Functions of the vitamins and minerals, metabolic role of the essential trace elements, metabolic basis of the vitamin and trace element deficiency states. Nutritional requirements in childhood, adolescence, pregnancy, lactation, occupational groups, athletes and in old age. Nutritional anemias, nutrition and cancer.
  • 133. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 133 | P a g e 3 Bioenergetics, Carbohydrate and Intermediary metabolism Intermediary metabolism and its importance in energy generation Glucose metabolism, regulation, homeostasis and associated disorders 4 Lipid metabolism and associated disorders Fatty acid and cholesterol metabolism, relationship between diet and cardiovascular disease. 5 Nitrogen metabolism and metabolic integration; Nutritionally essential amino acids, amino acid metabolism, metabolism of ammonia, catabolism of carbon skeletons of amino acids and associated inborn errors of metabolism. Hormones and metabolism, metabolic changes in conditions such as hypoglycemia, starvation, Diabetes mellitus; 6 Metabolism of Heme, Purines, Pyrimidines and associated disorders Heme metabolism and associated disorders Nucleotide metabolism, disorders, uses of nucleotide analogs
  • 134. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 134 | P a g e Title Internal & External Environment Code MED 107 Phase / Year Phase I / Year I / Semester 2 Duration 9 weeks Chairperson Dr. Ramesh Ranganathan Members Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman, Dr. Kannan Narsimhan Dr. Priya Sajith, Prof. Hemant Kumar Garg & Dr. Jenny Cheriathu John Participating Departments Physiology, Microbiology, Biochemistry, Pharmacology, Pathology, Community Medicine and Forensic Medicine Pre-requisite / s Courses MED 101 – MED 106 Course Description: This course is the last course in Phase-I of the Integrated Curriculum. This course will help the students to gain an insight into the challenges human beings face each day of their lives indoors, at home or at work or outdoors as their bodies are challenged by agents in its internal and external environments. The student will be introduced to the basic physiological and pathological responses to the noxious agents at the level of cells, tissues and organs that in turn is related to the toxicity of the agents which make the difference between health and disease. The students will realize the magnitude of the preventive measures made at the level of the individual, the community and globally to achieve the vision of health for all in the future. Aims: The aim of this course is to help the students to:  Gain understanding of the influence of internal and external environment & environmental agents on human health based on knowledge of relevant Epidemiological, Toxicological and Exposure factors.  Recognize the scientific basis of signs, symptoms, diseases and sources of exposure relating to common environmental agents and conditions  Recognize and the role of investigation and epidemiological approaches in the prevention and control of these diseases. Intended Learning Outcomes
  • 135. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 135 | P a g e Knowledge By the end of the course students will be able to:  Understand the magnitude of the impact of environment on the health of the individual and the community  Understand the control systems of the body that help to meet the demands of physiologic stress in the environment  Understand the innate and adaptive immune responses to environmental agents  Understand the cellular and tissue responses to noxious agents in the environment  Recognize the type and magnitude of infectious diseases that arise as a consequence of exposure to pathogenic organisms present in the environment and the basis of antimicrobial therapy in the control of these infectious diseases. Skills By the end of the course students will be able to:  Identify major groups of microorganisms on the basis of morphological, cultural and biochemical characteristics  Interpret tonicity, pH and changes in the composition of body fluids  Identify the prototypical morphologic changes at the gross and microscopic level in tissues injured due to environmental insults  Calculate and interpret epidemiological data with relevance to mortality and morbidity rates and risk  Retrieve information using library and Internet. Attitudes By the end of the course students will be aware of:  The importance of observing sterile precautions while handling infectious agents  The importance of teamwork and sensitivity to cultural and personal factors while collecting epidemiological data
  • 136. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 136 | P a g e Study Plan Duration (Week) Theme Subthemes Topics 1 1. Environment and Health 1.1 Environmental determinants of health Concept of environment & health 2-3 1.2 Biologic agents in the environment Microbes – Classification, Definitions & Nomenclatures, Growth & Cultural Methods, Sterilization & Disinfection 4-5 2. Control of internal environment 2.1 Physiologic responses to environmental stimuli Concept of homeostasis, Control systems in body, Acclimatization, Adaptation & Biological Rhythms, Normal Bacterial Flora, ADME of Drugs 6-7 3. Host response to environmental stimuli 3.1 Cellular response to stress and noxious stimuli Cellular adaptation, Neoplasia, Cell injury and cell death, Intracellular & Extracellular Accumulations 3.2 Immune responses to environmental agents Innate & adaptive immunity 3.3 Tissue response to injury Acute & chronic inflammation, Tissue Renewal & Repair 8-9 4. Environment and disease 4.1 Effects of adverse chemical environment: Drugs, Heavy Metals, Poisons 4.2 Effects of adverse physical environment: Radiations, Extremes of Temperature, Atmospheric Pressure Changes, Mechanic Forces/Troma 4.3 Consequences of exposure to pathogenic organisms on the host: Principles of Disease & Epidemiology, Microbial Mechanisms of Pathogenicity
  • 137. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 137 | P a g e Phase - II Courses Title Blood and Immune System Code MED 202 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 3 Duration 6 weeks Chairperson Dr. Biswadip Hazarike Members Dr. Sajith Khan, Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Prof. Edwin D’Souza Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine & Pediatrics Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description The course presents an overview of the normal structure and functions of the blood and the immune system and their derangement in disorders of the red cells, leucocytes, platelets and the lymphoid tissues/organs. The pathophysiology, molecular basis, laboratory findings and clinical manifestations of anemia, leukemia, hemorrhagic, thrombotic and immune disorders will be emphasized through didactics, laboratory exercises and seminars. Case based discussions through CBL, PBL settings will encourage development of problem solving skills. Aims: To acquire knowledge and understanding of common diseases of the blood, bone marrow and lymphoid organs emphasize the etiology, structural-functional alterations underlying laboratory findings, clinical features of the disorders and approach to their management and prevention. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: By the end of the course students should be able to:  Describe the cellular and molecular changes occurring in hematological diseases.  Describe the causes, types, principles of diagnosis and management of the common hematological disorders.  Describe epidemiology, prevention and rehabilitation of hereditary hematological disorders.  Explain immune mechanism and disorders of immune system.
  • 138. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 138 | P a g e Skills: By the end of the course students should be able to:  Perform peripheral blood smear and identify normal and abnormal blood cells.  Perform complete blood count and recognize abnormal blood counts.  Identify abnormal blood cells in bone marrow smear.  Interpret screening tests, lab results of hematological disorders.  Interpret immunological tests.  Interpret lab results, blood picture and bone marrow picture of blood cell abnormalities. Attitudes: By the end of the course students should be able to:  Follow safety guidelines in sample collection, cleanliness and meticulousness in performing investigations.  Recognize erroneous or unexpected test values and take appropriate measures.  Demonstrate awareness of the psychosocial aspects of hereditary anemia.  Be aware of medico legal implications in traumatic blood loss.  Be aware of limitations in the management of hematological malignancies.
  • 139. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 139 | P a g e Title Cardiovascular System Code MED 203 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 3 Duration 8 weeks Chairperson Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas Members Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari, Dr. Priya Sajith, Dr. Liju Susan Mathew, Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman & Dr. Ehab Mohey Eldin Farag Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Internal Medicine, Cardiology & Radiology Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description This course has been structured as an integrated study of the human cardiovascular system and provides instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the human cardiovascular system. Emphasis is placed on the integration of relevant principles with respect to the behavior of the normal circulation and its responses to the stress of injury and disease. This course deals with common cardiovascular disorders, including a study of atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease and myocardial infarction, hypertension, valvular and congenital heart disease, infectious heart disease, and heart muscle disorders. Also included is a series of case presentations dealing with common complications of a variety of cardiac diseases: cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure and shock. PBL sessions deal with prototype diseases and provide opportunities to develop problem solving and interpersonal communication skills. Aims:  To provide a course of integrated learning of normal structure and function of the organs of the cardiovascular system at a molecular, cellular and organ level, including the way different components of the cardiovascular system are coordinated to maintain perfusion of tissues under a wide range of physiological states.  To provide an introduction to abnormal structure and function (Pathology & Pathophysiology) of the cardiovascular system in selected cardiovascular diseases.  To provide a scientific basis for the management of selected cardiovascular disorders as a foundation for future clinical training.
  • 140. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 140 | P a g e Intended Learning Outcomes Knowledge: By the end of the course students will be able to:  Describe the normal structure and function of the different parts of the heart, the aorta and large elastic arteries, arterioles and capillaries, venules and veins  Recognize and identify the changes in structure and/or functioning of the cardiovascular system in the following disease states: valvular heart disease, disarrhythmias, atherosclerosis and ischemic heart disease, congenital heart disease, hypertension and common syndromes like heart failure, stroke and shock that arise as complications  Explain the principles underlying some of the therapeutic interventions that may be used to modify the course of the disease states listed above, including preventive measures Skills: By the end of the course students will be able to:  Identify normal and abnormal findings in the heart and blood vessels on gross, microscopic and radiologic examination  Interpret circulation physics  Interpret normal and distinguish abnormal ECGs  Record a blood pressure reading  Elicit a clinical history in a patient suspected of cardiovascular disease  Recognize normal and abnormal heart sounds on physical examination Attitudes: By the end of the course students will be aware of the:  Importance of lifestyle modification in the prevention and control of heart diseases  Marked morbidity and mortality associated with cardiovascular disorders and its psycho social impact on the individual and family Broad Outline of Course Content (Themes) The Heart Cardiac Muscle- normal structure, function and dysfunction The heart as a pump: valve function and valve disease Regulation of cardiac function and heart failure Blood supply to the heart and ischemic heart disease Cardiac electric activity and arrhythmias The Blood Vessels Large blood vessels and atherosclerosis Resistance blood vessels and hypertension Pulmonary circulation and pulmonary hypertension Capillary function lymphatic system and edema Circulation Fetal cardiovascular system and congenital heart disease Exercise and cardiovascular fitness Hemorrhage and circulatory shock
  • 141. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 141 | P a g e Title Respiratory System Code MED 204 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 4 Duration 6 weeks Chairperson Dr. Rizwana Burhanuddin Sheikh Members Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari, Dr. Sajith Khan, Dr. Anu Vinod Ranade & Dr. Raji Sharma Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine & Anesthesiology Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal structure, function and development of human respiratory system using different strategies and applying the knowledge and skills acquired in understanding the pathophysiology of various respiratory disorders. The basic principles of management of these disorders with a focus on disease prevention will be described. The medico legal aspects of specific respiratory disorders will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology and management of the lower respiratory tract infections. Aims: The aim of the course is to have an integrated approach to the learning of human respiratory system focusing on its normal structure-function relationships and their deviations and to understand the etiopathogenesis, basis for clinical presentations and the principles of treatment and management of various disorders. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: By the end of the course, students should be able to:  Explain the normal structure and function and to correlate it with deviations in common disease conditions.  Explain the normal development of the respiratory system and list the common developmental anomalies.  Describe the etiopathogenesis, structural and functional change, basis of clinical manifestations, approach to diagnosis, principles of prevention and management of common disorders of respiratory system.
  • 142. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 142 | P a g e  Describe the epidemiology of various respiratory disorders.  Describe the medico legal aspects of asphyxias and respiratory failure. Skills: By the end of the course, students should be able to:  Identify the gross and microscopic structure of the respiratory system.  Identify the anatomical relationships of the various components of the respiratory system using dissected parts, laboratory models and images.  Identify deviations in gross and microscopic structure of respiratory system using slides and images.  Interpret lung function tests and blood gas reports.  Demonstrate the use of basic cytological techniques in the diagnosis of respiratory infections and interpret the results.  Demonstrate the effect of various drugs on respiratory system using interactive CDs.  Interpret the results of the biochemical and cytological examination of pleural fluid.  Identify the bacterial flora in sputum smears in various respiratory infections.  Perform basic clinical examination, record the normal and abnormal findings and report the results. Attitudes: By the end of the module students should be able to demonstrate:  Awareness and concern about the environmental issues related to respiratory system affecting the community health.  Awareness about the medico legal and ethical issues concerning the disorders of the respiratory system. Study Plan Theme 1: Chest wall, Pleura and Diaphragm Structure, function and development of Chest wall, Pleura and Diaphragm; Respiratory cycle and lung compliance; Pleural infections and tumors; Medico legal aspects of chest injury and pulmonary embolism Theme 2: Upper respiratory tract Structure, function and development of Upper respiratory tract; Etiopathogenesis of upper respiratory tract infections; Upper respiratory tract infections of public health importance; Principles of drug therapy; Cough reflex Theme 3: Lower respiratory tract Structure and function of lower respiratory tract including broncho pulmonary Segments; Lung defense mechanisms; Laboratory diagnosis of lower respiratory tract infections; Morphology, clinical features and drug therapy of pneumonias
  • 143. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 143 | P a g e Theme 4: Airflow in the respiratory system Functions of airways; Lung function tests; Bronchial asthma 4.4 Chronic obstructive airway disease (COAD); Bronchiectasis; Neoplastic disorders Theme 5: Ventilation Ventilation- perfusion matching; Diffusion; Pulmonary edema; Flail chest Theme 6: Neural and chemical control of breathing Neural mechanisms; Chemical regulation of breathing; High altitude sickness; Sleep disordered breathing Theme 7: Transport of gases and acid base- balance Transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide; Hypo- and hyper-ventilation; Acid-base balance; Occupational pulmonary disorders; Respiratory failure; Respiratory distress syndrome; Ventilator associated infections; Asphyxia and asphyxial deaths.
  • 144. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 144 | P a g e Title Alimentary System Code MED 205 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 4 Duration 8 weeks Chairperson Prof. Shatha Al Sharbatti Members Dr. Ramesh Ranganathan, Dr. Nilofer Sami Khan, Dr. Miral Nagy Fahmy Salama, Dr. Kannan Narsimhan & Dr. Pradeep Kumar Sharma Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Radiology& Surgery Pre-requisites Phase I Courses Course Description The course adopts an integrated organ system- based approach to provide the learner with a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of the digestive system and its accessory organs, in health and their major deviations in disease. Furthermore, the learner is introduced to the etiopathogenesis, basis of clinical manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing the pharmacological management and methods of prevention of common disorders of the digestive system. The course employs problem based learning (PBL) and a variety of teaching /learning methods to facilitate interdisciplinary integration, student centered learning and development of generic competences. Simultaneous introduction of basic clinical skills aims to vertically integrate learning and prepare the students for clinical clerkship in the next phase. Aims: At the end of this course the student should be able to:  Understand the normal structure and functions of the alimentary system.  Know the structural and functional changes in the alimentary system due to disease result in clinical manifestations commonly seen in gastrointestinal disorders.  Perform and explain some common procedures used to diagnose and manage diseases of the alimentary system.  Interpret results of laboratory radiologic investigations commonly performed to diagnose and manage patients with diseases of the alimentary system.  Demonstrate awareness of the role of psychosocial aspects in the etiology of alimentary diseases and their management.
  • 145. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 145 | P a g e Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: By the end of this course students will be able to:  Understand and explain the structure of the component organs of the GIT and the associated organs (salivary glands, exocrine pancreas, liver) that are essential for the functioning of the digestive system and relate these to their key functions.  Explain the coordinated and integrated functioning of the digestive system.  Describe the causes, pathogenesis, morphological and functional alterations and epidemiology of common disorders of digestive system.  Explain the clinical and laboratory features of these disorders in terms of disruption of the normal structure and function.  Outline the principles of management and methods of prevention and medico-legal aspects of poisoning.  Recognize the major risk factors, common symptoms and signs of disorders of gastrointestinal system. Skills: By the end of the course students should be able to:  Identify the structures and associated organs of the digestive system, on macroscopic examination in cadavers, gross specimens as well as on imaging studies.  Identify the salient light microscopic features of these organs on slides /projected images.  Recognize major alterations in morphology (macroscopic) of the foregoing structures in common disorders.  Identify common gastrointestinal pathogens on appropriate specimens.  Obtain the clinical history from a patient with a gastrointestinal disorder.  Perform complete abdominal examination.  Interpret the results of a ascetic fluid analysis.  Interpret the results of liver function tests.  Explain the steps of procedures like nasogastric intubation, paracentesis, to a patient.  Perform nasogastric intubation of a manikin.  Identify normal radiological findings on an X-ray of the abdomen and explain the causes of deviations from the normal. Attitudes: By the end of the course, students should be aware of:  The cultural beliefs of different ethnic groups while performing a per-rectal examination.  The importance of proper nutrition, hygiene and sanitation in promoting health and preventing illnesses.  The role of interactions of the body and mind in manifestations of gastro-intestinal disorders.
  • 146. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 146 | P a g e Study plan Theme 1: Upper GIT - Mouth, Salivary glands, Esophagus, Stomach Structures in the oral cavity and pharynx, process of mastication and deglutition, Saliva: composition, functions, control of secretion, Infections of oral cavity and lips, Pathological conditions of the mouth, Embryology and developmental anomalies of face and upper G.I.T , Structural arrangements of esophagus, swallowing (deglutition), control of motility in the esophagus, dysphagia (mechanisms), , Esophageal reflux, oesophagitis, Barrett’s esophagus, varicose veins Gross anatomy and functions of the stomach, Gastro esophageal reflux, gastritis, peptic ulcer, Pre-neoplastic lesions and neoplasms of upper GIT, Main determinants and risk factors of upper GIT cancers, Imaging of the upper GIT. Theme 2: Liver, biliary tract and pancreas Gross anatomy of liver, gall bladder , biliary system and pancreas, Liver function tests, interpretation, Patterns of hepatic injury Histology of biliary system, Bile production, secretion and storage, Jaundice and cholestasis, Gallstones &Cholecystitis, Portal circulation, portal hypertension, Infectious disorders of liver including parasitic infestations , Alcoholic liver disease, cirrhosis, Hepatomegaly, Neoplasms of Hepatobiliary system, Hepatotoxic poisons, (Hepatotoxic drugs and chemicals), Antiviral drugs, Pancreas: Development and functions, Pancreatic juice, Pancreatitis , Neoplasms of pancreas. Theme 3: Peritoneum and Abdominal wall Gross and clinical anatomy of peritoneum and peritoneal cavity, Torsion of mesentery (volvulus) mesenteric cysts, Peritonitis, Subphrenic abscess, trauma, Ascites, Peritoneal fluid analysis, Abdominal wall:rectus sheath and inguinal canal anatomy and clinical applications, Emetics and antiemetics. Theme 4: The Small Intestine Gross and clinical anatomy of small intestine, Histology of small intestine, Development of midgut, anomalies, Structure of the intestinal wall: the villous cell types, intestinal secretions, control of secretions, Intestinal phase of digestion and absorption, malabsorption syndromes, Infections( viral, bacterial, parasitic), Laxatives and anti- diarrhoeal drugs, Principles of GIT chemotherapy, Abdominal injuries, Motility in the small intestine, types of motility, segmentation, control of motility.
  • 147. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 147 | P a g e Theme 5: Colon, Rectum and Anal Canal Structure of large intestine (Gross and microscopic )including vermiform appendix, Histology of large intestine, Secretion, absorption, motility of large intestine and its control, diverticular disease (definition, mechanisms), fecal incontinence, Hemorrhoids, Prolapse rectum, anal fissures, Corrosives and irritants, Food Poisoning, Constipation, principles of therapy ,Appendicitis, Ischiorectal fossa, fistula- in-ano, perianal abscesses, inflammatory bowel diseases (IBD): ulcerative colitis and Crohn’s disease; pathogenesis, morphological changes, clinical features, complication and management, Intestinal obstruction, ischemic bowel disease, Differentiation and growth of intestinal epithelium, Polyps, neoplasms of intestine, anal canal, Endocrine cells of the GIT and tumors arising from them.
  • 148. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 148 | P a g e Title Urinary System Code MED 206 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 2 / Semester 4 Duration 4 weeks Chairperson Dr. Shiny Prabha Mohan Members Prof. Hemant Kumar Garg, Dr. May Khalil, Dr. Syed Morteza Mahmoudi, Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Medicine, Surgery, Urology & Pediatrics Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description This course has been designed as an integrated study of the urinary system and provides instruction into the mechanisms of operation of the urinary system. Emphasis is placed on the integration of relevant principles with respect to the mechanisms of normal excretion and its responses to health and disease. This course deals with common urinary disorders, including study of renal failure, glomerular diseases, infections, obstruction and neoplasms of the urinary tract. Also included is a series of case presentations dealing with common complications of a variety of urinary tract diseases. PBL courses deal with prototype diseases and provide opportunities to develop problem-solving skills. Aims: To acquire an integrated knowledge on the urinary system and its common disorders. The knowledge acquired in understanding the normal and abnormal structures and functions of the urinary system will be applied rationally as a Medical Practitioner, in the diagnosis and management of common diseases of the urinary system in providing better health care. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: By the end of the course, students should be able to understand:  Normal development of the urinary system and how congenital defects arise if it is disturbed.  Normal structure and function of the urinary system and how these are altered in disease of the urinary tract.  Various normal functions of the urinary system.  Familiarize with common disorders of the urinary system infectious, non-infectious and congenital defects.  Principles of the management of recovery of normal functions of the urinary tract.
  • 149. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 149 | P a g e  Immune responses to external & internal agents may cause glomerular injury and produce disease.  Microorganisms producing urinary tract infections.  Alterations in systemic vascular and metabolic states that secondarily produce urinary tract disease.  Role of laboratory investigations and imaging techniques in the diagnosis and management of diseases of the urinary tract.  Principles of pharmacologic and non-pharmacologic treatment in the management of urinary tract disease. Skills: By the end of the course, students should be able to:  Identify the morphologic changes in common disorders of the urinary system.  Perform urethral catheterization in a manikin.  Interpret the results of the urinary colony count of microbiologic investigations done for urinary tract infections.  Interpret results of common radiological and laboratory investigations done to diagnose urinary tract diseases.  Distinguish the abnormal values from the normal values of kidney function tests.  Prepare and examine wet smear of the urine samples and interpret the cytological findings.  Observe aseptic techniques in the collection of urinary samples. Attitudes: By the end of the course, students should be able to:  Understand the progressive nature of most renal diseases, which contribute to the morbidity, and mortality of urinary tract diseases.  Respect the regional, religious and emotional beliefs & needs of the patients.  Understand the patient’s problem and pay attention with compassion.  Understand how end-stage renal disease affects the quality of a patient’s life and its effect on the individual and the family. Study Plan Theme 1 Kidney as an organ of excretion Theme 2 Kidney as organ of homeostasis Theme 3 Nephritc / Nephrotic syndrome & UTI Theme 4 PBL week Chronic renal failure / Diabetic nephropathy
  • 150. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 150 | P a g e Title Endocrine System & Mammary Gland Code MED 210 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester V Duration 5 weeks Chairperson Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie Members Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman, Ms. Soofia Ahmed & Dr. Mahir Khali Ibrahim Jallo Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Medicine & Surgery Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description This course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of normal structure, function and development of endocrine system including the mammary glands using different strategies and applying the knowledge and skills acquired in understanding the pathophysiology of various endocrine disorders .Each endocrine organ is taken as a theme and common presentations due to its hypofunction and hyperfunction are studied. The clinical and laboratory features of the disorders are discussed. PBL week deals with the structure and function and prototype diseases of mammary gland and provide opportunities to develop problem solving skills and communication skills. Aims: At the completion of the course, the student should have sufficient knowledge about the structure, function and regulation of major endocrine organs of the body, the endocrine regulation of different organ systems and common disorders associated with the endocrine system. The student should understand the role of mammary gland as the target organ for hormones and its importance in cancer screening programs. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: By the end of the course the student will be able to describe the:  Normal structure, function and development of endocrine organs and mammary gland;  Structural and functional relationships among the various endocrine organs;  Mechanisms for the synthesis, secretion and actions of hormones and their regulation;  Transport and metabolism of hormones;  Cellular and clinical effects of over-production and underproduction of hormones;
  • 151. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 151 | P a g e  The etiopathogenesis, morphology and clinical features and principles of management of neoplasms of endocrine glands;  Abnormal test findings of hypo function and hyper function of endocrine organs & correlate with clinical features.  The biological basis of Dynamic Function Tests (Provocative and Suppression) in endocrine disorders  Principles of drug therapy of endocrine disorders;  Epidemiology and prevention of endocrine disorders; Skills: By the end of the course the student will be able to:  Eliciting relevant clinical history for endocrine disorders;  Perform physical examination for endocrine disorders.  Identify abnormal findings in laboratory reports and correlate the results with hypo-and hyper-function of endocrine organs;  Identify different types of insulin preparations, insulin delivery devices & their usage;  Use glucometer for estimation of blood glucose in diagnosis of Diabetes mellitus;  Perform Breast examination using simulators;  Perform FNAC on breast using simulators;  Identify locations and normal shape and size of endocrine organs using images and models. Attitudes: By the end of the course the student will show:  Concern about the social problems associated with endocrine disorders;  Awareness about the importance of patient education in the management of diabetes mellitus.  Awareness about the psychosocial aspects of (male) gynecomastia;  Awareness about the importance and promotion of breast feeding;  Awareness and importance of breast cancer screening programs. Study Plan Theme 1 Hypothalamus & Pituitary Theme 2 Thyroid Theme 3 Parathyroid Theme 4 Adrenals Theme 5 Endocrine Pancreas Theme 6 Miscellaneous Hormones Theme 7 Mammary gland
  • 152. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 152 | P a g e Title Reproductive system Code MED 207 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester V Duration 7 weeks Chairperson Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari Members Dr. Joshua Ashok, Dr. Lisha Jenny John & Dr. Shanti Fernandez Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Gynecology, Urology, Surgery & Dermatology Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal structure, function and development of the human reproductive system using different learning strategies to acquire the knowledge and skills required for understanding the pathophysiology of various reproductive disorders; the rationale for their management focused on disease prevention. The medico legal aspects of specific disorders will be studied. The PBL course will deal with the pathophysiology and management of menstrual disorders. Aims:  To understand the normal structure & function of the male and female reproductive systems and their common disorders.  To enable the learner to be cognizant of the principles of diagnosis, management and prevention of these disorders. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: At the end of the course the students will be able to  Explain the relationship between embryological origin, structure and function of the male and female reproductive systems.  Describe the disorders of development of male and female genital systems  Describe the etiopathogenesis, structural and functional alterations, pathological basis of salient clinical features, approach to diagnosis, principles of management, and methods of prevention of :
  • 153. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 153 | P a g e  Inflammatory disorders of male and female genital tract  Tumors and tumor like conditions of male and female genital tract  Disorders of Tunica vaginalis and spermatic cord  Vascular disorders of male genital tract  Menstrual disorders  Gestational and placental disorders  Disorders of displacement of uterus  Explain significance of abnormal findings in an Endometrial Biopsy in common endometrial disorder  Be cognizant of microbiological examination and culture sensitivity reports of specimens from genital tract.  Recognize normal pregnancy and define terms related to abnormal pregnancy  List methods of diagnosis of pregnancy  Explain the rationale for urine and blood tests in Pregnancy  Describe the stages of Labor  List the causes for Infertility in both genders, and the methods employed in assessing the Infertile couple  Describe the types of Sexual offences and the Medico legal aspects of Impotency  Recognize normal and abnormal findings of Semen analysis  Describe the methods of Assisted Reproduction  List several birth control methods and describe their effectiveness.  Describe health programs directed to women and children  Identify causes for maternal and child mortality and morbidity Skills: At the end of the course the student will be able to:  Elicit history on Male Infertility and Sexual dysfunction  Conduct physical examination of Male Genital system on a simulator  Conduct Pelvic examination of Nullipara and Gravida on a simulator  Elicit Gynecology history  Demonstrate techniques of obtaining high vaginal swab  Demonstrate methods of obtaining PAP smear  Collect, store & transport urethral and vaginal specimens for microbiological and cytological examination.  Conduct Obstetric examination Attitudes: At the end of the course the student will be able to demonstrate awareness of:  Demonstrate awareness and sensitivity while performing intimate examination e.g. male and female genital examination.  The impact of Sexually Transmitted Diseases on the patient, his/her family, and the community
  • 154. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 154 | P a g e  The need to advise the patient to prevent transmission of STD  The feelings of the Infertile couple  The ethical issues of Assisted Reproduction and Abortion Study Plan Theme 1 Disorders of Development Theme 2 Inflammatory Disorders Theme 3 Male Infertility Theme 4 Vascular Disorders Theme 5 Disorders of Tunica Vaginalis and Spermatic Cord Theme 6 Tumors and Tumor like Disorders Theme 7 Disorders of Development Theme 8 Menstrual Disorders Theme 9 Infection of Female Genital Tract Theme 10 Displacement of Supporting Structures Theme 11 Tumors and Tumor like Conditions of Female Genital Tract Theme 12 Pregnancy Theme 13 Gestational & Placental Disorders Theme 14 Contraception, Maternal and Child Health
  • 155. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 155 | P a g e Title Nervous System Code MED 208 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester VI Duration 9 weeks Chairperson Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari Members Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike, Dr. Kannan Narsimhan, Dr. Radhika Taroor, Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed, Dr. Mohamed Hamdy Ibrahim Abdalla & Dr. Pankaj Lamba Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Pharmacology, Microbiology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Neurology, Medicine, Ophthalmology &ENT. Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description The course is designed to provide an integrated approach to the learning of the normal structure, function and development of the nervous system and the organs of hearing, vision, taste, smell and touch. The course also serves to introduce the medical students to individual factors affecting human behavior particularly the micro level psychological processes such as perception, personality, attitudes, values and motivation. The students will also have a chance to understand the impact of these factors on the health and well- being of people in general and on the patient-doctor relationship in specific. The medico legal aspects of death will be studied. PBL week will deal with the pathophysiology, and management of meningeal infections. Aims: This required system-based block integrates the basic sciences into a study of neuroscience and behavior in both health and disease. Each of the basic science topics is incorporated in an integrated body of knowledge covering neuroanatomy, neurophysiology, neurological correlates, neuropharmacology, neuropathology, human behavior and psychiatry, utilizing both didactic & self-directed learning methods and clinical models. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: At the end of this course the student will be able to:  Describe the gross features of the human nervous system including brain and spinal cord, the meninges and ventricular system, and its blood supply.  Describe the cell biology of neurons including the structure of neurons, the basis of synaptic transmission, and the pharmacological control of these processes.
  • 156. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 156 | P a g e  Define the structural basis and physiological and pharmacological properties of the pathways that transmit sensory and motor information in the nervous system.  Describe the etiopathogenesis, structural & functional alterations, pathological basis of salient clinical features, approach to diagnosis, principles of management & methods of prevention of common disorders of the nervous system.  Develop an understanding of the mental processes and individual characteristics of a person that form the basis of behavior, mental disorders and their treatment, the basis of psychiatry.  Develop an understanding of the characteristics of behavioral disorders and the principles of their treatment that form the basis of psychiatry.  Describe methods of relieving pain by pharmacologic and non - pharmacologic measures.  Describe the structure and function of the eye and visual disorders  Describe the structure and function of the ear and disorders of hearing  Describe the structure and function of gustatory and olfactory receptors and their disorders Skills: At the end of this course the student will be able to:  Elicit history related to nervous system and behavior disorders  Perform examination of the nervous system  Localize lesion to specific levels of the CNS based on application of basic principles to neurological symptoms.  Perform Lumbar puncture on a simulator  Recognize normal and abnormal CSF analysis findings.  Recognize normal and abnormal radiological and neuroimaging findings  Identify neurotoxin  Recognize the individual characteristics and psychological processes in behavior related to health and sickness  Perform examination of the eye (torch light, pupillary reactions, visual field, eye movements, visual acuity, color vision and ophthalmoscopy)  Perform examination of hearing by tuning fork and audiometer Attitudes: At the end of this course the student will be able to:  Appreciate the importance of psychological processes and individual characteristics in understanding health behavior  Demonstrate consideration for motivation based disorders.  Demonstrate awareness of the social & psychological consequences of stigma (disability/diseases) especially as they relate to the nervous system.  Appreciate the ethical issues in performing an invasive procedure (LP).  Demonstrate awareness of cases to be reported for medico legal investigation
  • 157. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 157 | P a g e Study Plan Theme 1 Synaptic transmissions and neurotransmitters Theme 2 Sensory system and its disorders Theme 3 Motor system and its disorders Theme 4 Spinal cord and polyneuropathies Theme 5-6 The Brain and its disorders Theme 7 PBL Meningitis Theme 8 Behavioral disorders Theme 9 The Eye and its disorders Theme 10 The Ear, Olfaction and Gustation
  • 158. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 158 | P a g e Title Musculoskeletal System Code MED 209 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester VI Duration 7 weeks Chairperson Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike Members Dr. Lisha Jenny John , Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed & Dr. Nishida Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Pathology, Pharmacology, Orthopedics, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Orthopedics & Physical Therapy Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description In this course the knowledge of the contribution of the normal structure, function and development of the bones, joints and muscles in the maintenance of the kinetics of normal posture and locomotion will help to understand how the physiological and pathological changes associated with congenital, traumatic, infectious, degenerative, metabolic and neoplastic musculoskeletal disorders lead to physical disabilities that have a major impact on the biomechanical function of this organ system particularly following traumatic bone injuries and degenerative joint disease. Aims:  To provide a course of integrated learning of structure and function of the organs that makes the musculoskeletal system to maintain posture and movements.  To provide an introduction to abnormal kinetics of the musculoskeletal system in common musculoskeletal related disorders.  To provide an understanding of the mechanisms underlying clinical manifestations, principles in management including rehabilitation in the disorders of the musculoskeletal system. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: At the end of this course the student will be able to:  Describe the structure and functions of the musculoskeletal system.  Explain the basic mechanisms of the structural and functional alterations that occur in common musculoskeletal disorders and their effects on health.  Relate the structural functional alteration to clinical manifestations of common musculoskeletal disorders.
  • 159. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 159 | P a g e  Explain the role of relevant biochemical, clinical and radiological investigations of the musculoskeletal system in common disorders.  Describe the conservative, surgical and rehabilitation measures to alleviate pain, improve function and to modify the natural history of common musculoskeletal disorders. Skills: At the end of this course the student will be able to:  Elicit relevant history related to the musculoskeletal disorders.  Identify by examination - visual inspection, palpation, and the evaluation of joint motion (LOOK, FEEL and MOVE) the normality and abnormality of the musculoskeletal system.  Recognize normal and abnormal findings in biochemical, electrophysiology, imaging modalities appropriate to the level of training. Attitudes: At the end of this course the student will be able to:  Demonstrate polite and considerate interaction with patients and their family members.  Show respect for patients’ views, privacy and dignity.  Demonstrate awareness of the psychosocial implications with respect to deformities and grievous injuries.  Communicate with patients about their condition, treatment and prognosis in a way they understand.  Appreciate the multi-system presentation and multi-disciplinary management of disorders and recognize the importance of teamwork. Study Plan Theme 1 Common Injuries of the Musculoskeletal System Theme 2 Defects of Metabolism Theme 3 Inflammatory, Infective and Degenerative Disorders of Synovial Joints. Theme 4 Primary Muscular Disorders Theme 5 Tumor &Tumor like Lesions of Bone and Soft Tissue Theme 6 Congenital Disorders of Muscle, Bone and Joint
  • 160. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 160 | P a g e Title Integumentary System Code MED 201 Phase / Year Phase II / Year 3 / Semester VI Duration 2 weeks Chairperson Dr. Anuj Mathur Members Dr. May Khalil, Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman, Dr. Liju Susan Mathew & Prof. Irene Nirmala Thomas Participating Departments Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Forensic Medicine, Dermatology & Surgery Pre-requisite / s Phase I Courses Course Description This course has been integrated around the Integumentary System to provide the learner with a sound knowledge and understanding of the structure, functions and development of the integumentary system in health and its major deviations in common skin diseases. In addition, the learner is introduced to the causes, pathogenesis, and pathological basis of clinical manifestations, methods of diagnosis, principles governing management and methods of prevention of these disorders. Aims: To develop an integrated, foundational knowledge and understanding of the Integumentary system and its common disorders. This understanding will be essential to the development of learners’ ability to recognize, diagnose, manage and prevent these disorders, which they may encounter later in their clinical training as well as medical practice. Besides, as the first course of organ system courses, it is expected to provide structured learning opportunities that help students apply and consolidate their learning of introductory medical sciences. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: By the end of the course students should be able to:  Understand and explain the relationship between the embryological origin, structure and function of skin and its appendages  Understand the incidence, prevalence and classification of skin disease  Relate alterations in structure and functions of skin to clinical manifestations and complications of cutaneous wounds (burns, erosion, ulceration, etc.); explain the principles of wound healing
  • 161. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 161 | P a g e  Describe etio-pathogenesis, structural and functional alterations, common signs and symptoms, appropriate Laboratory work ups, principles of management and methods of prevention of common disorders in the following categories:  Disorders of pigmentation  Disorders of appendages  Cutaneous infections  Inflammatory disorders of skin (including acute and chronic inflammatory dermatoses, hypersensitivity, reactions, blistering and autoimmune disorders),  Premalignant lesions and neoplasms of skin Skills: By the end of the course students will be able to:  Identify the structural constituents and organization of skin  Recognize alterations in gross and microscopic structure of skin in each of the disorders (listed) as appropriate.  Prepare a gram stain and identify common cutaneous infectious agents by light microscopy.  Identify common dermatophytes in a KOH preparation  Clinical skills:  Demonstrate the ability to take clinical history in patients with common skin disorders  Perform a focused physical examination in skin disorders, as appropriate to the level:  Identify primary and secondary lesions of the skin  Perform tests to detect skin sensations of touch, pain and temperature  Differentiate between skin cysts, tumors and ulcers by palpation  Perform injection techniques (I/D, S/C), tuberculin and allergy testing on simulators Attitudes: By the end of the course students should be able to: Demonstrate awareness of the social and psychological consequences of stigma (disfigurement/ diseases) especially as they relate to skin conditions. Study Plan Theme 1 Skin Trauma (Cutaneous wounds) Theme 2 Skin pigmentation and Disorders of Pigmentation Theme 3 Skin Appendages, Acne, hair problems and other disorders of skin Theme 4 Inflammations of the skin (including acute and chronic dermatoses, hypersensitivity reactions, blistering disorders and autoimmune disorders) Theme 5 Skin Infections Theme 6 Premalignant Lesions and Neoplasms
  • 162. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 162 | P a g e Phase – III Courses Title Ophthalmology Code MED 401 Phase / Year Phase III / Year 4 & Year 5 / Semester VII - X Duration 6 weeks Chairperson Prof. Salwa Abd El Razak El Said Attia Clerkship Coordinator Dr. Pankaj Lamba Members Dr. Pradeep Kumar Sharma, Dr. Mohammed Khalid & Dr. Kannan Narsimhan Participating Departments Ophthalmology, Internal Medicine, Physiology & General Surgery Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills Co-requisite / s Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Gynecology and Obstetrics & Otorhinolaryngology Post-requisite / s CRRI Course Description This course is designed as an introduction to ophthalmology. In addition to attending didactic sessions, the student will learn to take a good ophthalmic history and perform a good general eye exam in order to detect common abnormalities of the eye and visual system. Students will learn to interpret the clinical findings and reach a diagnosis and discuss their management during case based discussions in the classroom, the outpatient and the bedside. Students will develop and refine skills in the use of the penlight, ophthalmoscope and slit lamp and will also have ample opportunity to observe a variety of ophthalmic surgical procedures, such as sub-conjunctival injection, foreign body removal and nasolacrimal duct syringing performed in the management of common eye disorders. Aims: The broad goal the teaching students in ophthalmology is to provide such knowledge and skills to the students that shall enable him to practice as an internist and as a primary eye care physician, and also to function effectively as a community health leader to assist in the prevention of blindness and rehabilitation of the visually impaired. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge Outcome: At the end of the course, the student will have knowledge of 1. Common problems affecting eye 2. Principles of management of major ophthalmic emergencies 3. Main systemic diseases affecting the eye
  • 163. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 163 | P a g e 4. Effects of local and systemic diseases on patient’s vision and the necessary action required to minimize the sequelae of such diseases. 5. Adverse drug reactions with special references to ophthalmic manifestations. 6. Eye care education for prevention of eye problems 7. Role of primary health center in organization of eye camps 8. Organization of primary health care and the functioning of the ophthalmic assistant , eye bank organization Skill Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to 1. Elicit a history pertinent to general health and ocular status 2. Perform diagnostic procedures such as visual acuity testing, examination of eye, schiotz tonometry, staining for corneal pathology, confrontation perimetry, subjective refraction including correction of presbyopia and aphakia, direct ophthalmoscopy, and conjunctival smear examination and cover test. 3. Diagnose and treat common problems affecting the eye 4. Interpret ophthalmic signs in relation to common systemic disorders 5. Perform therapeutic procedures such as subconjunctival injection, Corneal/Conjunctival foreign body removal, Carbolic cautery for corneal ulcers, Nasolacrimal duct syringing, and tarsorraphy. 6. Provide first aid in major ophthalmic emergencies 7. Organize community surveys for visual checkup 8. Organize primary eye care service through primary health care centers. Attitudinal Outcomes 1. Use effective means of communication with the public and individual to motivate for surgery in cataract, and for eye donation. 2. Establish rapport with his seniors, colleagues, and paramedical workers, so as to effectively function as a member of the eye care team.
  • 164. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 164 | P a g e Title Otorhinolaryngology Code MED 402 Phase / Year Phase III / Year 4 & Year 5 / Semester VII -X Duration 6 weeks Chairperson Prof. Tambi Abraham Cherian Clerkship Coordinator Prof. Meenu Cherian Members Dr. Jenny Cheriathu, Dr. Muhanned Sultan & Dr. Rizwana B Sheikh Participating Departments Otorhinolaryngology, General Surgery, Pediatrics & Community Medicine Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills Co-requisite / s Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Ophthalmology, OBG Post-requisite / s CRRI Course Description The didactic lectures provide essential factual information, and the clinical rotations provide a practical experience. Students will learn to take a relevant history and perform a basic head and neck exam with equipments available to a primary care practitioner (flashlight, tongue blade, otoscope) and perform an ear exam by tympanometry and otoscope. The students will gain increasing experience discussing the clinical findings to reach a diagnosis of common problems like allergic rhinitis, sinusitis, otitis media, epistaxis, facial fractures, hearing loss, dizziness, and swallowing disorders and discuss a treatment plan with the faculty. Students will be able to observe surgical procedures like ear syringing, nasal packing, tracheostomy, endoscopy and removal of foreign bodies. The student will be able to perform laryngoscopy and use of tracheostomy tubes on a manikin in the simulation lab. Aims: The broad goal of the teaching of undergraduate students in Otorhinolaryngology is that the undergraduate student should have acquired adequate knowledge and skills for optimally dealing with common disorders and emergencies of the upper aerodiigestive tract and the principles of rehabilitation of the hearing impaired. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:  Describe the basic pathophysiology of common ENT diseases and emergencies  Adopt the rational use of commonly used drugs, keeping in mind their adverse reactions.  Suggest common investigative procedures and their interpretations
  • 165. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 165 | P a g e Skills: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:  Examine and diagnose common ENT problems including the pre-malignant and malignant disorders of the head and neck  Manage ENT problems at the first level of care and be able to refer whenever necessary  Carry out minor surgical procedures like ear syringing, ear dressings, nasal packing etc.  Assist in certain procedures such as tracheostomy, endoscopies and removal of foreign bodies Attitudes: At the end of the course, the students will be able to: Show awareness of the need to act immediately in emergencies obstruction to air passages by foreign bodies
  • 166. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 166 | P a g e Title Medicine & Allied Disciplines Code MED 403 Phase / Year / Semester Phase III / Year 4 & Year 5 / Semester VII - X Duration 28 weeks Chairperson Prof. Sheikh Altaf Basha Clerkship Coordinator Prof. Salwa Abd ElZaher Mabrouk Members Dr. Ehab M. Esheiba, Dr. Muhanned A Abdul Wahid, & Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas Participating Departments Internal Medicine, Cardiology, Psychiatry, PHC & Pharmacology Pre-requisite / s Phase II, Basic clinical skills Co-requisite / s Surgery, Pediatrics, Ophthalmology, Gynecology & Obstetrics, Otorhinolaryngology Post-requisite / s CRRI Course Description The Medicine clerkship is divided into two rotations one in clerkship year 4 and the other in year 5. The student will have adequate clinical encounters in both ambulatory and bedside settings in the outpatient and inpatient departments of the hospital. The student will gain wide exposure to the medical and conservative management of common acute and chronic medical disorders. Rotations in allied medical specialties like dermatology and psychiatry will increase the breadth of the experience to include the management of common skin disorders and a broad understanding of the human mind and behavior, its normality in health, abnormality in stress, methods of classifying psychological and psychiatric disorders and different forms of therapy. It also helps students in gaining an understanding of the ethical concepts in the field of medicine, the right of patients and the responsibility of health professionals. Aims: The broad goal of the teaching of undergraduate students in Medicine is to ensure that the graduate will have acquired adequate knowledge, skills and behavioral attributes to practice as a competent entry-level physician. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: At the end of the Clerkship the student will have achieved cognitive proficiency in:  Symptomatology, clinical presentation of common disorders affecting the various organ systems of the body.  Various diagnostic modalities for the identification and differentiation of the conditions; the interpretation of the results  Treatment strategies, which include drug therapy as well as other forms of therapy.
  • 167. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 167 | P a g e Skills: At the end of 5th year internal medicine ambulatory clerkship, the student will have achieved the following professional skills:  Eliciting a comprehensive history from the patient and analysis of the various aspects of the patient’s history.  Performing a general physical examination followed by detailed Systemic Examination.  Recording the history and findings of physical examination in a proper format and presenting the case to the clinical tutor / consultant.  Discussing the cases, identification of the most likely problem (provisional diagnosis), listing the differential diagnoses, describing the investigative approach, and discussing the line of management.  Interpretation of the laboratory data, investigations such as radiographs, imaging procedures, ECG, microbiology slides etc.  The student should have observed common diagnostic and therapeutic procedures (at least each on two occasions) such as – Pleural peritoneal aspirations, Lumbar Puncture, Bone marrow aspiration, Liver Biopsy, 2 Echocardiography, TMT, Spirometry, Gastric lavage, blood gas sampling etc. (As measured by acceptable scores in the periodically conducted OSCE at the end of each clinical rotations and the final professional clinical examination) Attitudes: The student will have acquired the attitudinal skills to:  Accept the patient’s welfare as the first priority  Respect, protect and value patient’s right to privacy  Demonstrate the ability to participate in team work. (eg. project work)  Willingness to participate in group learning activities such as seminars and symposia
  • 168. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 168 | P a g e Title Surgery and Allied Disciplines Code MED 404 Phase / Year / Semester Phase III / Year 4 & 5 / Semester VII -X Duration 20 weeks Chairperson Prof. Yasien Malallah Taher Clerkship Coordinator Dr. Mohammed Sohby Members Dr. Amit Chaturvedi, Dr. Sona Chaturvedi & Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike Participating Departments General Surgery, Orthopedics, Anesthesiology & Anatomy Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical Skills Co-requisite / s Medicine, Pediatrics, Gynecology & Obstetrics, Ophthalmology and Otorhinolaryngology Post-requisite/ s CRRI Course Description The clerkship in Surgery is designed to give the student a broad exposure to the principles of diagnosis and management of common surgical problems, including surgical emergencies; the indications and methods for fluid and electrolyte replacement therapy including blood transfusion, the importance of asepsis, disinfection and sterilization and use of antibiotics, and lastly, common malignancies and their management and prevention. During the course of the rotation, the student will be expected to focus on several areas of study, which will include basic principles of peri-operative management of the patient with a surgical problem. An awareness of the nature and management of surgical disease is developed by case oriented small group sessions, rounds and weekly conferences. The surgical experience will be further widened to include surgical aspects of orthopedics, anesthesia and radiology Orthopedics includes the principles of recognition and management of common bone and joint injuries and infections; recognition of congenital and skeletal anomalies for correction or rehabilitation; importance of metabolic bone diseases, diagnosis of neoplasms affecting bones; recognition and management of degenerative and rheumatological diseases of musculoskeletal system; principles of reconstructive surgery of musculoskeletal system. Anesthesiology includes principles of the pre-, intra- and post-operative anesthetic management of the surgical patient with particular emphasis on relief of preoperative anxiety, intraoperative maintenance of normal oxygenation when normal respiration is depressed under anesthesia and postoperative pain relief Radiology will include the identification of normal findings on routine X-rays of chest, abdomen, head and limbs, the recognition of deviations of normal and their significance in the management of the underlying disorders.
  • 169. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 169 | P a g e Aim: The broad goal of teaching undergraduate students in Surgery is to produce graduates capable of delivering efficient first contact surgical care. Intended Learning Outcomes: Knowledge: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:  Describe etiology, pathophysiology, principles of diagnosis and management of common surgical problems including emergencies.  Define indications and methods for fluid and electrolyte replacement therapy including blood transfusion.  Define asepsis, disinfection and sterilization and recommend judicious use of antibiotics.  Describe common malignancies in the country and their management including prevention.  Enumerate different types of anesthetic agents, their indications, mode of administration, contraindications and side effects. Skills:  Elicit a comprehensive history on all surgical patients.  Identify and diagnose simple conditions like an abscess, thyroid swellings, superficial tumors, breast lumps and abdominal masses.  List a differential diagnosis for each of the above conditions in the order of priority.  Evaluate patients with varicose veins, peripheral arterial disease and diabetic foot ulcers clinically.  Perform clinical examination of trauma patients and explain the basics of the initial care of these patients e.g. A,B&C.  Interpret common hematologic abnormalities (anemia, Leukocytosis, etc. ) and correlate them with the clinical condition.  Decide which investigations are mandatory in patients with common surgical problems e.g. acute abdomen  Interpret urine examination reports especially with reference to the presence of hematuria and pyuria, and correlate the findings clinically. On the basis of the normal values for: fasting and post prandial blood sugars, blood urea and S. creatinine, Liver function tests, coagulation parameters and S. electrolytes and correlate these with the clinical features.  Interpret plain and contrast X – ray films especially of the abdomen and the GIT (Barium series) and explain the basics of evaluation of abdominal CT films.  Explain to the patient the modalities of vascular imaging – Doppler / angiogram and the indications for these clinically.
  • 170. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 170 | P a g e  Recognize shock, especially hemorrhagic / septic shock and describe the principles of fluid management.  Demonstrate basic techniques of dressing of wounds  Demonstrate basic techniques of bandaging  Identify clinical conditions that require surgical intervention and list the pre-operative corrective measures required in common surgical problems. E.g.: Correction of fluid / electrolyte balance, Correction of anemia  Explain the principles of monitoring patients after surgery – urine output, vital parameters, role of recording central venous pressure etc.  Perform physical examination of patients with disorders of the musculoskeletal system.  Identify common musculoskeletal injuries  Differentiate between life / limb threatening injuries from others.  Identify common musculoskeletal infections.  Identify congenital and skeletal abnormalities.  Identify metabolic bone disorders.  Recognize tumors and tumor-like conditions of bones and soft tissues  Diagnose degenerative and rheumatological diseases of musculoskeletal system.  Recognize abnormalities of Musculoskeletal system in x-rays  Interpret laboratory results in various diseases of the musculoskeletal system. Attitudes:  Demonstrate ability to communicate with the patient and attendants and explain about the diagnosis and modalities of treatment available with the risks of each type of therapy  Demonstrate willingness to practice ethical medicine and to respect patient’s rights for confidentiality of Information
  • 171. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 171 | P a g e Title Obstetrics & Gynecology Code MED 405 Phase / Year Phase III / Year 4 & 5 / Semester VII -X Duration 10 weeks Chairperson Prof. Mawahib Abd Salman Clerkship Coordinator Dr. Shanthi Fernandes Members Dr. Tarek Fowzy, Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan & Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari Participating Departments Obstetrics & Gynecology, Radiology, Urology & Physiology Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills Co-requisites / s Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Ophthalmology & Otorhinolaryngology Post-requisites / s CRRI Course Description In the Obstetrics and Gynecology, the student will gain the skills of gynecologic and obstetric history taking and physical examination in the outpatient and wards and practical experience in the delivery room under the close supervision of the staff. The student will avail of these opportunities to reach a diagnosis and discuss the management of gynecologic and obstetric disorders with the faculty while dealing with patients in the outpatient, the delivery room, the operation theater and the wards. The performance of procedural skills like delivering a baby, taking a PAP smear, suturing an episiotomy will be learnt and practiced in the safe environment of the Simulation Lab. Formal and informal daily teaching sessions and rounds with the faculty are a part of this clerkship experience. Aims: The broad goal of the teaching of undergraduate students in Obstetrics and Gynecology is that he/she should acquire understanding of anatomy, physiology and pathophysiology of the reproductive system and gain the ability to optimally manage common conditions affecting it. Intended Learning Outcomes: By the end of the Obstetric clerkship the student should achieve cognitive proficiency in: Knowledge:  Physiological changes in pregnancy, the common symptoms & signs of pregnancy.  Normal pelvis, abnormal pelvic types.  Normal and abnormal labor
  • 172. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 172 | P a g e  Normal & abnormal puerperium  Routine antenatal care, antenatal advice, routine antenatal investigations – blood investigations, ultrasound scan.  High risk pregnancies, abnormal presentations  Complications of labor Skill:  To elicit a comprehensive history, and calculate Expected Date of Delivery from the date of Last Menstrual Period, determine gestational age in weeks.  To analyze and document in clinical history in proper chronological order.  Perform general examination; check vital signs, and breast examination.  To perform the various obstetric maneuvers including auscultation for the fetal heart sounds.  To perform per speculum & digital examination in pregnancy and if necessary assess the pelvis & Bishop’s score (cervical assessment) Attitudinal Outcomes:  Demonstrate readiness to follow ethical guidelines related to pregnancy  Demonstrate readiness to consider the patient’s welfare as first priority  Recognize the importance of protecting & valuing patient’s privacy  Demonstrate willingness to accept teamwork in providing medical care By the end of the Gynecology clerkship the student should have achieved cognitive proficiency in: Knowledge:  Symptomatology & presentation of common gynecological disorders.  Various methods of contraception.  Appropriate investigations to be performed to aid in the diagnosis & to interpret the results. Eg: S.BHCG in titer for cases of ectopic pregnancies & molar pregnancies, etc. Ultrasound Scan.  Treatment strategies, medical & surgical. Skills:  Elicit a comprehensive history & analyze it, record in chronological order.  Perform general physical examination; check vitals, thyroid & breast examination, abdomen examination, per speculum & per vaginal examination.  Prepare a pap smear; collect high vaginal swab & cervical swab.  Make provisional diagnosis & list differential diagnosis.
  • 173. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 173 | P a g e  Order relevant investigations & discuss the line of management.  Interpret the investigations results like Pap smear report, semen analysis report, Histopathology report of cervical punch biopsy & D&C, HSG (Hystero-salphingogram), vaginal swab report, ultrasound etc.  Observed common procedures in the OPD like IUCD insertion, colposcopy, cervical cauterization, endometrial biopsy, and Incision of Bartholin’s abscess.  Attended & observed surgical procedures (at least 2 each) like fractional curettage, Diagnostic D&C, Marsupilization of Bartholin’s cyst, Incision & drainage of Bartholin’s abscess myomectomy, hysterectomy – Abdominal & vaginal. Attitude:  Observe medical ethics to consider patients welfare as first priority  Protecting & valuing patients privacy  Spirit of teamwork  Respect for teachers and for fellow students
  • 174. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 174 | P a g e Title Pediatrics Code MED 406 Phase / Year / Semester Phase III / Year 4 & 5 / Semester VII -X Duration 10 weeks Chairperson Prof. Mahmoud Shamseldeen Clerkship Coordinator Prof. Ignatius Edwin D’Souza Members Dr. Wesam Khadum, Dr. Malini Vijayan & Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie Participating Departments Pediatrics, Dermatology, Obstetrics & Gynecology and Biochemistry Pre-requisite / s Phase II & Basic clinical skills Co-requisite / s Surgery, Medicine, Pediatrics, Gynecology & Obstetrics, Ophthalmology& Otorhinolaryngology Post-requisite / s CRRI Course Description The student will learn to obtain clinical history in an age-appropriate and sensitive manner from a child and or the accompanying adult and conduct a pediatric physical examination appropriate to the condition and the age of the patient. During presentation of the clinical findings to the faculty, the student will interpret the clinical findings and available lab results to suggest a diagnosis and discuss the management of the disease. The student will assess growth and development and advocate safety measures to prevent injury and disease. Many case based sessions have been planned to provide alternative clinical experiences. The simulation lab will allow the learner to practice in a safe environment. Aims: The broad goal of teaching undergraduate students in Pediatrics is to acquire adequate knowledge and appropriate skills for optimally dealing with major health problems of children to ensure their optimal growth and development. Intended Learning Outcomes: At the conclusion of the clerkship in Pediatrics, the student should be able to:  Recognize common developmental and medical problems in infants and children  Elicit a comprehensive history that includes perinatal, developmental, nutritional and family history and immunization history in communication with the child’s parents.  Conduct an adequate physical examination in sick children of different age group.  Explain developmental milestones in a child and use the information in assessment of infants and children.
  • 175. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 175 | P a g e  Recognize the specific requirements in neonates and identify differences in the presentation of clinical problems in this age group compared to children in the older age group.  Describe the appropriate investigations that would help in confirming the diagnosis in common problems in infants and children.  Describe the principles of administration of drugs in children and explain the rationale  Describe and assist in resuscitative procedures in the new born.  Participate in clinical problem solving sessions and demonstrate the ability for data search and analysis
  • 176. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 176 | P a g e 14.8 Typical Week 14.8.1 PHASE – I Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday 8.30 am – 9.30 am Formative Quiz Lecture Lecture Lecture Lecture 9.30 am – 10.30 am Discussion on Quiz Lecture Lecture Preparation for Seminar Lecture 10.30 am – 11.00 am T E A B R E A K 11.00 am – 01.00 pm CBL Part I (Brainstorming) Practical / CAL / SDL Practical / SDL / Self Study Integrated Seminar Mini-project on Health Days / Preceptor Meeting / SDL 01.00 pm – 01.30 pm L U N C H B R E A K 01.30 pm – 03.30 pm CBL Self Study Practical/SDL/ Self Study Practical/CAL/SDL CBL Self Study CBL Part II (Review and Entry) 03.30 pm – 04.30 pm Faculty office hours- You can meet faculty members in their offices to clarify doubts and ask for advice related to academics Multimedia rooms (Computer Labs) will be used only for CAL sessions. For SDL, students will use books and own laptops (If needed). 14.8.2 PHASE – II Year 1 Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday 8.30 am – 9.30 am Lecture Lecture Lecture BCS Batches A & B Lecture 9.30 am – 10.30 am CA Lecture Lecture Lecture 10.30 am – 11.00 am T E A B R E A K 11.00 am – 01.00 pm CBL Part – I Batches A & B Practical / Video / Reading Assignments Batch A / B SDL / CAL / Practical Batch A / B BCS Batches A & B *SDL Seminar preparation 01.00 pm – 01.30 pm L U N C H B R E A K 01.30 pm – 03.30 pm SDL – CBL (LO) Batches A & B Practical / Video / Reading Assignments Batch A / B Resource session Batches A & B CBL Part – II SS BCS: Basic Clinical Skills CBL: Case Based Learning SS: Self Study SDL: Self Directed Learning LO: Learning Objectives CA: Continuous Assessment CAL: Computer Assisted Learning
  • 177. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 177 | P a g e 14.8.3 PHASE – II Year 2 Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday 8.30 am – 9.30 am Lecture CA Lecture Lecture BCS Batches A & B9.30 am – 10.30 am Lecture Lecture Lecture Lecture 10.30 am – 11.00 am T E A B R E A K 11.00 am – 01.00 pm CAL / Practical Batch A / B CBL – SDL Seminar preparation / SDL / CAL / Practical Batch A / B SDL / CAL / Practical Batch A / B BCS Batches A & B 01.00 pm – 01.30 pm L U N C H B R E A K 01.30 pm – 03.30 pm CBL Part – I Batch A & B CAL / Practical Batch A / B SDL / CAL / Practical Batch A / B CBL Resource Session / SDL / CAL / Practical Batch A / B CBL Part – II / SDL / CAL / Practical BCS: Basic Clinical Skills CBL: Case Based Learning S: Seminar SDL: Self Directed Learning LO: Learning Objectives CA: Continuous Assessment CAL: Computer Assisted Learning
  • 178. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 178 | P a g e 14.8.4 PHASE – III Year 1 Day * 8.00 am – 01.00 pm 01.00 – 01.30 pm 01.30 - 3.00 pm 3.00 – 4.00 pm Sunday ① Journal Club / Clinical Society Meeting Case Based Learning (CBL) Expert Forum Ward Round & Clinics B Monday Ward Round & Clinics R Tuesday ② Grand Rounds E Ward Round & Clinics A Wednesday Ward Round & Clinics K ② Grand Rounds Thursday Ward Round & Clinics Lecture / Multidisciplinary Seminar Lecture / Multidisciplinary Seminar Note: * Reporting time depends on Clinical Site requirements ① Journal Club meeting 1st Sunday of the month Clinical Society meeting every 3rd Sunday of the month ② Grand Rounds scheduled every 3rd Wednesday & 4th Tuesday of the month 14.8.5 PHASE – III Year 2 Clinic Theory Day * 8.00 am – 09.00 am 9.00 am to 12.00 pm 12.00 pm – 01.30 pm 01.30 - 3.00 pm 3.00 – 4.00 pm Sunday Morning Reporting Ward rounds / Clinics B SGL Tutorial Monday Grand Rounds R Tuesday Morning Reporting E Wednesday Morning Reporting A Thursday Morning Reporting K * Reporting time depends on Clinical Site requirements
  • 179. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 179 | P a g e 14.9 PBL Week 14.9.1 PHASE – II Year 1 Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday 8.30 am – 9.30 am PBL Part – I Batches A & B (5 groups) SDL / Resource Session SDL / Resource Session BCS Batches A & B Expert Forum 9.30 am – 10.30 am SDL SDL 10.30 am – 11.00 am T E A B R E A K 11.00 am – 01.00 pm SDL SDL / Resource Session SDL BCS Batches A & B SDL 01.00 pm – 01.30 pm L U N C H B R E A K 01.30 pm – 03.30 pm SDL / Resource Session SDL / Resource Session PBL Part – II Batches A & B PBL Part – III Batches A & B CA MEQ BCS: Basic Clinical Skills PBL: Problem Based Learning SDL: Self Directed Learning CA: Continuous Assessment MEQ: Modifies Essay Questions 14.9.2 PHASE – II Year 2 Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday 8.30 am – 9.30 am PBL Part – I Batches A & B (5 groups) SDL / Resource Session PBL Part – II Batches A & B SDL / Resource Session BCS Batches A & B9.30 am – 10.30 am SDL SDL 10.30 am – 11.00 am T E AB R E A K 11.00 am – 01.00 pm SDL SDL / Resource Session SDL PBL Part – III Batches A & B BCS 01.00 pm – 01.30 pm L U N C H B R E A K 01.30 pm – 03.30 pm SDL / Resource Session SDL / Resource Session SDL / Resource Session Expert Forum MEQ BCS: Basic Clinical Skills PBL: Problem Based Learning SDL: Self Directed Learning CA: Continuous Assessment MEQ: Modifies Essay Questions
  • 180. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 180 | P a g e 15.0 List of Text Books, Reference Books, Recommended Readings Phase – I Course Title: MED 101 Language and Communication Skills 1. McCullagh Marie, Wright, Ros. Good Practice: Communication Skills in English for the Medical Practitioner (Student's Book). Cambridge University Press; 2008. ISBN: 9780521755900 2. Glendinning, Eric H, Holmstrom, Beverly A.S. English in Medicine. Cambridge University Press; 2008. ISBN: 9780521606660. 3. Glendinning Eric H, Howard Ron. Professional English in Use Medicine. Cambridge University Press; 2007. ISBN: 9780521682015. Additional Readings:  Beebe Steven A, Beebe Susan J, Ivy Diana K. Communication Principles for a Lifetime. Volume 1: Principles of Communication Volume 2: Interpersonal Communication Volume 3: Communicating in Groups and Teams Volume 4: Presentational Speaking. Pearson Benjamin Cummings; 2009. ISBN: 9780205593576  Gamble Teri Kwal, Gamble Michael. Communication Works. McGraw Hill; 2006. ISBN: 9780073534220.  Lloyd Margaret, Bor Robert. Communication Skills for Medicine. Churchill Livingstone; 2004. ISBN: 0443074119.  Bickley Lynn S. Bates Pocket Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking. Lippincott William & Wilkins; 2004. ISBN: 0781738180 .  Abdel Hamid El-Hawary. Medical Terminology: Made Easy. UAE: Gulf Medical College, Ajman; 2000.  Jean M.Denneril. Medical Terminology Made Easy. 4th ed. Delmar Cengage Learning; 2006. ISBN-10: 1401898847, ISBN-13: 978-1401898847  JeHarned. Medical Terminology Made Easy. Tobey Press; 2010 ISBN-10:1446525457, ISBN-13: 978-1446525456
  • 181. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 181 | P a g e Course Title: MED 102 Psychosocial Sciences 1. Myers David G. Psychology. 9th ed. Worth Publishers; 2009. ISBN: 978-1429215978 2. Graham Scambler. Sociology as Applied to Medicine. 6th ed. Saunders; 2008. Additional Readings:  Atkinson and Hilgards. Introduction to Psychology.15th ed. Harcourt; 2009. ISBN: 9781844807284  Myers David G. Exploring Psychology. 8th ed. Worth Publishers; 2009. ISBN: 978- 1429238267.  Barbara Fadem. Behavioral Science in Medicine. 2nd ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN: 978-1609136642.  Sadock Benjamin J, Sadock Virginia A. Kaplan and Sadock's Synopsis of Psychiatry: Behavioral Sciences. 10th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2007. ISBN: 978- 0781773270.  Mitchell Feldman, John Christensen. Behavioral Medicine: A Guide for Clinical Practice. 3rd ed. McGraw-Hill Medical; 2007. ISBN: 978-0071438605. Course Title: MED 103 Cells, Molecules and Genes 1. Eroschenko Victor P. diFiore's Atlas of Histology: With Functional Correlations. 12th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN: 978-1451113419. 2. Murray Robert. Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry. 29th ed. Mcgraw Hill Professional; 2012. ISBN: 978-0071792776 3. Westman Judith A. Medical Genetics for the Modern Clinician. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2005. ISBN: 978-0781757607. Additional Readings:  Vinay Kumar, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.  Alberts Bruce, Johnson, Alexander. Molecular Biology of the Cell. 5th ed. Garland Science; 2007. ISBN: 978-0815341055  Thomas M. Devlin. Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. 7th ed. John Wiley & Sons; 2010. ISBN: 978-0470281734.  Korf Bruce R. Human Genetics and Genomics. 3rd ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2006. ISBN-13: 978-0632046560.  Denniston Katherine, Topping Joseph. General, Organic & Biochemistry. 7th ed. McGraw-Hill; 2010. ISBN: 978-0077354800.
  • 182. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 182 | P a g e Course Title: MED 104 Tissues and Organs 1. Elaine N. Marieb, Katja N. Hoehn. Human Anatomy & Physiology. 9th ed. Benjamin Cummings; 2012. ISBN: 978-0321694157 2. Moore, Keith L, Dalley, Arthur F. Clinically Oriented Anatomy. 6th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ISBN: 978-0781775250 3. Eroschenko Victor P. diFiore's Atlas of Histology: with Functional Correlations. 12th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN: 978-1451113419. Additional Readings:  Tortora Gerard J, Derrickson Bryan H. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. 13th ed. Wiley; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0470565100.  Hall John E. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th ed. Saunders; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1416045748.  Arthur Anne, M.R. Grant's Atlas of Anatomy. 13th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-1608317561.  Vinay Kumar, Abul Abbas, Jon C. Aster. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.  Young Barbara, Stewart William, O'Dowd Geraldine. Wheater's Basic Pathology: A Text, Atlas and Review of Histopathology. 5th ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0443067976. Course Title: MED 105 Embryogenesis and Life Cycle 1. Moore Keith L, Persaud T. V. N. Before We Are Born. 8th ed. Saunders; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-1437720013. 2. Stevens Vivian M, Redwood, Susan K. Rapid Review Behavioral Science. 2nd ed. Mosby; 2006. ISBN-13: 978-0323045711. Additional Readings:  Schoenwolf Gary C, Bleyl Steven B, Brauer Philip R. Larsen's Human Embryology. 4th ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-0443068119.  Sadler Thomas W. Langman's Medical Embryology. 12th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1451113426.  Sigelman Carol K, Rider Elizabeth A. Life-Span Human Development. 7th ed. Wadsworth Publishing; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1111342739
  • 183. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 183 | P a g e Course Title: MED 106 Nutrition and Metabolism 1. Mann Jim, Truswell Stewart. Essentials of Human Nutrition. 4th ed. Oxford University Press; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0199566341. 2. Pamela Champe. Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews: Biochemistry. 4th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ASIN: B005RQJ1SY Additional Readings:  Bronk J Ramsey. Human Metabolism. Pearson Higher Education; 1999. ISBN-13: 978-0582026551.  Geissler Catherine, Powers Hilary. Human Nutrition. 12th ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702031182  Devlin Thomas M. Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. 7th ed. John Wiley & Sons; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0470281734.  Bender David A. Introduction to Nutrition and Metabolism. 4th ed. CRC Press; 2007. ISBN-13: 978-1420043129  Murray Robert, Rodwell Victor. Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry. 29th ed. McGraw-Hill Medical; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0071765763. Course Title: MED 107 Internal & External Environment 1. Ananthanarayan R, JayaramPaniker, C.K. Ananthanarayan and Paniker's Textbook of Microbiology. 8th ed. Universities Press; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-8173716744 2. Goering Richard, Dockrell Hazel. Mims' Medical Microbiology. 5th ed. Saunders; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0723436010. 3. Park K. Park’s Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine. 19th ed. BanarsidasBhanot Publishers; 2007. ISBN 8190128280. 4. Hall John E. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th ed. Saunders; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1416045748 5. Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215. 6. Katzung Bertram, Masters Susan. Basic and Clinical Pharmacology. 12th ed. McGraw- Hill Medical; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0071764018.
  • 184. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 184 | P a g e Reference Books:  Chatterjee K. D. Parasitology: Protozoology & Helminthology. 13th ed. CBS Publishers & Distributors Private Limited; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-8123918105  Widmaier Eric, Raff Hershel. Vander's Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body Function with ARIS. 11th ed. McGraw-Hill; 2007. ISBN-13: 978-0077216092.  Rosenstock Linda, Cullen Mark, Brodkin Carl. Textbook of Clinical Occupational and Environmental Medicine. 2nd ed. Saunders; 2004. ISBN-13: 978-0721689746.  Brunton Laurence, Chabner Bruce. Goodman and Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics. 12th ed. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0071624428. Videos and CD ROMs:  Interactive Case Study CD Companion to Robbins and Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease 7th Ed.
  • 185. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 185 | P a g e Phase – II Textbooks: 1. McCullagh Marie, Wright Ros. Good Practice: Communication Skills in English for the Medical Practitioner / Student's Books. Cambridge University Press; 2008. ISBN : 9780521755900 2. Glendinning Eric H, Holmstrom Beverly A.S. English in Medicine. Cambridge Press; 2008. ISBN: 9780521606660. 3. Glendinning Eric H, Howard Ron. Professional English in Use Medicine. Cambridge University Press; 2007. ISBN: 9780521682015. 4. David G. Myers. Psychology. 9th ed. Worth Publishers; 2009. ISBN: 978-1429215978 5. Graham Scambler. Sociology as Applied to Medicine. 6th ed. Saunders; 2008. 6. Vian M. Stevens, Susan K. Redwood. Rapid Review Behavioral Science. 2nd ed. Mosby; 2006. ISBN-13: 978-0323045711. 7. Victor P. Eroschenko. diFiore's Atlas of Histology: with Functional Correlations. 12th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN: 978-1451113419. 8. Elaine N. Marieb, Katja N. Hoehn. Human Anatomy & Physiology with Mastering. 8th ed. Benjamin Cummings; 2010. ISBN : 978-0321694157 9. Keith L. Moore, Arthur F. Dalley. Clinically Oriented Anatomy. 6th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ISBN: 978-0781775250 10. John E. Hall. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th ed. Saunders; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1416045748. 11. Judith A. Westman . Medical Genetics for the Modern Clinician. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2005. ISBN: 978-0781757607. 12. Moore Keith. Before we are Born. 8th ed. Saunders; 2012. ISBN-10:1416037055. 13. Robert Murray. Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry. 29th ed. Mcgraw Hill Professional; 2012. ISBN: 978-0071792776 14. Harvey Richard A, Ferrier Denise R. Biochemistry (Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews Series). 5th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1608314126 15. Jim Mann, Stewart Truswell. Essentials of Human Nutrition. 4th ed. Oxford University Press; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0199566341. 16. Ananthanarayan R, C.K.JayaramPaniker. Ananthanarayan and Paniker's Textbook of Microbiology. 8th ed. Universities Press; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-8173716744
  • 186. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 186 | P a g e 17. Richard Goering, Hazel Dockrell . Mims Medical Microbiology. 5th ed. Saunders; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0723436010. 18. Vinay Kumar, Abul K. Abbas, Jon C Aster. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN: 978-1416031215 19. Park K. Park’s Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine. 19th ed. BanarsidasBhanot Publishers; 2007. ISBN 8190128280. 20. Bertram Katzung, Susan Masters. Basic and Clinical Pharmacology. 12th ed. McGraw- Hill Medical; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0071764018. Course Title: MED 201 Integumentary System Textbook: 1. MacKie Rona M. Clinical Dermatology. 5th ed. USA: Oxford University Press; 2003. ISBN: 978-0198525806. Additional Readings:  Campbell Mary K, Farrell Shawn O. Biochemistry. 7th ed. Brooks Cole; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0840068583.  Williams Norman S, Bulstrode Christopher J.K, O'Connell P Ronan. Bailey and Love's Short Practice of Surgery. 25th ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-0340939321. Course Title: MED 202 Blood and Immune System Textbooks: 1. Hoffbrand A.V, Moss P.A.H. Essential Hematology. 6th ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1405198905. 2. Playfair J.H.L, Chain B.M. Immunology at a Glance. 9th ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1405180528. Additional Readings: 1. Colledge Nicki R, Walker Brian R, Ralston Stuart H. Davidsons Principles and Practice of Medicine. 21st ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702030857 2. Abbas Abul K, Lichtman Andrew H. Cellular and Molecular Immunology. 7th ed. Saunders; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1437715286. 3. Hoffbrand A. Victor. Color Atlas of Clinical Hematology. 4th ed. Mosby; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0323044530.
  • 187. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 187 | P a g e Course Title: MED 203 Cardiovascular System Textbooks: 1. Noble Alan, Johnson Robert, Thomas Alan, Bass Paul. The Cardiovascular System: Systems of the Body Series. 2nd ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978- 0702033742. 2. Dubin Dale. Rapid Interpretation of EKG’s. 6th ed. Cover Pub Co; 2000. ISBN-13: 978-0912912066. 3. Hampton John R. The ECG Made Easy. 7th ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2008. ISBN 9780443068263. Additional Readings:  Katz Arnold M. Physiology of the Heart. 5th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1608311712.  Lilly Leonard S. Pathophysiology of Heart Disease. 5th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1605477237.  Colledge Nicki R, Walker Brian R, Ralston Stuart H. Davidsons Principles and Practice of Medicine. 21st ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702030857.  Aaronson Philip I, Ward Jeremy P.T. The Cardiovascular System at a Glance. 4th ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-0470655948. Course Title: MED 204 Respiratory System Textbook: 1. Davies Andrew, Moores Carl. The Respiratory System: Basic Science and Clinical Conditions. 2nd ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010.ISBN-13: 978-0702033704. Additional Readings:  Ward Jeremy P.T, Ward Jane, Leach Richard M, Wiener Charles M. The Respiratory System at a Glance. 3rd ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1405199193.  Gardenhire Douglas S. Rau's Respiratory Care Pharmacology. 8th ed. Mosby; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0323075282.  West John B. Pulmonary Pathophysiology: The Essentials. 8th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2012. ISBN-13: 978-1451107135.  Rao Nagesh kumar G. Textbook of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology. 2nd ed. Jaypee Brothers Medical Pub; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-8184487060. CDs: Robbins Interactive CD-Rom for respiratory diseases.
  • 188. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 188 | P a g e Course Title: MED 205 Alimentary System Textbook: 1. Margaret E. Smith. The Digestive System. 2nd ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN- 9780702033674 Additional Readings: 1. Smith Fred. J. Taylor's Principles and Practice of Medical Jurisprudence. Vol 2 of 2. Gale, Making of Modern Law; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1240137978. 2. Rose Suzanne. Gastrointestinal and Hepatobiliary Pathophysiology. 2nd ed. Hayes Barton Press; 2004. ISBN-13: 978-1593771812. 3. Johnson Leonard R. Gastrointestinal Physiology. 7th ed. Mosby; 2006. ISBN-13: 978-0323033916. 4. Chatterjee K D. Parasitology: Protozoology & Helminthology. 13th ed. CBS Publishers & Distributors Private Limited; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-8123918105. Course Title: MED 206 Urinary System Textbook: 1. Field Michael, Pollock Carol, Harris David. The Renal System: Basic Science and Clinical Conditions. 2nd ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-9780702033711 Online resources – Get your username & password from the librarian. http://www.accessmedicine.com/resourceTOC.aspx?resourceID=57 Course Title: MED 207 Reproductive System Textbook: 1. Heffner Linda J, Schust Danny J. Reproductive System at a Glance. 3rd ed. Wiley- Blackwell; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1405194525. Reference Textbooks:  Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto and Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.  Frohlich Edward D.Rypins Basic Sciences Review. 18th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2001. ISBN-13: 978-0781725187.  DeGown Richard L, Brown Donald D. DeGowin's Diagnostic Examination. 9th ed. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2008.
  • 189. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 189 | P a g e  Neville F Hacker. Essentials of Obstetrics and Gynecology. 5th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416059400.  Tortora Gerard J, Derrickson Bryan H. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. 13th ed. Wiley; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0470565100.  Williams Norman S, Bulstrode Christopher J.K, O'Connell P Ronan. Bailey and Love's Short Practice of Surgery. 25th ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-0340939321.  Park K. Park’s Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine. 19th ed. BanarsidasBhanot Publishers; 2007. ISBN 8190128280. Course Title: MED 208 Central Nervous System Textbooks: 1. Hirsch Martin C; Kramer Thomas. Neuroanatomy: 3 D- Stereoscopic Atlas of the Human Brain. Springer; 2013 (reprint). ISBN 978-3642636097. 2. Hall John E. Guyton and Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th ed. Saunders; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1416045748. 3. Barker Roger A, Barasi Stephen, Neal Michael J. Neuroscience at a Glance. 3rd ed. Wiley-Blackwell; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-1405150453. 4. Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215. 5. Gilroy John. Basic Neurology. McGraw Hill; 2000. ISBN 007115289x. Course Title: MED 209 Musculoskeletal System Textbook: 1. Sambrook Philip, Schrieber Leslie, Taylor Thomas K, Ellis Andrew. The Musculoskeletal System: Systems of the Body Series. 2nd ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010.ISBN-13: 978-0702033773. References Textbooks:  Hamblen David L, Simpson Hamish. Adams’s Outline of Fractures Including Joint Injuries. 12th ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2007. ISBN-13: 978-0443102974.  Moore Keith L, Dalley Arthur F, Agur Anne M.R. Clinically Oriented Anatomy. 6th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0781775250.
  • 190. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 190 | P a g e  Young Barbara, Lowe James S, Stevens Alan, Heath John W, Deakin Philip J. Wheater's Functional Histology: A Text and Color Atlas. 5th ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2006. ISBN-13: 978-0443068508.  Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215. Course Title: MED 210 Endocrine System Textbook: 1. Hinson Joy, Raven Peter, Chew Shern. The Endocrine System - Basic Science and Clinical Conditions. Churchill Livingstone; 2006. ISBN 9780443062377. Additional Readings:  Guyton A C, Hall J E. Textbook of Medical Physiology. 12th ed. Philadelphia: W.B. Sauders: 2010  Vinay Kumar, NelsoFausto, Abul Abbas. Robbins &Cotrans Pathologic Basis of Disease. 8th ed. Saunders; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-1416031215.  Niewoehner Catharine B. Endocrine Pathophysiology. 2nd ed. Hayes Barton Press; 2004. ISBN-13: 978-1593771744. Reference Books:  Jameson Larry J.Harrison's Endocrinology. 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0071741446.  Larsen P Reed, Kronenberg Henry M, MelmedShlomo, Polonsky Kenneth. Williams Textbook of Endocrinology. 12th ed. Saunders; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1437703245.  Gardner David G, Shoback Dolores. Greenspans Basic and Clinical Endocrinology. 9th ed. McGraw-Hill Medical; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0071622431.
  • 191. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 191 | P a g e Phase - III Internal Medicine 1. College Nicki R, Walker Brian R, Ralston Stuart H. Davidson's Principles and Practice of Medicine. 21st ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-0702030857. 2. Alguire Patrick C. Internal Medicine Essentials for Clerkship Students 2007 – 2008. American College of Physicians; 2006. ISBN – 9781930513822. 3. Douglas Graham, Nicol Fiona, Robertson Colin. Macleod's Clinical Examination. 12th ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0443068485. 4. Wolff Klaus, Johnson Richard. Fitzpatrick's Color Atlas and Synopsis of Clinical Dermatology. 6th ed. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2009. ISBN-13: 978-0071599757. General Surgery 1. Williams Norman S, Bulstrode Christopher J.K, O'Connell P Ronan. Bailey and Love's Short Practice of Surgery. 25th ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2008. ISBN-13: 978- 0340939321. 2. Adams George A, Adams Gregg A, Garland, Adella M, Shatney, Clayton H, Sherck John P, Wren Sherry M. Surgery Clerkship Guide. Mosby; 2004. ISBN - 9780323018579. 3. Ciocca Rocco G, Rettie, Candice S, Lowry Stephen F. Learning Surgery: The Surgery Clerkship Manual. Springer; 2010. ISBN-13: 978-1441919786. 4. Browse Norman L., Black John, Burnand Kevin G.,Thomas William E.G. Browse’s Interoduction to the Symptoms and Signs of Surgical Disease. Hodder Arnold; 2005. ISBN: 9780340815793 5. Das.S. A Manual on Clinical Surgery. 9th ed. S.Das’s Publications; 2011. ISBN:9788190568104 6. Crowther Christy L. Primary Orthopedic Care. 2nd ed. Mosby; 2004. ISBN 0323023657. 7. Courtney M. Twwnsend. Sabiston textbook of Surgery. The Biological basis of modern surgical practice. 19th ed. Sounders; 2012. ISBN - 9781437715606 Obstetrics & Gynecology 1. Beckmann. Obstetrics and Gynecology. 6th ed. William & Wilkins; 2010. ISBN 9780781788076. 2. Baker Philip N. Obstetrics by Ten Teachers. 19th ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0340983539.
  • 192. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 192 | P a g e 3. Monga Ash. Gynecology by Ten Teachers. 19th ed. Hodder Arnold Publishers; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0340983546. Pediatrics 1. Kliegman Robert M, Stanton Bonita M.D, Geme Joseph St., Schor Nina F, Behrman Richard E. Nelson Textbook of Pediatrics. 19th ed. Saunders; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-1437707557. 2. Woodhead Jerold C. Pediatric Clerkship Guide. 2nd ed. Mosby; 2008. ISBN-13: 978-0323043335. Otorhinolaryngology 1. Dhillon R.S. Ear Nose & Throat and Head and Neck Surgery: An Illustrated Color Text. 3rd ed. Churchill Livingstone; 2011. ISBN 9780443073113. 2. Dhingra P L. Diseases of Ear, Nose and Throat. 4th ed. Elsevier Science; 2007. ISBN 9788131203279. Ophthalmology 1. Kanski Jack J. Clinical Ophthalmology: A Systematic Approach. 7th ed. Saunders; 2011. ISBN-13: 978-0702040931. 2. Khurana A K. Comprehensive Ophthalmology. 4th ed. New Age international (P) Ltd.; 2007. ISBN 9788122420418.
  • 193. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 193 | P a g e 16.0 Grading, Assessment and Progression Policies Grading Policy: Classification Marks scored in percentage Letter Grade Excellent > = 86 A Good 76-85 B Pass 65-75 C Fail < 65 F Assessment Policy: Assessments in each Phase will be both formative and summative. Phase I Assessment Plan Continuous Assessment: 60% & Professional Examination: 40% Project Work Participation in Quizzes Course Work Semester Examinations Professional Examination 5% 5% 20% 30% 40% Formative Assessments: This includes:  Informal class tests  Assignments  Weekly quizzes (MCQ / SAQ / MEQ / OSPE)  End-course test (Theory / Practical) with feedback on performance  Assessment of student learning outcomes by faculty  Student self-assessment of learning outcomes Summative Assessments: A. Project work: Mini-project in Phase I It is a group activity undertaken by Phase I students and mini-projects based on WHO declared Health Days and are assessed for group activity, team work, and communication skills. B. Participation in Quizzes: Student participation in the formative assessment (s) is mandatory and will count for a maximum of 5% of the summative evaluation in the course.
  • 194. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 194 | P a g e C. Course Work: The matrix for the course work assessment and the marks allocated for each activity in Phase I are as follows: Activity Phase I Contributory Marks Seminars 15 CBL log book 15 CBL / SGL / Tutor Evaluation 15 Practical Record book 15 Assignments 10 CBL Peer Evaluation 05 Reflection 05 Total 80 D. Semester Examinations:  Two semester examinations will be conducted during Phase I and shall contribute 30% of marks towards overall summative assessment  Each course will contribute to the semester examination proportionate to their contact hours  Each semester examination will assess the syllabi covered during the respective semester as follows:  Semester 1 examination: Cell, Molecules & Genes, Tissues & Organs, Embryogenesis & Life Cycle  Semester 2 examination: Metabolism & Nutrition, Internal & External Environment E. Professional Examination: Phase I Professional Examination will be conducted at the end of Semester 2 as a combination of theory, practical and viva voce. The Theory Examination will be in the form of online MCQs and EMIs; SAQs, and MEQs; it shall be integrated and made up of 2 papers, each of 3 hours duration:  Paper I (Cell, Molecules & Genes, Tissues & Organs, Embryogenesis & Life Cycle)  Paper II (Metabolism & Nutrition, Internal & External Environment) The practical examination will be in the form of OSPE; Viva Voce will form part of the practical examination. The student must appear for each component of the examination (Theory paper I, Theory paper II, Practical and Viva Voce). Absence in any one component shall be considered as a disqualification from the examination.
  • 195. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 195 | P a g e Eligibility for appearing in the Professional examination for Phase I require that the student fulfills the following criteria:  It is mandatory to attend all courses in the Phase  The student should have not less than 80% attendance in each course of the Phase  In addition, the student should have a cumulative attendance of not less than 80% for the Phase  The student should have a continuous assessment marks of not less than 60%  Any student who has not fulfilled the above attendance and / or continuous assessment criteria will be detained from appearing for the professional examination and made to repeat a year Re-sit Examination for Phase I  Those students who appeared for the Professional Examination and failed will have a chance to appear for the Re-sit Examination which will be held within 6 weeks after the regular Final Examination is conducted  The students who fail in the Re-sit Examination shall be on probation and would have to re-register and repeat the year along with the next regular batch  They would then take the Final Examination at the end of the repeat year on satisfaction of the eligibility criteria  Those students who fail again in the Final Examination after the repeat year, will have the final chance to appear in the second Re-sit Examination held within 6 weeks of the Final Examination  Those who fail in the second Re-sit examination will be asked to leave the program  Absenteeism will be considered as an attempt
  • 196. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 196 | P a g e Phase II Assessment Plan Continuous Assessment: 60% & Professional Examination: 40% Project Work Participation in Quizzes Course Work Semester Examinations Professional Examination 5% 5% 20% 30% 40% Formative Assessments: This includes:  Informal class tests  Assignments  Weekly quizzes (MCQ / SAQ / MEQ / OSPE / OSCE)  End-course test (Theory / Practical) with feedback on performance  Assessment of student learning outcomes by faculty  Student self-assessment of learning outcomes Summative Assessments: A. Research Project in Phase II The evaluation of Research (Project work) for 40 marks (5%) shall be done by the project supervisors under the direction of Department of Community Medicine and students in small groups are required to carry out a research project and present as a requirement of the curriculum and to be eligible to appear for the Phase II professional examination. B. Participation in Quizzes Student participation in the formative assessment (s) is mandatory and will count for a maximum of 5% of the summative evaluation in the course. C. Course Work The matrix for the course work assessment and the marks allocated for each activity in Phase II are as follows: Activity Phase II Contributory Marks Seminars 30 CBL log book 30 CBL / PBL / SGL / Tutor Evaluation 30 Clinical skills Log book 30 Practical Record book 20 Assignments 10 CBL Peer Evaluation 10 Total 160
  • 197. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 197 | P a g e D. Semester Examinations:  Four semester examinations will be conducted over the period of 2 years of Phase II and shall contribute 30% of marks towards overall summative assessment  Each course will contribute to the semester examination proportionate to their contact hours  Each semester examination will assess the syllabi covered during the respective semester as follows:  Semester 3 examination: Blood and Immune system and Cardiovascular system  Semester 4 examination: Respiratory system, Alimentary system and Urinary system  Semester 5 examination: Endocrine system and Reproductive system  Semester 6 examination: Nervous system, Musculoskeletal system and Integumentary system  Each semester examination will have a theory and practical component  The theory component of the semester examinations will consist of online MCQs and SAQs / MEQs  The practical component of the semester examination will comprise of OSPE / OSCE and Viva Voce E. Professional Examination Phase II Professional Examination will be conducted at the end of Semester 6 as a combination of theory, practical and viva-voce. Components Portions Composition Duration Mode Theory Paper I All organ-system courses Only MCQ consisting of 160 test-items 4 hrs. Online Theory Paper II Integrating all organ- systems Only SAQ & MEQ 3 hrs. ‘Paper-and- pencil’ Practical Examination Integrated among courses Integrated OSPE / OSCE (including orals) - Face-to-face The Theory paper I is the International Federation of Medicine (IFOM) – Basic Sciences examination conducted online by the National Board of Medical Examiners (NBME). The student must appear for each component of the examination (Theory paper I, Theory paper II, Practical and Viva Voce). Absence in any one component shall be considered as a disqualification from the examination.
  • 198. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 198 | P a g e Eligibility for appearing in the Professional examination for Phase II requires that the student fulfill the following criteria:  It is mandatory to attend all courses in the Phase  The student should have not less than 80% attendance in each course of the Phase  In addition, the student should have an cumulative attendance of not less than 80% for the Phase  The student should have a continuous assessment marks of not less than 60%  If the student has less than 80% attendance and or less than 60% CA, he or she shall be detained from appearing for the Professional Examination  From 2012 batch onwards, a student who has not fulfilled the above attendance and / or continuous assessment criteria will be detained from appearing for the Professional Examination and made to repeat a year and those who appeared for the professional examination and failed alone would be permitted to take the re-sit examination. Re-sit Examination for Phase II  Those students who were detained due to lack of attendance and / or continuous assessment marks (till 2011 batch) or those students who appeared for the Final Examination and failed will have a chance to appear for the Re-sit Examination which will be held within 6 weeks after the regular Final Examination is conducted for Phase II  The students who fail in the Re-sit Examination shall be on probation and would have to re-register and repeat the year along with the next regular batch  They would then take the Final Examination at the end of the repeat year on satisfaction of the eligibility criteria  Those students who fail again in the Final Examination after the repeat year, will have the final chance to appear in the second Re-sit Examination held within 6 weeks of the Final Examination  Those who fail in the second Re-sit examination will be asked to leave the program  Absenteeism will be considered as an attempt
  • 199. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 199 | P a g e Phase III Assessment Plan Continuous Assessment: 60% & Professional Examination: 40% Phase III Quizzes Course Work Semester Examinations Professional Examination Total % 10% 20% 30% 40% 100% Marks 100 200 300 400 1000 Formative Assessment: This includes:  Direct Observation of Clinical Skills (DOCS)  Assessment of clinical skills and attitudes by clinical supervisors and other members of the health care delivery team  Faculty assessment of case presentations and case discussions by the student followed by feedback  Assessment of student learning outcomes by faculty  Student self-assessment of learning outcomes Summative Assessments: A. Quizzes: Includes:  Course tests conducted at the end of each course in Phase III year 1  OSCE conducted at the end of each rotation in Phase III year 1 & 2  Professional attributes throughout the rotations (Punctuality / Discipline, Communication Skills, Professional behavior towards patients & peers, Data gathering)  Contributes 10% or 100 / 1000 marks towards overall summative assessment B. Course Work: 20% amounting to 200 / 1000 is distributed as: Activity Phase III Mark Distribution IV MBBS (GMCH) V MBBS (Al Mafraq) Seminars 10 10 - Tutor evaluation of SGL 20 10 10 CBL records 10 10 - Clinical log book 40 10 30 DOCS 60 30 30 General Clinics 30 30 - RIME 30 - 30 Total 200 100 100
  • 200. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 200 | P a g e C. Semester Examinations:  Four semester examinations shall be conducted in Phase III as follows:  Semester 7 & 8 examinations in Phase III, year 1 (IV MBBS)  Semester 9 & 10 examinations in Phase III year 2 (V MBBS)  Semester 7 & 9 examinations will have only theory component as all students do not have an uniform clinical learning experience at this point  Semester 8 & 10 will have theory and integrated OSCE components as all students would have completed a 40-week clinical rotation  Semester 9 examination will be conducted in GMU and will comprise of 5 different papers for the 5 different clinical groups of students; they would be tested in the respective portions covered in their clinical & classroom teaching sessions.  The 4 semester examinations together will contribute 30% of marks (300 / 1000) towards overall summative assessment D. Professional examination: Clinical 60% & Theory 40% Components Portions Composition Duration Mode Theory Paper I All organ-system courses Only MCQ consisting of 160 test-items 4 hrs. Online Theory Paper II Integrating all organ- systems Only SAQ & MEQ 3 hrs. ‘Paper-and- pencil’ Clinical Examination Integrated among clinical disciplines Integrated OSCE (including orals) - Face-to-face The Theory paper I is the International Federation of Medicine (IFOM) – Clinical Sciences examination conducted online by the National Board of Medical Examiners (NBME). Eligibility for appearing in the Phase III Professional examination requires that the student fulfill the following criteria:  It is mandatory to attend all courses / clinical rotations in Phase III  The student should have not less than 80% attendance in each course / clinical rotation of Phase III  In addition, the student should have a cumulative attendance of not less than 80% for Phase III  The student should have a continuous assessment marks of not less than 60%  If the student has less than 80% attendance and or less than 60% CA, he or she shall be detained from appearing for the Professional Examination
  • 201. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 201 | P a g e Re-sit Examination for Phase III  Those students who were detained due to lack of attendance and / or continuous assessment marks or those students who appeared for the Final Examination and failed will have a chance to appear for the Re-sit Examination which will be held within 6 months after the regular Final Examination is conducted  These students will undergo remedial clinical rotations in core disciplines before the resit examination  Those students who fail in the re-sit examination will have to again repeat the clerkship in the core disciplines of Internal Medicine, General Surgery, Obstetrics and Gynecology, and Pediatrics and they will have the final chance to appear for the second Re-sit Examination held after 6 months of the first re-sit examination  Those who fail in the second Re-sit examination will be asked to leave the program  Absenteeism will be considered as an attempt Requirements for Passing the Professional / Re-sit Examination (Phase I / II / III)  The student must appear for each component (Theory paper I, Theory paper II, Practical / Clinical and Viva-Voce) of the examination  Absence in any one component shall be considered as a disqualification from the examination  An aggregate score of 65% in both theory and practical / clinical examinations is required for passing the professional examination Academic Progression Policy  The progress of students through the semesters within each Phase would be continuous  Those students who fail in Phase I / II examinations will not be allowed to progress to the next phase  Those students who fail in Phase III examinations will not be eligible to commence the internship Degree Completion Requirements: The student will be commended for the award of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery Degree upon:  Being continuously enrolled in the program from admission to graduation  Having satisfied all conditions of his or her admission  Attaining a minimum attendance of not less than 80% in each course and in each Phase  Submission of a research project  Successful completion of a comprehensive professional examination (Phase III) with an overall score of not less than 65%  Successful completion of 52 weeks of Compulsory Resident Rotating Internship (CRRI) program with satisfactory evaluation  The student shall complete the program within a maximum period of 10 years.
  • 202. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 202 | P a g e 17.0 Deans List of Toppers MBBS Phase – I Professional Examination (2012 Batch) - July 2013 Reg. No. Name Max. Mark Marks Obtained Percentage 2012M046 Ms. Shahd Munir Odeh Farajallah 400 365 91 2012M002 Ms. Munira Abubakar Matawalle 400 353 88 2012M016 Mr. Mohammad Sazzadul Huque 400 352 88 MBBS Phase – II Professional Examination (2010 Batch) - July 2013 Reg. No. Name Max. Mark Marks Obtained Percentage 2010M025 Mr. Mehdi Saeedan 800 737 92 2010M029 Ms. Rose Sneha George 800 719 90 2010M026 Ms. Yasmin Ghazvini Kor 800 706 88 MBBS Phase – III Professional Examination (2008 Batch) - July 2013 Reg. No. Name Max. Mark Marks Obtained Percentage 2008M010 Ms. Gowri Karuppasamy 1000 895 90 2008M007 Ms. Fatima Bala Shehu 1000 841 84 2008M003 Ms. Falak Abdul Jabbar Sayed 1000 830 83
  • 203. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 203 | P a g e 18.0 Administrators & Faculty Administrators Mr. Thumbay Moideen Founder President Prof. Gita Ashok Raj Provost Dr. P.K. Menon Director, Administration Prof. Mohammed Arifulla Dean, Admissions & Registers Prof. R. Chandramouli Dean, Assessment & Evaluation Prof. Manda Venkatramana Dean, College of Medicine Dr. Ghaith Jassim Jaber Al Eyd Associate Dean, College of Medicine Dr. Joshua Ashok Associate Dean Student Affairs Prof. K.G. Gomathi Associate Dean, Admissions & Registers Dr. Rizwana B Shaikh Associate Dean, Assessment & Evaluation List of Faculty Members Faculty of Biomedical Sciences Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. R. Chandramouli MSc – 1972 PhD - 1981 University of Madras, India Dean Assessment & Evaluation and Professor and Head of the Department of Physiology Prof. Bushra Hasan Elshafei Elzawahry M.B.B.Ch – 1983 MSc – 1993 MD (PhD) - 1997 Al-Azhar University, Egypt Professor, Department of Physiology Prof. Hemant Kumar Garg MBBS – 1984 MD - 1992 Aligarh Muslim University, India Professor of Pharmacology Prof. Jayakumary Muttappallymyalil MBBS – 1993 MD - 1998 Bangalore University, India Professor of Community Medicine Prof. K. G. Gomathi MSc. – 1985 PhD - 1993 All India Institute of Medical Sciences, India Associate Dean – Admission & Registers and Professor, Department of Biochemistry Dr. Ramesh Ranganathan MBBS – 1994 MD - 2001 NTR University of Health Sciences, India Associate Dean – Graduate Studies and Associate Professor & Head of the Department of Microbiology Dr. Joshua Ashok MBBS - 1984 MD - 1992 University of Madras, India M.G.R. University, India Associate Dean – Student Affairs and Associate Professor & Head of the Department of Forensic Medicine Dr. Rizwana Burhanuddin Shaikh MBBS - 1992 MD - 1999 Bangalore University, India Kevempu University, India Associate Dean, Assessment & Evaluation and Associate Professor, Department of Community Medicine
  • 204. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 204 | P a g e Dr. Nelofar Sami Khan MSc. – 1994 PhD - 1998 Aligarh Muslim University, India Associate Professor, Department of Biochemistry Dr. Razia Khanam B. Pharm – 1997 M. Pharm – 1999 PhD - 2006 Hamdard University, India Associate Professor of Pharmacology Dr. Ghaith Jassim Jaber Al Eyd* MBChB - 1995 MSc. - 1999 PhD - 2005 Al-Nahrain University, Iraq Associate Dean – College of Medicine and Associate Professor, Department of Pathology Dr. Syed Shehnaz Ilyas MBBS – 1995 MD - 2002 Dr. M.G.R. Medical University, India Assistant Professor, Department of Pharmacology Dr. May Khalil Ismail MSc. – 1986 PhD - 2006 Colarado State University, USA University of Mosul, Iraq Assistant Professor, Department of Biochemistry Dr. Nisha Shantha Kumari MBBS – 1999 MD – 2005 DNB - 2005 University of Kerala, India University of Kerala, India National Board of Examinations, India Assistant Professor, Department of Physiology Dr. Anuj Mathur MBBS – 1996 MD - 2004 University of Rajasthan, India Assistant Professor of Microbiology Dr. Sajit Khan Ahmed Khan MBBS – 1995 MD - 2006 Bangalore University, India Annamalai University, India Assistant Professor, Department of Microbiology Dr. Biswadip Hazarika MBBS – 1990 MD – 2004 Dibrugarh University, India Assistant Professor of Pathology Dr. Anu Vinod Ranade MSc – 1996 PhD - 2007 MAHE, Manipal – India Assistant Professor of Anatomy Dr. Miral Nagy Fahmy Salama MB.B.Ch – 1996 MSc – 2002 MD - 2007 Ain Shams University, Egypt Assistant Professor of Anatomy Dr. Kannan Narsimhan MBBS – 1998 MD - 2004 Pondicherry University, India Assistant Professor of Physiology Dr. Faheem Ahmed Khanzada MBBS – 1998 MPH - 2006 University of Karachi, Pakistan University of Malaya, Malaysia Senior Lecturer, Department of Community Medicine Dr. Mohammad Mesbahuzzaman MBBS – 1998 MD - 2011 University of Dhaka, Bangladesh Lecturer, Department of Pathology Ms. Soofia Ahmed MSc – 1986 MPhil - 1989 University of Karachi, Pakistan Lecturer, Department of Physiology Dr. Shiny Prabha Mohan MBBS – 2003 MD - 2008 University of Kerala, India Lecturer, Department of Pathology Ms. Suni Ebby BSc – 1996 MSc - 1999 Kerala University, India MG University, India Lecturer in Anatomy Dr. Lisha Jenny John MBBS – 2003 MD - 2008 Rajiv Ghandhi University of Health Sciences, India Lecturer in Pharmacology
  • 205. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 205 | P a g e Dr. Liju Susan Mathew MBBS – 2006 MS - 2010 Gulf Medical University, UAE Baba Farid University of Health Sciences, India Lecturer, Department of Anatomy Ms. Devapriya Finney Shadroch BSc – 1985 MSc - 1988 University of Madras, India Lecturer, Department of Microbiology Dr. Nishida Chandrasekharan MBBS – 2005 MS (Ortho) - 2006 Manipal Academy of Higher Education, India Kathmandu University, Nepal Lecturer, Simulation Centre Dr. Mehzabin Ahmed MBBS – 1996 DCP - 2000 Bangalore University, India Rajiv Ghandhi University of Health Sciences, India Demonstrator, Department of Pathology Dr. Nada A. Kadhum* MBChB - 2000 Al Mustanseria University, Iraq Demonstrator, Department of Anatomy Dr. Elias Alkayal MBBS – 2006 Masters in General Pathology - 2010 University of Aleppo, Syria Demonstrator, Department of Pathology Dr. Priya Sajith MBBS – 1995 Diploma in Clinical Pathology - 2001 Dr. MGR Medical University, India University of Kerala, India Demonstrator, Department of Microbiology and Coordinator CCE&CO Dr. Syed Morteza Mahmoudi MBBS – 2011 Gulf Medical University, Ajman, UAE Demonstrator, Dept. of Anatomy Dr. Erum Khan MBBS - 2001 University of Punjab, Pakistan Simulation Instructor Dr. Zannatul Ferdous MBBS – 2007 MPH – 2010 University of Science & technology, Bangladesh North South University, Bangladesh Clinical Tutor Dr. Farhat Fatima MBBS – 2007 University of Karachi, Pakistan Clinical Tutor Dr. Lubna Ahmed MBBS – 2007 University of Karachi, Pakistan Clinical Tutor Dr. Rida Zainab MBBS – 2011 University of Health Sciences, Pakistan Clinical Tutor *on Sabbatical Leave
  • 206. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 206 | P a g e Faculty of Clinical Sciences Internal Medicine Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Shaik Altaf Basha MBBS - 1974 MD - 1978 University of Madras, India Clinical Professor & Head of the Department Prof. Salwa Abdelzaher Mabrouk M.B.B.Ch – 1976 M.S - 1982 M.D - 1992 Ain Shams University, Egypt Clinical Professor Dr. Mahir Khalil Ibrahim Jallo M.B.B.Ch - 1981 Certificate of Arab Board of Internal Medicine - 1992 University of Mosul, Iraq Arab Board of Medical Specialization Clinical Associate Professor Dr. Mohammed Khalid MBBS – 2002 MD – 2007 MRCP - 2011 Rajiv Gandhi University of Medical Science, India Manipal University, India The Royal College of Physicians, UK Clinical Lecturer Cardiology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Ehab Moheyeldin Farag Esheiba M.B.B.Ch – 1995 Diploma in Internal Medicine – 1999 MSc - 2004 MRCP - 2009 Alexandria University, Egypt Cairo University, Egypt Zagazigu University, Egypt The Royal College of Physicians, UK Clinical Assistant Professor & Head of the Department Dr. Mohamed Ahmed Mohamed Fathi Ahmed MBBS – 1995 MSc – 2003 Alexandria University, Egypt Clinical Lecturer Neurology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Adnan Jalkhi MD – 1987 PhD - 1995 Aleppo University, Syria Saint Petersburg Postgraduate Medical Academy Clinical Associate Professor Dr. Mohamed Hamdy Ibrahim Abdalla M.B.B.Ch – 1999 MSc – 2005 MD - 2008 Ain Shams University, Egypt Clinical Assistant Professor Dermatology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Irene Nirmala Thomas MBBS – 1986 MD – 1997 Diploma in Dermatology – 2004 University of Madras, India Dr. MGR University, India Royal College of Physicians & Surgeons of Glasgow, UK Clinical Professor and Head of the Department
  • 207. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 207 | P a g e Dr. Wesam Khadum M.B.B.Ch - 1992 FICMS - 2005 Al-Mustanseriah University, Iraq Iraqi Commission for Medical Specialization Clinical Assistant Professor Psychiatry Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Mohanad Abdulrahman Abdul Wahid MBChB - 1984 FICMS - 1999 (Psychiatry) Al Mustansiriya, University, Iraq Iraqi Commission for Medical Specialization, Iraq Clinical Lecturer & Head of the Department General Surgery Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Yassin Malallah Taher Al-Musawi MBChB - 1974 FRCS - 1983 Baghdad University, Iraq Royal College of Surgeons, Glasgow - U.K Clinical Professor & Head of the Department Prof. Manda Venkatramana MBBS - 1987 MS - 1990 FRCS - 2001 Saurashtra University, India Saurashtra University, India Royal College of Surgeons, Edinburg, U.K Dean College of Medicine and Clinical Professor Dr. Pradeep Kumar Sharma MBBS – 1984 MS – 1997 MRCS - 2010 Andhra University, India University of Mumbai Royal College of Surgeons in Ireland Clinical Associate Professor Dr. Mohanad Mohamad Sultan MBChB - 1996 FICMS – 2004 CABS – 2004 MRCS - 2008 Al Mustansiriya University, Iraq Iraqi Commission for Medical Specialization, Iraq Arab Commission of Medical Specialization, Syria Royal College of Physicians & Surgeons of Glasgow, UK Clinical Lecturer Dr. Mohamed Sobhy Badr Sobei MBBCh – 2001 MSc – 2005 Al Azhar University, Egypt Clinical Lecturer Orthopedics Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Sujaad Al Badran MBChB - 1972 FRCS – 1984 Mosul University, Iraq Royal College of Surgeons, Edinburg – UK Clinical Associate Professor & Head of the Department Dr. Amit Chaturvedi MBBS - 1993 MS – 1999 DNB - 1999 MNAMS - 2004 Nagpur University, India University of Calcutta, India National Board of Examinations, India National Academy of Medical Sciences, India Clinical Associate Professor
  • 208. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 208 | P a g e Radiology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Tarek Fawzy Abdou Abd El Ghaffar MBBCh - 1988 MSc - 1993 Cairo University, Egypt Clinical Lecturer & Head of the Department Anesthesiology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Raji Sharma MBBS – 1989 MD - 1998 Kerala University, India University of Mumbai, India Clinical Associate Professor & Head of the Department Dr. Sona Chaturvedi MBBS - 1994 MD - 2001 Nagpur University, India Nagpur University, India Clinical Assistant Professor Dr. Arun Kumar Muthu Subramanian MBBS – 1994 MD - 1999 Dr. MGR University, India Gandhi Medical College, India Clinical Lecturer Urology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Ihsan Ullah Khan MBBS – 1985 MS – 1996 MRCS - 2007 Punjab University, Pakistan The Royal College of Surgeons of Edinburg, UK Assistant Director Academic Affairs and Clinical Associate Professor & Head of the Department Otorhinolaryngology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Tambi Abraham Cherian M.B.B.S – 1984 DLO - 1989 MS – 1992 DNB - 1992 Madras University, India Dr. MGR University, India Dr. MGR University, India National Board of Examinations, India Clinical Professor and Head of the Department Prof. Meenu Khurana Cherian MBBS – 1987 DLO – 1991 MS - 1994 Madras University, India Dr. MGR University, India Dr. MGR University, India Director Academic Affairs and Clinical Professor Dr. Effat Radwan Isaa Radwan M.B.B.Ch.B - 1969 MS - 1983 University of Cairo, Egypt Ain Shams University, Egypt Clinical Lecturer
  • 209. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 209 | P a g e Ophthalmology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Salwa Abd El-Razak Attia MBBCh – 1975 MS – 1981 Fellowship in Cornea and Refractive Surgery – 1991 MD - 2000 Alexandria University, Egypt Alexandria University, Egypt Atlanta University, USA Alexandria University, Egypt Clinical Professor & Head of the Department Dr. Pankaj Lamba MBBS – 1997 Diploma in Ophthalmology – 2001 DNB – 2004 FRCS - 2004 Nagpur University, India Aligarh Muslim University, India National Board of Examinations, India Royal College of Physicians & Surgeons, UK Clinical Assistant Professor Obstetrics & Gynecology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Mawahib Abd Salman Al Biate M.B.Ch.B - 1980 Arab Board for Medical Specialization DGO - 1988 Basrah University, Iraq Arab Board, Syria College of Mustansiriya, Iraq Clinical Professor & Head of the Department Dr. Kasturi Anil Mummigatti MBBS - 1981 MD - 1986 Bangalore University, India Clinical Professor Dr. Prashanth Hegde MBBS – 1992 MD – 2003 DNB - 2004 Mysore University, India All India Institute of Medical Sciences, India National Board of Examinations, India Clinical Assistant Professor Dr. Shanti Therese Fernandes MBBS – 1998 MD - 2002 Manipal Academy of Higher Education, India Clinical Assistant Professor Dr. Malini Vijayan MBBS – 1990 DGO – 2003 DNB - 2005 MG University, India Kerala University, India National Board of Examinations , India Clinical Lecturer Dr. Wajiha Ajmal MBBS – 1997 FCPS - 2005 University of Peshawar, Pakistan College of Physicians & Surgeons, Pakistan Clinical Lecturer Dr. Dipti Navanitlal Shah MBBS – 1994 Diploma in OBG - 1997 The Maharaja Sayajirao University of Baroda, India Clinical Tutor Pediatrics Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Mahmoud Elsayed Attia Shamseldeen M.B.B.Ch - 1976 MSc - 1981 MD - 1985 Al Azhar University, Egypt Clinical Professor & Head of the Department
  • 210. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 210 | P a g e Prof. Imad Oudah Emnakher Al Sadoon MB.Ch.B – 1976 DCH – 1983 MRCP – 1983 FRCP - 1985 University of Basrah, Iraq The Royal College of Physicians of London, UK Clinical Professor Prof. Ignatius Edwin D’Souza MBBS – 1991 MD - 1996 MRCPCH - 2007 Bangalore University, India Post Graduate Institute of Medical Education & Research, India Royal College of Pediatrics & Child Health, U.K Clinical Professor Dr. Jenny Cheriathu MBBS – 2001 DCH – DNB - 2009 University of Mumbai, India Shivaji University, India National Board of Examinations, India Clinical Lecturer Faculty of Graduate Studies Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Gita Ashok Raj MBBS – 1970 MD - 1979 MNAMS – 1981 (Morbid Anatomy) Shivaji University, India All India Institute of Medical Sciences, India National Board of Examinations, India Professor & Head of the Department of Pathology Prof. Mohammed Arifulla MSc – 1973 PhD - 1984 University of Mysore, India University of Madras, India Professor & Head of the Department of Pharmacology Prof. Ishtiyaq Ahmed Shaafie MBBS – 1977 MD – 1983 Kashmir University, India Chandigarh University, India Professor & Head of the Department of Biochemistry Prof. Shatha Saeed Hamed Al Sharbathi MBChB – 1976 DCM – 1985 MSc – 1989 PhD - 1998 Baghdad University, Iraq Professor & Head of the Department of Community Medicine Prof. Elsheba Mathew MBBS - 1977 MD - 1986 M Phil - 1994 Madras University, India Madras University, India Mahatma Gandhi University, India Professor, Department of Community Medicine Prof. Joyce Jose MBBS – 1984 MD - 1990 Kerala University Mahatma Gandhi University, India Professor, Department of Pathology Prof. Mandar Vilas Ambike MBBS – 1989 MS - 1996 Shivaji University, India Pune University, India Professor & Head of the Department of Anatomy Prof. Anoop Kumar Agarwal Master of Veterinary Science – 1985 PhD – 1988 Haryana Agriculture University, India Postgraduate Institute of Medical Education & Research, India Professor of Pharmacology
  • 211. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 211 | P a g e Prof. Jayadevan Sreedharan MSc (Statistics) – 1990 PhD (Statistics) – 2000 Diploma in Cancer Prevention – 2002 PhD (Epidemiology) - 2008 Annamalai University, India Kerala University, India National Cancer Institute, USA Tampere University, Finland Assistant Director Statistical Support Facility and Professor of Biostatistics Dr. Preetha Jayasheela Shetty MSc – 2000 BEd – 2006 PhD - 2011 Mangalore University, India Bharatiya Shiksha Parishad, India Osmaniya University, India Assistant Professor in Cytogenetics & Molecular Biology Dr. Victor Raj Mohan Chandrasekaran MSc – 2001 Ph.D - 2006 Bharathiar University, India University of Madras, India Assistant Professor of Toxicology Dr. Kartik Janak Dave MBBS – 1990 MD - 1993 Gujarat University, India Lecturer, Dept. of Pathology Dr. Nehmat El Banna EP. Ziad El Banna MBBS – 2000 MS CP - 2012 The Lebanese University, Lebanon Gulf Medical University, UAE Graduate Program Coordinator and Demonstrator Centre for Advanced Biomedical Research & Innovation (CABRI) Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Prof. Palat Krishna Menon MBBS – 1981 MD – 1989 PhD - 1996 University of Pune, India University of Pune, India Rajiv Gandhi University of Health Sciences, India Director CABRI & Professor of Research Dr. Tatjana Ille MD – 1993 MSc – 1995 PhD - 1999 University of Belgrade, Serbia Professor of Statistics Dr. Monalisa Panda MBBS – 2000 MD - 2008 Utkal University, India University of Mumbai, India Technical Scientist CABRI & Adjunct Lecturer General Education Faculty English Language Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Mr. Clint Freeman BA – 1991 MA - 2009 IOWA State University, USA IOWA State University, USA Adjunct Instructor Information Technology Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Mr. Suraj Kochuthoppil Sebastian MSc (Software Engineering) - 2010 Sathyabama University, India Adjunct Lecturer Physics Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Meena Varma V K BSc – 1988 MSc – 1990 PhD - 1997 Mahatma Gandhi University, India University of Kerala, India University of Kerala, India Adjunct Lecturer
  • 212. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 212 | P a g e Mathematics Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Ms. Rejitha Biju BSc – 2001 MSc – 2003 BEd - 2004 Mahatma Gandhi University, India Adjunct Instructor Behavioral Science Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Radhika Taroor MPhil – 2006 PhD - 2011 Bharathiar University, India Mother Teresa Women’s University, India Adjunct Assistant Professor Human Behavior & Socialization Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Ms. Avula Kameswari BA – 1996 MA – 1998 BEd - 2007 Nagarjuna University, India Adjunct Instructor Islamic Studies Name Qualifications Conferring University Designation Dr. Ahmed Sebihi Bachelor in Theology – 1992 MA – 2008 PhD - 2011 Amir Abd Al-Qadir University, Algeria Universiti Sains Malaysia, Malaysia Adjunct Instructor
  • 213. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 213 | P a g e List of Faculty – Mafraq Hospital Department: Obstetrics & Gynecology No. Name Title 1 Dr. Mini Ravi Consultant 2 Dr. Karim Medhat Elmasry Consultant 3 Dr. Farha Consultant 4 Dr. Shabnam Faheem Ahamed Specialist 5 Dr. Zakiya Specialist 6 Dr. Mercy Beljouri Specialist 7 Dr. Deepti Kansal Specialist 8 Dr. Soumya Srivastava Specialist Department: Pediatrics 9 Dr. Ali Memon Consultant 10 Dr. Waseem Fathalla Consultant 11 Dr. Asma Deeb Consultant 12 Dr. Faisal Ezzeddin Consultant 13 Dr. Fathima Hashem ibrahim Consultant 14 Dr. Khaled Zameel Consultant 15 Dr. Laila Obaid Qambar Obaid Consultant 16 Dr. Saggaff Al Saggaff Consultant 17 Dr. Anwar Wajdi Sallam Consultant 18 Dr. Wafa Naji Jaber Specialist 19 Dr. Mohamed Yasser Abd El Specialist 20 Dr. Amer Mehmood Khan Specialist 21 Dr. Shahid Rashid Specialist 22 Dr. Sajeev Vengalath Specialist 23 Dr. Ahmad Abdel Aziz Specialist 24 Dr. Khaled Mohammed Al Baiti Specialist 25 Dr. Salwa Adam Specialist 26 Dr. Dina Ahmed Saleh Specialist 27 Dr. Nishar Ahmed Bathoolunnisa Manager of Dietetics Department: Internal Medicine 28 Dr. Ahmed Osman Shatila Consultant 29 Dr. Ahmed Mohsin Ibn Mahfoudh Consultant 30 Dr. Udugama Ajit Goonetileke Consultant 31 Dr. Amine Rekab Consultant 32 Dr. Ashraf Mohd El Ghul Consultant 33 Dr. Baher al Homsi Consultant 34 Dr. Mahamad Tarek Bakri Consultant 35 Dr. Nahlla Dolly Consultant 36 Dr. Aladdin Maarroui Consultant 37 Dr. Aref Ahmad Chehal Consultant
  • 214. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 214 | P a g e 38 Dr. Babar Navid Hassan Consultant 39 Dr. Thar El Baage Consultant 40 Dr. Iman Aboobacker Consultant 41 Dr. Mike Muhannad Bismar Consultant 42 Dr. Mustafa Al Maini Consultant 43 Dr. Shobhit Sinha Consultant 44 Dr. Samer Muhammad Nuhaily Consultant 45 Dr. Sarah Hussain Khan Consultant 46 Dr. Shakkir Hussain Specialist 47 Dr. Ahmed Shahat Saber Shehata Specialist 48 Dr. Farooq Ahmad Mir Specialist 49 Dr. P. C. Sudhir Kumar Specialist 50 Dr. Lidia Sanchez-Riera Specialist Physician 51 Dr. Syed Yousef Abbas Medical Practitioner Department: Surgery 52 Dr. Abdul Karim Al Fahim Consultant 53 Dr. Yasir Ali Ahmed Suliman Consultant 54 Dr. Ateq Mohsen Consultant 55 Dr. Abdul Nasser Hachem Consultant 56 Dr. Hanaa Madani Consultant 57 Dr. Rashid Al Shaeel Consultant 58 Dr. Seliman Gebran Consultant 59 Dr. Bader Abdullah Al Hashmi Consultant 60 Dr. Michael Stephen Ajemian Consultant 61 Dr. Fawzi Al Ayoubi Consultant 62 Dr. Nahed Ahmed Balalaa Specialist 63 Dr. Mohd. Rahmatulla Korambayil Specialist 64 Dr. Nijamuddin Syed Specialist 65 Dr. Raj Kumar Manickam Specialist 66 Dr. Shakkir Hussain Specialist 67 Dr. Mohd Husin Al Fahil Specialist 68 Dr. Amin Mohamed El Helw Specialist 69 Dr. Ziayazan sabbah Specialist 70 Dr. Abdul Nasser Koroth Specialist 71 Dr. Farook Bacha Specialist 72 Dr. Heyssam Gibboui Specialist Department: PHC 73 Dr. Bassam Khaled Specialist 74 Dr. Khulood Obaid Specialist 75 Dr. Medhat Sayed Specialist 76 Dr. Raiham Mohamed Yousef Specialist 77 Dr. George Cherian Medical Practitioner 78 Dr. Habib Khan Medical Practitioner
  • 215. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 215 | P a g e 79 Dr. Inshirah Awadh Medical Practitioner 80 Dr. Javed Memon Medical Practitioner 81 Dr. Khalid Hassan Medical Practitioner 82 Dr. Mohammed Elyas Medical Practitioner 83 Dr. Mona Mohammed Medical Practitioner 84 Dr. Najla Mohd. Medical Practitioner 85 Dr. Saly Phillip Medical Practitioner 86 Dr. Shirley Lewis Medical Practitioner 87 Dr. Sumaya Abdel Moneim Medical Practitioner 88 Dr. Tauheed Najmul Qamar Medical Practitioner 89 Dr. Amani Ramses Medical Practitioner 90 Dr. Elsayeda Khafagy Medical Practitioner 91 Dr. Fatima Al Mahmood Medical Practitioner 92 Dr. Gamal Sulaiman Medical Practitioner Department: Psychiatry 93 Dr. Abdulnaser Arida Consultant 94 Dr. Hassan Said Ahmed Consultant 95 Dr. Mohamad Al Garhy Consultant 96 Dr. Tarek Shahrour Consultant 97 Dr. Alaa Ibrahim Haweel Consultant 98 Dr. Ahmad Almai Consultant 99 Dr. Gamal Mousa Consultant 100 Dr. Adel El Shiekh Consultant 101 Dr. Medhat El Sabbahi Consultant 102 Dr. Mufeed M.S. Raoof Specialist 103 Dr. Ahmad El Boraie Specialist Department: Ophthalmology 104 Dr. Khaled Abuhaleeqa Consultant 105 Dr. Ramzi Ghanem Consultant 106 Dr. Rani Jacob Specialist Department: ENT 107 Dr. Mondy Hammad Consultant 108 Dr. Amin Al-Menhaly Consultant 109 Dr. Hilal Omar Specialist 110 Dr. Sanooj Sayed Specialist 111 Dr. Zafeer Ahmed Specialist Department: Accident & Emergency 112 Dr. Jehad Awad Consultant 113 Dr. Biniam Tesfayohannes Consultant 114 Dr. Jamal Saadah Consultant
  • 216. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 216 | P a g e List of Faculty – Umm Al Quwain Hospital Department: Anesthesia – ICU Department: Internal Medicine Dr. Mohammed Taisser Almasry MRCP (1) 1987 Consultant – Head of Department (teaching skill) Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Salah Eldin Taha Elebidi MD Cardiology 1988 Consultant (teaching skill) Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Mustafa Sayed Abdul Aziz MD 2001 Consultant – Associate Professor Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Hassan Ahmed Hassane MRCP Consultant Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Jafar Sadik Mahdi Arab Board Consultant (teaching skill) Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Mohammed Abdul Maksood Mansor Diploma Medicine 1996 Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Akram Yousef Alkhaldi MBBS GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Mohammed Islam MBBS GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Name Degree MOH Designation GMU Rank Dr. Osama Ahmed Zayed MD (Anes) Consultant-Head of Department - Professor Director Clerkship & HOD Anesthesia Dr. Ahmed Abdel Wahab Hassanien MD (Anes) 1989 Consultant – Associate Professor Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Obey Mohammed El Hasan Shaker MD (Anes) 1991 Consultant – Professor Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Iffat Haque Kadri MD 1994 Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Mohamad Galal Gheith MSc (Anes) 1996 Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Mohammed Abdulla Mohamed Elsayed MSc (Anes) 1995 Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Ghassan Nouri Awad MD (Anes) Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
  • 217. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 217 | P a g e Department: Nephrology Dr. Medhat Ali Ahmed Aref MD 2000 Consultant – Head of Department – Associate Professor Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Hosam Mohammed Abdullah Abdellatif MSc, MRCP Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Department: Ophthalmology Dr. Haifa Abdulghani Nassief FRCS Consultant-Head of Department-Associate Professor Adjunct Clinical Assoc. Professor Department: ENT Dr. Mohammad Magdy Zakaria MD (ENT) Consultant-Head of Department-Professor Adjunct Clinical Assoc. Professor Dr. Akram Awad Metwally MD (ENT) Consultant - Lecturer Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Syed Zubair Ahmed Hashmi Specialist Department: PHC Dr. Mustafa Taha El Shabrawy GP - Head of Department Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Sameh Mohamed Abdel Satar Abu El Khair GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
  • 218. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 218 | P a g e List of Faculty – Sheikh Khalifa Bin Zayed Hospital Medical Department Orthopedics Department Dr. Waguih El Sissi MD, Ortho 1980 Consultant A & H. O. D Adjunct Clinical Assoc. Professor Dr. Mohamed Fahmy MBBS, MSc Ortho 1987, FRCS-1996 Consultant A Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Magdy Helmy Ibrahim Aly Elbaroudy MBBCh, MS ortho 1987, FRCS 2000 Consultant A Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Raad Abdulla Salman FICMS - 1994 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Karim Mohd Saied MS Ortho 2000 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Vinith Zachariah John MBBS, DNB & MCH (Orth) Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Emad Aziz Tawfik Masters (Orth) 2007 Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Ramadan K. R Arafa MBBS 2002 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Name Degree MOH Designation GMU Rank Dr. Fadhil Al Douri MB,Ch.B, MRCP (UK) 1979, FRCP (London) 1991 Consultant A, HOD Director, Clerkship & H O D Medicine Dr. Fadil H. K. Alazawi Iraqi Board MRCP (UK) Consultant B Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Ismail Al Bagdadi MBChB, MBBD, MD 1998, Cardiology - Romania Consultant B Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Medhat Mukhtar MBBS, MSc Medicine 1989 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Rhamadan AlSaeed MRCP Part I (2005), Dip Emerg. Med 2004 GP Clinical Tutor Dr. Ayman Abdel Moti Younes MBBS 2004 GP Clinical Tutor
  • 219. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 219 | P a g e Pediatrics Department Dr. Nadim Ahmed Khan Diplomate ABP 1995 Consultant A & H. O. D. Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Mohamed Ziad Al Zawahry MSc (Ped) 1986, MD (Ped) 1997 Consultant B Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Raef Jamal Masters (Ped) 1987 Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Khalid Ibrahim Al Awadhi Dip. (Ped) 1992 Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Mohammad Habbal MBBS GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Surgical Department Dr. Abdul Moti Younes MD – 1977, FRCS - 1977 Consultant A & H.O.D Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Abdel Khaleq Yousef FRCS 1987 Consultant A Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Hesham Abdul Moniem MSc, MD (Surg) - 1997 Consultant A Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Abdel Aal Qassim FICS 2002 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Sabah Kaddouri Polish Board (Surg), FMAS 2010 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Mohammed Redha Iraq Board 2001, European Board of Urology (FEBU) 2005, FRCS Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Zaher Abdel Muttalaf Iraqi Board 2005 Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Eltegani Elmasaad Eltayeib MRCS 2011 GP Adjunct clinical Tutor Dermatology Department Dr. Haythem A.G Musa PhD, 1985 Consultant A & HOD Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Shifa Al-Halabi MSc. Derma Specialist B Adjunct Clinical Lecturer
  • 220. MBBS Student Handbook (AY 2013 – 2014) 220 | P a g e Emergency Department Dr. Abdel Karim Mahmoud Helmy MD Int Med Consultant A & HOD Adjunct Clinical Asst. Professor Dr. Raeed Al Safadi MBBS 2000 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Ahmed Abou Saada MSc (Orth) GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Ahamed Ali Mohamed GP Dr. Ahmed Abdel Halim GP Dr. Wael Jalal Al Sayed El Bahtiti GP PHC Dr. Sana Hassoun MD (Pedia) 1985 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Lujain M Alhiti MBChB Specialist Adjunct Clinical Lecturer Dr. Iman Ahmed Ismail DRCOG 2002, MRCP 2004 Specialist A Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Eihab Abdelrahman Saleh MBBS 2001 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Rawdah AL Safadi MBChB 1989 GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Suzan Refaat Hassan MSc (Pedia) GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor Dr. Wathib Abdulsamad Hameed MBChB GP Adjunct Clinical Tutor
  • 221. Learn from the world Growth Through Innovation P. O. Box: 4184, Ajman, United Arab Emirates • Tel.: +971 6 7431333 • Fax: +971 6 7431222 E-mail: gmcajman@emirates.net.ae • Website: www.gmu.ac.ae • www.gmchospital.com FOLLOW US ON www.facebook.com/gulfmedicaluniversity www.youtube.com/thumbaytv